THE SILENT MASSACRE:
REMOTE-DELIVERED, ELECTRONIC PHYSICAL AND NEUROLOGICAL
TORTURE IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
By Max H. Williams
What This Book Is About
This book is about torture--physical and neurological torture. However, there is a
particular twist to the torture that I describe: it is conducted by remote. So, no visible
attackers; no visible weapons; no known motive, and usually no visible marks on the
victims. The attackers commit the perfect crime.
Wait! There is also another twist. Usually torture is conducted on prisoners of war by
foreign captors. The torture portrayed in this book is carried out on civilians by or with
the consent of their own government! Throughout this book, I make the point that if the
U.S. Government does not actually engage in the torture, it nevertheless condones it
and aids and protects the torturers.
Victims represent the entire American population. They include both genders and all
ages from very young children to the very elderly. They also include all races,
ethnicities, levels of education, professions/occupations, religions, philosophies, states
of health, political leanings, economic statuses, social strata, and life styles. Many of
the victims are veterans. I am one of those victims.
Victims range from the barely literate to the PhDs, from the atheistic or agnostic to the
piously religious, from the welfare recipient to the well off, from the apolitical to the
zealously partisan, and from single people of various life styles to the family-focused
patriarchs and matriarchs. There appears to be no commonality that links the victims
except that they are all victims of torture. Estimates of the numbers of victims range
from 400,000 to several million. Probably nobody, including the attackers, knows the
exact number.
Many victims believe that the torture stems from human experimentation conducted by
U.S. Government agencies, notably the CIA and the FBI, pharmaceutical companies,
the military, and scientists working for the government. Documents obtained through
the Freedom of Information Act (FOIA), expert witness testimony before Congress,
descriptions of patents, and credible publications do attest that the government has
engaged in human experimentation for many years, particularly since World War II.
Experimental mind control programs such as MKULTRA, conducted by the CIA in the
U.S. and Canada from the 1950s to the 1970s, are now well known. Those crimes
against humanity are still going on; however, today they are carried out in a large
conspiratorial secrecy, they use more sophisticated devices/methods, and the
perpetrators are protected now by law—the Patriot Act.
1
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Non-consensual human experimentation constitutes torture. That principle was
established in Nuremberg right after WWII, when the Allies, led largely by the
Americans, tried, convicted, and hanged and imprisoned German leaders for their roles
in human experimentation and other crimes. Ironically, at the very time the trials were
being conducted, the Americans were carrying out secret medical experiments on nonconsenting Guatemalans. Since the promulgation of the Nuremberg Code, additional
international acts have condemned non-consensual experimentation and torture: the
Geneva Conventions and Accords, including the Convention against Torture, the
International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights, the Statute of the International
Criminal Court, and others.
In addition, most countries have national laws against torture. Although the United
States has laws against torture, it does not have ironclad laws defining human
experimentation and making it illegal. Congress pays no heed to requests for such
laws, which then allows human experimentation to continue with impunity. The torture
also emerges during a period in U.S. history when a united citizenry is most needed
against many chilling challenges from within and from abroad.
Torture in the USA is particularly disturbing in that the United States of America touts
itself as the Great Defender of universal human rights. The U.S. can no longer
justifiably criticize other countries for their human rights violations. The official stance
by the U.S. Government on human rights is duplicitous and proves that the USA simply
uses human rights as a political tool.
The hypocrisy of the U.S. Government is readily seen in the passage of the Torture
Victims Relief Act of 1998 (the TVRA), which provides funds to rehabilitate foreigners
now living in the United States who had undergone torture in their native countries. Yet,
citizens of the U.S. who have been tortured for many years electronically via directed
energy weaponry receive absolutely no attention or recognition from the government.
Most of those victims have received a virtual death sentence, as they must endure the
torture for as long as they live.
2
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Carrying out 24/7 surveillance and remote torture on victims is costly. My attackers
stated to me though our mutual telepathic communication system (much more about
that later) that they had already spent over two million dollars on me. That was about
two years ago. If the U.S. Government is indeed involved, the money used for torture is
taxpayer money. Thus, the irony is that victims of torture are paying for their own
torture.
All of this is happening while today’s reality of the United States unfolds in a distressing
manner:
“Confidence in the U.S. system of government has dropped to a new low in more than
35 years . . . .” (Gary Langer, “Economy, Gas, Partisanship and War Gang Up on Confidence in
Government,” March 15, 2011);
“A recent New York Times/CBS News poll shows that 89 percent of Americans
surveyed distrust government to do the right thing, and that 84 percent disapprove of
Congress.” (Sean Patrick, “Americans Distrust Government, Disapprove of Congress,”
October 25, 2011);
Ex-con superlobbyist Jack Abramoff, in his book on lobbying, describes the U.S.
Government as a “corrupted system.”
“Nearly one in six in poverty in the U.S.; children hit hard, Census says.” (Michael A.
Fletcher, September 13, 2011 in The Washington Post 09/13/2011) About one out of
every seven Americans receives public food assistance. This is happening while the
U.S. spends billions on meaningless and solutionless wars.
“Census shows 1 in 2 people [half of the American population] are poor or low-income”
(Hope Yen, Associated Press, December 15, 2011)
The U.S. public debt on November 26, 2011 is $15,044.384,404,021. “The estimated
population of the United States is 311,739,687 so each citizen's share of this debt is
$48,259.45. The National Debt has continued to increase an average of $3.97 billion
per day since September 28, 2007!” (Online U.S. NATIONAL DEBT CLOCK)
“The gap between the top 1% and everyone else [the 99%] hasn't been this bad since
the Roaring Twenties.” (Business Insider, November/December 2010)
Due largely to the controlled U.S. media, the general public is not widely aware of the
human rights violations that take place in the United States. In addition, law
enforcement either knowingly or unwittingly cooperates with the attackers in labeling
3
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
complainants mental cases and not investigating their complaints. On top of that, state
legislatures and Congress and the entire court system refuse to do anything for the
victims or against the attackers. If the media, law enforcement, the legislatures, and the
courts willfully cooperate with the attackers, as appears almost certain, their actions
constitute one of the largest and most widespread conspiracies of all times, truly the
great conspiracy.
Types of Victims
There are three types of surveillance and harassment victims, who have come to call
themselves targeted individuals (Tis) or simply targets: (1) Those who receive remotedelivered physical and neurological attacks. (2) Those who are physically gang stalked
by organized stalkers on the ground. The on-ground stalking entails a variety of
criminal acts committed on the victim, including monitoring his location and harassing
him on foot and in vehicles, covertly entering his domicile, tampering with his food,
introducing gases and odors into his dwelling, harassing him in his work place,
vandalizing his vehicle and other property, and strangers making rude signals and
engaging in rude behavior with him wherever he goes. (3) Those who endure the
remote-operated physical and neurological torture as well as the on-site stalking.
This paper deals mainly with remote-operated electronic and mind control assault,
which I henceforth shall call “remote electronic assault,” or simply REA. I wrote this
book for two audiences: the targets, or the victims, especially those targets who have
only recently discovered their targeting, and also for the public. Public awareness of
REA is long overdue. In The Silent Massacre, I discuss my particular case, inform
readers of what I know for certain about the REA, and speculate about other facets of
it.
I want other targets to know that although we have not yet learned how to shield
ourselves from the remote torture, they can learn to minimalize the effects of that
torture and live relatively “normal” lives. Despite my targeting, I go on with my life, and I
enjoy life. Knowledge is defense. What I have learned about targeting has not only
empowered me to withstand the physical and neurological torture but also largely to
defeat it. I want to impart my knowledge of targeting to help other victims live
contentedly and without fear despite their targeting.
The Government and Targeting
The secrecy involved in the attacks, the control of publicity concerning those attacks,
the lack of cooperation of law enforcement in locating and identifying the attackers, the
4
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
attempt by law enforcement to make victims appear delusional, the human resources
required, and the enormous cost of carrying out the attacks strongly implicate the U.S.
Government. Only governments can mobilize the enormous outlay of funds and
successfully camouflage the use of those funds. Only governments have the
sophisticated, highly-classified equipment and computers required for electronic abuse
and mind control. Only governments can train in secrecy the cadre of attackers who
actually administer the electronic assault and mind control activities, using deception
and psychology. It is easily proved that the intelligence community in the United States
operates with an almost limitless secret budget without Congressional oversight.
I clearly recognize that the secret device(s) and method(s), after decades of usage,
may have been purloined by those involved and passed on to other entities. It is also
possible that other scientists discovered the device(s) and method(s) either collaterally
or independently. Efforts from many sources went into the development of electronic
stalking and mind control. With so many pure and applied scientists, social scientists,
CIA/military propagandists, intelligence agents, high-ranking government officials, and
medical personnel involved in the development, the secret could have been stolen and
used for many originally-unintended purposes.
Nevertheless, no non-government entity could carry out electronic stalking without
government knowledge of it. U.S. Government intelligence and military units continually
scan the air waves for suspicious radio frequencies, particularly since 9/11, and they
regularly identify unauthorized air wave frequencies. Thus, even mega corporations,
laboratories, and individual scientists would not be able to carry out electronic assault
and mind control in secrecy unless they did so under cover of the government and with
government protection.
Several countries, including the United States of America, have experimented with
directed energy weaponry (DEW) and mind control for many years. Once-secret
documents obtained through the Freedom of Information Act prove that the CIA and
other elements of the intelligence community have electronically targeted American
citizens without their knowledge and consent for almost three-quarters of a century.
They used that torture not only for purposes of experimentation but also to eliminate
threats to the status quo.
Targets Learn to Unite
Fortunately for TIs, the internet brings together targeted individuals of electronic torture
and mind control from all conceivable backgrounds. Race and ethnicity, color, gender,
religion, politics, philosophical views, and all other human characteristics and thought
become insignificant as targets unite to do battle with their unseen enemies. The
5
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
internet provides a link among the many targets of electronic stalking and mind control.
Working together, we shall eventually identify the devices and methods used in the
remote torture, learn the identity of the perpetrators, and bring down the cowardly
perpetrators.
The attackers also recognize the value of the internet; consequently, they fill the
internet with a massive amount of misinformation on electronic stalking and mind
control activities and work relentlessly toward curtailing targets’ use of the internet. The
government’s super computer system, called Echelon, sweeps the internet and
monitors our phone calls, looking for any signs of unrest against the status quo in the
name of “War on Terrorism.” Congress is also currently trying to pass acts that will
regulate, control, and tax internet users.
In the following chapters, I often use several terms concerning the REA. I shall define
briefly three of those terms.
− Perpetrators (perps). Many targets use the term “perpetrator,” or perp, in a generic
sense to refer to all of the persons involved in electronic stalking and mind control. I
prefer to differentiate between the perps and the other assailants. The perpetrators, to
me, are the powerbrokers that sponsor the REA. That group probably represents one or
more of the following: (1) national law enforcement and intelligence agencies or a
coalition of those entities, which operate under the executive branch of the U. S.
Government; (2) a Radical Right or other so-called civic organization or PAC powerful
enough to command the support and protection of the executive branches of all levels
of government; or (3) a foreign power, working with the knowledge and acquiescence of
the U. S. Government or a group in the U.S. that promotes the interests of that foreign
government.
− Attackers, working for the powerbrokers, actually employ the still-secret device(s)
and methods to carry out the torture and mind control on targets by remote.
− Accomplices support the attackers by engaging in on-site organized stalking,
spreading rumors, and interfering with the targets' communications and their daily lives.
The attackers and their accomplices seek to neutralize TIs in any possible way.
Interfering with the targets’ ability to communicate aids the attackers in neutralizing the
targets. My attackers, who have had access to my computer for years, tried their best to
prevent my writing this paper. They especially interfered with the sections dealing with
the perpetrators and the psychiatrists by continually deleting my text, keeping me from
saving the text to the computer, causing countless other mechanical problems, and
6
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
distracting me with their voice-to-skull telepathy (more about that later). But they failed
to silence me. Their downfall will come from public awareness, and I shall do my part to
educate the public.
The Discovery
In looking back, I now know that I have been targeted since no later than the mid-1970s
and very probably even from the early 1960s. I may even have been targeted as a
child. However, I did not actually grasp the fact that I was targeted until 2005, when my
assailants started bombarding me with electrical-like jolts, strong vibrations, and other
physical torture. The first electronic vibrations struck me with such force that I could
hardly stand on my feet. Only a few days later, I began hearing voices from unseen
speakers. I later learned that only I could hear those voices.
The physical electronic effects were intended to frighten me, throw me into a state of
panic and confusion, destabilize my body, and inflict pain, all of which they initially did.
I gradually learned, however, that those effects were used by the attackers to “soften”
or “sensitize” or “pre-condition” me for the real objective – mind control. I also later
learned that victims are normally targeted for years before they finally realize it. Some
targets suffer physical attacks for long periods and visit doctors frequently without
realizing that their symptoms are not natural consequences. Other targets die,
sometimes probably from the consequences of their torture, without ever having
discovered that they were targeted.
Four days after the first all-out electronic attacks, the attackers, began "talking" to me
subliminally through my brain. I later discovered that TIs call that communication voiceto-skull, or V2K. It is also sometimes called “synthetic telepathy, microwave hearing,” or
“subliminal communication.” The U.S. Government possesses and utilizes the
capability of projecting those voices through a neurological program termed Medusa.
Of course, only the victim can hear the talking, which, by design, is intended to make
the victim appear crazy. After all, only schizophrenics are supposed to hear voices. At
the time that the electronic attack hurled me into reality, I was sixty-eight years old and
in exceptional physical and mental health. I knew full well that I was not delusional.
The voices first occurred as I drove in Texas near the Mexican border. The vehicle
radio was not on. At first the voices sounded like they came from the door panel on the
driver’s side. I thought that someone for some reason had perhaps planted a bug in the
door. I later learned that targets can be located using their cell phones. However, at
that time, I did not use a cell phone.
7
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
During that trip, when I reached Houston I spent the night with a sister who lived there.
After retiring, I heard voices that seemed to come from right outside the window of the
room in which I was sleeping. When I went outside with a flashlight to investigate the
voices, naturally nobody was there.
When I arrived at my destination in Baton Rouge, Louisiana, I sought out a private
detective who did a bug sweep on my vehicle without finding anything. At that time, the
voices that seemed to come from the vehicle were very weak. Still convinced that there
was some type of hidden microphone in the vehicle, I believed that the private
investigator was simply incompetent.
Shortly after visiting the private detective, I figured out that the voices were not coming
from the vehicle but from my own body. Having had much dental work performed
overseas, I at first suspected that a bug might be hidden in a tooth. A few days later, I
went to a dentist and requested that he take full x-rays of my teeth and mouth. He saw
nothing unusual in the x-rays.
I did not see anything either at the time, as I was looking for a clearly visible, welldefined object; however, later, in May of 2009, I took a much closer look at those xrays. In the roof of my mouth were two tiny specks of what looked to be the same
metallic substance used for fillings. In my gums was a very slender, light-colored,
cylindrical-shaped sliver of some object. Those objects are still unidentified, as I can
get no doctor to examine more closely those specks.
A different dentist later told me that if a microchip were embedded in the mouth, it
would probably be injected into the soft tissue, i.e., the roof of the mouth or the gums,
and not the teeth. However, logic tells me that the best place to implant microchips in
the mouth is to build them into the posts that secure for crowns. The metal used in the
crowns, which surround the posts, would then keep an x-ray from revealing the hidden
microchips. Few targets can afford to have their crowns removed, even temporarily, to
test for microchips.
The first few months of electronic and mind control attacks threw me into a state of
confusion. I was completely disoriented, as I could not understand what was
happening. I later discovered that all targets go through that stage of initial
bewilderment and befuddlement without having anywhere to turn for help. Depending
on the target, that first stage can last from six months or less to over a year, sometimes
much longer. Indeed many targets fail to get over the trauma of that first stage of
targeting, and they live in constant fear.
8
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
As an historian and former government employee, I understood the value of
documentation. Thus, on the very day that the electronic effects first pounded me, I
started recording a detailed journal in which I recount my experiences and my thoughts
concerning them. I later realized that my attackers could utilize my journal as a written
record of the effects of their torture, could adjust their effects on my mind and body
accordingly, and could circulate a written copy of my journal among themselves.
Despite that, I felt that it was more important to keep a record of those occurrences
than to attempt to shield myself by not keeping it. The journal today comprises ten
volumes and well over fifteen hundred pages of single spaced typescript.
I do not yet know how the perpetrators of the electronic and mind control assault
“hooked” my brain by remote; however, I suspect that I was implanted with a microchip
or several microchips over the years. I have had many inoculations, much dental work,
and several minor medical procedures performed in various locations. Locating the
microchips is a major problem, for they can be inserted in any part of the body, either
only slightly below the surface of the skin or very deep into the muscle tissue. I have
determined that there are probably nineteen or twenty locations on and in my body
where microchips could have been implanted.
Not being able to pin down the location makes finding the devices difficult. In addition,
if doctors know that a victim wants an x-ray, CT Scan, or MRI to look for a microchip,
they will not write orders for those searches. In fact, they will ordinarily advise the
authorities of your purpose in wanting those pictures, in effect suggesting that you are
paranoid schizophrenic.
As the reader will later see, whatever method was used to “hook” my brain had been
employed in my case perhaps by the early- or mid-1970s and no later than the mid1980s. More recently, I have recalled conditions and events that indicate that I could
have been targeted even in the early 1960s. If the latter date proves correct, it would
probably implicate the military doctors and other military medical personnel who gave
me shots and inoculations when I served in the Active Army Reserves.
I believe that American soldiers are routinely implanted with microchips to locate them
if they become stranded, taken prisoner, or go AWOL. I also believe that they are
implanted with microchips to study their reaction to the effects of war and the stress of
serving in the armed forces. The latter purpose would fall under neurological
experimentation. Other readers probably wonder, as I do, how our U.S. rescue forces
are able to locate lost servicemen who have become separated from their units during
battle. I believe that it is done electronically.
Theories of Methods Used in REA
9
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
We know that electronic and mind control assault operates by remote, but we know
little about its delivery system. The delivery has to be either satellite-driven, landbased, or a combination of the two. The debate about which one it is goes on. Likewise,
there is still some question about whether the delivery system requires a device
implanted in the human body or can be delivered without that implanted device.
“Remote” means that some object is used to make contact with the human body over a
distance through the air. Whatever is beamed into the body does not waft aimlessly
through space but follows a line of trajectory, or a frequency. Anything that makes a
sound or a movement creates a frequency. There are thousands, probably millions, of
frequencies. Almost anything today can be controlled by remote using particular radio
frequencies.
Today remote-controlled objects are also used in guiding satellites and unmanned
space ships, sending and operating military spy drones, changing TV functions,
opening garage doors, turning on light switches, and working almost any other
motorized or electrical object. It would be difficult today for an American to live without
remote devices.
Electromagnetism may play a role in the targeting. A field of electromagnetism seems
to envelope the target’s surroundings. In my case, it appears to cover my house and
the pastures and fields immediately around it, as whenever I am outside, the attackers’
voices, or V2K, come through stronger and clearer. Once again, we do not know
whether that electromagnetic field is projected by satellite, from a land site, or from a
hidden device in or near the victim’s house. Notwithstanding, what if there were some
type device that could make contact with that electromagnetic field that surrounds the
target and then operate within that field to attack us along our particular brain
frequencies? If that were true, distance would be no object and a person could be
pinpointed among several nearby people for electronic assault.
Satellites now possess amazing capabilities, all performed by remote, and they may
very well be utilized in electronic assaults and mind control. In a 2003 article called
Shocking Menace of Satellite Surveillance, John Fleming wrote about the use of
satellites in REA assault. Discussing the realities of satellite-driven REA, Fleming said:
“The victim’s movements will be known, his conversations heard, his thoughts picked
clean, and his whole life subjected to bogus moralizing, should his tormentor
diabolically use the information gained. A sadist could harass his target with sound
bites, or audio messages, directly broadcast into his room; with physical assault with a
laser; with subliminal audio messages that disturb his sleep or manipulate persons
around him into saying something that emotionally distresses him . . . .”
10
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
The satellite-guided GPS almost certainly figures somehow in the electronic assault
and mind control activities. Programs such as Google Earth can locate and zoom in on
houses and other objects on maps. That a victim can be targeted regardless of his
location and movement argues that a satellite is very likely involved. For a satellite to
be able to follow and pinpoint the target wherever he goes, however, probably requires
an object, a substance, or a special condition in the target’s body or, as suggested
above, a device that can operate within and upon the electromagnetic field around the
target. The voices that many targets hear may be piggybacked over the GPS into that
electromagnetic field. Targets know that the intelligence community and other agencies
possess through-the-wall surveillance capability.
If satellites are used, distance is no object. Our torture could be carried out from other
countries just as easily as from the United States. China, India, Israel, Russia, and
other countries possess that capability. Consider the use of drones in warfare. Today
(November, 2009), the United States often sends drones, or unidentified aerial vehicles
(UAVs), to strike targets in Afghanistan and Pakistan. Forward observers identify the
target, get permission to call in, and then communicate with the drone operators. Those
drones are guided by computer software by remote from facilities in the United States,
usually Fort Meade, Maryland, from thousands of miles away through the GPS with
pinpoint precision.
In early December 2011, the Iranians tricked one of the U.S. drones into landing in their
territory by blocking the U.S.-controlled GPS and then using its own GPS to cause it to
land in Iran. The Iranians outsmarted the Americans by using the Americans’ own
technology. As I write, the Iranians are dissecting the drone to learn all of its secrets,
including what type information that it gains in its surveillance.
The use of satellites, however, does not prove that the attacks come from a great
distance. Satellites can also be used along with the GPS from nearby. Attackers who
live near targets can utilize satellites and the satellite-driven GPS, using the same
devices and methods, just as easily as attackers who operate thousands of miles away.
Information concerning weaponry capable of being used by satellite for physical and
neurological torture is purposely vague about distances. Eventually we shall know from
what range our attackers operate. It will probably vary from case to case. Many targets
believe that our electronic harassment comes from U. S. Government facilities near
Fairbanks, Alaska called High Frequency Active Auroral Research Program, or
HAARP. I doubt that.
11
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
This paper does not explore in depth the methods used to zero in on a person body
and mind by remote. There are many schools of thought on that subject. Here are some
of them.
One theory believes that one’s voice can be recorded, transferred to a computer, and
the computer then used to locate the particular voice and lock onto that voice’s brain.
Experiments show that that can indeed be done in controlled situations. Voices give off
distinct vibrations that are as peculiar to a person as his fingerprints and DNA. One day
when the attackers were vibrating me mercilessly, I tensed my throat, and the vibrations
stopped.
That caused me to remember an incident that occurred when I served in Africa in the
1980s. One day while working in my office, the secretary from the embassy political
section, the office that serves as a front for our CIA agents, called me to ask some
question that anyone could have answered. I hardly knew the caller; thus, I instantly
realized that the real purpose of her call was to record my voice.
However, I believed that it was probably for security purposes in case of kidnapping or
being held hostage at some point. Voices are very distinctive, and they can certainly be
used to distinguish one voice from another. That our intelligence community was
recording voices in the 1980s makes me believe that there may be some validity to the
theory that perpetrators of REA may be able to “hook” our brains, or at least determine
our locations, by zeroing in on our voices.
Some evidence also suggests that targets’ minds can be “hooked” if the attackers know
the targets’ DNA. If that is true, targets would not necessarily have to have a microchip
or other object or substance in his body to be hooked. There may be some remote
device that with the aid of the GPS will locate a person and “hook” him using his DNA.
If DNA can be utilized, society is in deep trouble, for obtaining DNA samples of people
is a very simple matter. Even touching a glass or a can will leave useable traces of
DNA.
It is reported that since 1979 all hospitals in the United States have been required to
send DNA samples of all babies born in the U. S. to the Federal Government. I do not
know the office or agency that is supposed to keep that data. If that information is true,
it adds credence to DNA perhaps being involved in REA. In addition, I believe that the
DNA of all prisoners and persons who have spent time in jail as well as anyone who
has undergone treatment in hospitals have been collected for the DNA data bank. DNA
samples are easily collected. It is reasonable to believe that the intelligence community
has asked large companies to submit samples of DNA of its employees.
12
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Scientists have become obsessed with the possibilities of the use of DNA, as its
uniqueness narrows the subject down to one in millions of people. By using computers
with the DNA of persons, it is entirely conceivable that those scientists have developed
a method of targeting individuals using DNA.
Still another theory talks about small devices (nano-microchips) made so small that
they can fit between molecules of water and other liquids and be injected into the body
in shots and inoculations. Patents taken out by scientists describe that very procedure.
Those same nano-microchips can probably also be ingested by the target in swallowing
food and beverages, after which the chips attach themselves to the lining of the
stomach. Only the finest equipment, which is normally not available in regular medical
facilities, could locate those barely visible objects.
There is also evidence that even human breath or breathing somehow figures in
electronic torture and mind control. Every movement, even breathing, gives off a
frequency. I later found out that when I hold my breath for a few seconds, the vibrations
temporarily cease. Yet, we do not know whether breathing in itself has any connection
with “hooking” a target’s brain. The breathing theory does not explain how a target can
be pinpointed while in the close presence of others.
In addition, MRI and other machines have been successfully combined with computers
and used by remote along radio frequencies to move digits and limbs, detect emotions,
and “detect lying, racism, and even identify which image a person is looking at,
suggesting [that] one could visualize scenes from a person’s dreams or memory”
(Hospital Soup.com, June 10, 2008). The uses of a device such as that are endless if
used on the brain’s wave lengths or frequencies. Yet, those actions probably require an
implant in the person on whom the actions are performed.
Similarly, neurotransmitters can be used by remote to communicate with brain cells
through electrical impulses. That device can tap into the brain’s functions that cause
body movement, thought, feelings (emotions), and communication. It could probably
also influence the thalamus, or the inner part of the brain, which regulates body
temperature and controls urges such as eating, sleeping, and sexual behavior, all of
which figure among many targets’ REA effects.
Laser guns may play a role in REA. A CNN news program on February 23, 2009,
reported that 148 incidents of lasers aimed at airplanes had already been reported
since the beginning of the year. In the last incident, the laser was green in color and
about the size of a pencil. If a laser beam can be focused to such a fine point over
several miles of distance, imagine what it could do when trained on an individual or an
object from a closer distance over a period of time.
13
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Mounting evidence suggests that a substance or an object can also be introduced
sexually into a target’s body to “hook” his or her brain. More than a few of my
correspondents mention that their REA began after having had an intimate relationship
with somebody. Those relationships may have been set-ups. Spies and undercover
agents have used sex for centuries to entrap individuals. Some such object (nanomicrochips) or substance could possibly be introduced into targets vaginally, orally, or
anally through sexual contact.
Some targets believe that the perpetrators’ device enters through the targets’ eyes to
carry out the electronic attacks on the targets’ bodies. Presumably that would happen
after the targets are already “hooked.” One target whom I know wears professional
goggles that she says help keep out the light used by the assailants. Another target
also believes that he is attacked using light. He describes the lights as very bright
street lamp-type elevated lights that seem to rotate. He believes that his attackers
piggyback their laser, or whatever the remote device might be, on the beams of light.
Although those targets may be correct, I suspect that they have been led to believe that
through mind control.
Remote cognitive neural monitoring is one of the most recent theories. That theory has
the targets’ minds being located and “hooked” using some type frequency by remote
that somehow connects with the brain without anything being implanted in the targets. I
believe that theory is pure disinformation, disseminated by the very elements who are
carrying out the remote torture. Why do I believe that? Use your brain. If it were that
simple to “hook” a person’s brain, all the drug lords and pushers, heads of crime
syndicates, crooked politicians, white collar crooks, prostitutes, child porn makers and
distributors, foreign and domestic terrorists, bank robbers, embezzlers, money
launderers, and other criminals would already have been caught and sent to prison.
That has not happened; therefore, in my opinion, that theory, which has caught on in
the targeted community and is believed by many targets, is not valid. Let me repeat:
remote cognitive neural monitoring, in my opinion, is not a valid theory.
Other theories include wiring in the ear that connects with the brain and pins that
penetrate the skull. If those ideas are valid, the procedures would have to be done in
medical facilities or at least while the target is under sedation. If true, this further indicts
the medical community for its complicity in electronic and mind control assault.
All that said, pick a theory. In truth, we do not yet actually know how high-tech
assailants can focus on a single individual and capture that person’s mind; neither do
we know what instruments are used in the process. Both are highly guarded secrets
shrouded in deception. In fact, there may be several methods of “hooking” the target as
14
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
well as several methods of administering the electronic and mind control effects.
However, the only proven method thus far is through implanted microchips.
Whatever device is used to “hook” the brain, it has the capability of using that system
on diverse targets in a variety of circumstances in all types of locations. A super
computer necessarily has to be used along with the device, and that computer uses
programs with an amazing range of capabilities. Only the government, research
institutions, and mega-businesses and organizations would probably be able to own
such computers and be able to acquire some of the more sophisticated computer
programs. We shall later see some of its capabilities and the effects they have on the
human body and mind.
Microchips, the Most Plausible Agent of REA
Microchips have been used for many years in animals, fowls, and fishes to track their
migratory patterns and learn more about their body functions and habits. Scientists call
those microchips “satellite tags;” thus, if microchips are used on us, they are
doubtlessly manipulated via satellite communication. Microchips both transmit and
receive frequencies. At first, scientists working with those non-human creatures were
mainly interested in the transmissions. Then, they began experimenting with the
receptive qualities of the microchips. The carrier of those microchips can be monitored
by satellite for thousands of miles. Much of the work with non-humans was probably
experimental with the intention of later using the devices on humans.
Although targets will read and hear about several methods supposedly capable of
hooking their minds, the only proven method is through surreptitiously implanting a
microchip or a nano-microchip in the target’s body. Scores of patents dealing with
microchips in the human body and operated by remote have indeed been filed, many of
which, in the wrong hands, could be utilized for electronic abuse. I have read of only a
handful of people who have located microchips in their bodies and had them surgically
removed. To my knowledge, in only one case was the microchip identified and traced to
the manufacturer.
My efforts to contact those individuals failed; however, their cases are well
documented. I know other targets who have located foreign objects in their bodies but
have not been able to find surgeons who would remove them. We know that many
forms of microchips have been developed for the human body for many purposes, all of
them capable of being controlled by remote.
If indeed microchips turn out to be instrumental in a target’s electronic assault and mind
control, it directly implicates the medical profession. Only persons in the medical field,
15
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
intelligence agents, and perhaps law enforcement are able legally to acquire
microchips. Those microchips had to have been implanted at some point by a dentist, a
doctor, an anesthesiologist, a nurse, or somebody else in that field unless a target is
somehow sedated by a knowledgeable person who implants the microchip. Those
cases have indeed occurred.
Since syringes are generally used for the implantations, nurses are particularly suspect
in committing that crime. If a doctor, nurse, or another member of the medical
profession would implant a microchip in a patient, he would also probably not hesitate,
if given orders, to inject that patient with live cancer cells, Hepatitis C, or AIDS. That, of
course, does not mean that every doctor and nurse engages in that sordid practice.
I got a letter in early 2010 from the mother of a victim in Scotland who stated that her
son was implanted with a microchip while he was in jail. He could later feel the lump
where the microchip had been implanted. For months he suffered relentless electronic
and neurological attacks. A local doctor later saw the microchip on his scanner and
removed it. The victim instantly improved. Afterward, the doctor refused to discuss it
with the victim and his mother, telling them that he found nothing. Most microchips
cannot be located by the sense of touch.
Targets require some object, substance, or characteristic in their body that will attract
frequencies used by their remote attackers. Otherwise, if the electronic and mind
control assault is delivered along a frequency, how does the effect distinguish that
particular person? A target can receive vibrations while in the presence of other people
without the others feeling it. Certain voice inflections and tones of narrators on TV also
cause jolts in a target’s body without others sitting nearby feeling them. Something on
or about the victim’s body has to act as the receiver for some device that delivers those
effects.
The microchip has been around since the 1970s. Since then, many versions of
microchips have been invented and manufactured. One such microchip was invented
by Peter Seth Edelstein of Menlo Park, CA and Benjamin Theodore Nordell II of San
Mateo, CA and patented on September 5, 2006 under the name Method and Apparatus
for Locating and Tracking Persons (Patent No. US 7,102,508 B2).
The patent was sold by the inventors to Persephone, Inc. of Menlo Park, CA.
Interestingly, my online search for Persephone turned up very little on that company. It
very well may be only a front for Department of Defense contractors who carry out
experiments and invent and improve gadgets for the DOD. At any rate, it is not a highly
visible organization.
16
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Although the ostensible purpose of the above patented “device” is to locate and track
persons who are lost or kidnapped, it lends itself to many more devious and sinister
purposes. Descriptions of patents of this type are purposely made very vague;
however, reading between the lines, we can glean the following information about that
particular patent as it relates to targeted individuals.
– the “device” is indeed a microchip;
– the microchip can be implanted in virtually every part of the human body, even in
body cavities (use your imagination);
− the microchips serve as both transmitters and receivers;
− those microchips are encased in a substance that does not irritate the flesh
around them;
– the remote operators [the attackers] use a handheld device, probably a small radio
or a cell phone, that in conjunction with cell phone towers "activates" the microchips;
– the users, or attackers, also communicate with each other by cell phone;
-- the users do not have to be physically present in a single location to coordinate
their efforts but can instead use "conference calls from various locations;"
– the microchips CAN be shut off by the initiators;
-- the microchip lasts indefinitely, as it can be continually recharged by the target’s own
body;
– the microchip’s software can indeed see the target’s body and even the organs
inside his body;
– the microchip can be programmed with a vast variety of software that renders many
of the physical and neurological effects (the voices, etc.) experienced by targets;
– those effects can be programmed to occur whenever the programmer wishes;
– users/operators of the microchip can monitor several targets at the same time by
remote.
Distance was not mentioned in the patent. In the drawing that accompanied the patent,
communication is depicted by three cell phone-looking towers. Patents, however, are
often written in a vague and misleading manner, especially those patents that can also
be used for unethical, intelligence, or military purposes. Thus, the communication
system shown could be the triangulation of satellites. The use of satellites would make
the patent workable at any distance. Even regular radio frequencies patched from one
area to another would allow the attackers to operate from a far distance.
The triangulation could also conceivably be within the target’s body. To achieve the
effects, the attackers may need to implant three different microchips within the body. All
three of them may have different functions but work off each other.
17
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Likewise, the device used to communicate with the microchip was not mentioned
specifically. Although the three towers were shown in the figure demonstrating how the
patent works, the narrative did not state whether the device was a radio tuner, cell
phone, land line phone, or some type of scanner/radio.
The microchip’s computer software determines its effectiveness. By adding new
software, the microchip can be adapted by remote to the target’s evolving situation and
change in location. Additional software, tailored for the particular target, can be
introduced into the microchip by remote at any time. That software can be continually
refigured and reprogrammed as necessary, based on the target’s actions and
reactions.
To be used in the human body by remote, microchips must have a unique identification
(ID) such as a symbol, a number, a word, or a combination of those. There is even
some evidence that a target’s DNA profile, or a distinct part of it, may be inscribed on
the microchip. The target’s ID has to be known and entered into the handler’s device
for a match before it can be contacted by remote. Once the codes are matched on the
microchip and the device used by the attackers, the device’s computer software,
without which the device is useless, acts through contact with the microchip to carry out
its various and many purposes. There must also be a radio frequency to connect the
sender to the receiver, becoming an RFID (radio frequency identification), much like
that used in store scanners at the check-out counters.
The device used by the handler who operates the device and software must be
reasonably small and portable (battery operated). The name of that device is carefully
avoided in the patents; however, it will probably be a common or perhaps customized
cell phone, a small radio or scanner, laptop computer, or a similar object that has both
receiving and transmitting features. Logically, only one handler has use of the
computer that controls all the functions of the software on the target through the
implanted microchip; otherwise, the computer commands could conflict and negate
each other. Nevertheless, other attackers using those handheld devices can
doubtlessly locate the target using the device.
The attackers’ trainer manual doubtlessly instructs them to vary their methods of attack
on their targets. Some targets may get the V2K and no neighborhood stalking; others
may outwardly receive only the electronic effects, i.e. jolts, vibrations, and pin pricks;
still others may get a combination of electronic effects, V2K, and organized physical
stalking. That is totally by design, for if the same technique were used on every target,
it would be far easier to research that technique, develop shielding for it, and possibly
trace it to its origin.
18
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Introduction of the microchip into a target’s body can be performed in a variety of
manners: through shots and inoculations, through medical procedures, through tiny
projectiles (microscopic darts), and drugging the victim first and then administering the
microchip. Apparently many targets are “tagged” using the latter method. Hypnosis
often accompanies the act so that the target will not remember being drugged.
Although hidden microchips have been recovered from the bodies of unknowing and
involuntary targets, their detection and removal has proven very difficult, as doctors
very reluctantly write orders for the use of instruments that can detect those microchips.
Moreover, today’s microchips are purposely made too small to detect and with
materials designed to conceal them. Regardless of whatever other device(s) and
method(s) might be used to perform REA on involuntary targets, we know that
microchips can be and are used for that purpose.
Most microchips, like implanted medical devices such as hip replacements and
pacemakers, are probably not expected to last beyond a certain period of time. That
argues that targets are implanted with multiple microchips so that if one stops
functioning, another one will continue. Continuity in electronic stalking and mind control
is very important.
Many targets receive both voices as well as physical effects from their attackers. There
is increasing evidence that the voices and the physical assaults may stem from two
different remote weapons. For example, in my case I not only receive electronic effects
but also get the voices. If the voices come from an illegally implanted microchip, why
did hundreds of holes appear in sheets of aluminum foil I had placed over my bedroom
windows? This suggests that if indeed microchips are used, they must function in
consonance with the electromagnetism and directed energy weapons.
We have been led to believe that microchips are cylindrical capsule-looking devices
about the size of an oft-quoted “grain of rice.” That may no longer be true. Today
scientists have the capability of manufacturing a microchip in many forms and shapes
and from many substances. A microchip may now look like a very thin wire no longer
than perhaps a quarter of an inch. Another possible microchip will look like a mole and
will probably be attached to the sub-dermis with very short wires that serve as
antennas. Nano-microchips can also probably be ingested orally.
Microchips have evolved from the traditional, capsule-like ones often pictured in
articles about the Verichip on the internet. Today microchips take many shapes, forms,
and sizes. There is proof that microchips in the form of tiny darts smaller than a human
hair and less than a quarter of an inch long can be shot into a target from a distance.
19
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
The voices can be projected into the target using a microchip or other object or
substance. The voices are projected via the implant into the target's nervous system
and thus his auditory canal. If that is the method, the voices would be directed to the
target using the GPS to the target’s surroundings and his microchip would pick up the
signal from the electromagnetic field. The magnetic field may not even be necessary.
Animals and sea creatures implanted with microchips can be tracked from thousands of
miles away. With implanted microchips, only the target would hear the transmissions.
Targets have long searched for ways to shield themselves from the targeting effects.
There is no effective shield. Why? Because, in my opinion, the attacks come from
inside one’s body via microchips rather than from outside. That being the case, any
shielding is useless.
Testing for Microchips
Both of the methods described above may be utilized by the attackers, depending on
the situation of the target and whether he is implanted with a microchip. I suggest that
organizations that represent targets set up a massive program to examine every
alleged victim for foreign objects or substances in his body. That can be carried out by
examining targets by x-rays, MRIs, CT scans, or some other instrument.
The test will either locate one or more microchips or will rule out the possibility of
implanted microchips. The outcome of the tests may show that some victims do indeed
have implanted microchips while others do not. If microchips cannot be found on the
victim examined, his REA will probably be carried out from a relatively close distance.
Some victims may be targeted by both the internal method as well as the external
method.
At any rate, the testing will either confirm or lay to rest the microchip theory. If
microchips are eliminated as a method, targets can focus their efforts on determining
the device(s) and methods used on them externally and bringing those who are doing it
to justice, presuming that justice will be forthcoming. The latter is doubtful under the
powerbrokers who control the current form of government.
I definitely feel that there is at least one microchip in my body. Some of my symptoms
could only come from within the body, for example, the unusual salivation, the cramps,
the gastric disturbances, and the chronic constipation. Those effects can probably be
caused only by specialized software. That software must operate in conjunction with a
code from an object within the body that responds to a computerized command –
doubtlessly a microchip. Let me repeat that despite the many theories, so far ONLY
20
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
microchips are PROVEN capable of interacting with victims to produce physical and
mental torture.
In my case, most of the symptoms occur on and around my head, which leads me to
believe that if there is indeed an object in my body probably located in that region. Here
are some of the effects on my head: tinnitus (ringing in the ears); tops of ears oozing a
colorless fluid; sensation of bubbles popping in mouth; salivating from the mouth at any
time; pin pricks on the eyes and a loss of vision; the top of the nose coating over with a
thick crust; tingling on the skin (as a result a brown spot has appeared on the right
outside nostril and a sore-type depression, on the right side of my chin); clicking on my
head and in my left ear; frequent, long-lasting, pin-like prick on the back of my neck;
the sensation of flies crawling on my face; a psoriasis-like area on my cheek near the
left eye; a very sharp sensation on or in several teeth (as if a dentist drill had hit a
nerve); a heavy pounding, throbbing in the back of my head; an unnaturally intense
itching in the corners of my eyes and on my eyelids; pin-like pricks in the depths of my
ears that cause me to shudder violently; air that pushes my lips out as if I were snoring
through my mouth; scratching of the throat, which causes either sneezing or coughing;
a tingling inside my nostril that induces sneezing; blockage in my esophagus that
makes it difficult to swallow; constant itching inside my nostrils that makes me want to
“pick” my nose; and of course the voices that occur in my brain or ears. (More about
symptoms later.)
Do Medical Personnel Play Roles in Targeting?
I have corresponded with hundreds of other victims of remote-delivered electronic
attacks, and many of them state that they began experiencing their symptoms after
undergoing surgery or having dental work done. Because of the large number of people
who have told me that, there does indeed appear to be a connection between surgery
and dental work and targeting. Their many similar complaints would not likely be simply
coincidence.
What better opportunity could exist for implanting a microchip or some other type pf
foreign object in one’s body than through a medical procedure? The incision made
in the procedure provides the perfect site for implanting a microchip. However, that
possibility opens doors for many questions.
Is the surgeon implanting the microchip on his own so that perhaps he or other
colleagues can later experiment on the patient? Do pharmaceutical companies, medical
equipment manufacturing companies, and other businesses associated with medicine
pay the surgeons or their helpers to implant those devices? Is there a master list
circulated in the medical community of those Americans who have been redlined by the
21
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
government and thus available for exploitation? Are the implanters given immunity for
that work, which violates both the Hippocratic Oath and various laws?
Also, consider this possibility. If microchips are not actually physically implanted in the
patients during surgery, since the patient is completely immobilized and under
anesthesia, could the physicians implant some other foreign substance in the patient’s
body that will be absorbed into the blood and remain there? Or is there some other yet
highly classified method, other than implanting microchips, that can be administered to
a patient under anesthesia with the same results?
Are the incidences of victims claiming that their targeting started after medical
treatment proof of medical collaboration in the conspiracy, merely coincidences, or
deception on the part of the attackers? The attackers are masters of deceit. We cannot
rule out deception on the part of the attackers to make it look as if patients may have
been implanted during surgery or dental work when in reality they had been targeted
long before then. However, I can see no advantage on the attackers’ part in
establishing the possibility of that occurrence. Yet, we know that the attackers go to
great length to deceive targets about the means and purposes of their attacks.
Likewise, many targets have had extensive dental work, after which they began to
complain of REA symptoms. The metal amalgam used in making crowns and filling
teeth could easily be employed to hide a tiny microchip. Curiously, years ago, dental
patients complained about metal fillings receiving music from radio stations. Dentists
supposedly stopped using that particular amalgam; however, that material is probably
still available.
We cannot say with certainty that patients who seemingly become victims of REA
directly after medical procedures and dental work are also victims of unscrupulous
medical practice, or malpractice. However, coincidences of surgery prior to discovery of
targeting are very high. Time will probably tell whether the medical community are
willing accomplices in The Great Conspiracy.
That doctors refuse to write orders for MRIs, x-rays, and CT scans does indeed cast
suspicions on the medical community, especially if a victim tells doctors that they are
trying to locate an unlawfully implanted microchip. Doctors routinely refer those patients
to psychiatrists and notify the authorities. Considering the billions and billions of dollars
that are spent on health care, much of it wasted or misspent, what would be the harm in
writing orders for patients who think that they are implanted with a microchip? Yet, even
if the patient offers to pay for the exams himself, doctors will not write the orders. Logic
suggests that there is a deeper reason for that refusal.
22
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Torture Software and How It Is Used
Regardless of how a target is “hooked,” to perform electronic stalking and mind control
on that target requires a computer and computer software. The software is used for
both electronic physical and neurological assault. Much of the software required for
remote torture had to be created by the sick authors of the attack plan for the explicit
purpose of physical and neurological torture.
Other software utilized in the remote torture can be bought off the shelves in retail
stores. The software used for neurological assault can probably only be procured by
medical personnel and authorized persons in the military-intelligence-law enforcementindustrial complex. That computers and software are used for those purposes strongly
argues that targets carry some type of foreign object in their bodies or possess some
innate feature peculiar to each individual.
Once a microchip is implanted, the attackers, using its I.D, can employ dozens of
software programs with that microchip. The various programs can speed up the
heartbeat, slow down the heartbeat, cause sensations on the skin, make the digits on
the hands and feet twitch, actually shut down organs, and perform many other
functions. Ostensibly the software was invented to do good, but it can just as easily do
bad.
Several medical devices figure in the remote torture and must somehow be
incorporated into the attackers’ computer software. One machine is the EEG scanner,
which makes contact with the brain and allows the attackers to read the minds of the
victims. Another device is the large fMRI machine, which allows the attackers, in their
interrogations of the victims by remote, to know when victims are lying. Both machines
are well known to the medical community and are often used by them.
Physical Effects
Everybody has seen movies in which scientists manipulate radioactive and other
devices from behind glass walls with instruments by remote. Nowadays doctors can do
the same thing, except at a much greater distance. Physicians can monitor and adjust
their patients' heart beat rate, blood pressure, and other bodily functions by remote
over hundreds, probably thousands of miles. I know a person in south Louisiana whose
heart doctor lives and practices in Houston. Whenever the person experiences an
irregular heartbeat, he simply calls the doctor who then monitors the patient's heart
using his computer software and adjusts the heartbeat rate by remote. The doctor's
device must necessarily key in the ID number or symbol on the patient's pacemaker to
be able to do that.
23
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
It is only too logical that the same device that the physician uses to regulate a
heartbeat can also be used to cause the opposite effect, an irregular heartbeat. My
attackers often attempt to interfere with my normal heartbeat while repeating
subliminally through the V2K, “Heart attack.” Targets call that “faux heart attacks,” or
“induced heart attacks.” Many other targets also suffer from irregular heartbeats caused
by their attackers. Those targets only very rarely wear pacemakers, which argues that
they must host some other type of receiver-transmitter in their body that carries an ID
that can connect with similar software.
In addition to the software that causes faux heart attacks, the attackers possess
software that allows them to cause severe gastric problems, including the formation of
much stomach gas or air on the targets' stomachs, and to light up the interior of targets'
stomachs, intestines, and esophagi. I suggest that the attackers employ software used
for performing colonoscopies. Although a doctor who does a colonoscopy operates
from nearby, the device nevertheless operates by remote. If a device operates by
remote, the device could just as easily be located hundreds or thousands of miles
away.
The attackers use software that provides a light that allows them to view our organs
and the inside of our throats and stomachs by remote. Moreover, the attackers can
perform sodomy on targets, as they have on me and on many of my correspondents
both male and female. When that occurs, it feels exactly like the tube used for the
colonoscopy. If a device can function from a few feet away by remote, what is to
prevent its performing that same sensation from many miles away?
Doctors also perform eye, nose, and sinus surgery using computers by remote. Once
again, normally the computer and the computer software are in the same room with the
patient. However, it could easily be used by remote over a great distance. Likewise,
hearing technicians who fit hearing aids check and adjust the hearing by remote. That
could be done a thousand miles away as easily as from the desk in front of the hearing
aid recipient.
Prostate problems are often treated by instruments run off computers using specially
designed software. Many male targets complain that their attackers cause them pain in
the groin and cause unnatural erections. By stimulating parts of the penis or vagina and
the colon by remote, the attackers can cause erections in men and unnatural orgasms
in women. Playing with the targets' sexual organs by remote is seemingly one of the
favorite activities of the attackers.
24
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
There is also various specialized dental software that allows the user to view the
patient's teeth and mouth in great detail by remote. Those programs work with x-rays of
the patient's mouth. Dentists normally use a simple laptop computer for that purpose. I
suspect that a dentist, using the dental records of a particular person, could locate with
his dental software that person wherever he might be. The same type program can be
used with x-rays of any part of the patient's body, either internal or external. Many
targets complain that their attackers are able to focus on particular teeth to make them
feel like they are being drilled without an anesthesia. Although that computer software
is normally used only a few feet from the patient, it can also be used from many miles
away.
Today there is specialized computer software that can affect practically every part of
the body by remote. Through such a software program, actions can be carried out on
the lungs, liver, and kidneys by remote using highly specialized computer software.
Renal and kidney failure can thus be induced by remote. Several forms of cancer
procedures can also be done by remote. In the hands of the wrong people, that
software can just as easily be used for medical torture instead of medical healing.
An MRI machine, functioning by remote, can view our entire body. It requires little
imagination to think that if attackers can view our bodies, they can also perform many
effects on our bodies. The sophistication of medical software and its range of activities
are truly impressive. In addition to performing the physical effects, the same software
can also doubtlessly indicate with precision a target's location, especially if it has the
I.D. number of an implanted microchip.
Neurological Effects
In addition to the physical effects caused by remote-operated computers and computer
software, those devices can also assail the mind. We do not yet know how our enemies
invade our minds. However, once they do so, they must use computer programs for
their neurological torture, thought-mining, neural programming, and interrogations.
Most of the computer software is probably secret, difficult to obtain, and highly
classified.
The attackers' software allows them with the stroke of a particular key on their
computer keyboard to send various messages and loop play tapes to the targets'
minds. They can not only send the recordings and loop play tapes to the victim’s mind
but they can also send multiple recordings and tapes that literally inundate the victim’s
mind. Whether or not the target hears the attackers' voices, the voices are always
there.
25
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
One software program that the attackers use works as an interrogation tool and lie
detector. The attackers ask the target a question and the target thinks the answer to
their question without being aware of it or without being able to resist. The attackers'
software can further determine whether the target's answer is true or false.
Other software can analyze the targets' voices and heartbeat to detect emotions such
as anger, sadness, untruthfulness, loneliness, anxiety, depression, and others. One
such program measures target's pulse to accomplish that same purpose. The pulse
rate tells the attackers whether the target is lying, being deceptive, excited, or exhibits
other emotions.
The same software or perhaps a similar version of it can cause a target to reveal data
that he would not voluntarily tell another soul. When he hears a particular word or sees
a particular object that reminds him of that secret, the software somehow alerts the
attackers. They then proceed to question the target about that secret until finally the
attackers know every detail.
There is also software that programs the targets to think certain things or react in a
certain manner when he hears particular words. Those words can be persons' names,
places, or objects. The attackers particularly like to use that programming in a sexual
context. For example, a male target is supposed to experience an arousal when he
hears certain people's names or sees a particular scene. That software is re-enforced
by the attackers' subliminal talking into the victim's subconscious.
All of the software used for neurological assault is re-enforced by the attackers'
synthetic telepathy or subliminal talking to the targets' subconscious. Not all targets can
hear those voices; nevertheless, targets who receive electronic harassment also
receive the voices whether or not they hear them. The subliminal talking itself may be
the result of computer software, for in their synthetic telepathy the attackers most
certainly use software to disguise their voices, make distinctive sounds, and project
sounds to particular areas.
Most targets who hear the voices also suffer from induced tinnitus. I have often
pondered the origin of the tinnitus. Although the tinnitus could be intentional simply to
annoy the target and affect his hearing, it could also be unintentional, i.e., a side effect
of either the device that “hooks” our brain or of some of the software used by the
attackers. In my case, I hear a change of tone in my tinnitus (to a much higher or lower
pitch) whenever the attackers attempt to cause a faux heart attack.
Programmable Software
26
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
All or most of the software mentioned above is programmable. The attackers can use
their computers to schedule the various physical and psychological effects to function
at particular times of the day or night. They can also program the neurological software
to be triggered by certain target thoughts, actions, colors, and code words that they
hear on TV, radio, and in conversation. They can also use habitual locations of targets
to trigger those effects. For example, when I stand in front of my commode, my legs are
struck with pin prick-type sensations.
Neither electronic harassment nor mind control could be carried out without the use of
computers and computer software. The sophistication of the software for torture
requires the participation of medical personnel and thus implicates doctors, nurses, and
other health workers in the electronic stalking and mind control scheme. If not, medical
personnel had to have trained the attackers to use those programs. In addition, the
software that allows the attackers to perform mind control on targets requires training
provided by law enforcement and intelligence. Thus, there can be little doubt that
personnel in the medical field, law enforcement, and U. S. intelligence are somehow
involved in the overall electronic stalking and mind control scheme although their
participation may be rogue-type actions.
Many targets claim that they receive “directed conversation” from family members,
friends, and other people. I suspect that those people are being manipulated by the
same attackers who manipulate the targets. Moreover, the attackers can clone the
voices of friends and relatives and direct those voices via the V2K into the targets’
brains to make it sound like those people talking about the targets.
Evidence suggests that millions and millions of Americans are already “hooked” but
most of them are not subjected to electronic stalking and mind control. Nevertheless,
their frequencies have already been identified, catalogued, and entered into a megacomputer so that attackers can access those targets at will.
Automated Computer-to-Brain Interfacing
As the number of targets increase, the powerbrokers must find, hire, and train an
increasing number of attackers. The powerbrokers fear, however, that as the number of
attackers increases, so does the possibility of the secret becoming known. Moreover,
lack of manpower in the USA is a great disadvantage in training attackers when
comparing that country with China, India, and other more populous nations. Thus, the
powerbrokers wish to limit the manpower necessary to control the targets.
To do that, I believe that the powerbrokers are presently experimenting with the
development of a super computer and software that can interface with targets’ minds
27
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
through automation without the use of human attackers. Large businesses already use
computers that interact by phone with customers’ voices. Some of that programming is
very realistic. Remember that mainstream American technology is always twenty to
thirty years behind that known and employed by the Department of Defense. If human
thoughts can be translated into actual words and those words processed through super
computers, computer-target interfacing is a realistic goal.
I further believe that those super computers are being designed to connect to and work
with the massive data bases kept on targets already established for that purpose. That
data base may be the Echelon system, which is already in usage by the U. S.
Government to glean information on American citizens. Echelon scans the data and
spits out information fetched out of the data by using key search words. Much of the
attackers’ psychological material is already automated in the form of the previously
recorded messages played to targets’ subconscious. It is not farfetched to believe that
in the future, human attackers will either be altogether unnecessary or drastically
reduced in number.
My attackers consistently use certain expressions in their subliminal talking, such as
“That’s true,” or simply “True;” and “That’s good” or only “Good.” They also often use
the word “Dad.” The speakers are always the same voices. For a long time, I wondered
why the attackers used those expressions, sometimes when they seemed irrelevant to
what I was thinking. Now I believe that they are computer-generated expressions that
alert the computer to mark certain thoughts of the targets. Those thoughts are then
analyzed by the computer and categorized in special areas for future automated use.
The attackers also carry out their mind control on targets through code expressions that
cause targets to act or react in a presupposed manner. Although most targets cannot
hear those codes, their minds do. Once targets get used to hearing and responding to
those codes, a computer can take over the work of the attackers. Incredible, you say?
Perhaps, but one cannot overestimate the evil designs of the powerbrokers and the
super high-tech equipment in their possession for putting those designs into action.
The attackers themselves are probably totally unaware of the reason behind their using
the codes and other expressions. They only follow the established protocol laid out in
the training manual. A part of the entire scheme is to ensure that the various units work
independently without knowing what other units are doing. That is the way a conspiracy
normally works. Only the powerbrokers’ most trusted lieutenants have access to the
combined knowledge of those various operational units.
I also believe that the U.S. Government and other governments are working on a phone
system that will electronically extract information from the phone owner. Here is the way
28
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
it will work. A caller will telephone the phone owner, hypnotize him (or previously
hypnotize him) using particular words or methods, and use pre-determined codes to
ask the person questions. The person who answers will provide answers to the
questions posed to him. He will be told under hypnosis not to remember the phone call.
After the conversation ends, the phone owner’s memory will blank out completely his
ever having received such a call.
Psychiatrists would probably label paranoid anyone with ideas such as machine-tomind interfacing and hypnotic info-gathering by phone. On the other hand, perhaps
those methods only barely touch upon the possibilities concerning the subject of
electronic stalking and mind control.
Early Tell-Tale Signs of Targeting
The attackers work on their victims for years before the victims realize that they are
targeted. In the 1990’s, I experienced several strange symptoms that I now know were
the attackers’ work. Although at the time I thought that those symptoms were odd, I did
not connect them to any evil source. Who would? Those symptoms follow.
-- The muscles in the calves of my legs pulsed unnaturally in a rippling manner. That
symptom continues to this day. There is absolutely no physical explanation for that
strange occurrence. There seems to be no particular pattern to the pulsing. Moreover,
weather and other conditions do not seem to affect the pulsations. I believe that the
strange pulsing has something to do with the electromagnetic force or frequencies of
whatever device is used by the attackers to connect with my mind and body.
-- The tops of both ears began to exude a colorless fluid that became crusty. Likewise,
there is no physical explanation for that condition, which still continues whether I use
sun screen or not. Other victims have also mentioned the fluid coming from the tops of
their ears. Also, the top of my nose forms a crust. I remove it with a soapy bath cloth
one day and the next day it reappears. Sun screen does not prevent its doing that. I do
not have particularly sensitive skin.
-- I also experienced the sensation of something crawling on my skin or underneath my
skin, normally on my face. Unable to sleep well at night, I sought out a dermatologist.
The doctor called that condition dermatitis and told me that it had no known cure.
Strangely, he said that he also had dermatitis. That condition gradually went away and
did not return until the electronic effects and mind control activities became obvious in
December of 2005! I now know that the “dermatitis” in the mid-1990’s was the work of
the attackers, probably telling my brain that I felt insects crawling on my face, i.e.,
psychology reinforced by post-hypnotic suggestion.
29
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
-- I became weak and lethargic for no apparent reason. That malady is often called
chronic fatigue syndrome. Such was my lack of energy that oftentimes my son would
have to help me up from my chair. Even then, I was unsteady on my feet. I was still in
my fifties. Despite those odd conditions, I failed to see anything sinister in them. Over
time, I regained my strength, and today I am again exceptionally fit. I later learned that
the attackers’ device can cause chronic fatigue. Other targets complain of the same
effect. I suspect that directed energy weaponry may even be the cause of the relatively
new medical condition known as chronic fatigue syndrome (CFS).
-- I also often had “restless legs” at night when I retired. That symptom is a favorite with
the attackers, and it appears to have some kind of relationship to the pin pricks and
vibrations. That appears to be a connection between restless legs and the spinal
column. The restless sensation first begins at the small of the back, or spine, and then
continues down the leg, in my case usually the right one, to the bottom of the foot.
Oftentimes, when the sensation reaches the foot, the foot will twitch or jump.
-- My legs and feet often cramped badly while driving and on other occasions. That had
never happened before. I later learned that cramping was almost always a symptom of
targets. Cramping became a vital part of my targeting in the beginning and continues to
this day. However, today I can control the cramping by control my mind, and it does not
at all bother me.
-- I noticed that food seemed not to empty into my stomach but got stuck in my
esophagus. I do not take large bites, and I am a slow eater; yet, the food did not go
down easily. Also, while driving I was often struck with what seemed like a hiatal
hernia. I learned that if I kept a beverage in the vehicle and took a swallow, that
sensation disappeared. Again, other victims mention that symptom.
At the time, I thought little about those symptoms. Now, however, I know that they were
signs that I was a target even back in the early 1990s. At first, targets normally ascribe
their ailments and physical problems to simply “bad luck,” quirks of nature, lack of
exercise, genetics, a poor diet, or advancing age. It literally takes years for most targets
to realize that their symptoms are induced by remote by people who want to harm them.
Once the target does become aware that the effects are unnatural, he has no defense
against the torture, and his frustration, anger, and anxiety mount. Nobody believes him.
Law enforcement will not investigate his claims. When that scenario develops, the
attackers have achieved what they wanted and anticipated. On the other hand, many
targets die without ever knowing that they have been targeted.
30
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Capabilities of the Attackers
The only fact that we know for certain about electronic assault and mind control relates
to the symptoms, or the effects on the victim. Targeted individuals are well aware of the
capabilities of the assailants, but for those readers who may be reading about
electronic stalking and mind control for the first time, I describe below fifteen
capabilities of the attackers.
(1) Inflict physical torture techniques in and on the body. The software that the
attackers use is truly impressive, for they can induce a multitude of conditions in and on
the body. Many of those effects may perhaps be done through the use of silent directed
sound and various PC software used over the voice-to-brain communication. Others
may be psychological or aided by psychological suggestions through the attackers’
subliminal voices into the target’s brain (more about the voices later). Those effects
include the following.
-- sensation of pin pricks in the eyes, shoulders, face, feet, elbows, and other
areas. The pin prick can be instantaneous or can be prolonged. In my case, the
attackers have long caused an enduring pin prick on the rear of my neck. At first I
thought that the sensation was an irritation on the neck caused by shirt labels;
however, when it kept hurting in the absence of labels, I knew that it was only one of
the attackers’ bag of tricks. In addition, the sensation was not in the same location
as the shirt labels. They can also cause the entire lower legs to feel like they are
being struck by pins. In recent months, they have pin pricked the depths of my
auditory canal in my right ear, causing me to shiver violently. They have also
frequently pricked underneath the toenail on my right foot, causing the toenail to
recede for a quarter of an inch between it and the skin, much like laser is used for
ingrown toenails.
-- intense pressure on the bridge of the nose.
-- restless legs. A sensation begins in the small of the back and extends into the
extremities, causing the “restless legs” syndrome. I can feel that sensation coming
on as the attackers apply their vibrations to my body. Sometimes when that
happens, the legs will jerk involuntarily.
-- hunger pains in the stomach between meals.
-- electrical jolts. These affect the entire body and feel much like the shock that one
gets from touching a low voltage electrical fence. I suspect that the jolts work along
with previous hypnotic instructions to the target. For example, when a target feels
the jolts, he is supposed to open his mind to the attackers.
-- tremors, or vibrations. These can affect the whole body or be focused on specific
31
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
-------
--
----
---
--
--
parts of the body. They can range from very mild to violent. (I believe that the jolts
and vibrations may partially be pre-hypnotic suggestions causing the target to think
that he feels jolts and vibrations whenever the attackers whisper the code word. In
other words, those physical effects may instead be psychological effects resulting in
physical reactions. I have asked other people to touch my legs and body when they
were vibrating, and they felt nothing.)
zapping in/on the head. These sound much like sparks from a welder’s torch or like
children’s sparklers used as fireworks on holidays.
a “heaviness” in the chest that makes one feel somewhat tired.
clicking in the left ear. (In my case, it is always in the left ear, never in the right one.)
severe cramping, mainly in the calves of the legs.
numbness in the limbs from the base of the spinal column to the toes.
coughing (I can feel an unnatural scratching in the inside of my throat), and
sneezing (likewise, I can feel an artificial tickling in the inside of my nostrils and on
a particular area of my throat. Apparently, the attackers have mapped out the
various areas of the throat that produce those symptoms.)
induced erections, by vibrating very lightly the inside of the urethra and the groin.
Those erections usually occur while the attackers whisper the names of friends and
relatives, very obviously attempting to cause the target psychologically to associate
the sexual sensation with those people.
stomach aches and pains, indigestion, nausea, and dizziness.
gas on the stomach and in the intestines.
sodomizing and virtual rape, using some unknown force to probe the anal cavity
and the vagina (perhaps directed sound waves, which cause a strong vibration and
throbbing sensation that can focus on a particular very small area, usually on the
anus). It could also be purely psychological suggestion.
lethargy and listlessness. I suspect that many people suffering from Chronic Fatigue
Syndrome are actually victims of REA. CFS was not identified until the 1980s.
tinnitus. I had never suffered from tinnitus before the electronic stalking began. It
hit me the day the stalking became overt, and I have had that condition ever since
then. The tone of the ear ringing changes often in a very noticeable manner,
sometimes reaching a very high pitch.
inability to urinate or frequent urination. I had two prostate procedures in 2001,
although the prostate was not enlarged, because I had the urge to urinate but could
not do so. Now I know that it was the work of the attackers who use the REA
techniques, for since the attackers became overt in 2005, they have continued
making the bladder often seem full. Now I can hear them saying subliminally to my
subconscious, “Don’t piss.” It now has absolutely no effect.
constipation. Likewise, I often used to have a problem defecating. Since I have
developed an ability to “hear” the attackers’ whispers, I hear them repeating, “Don’t
shit.” The brain learns over a period of time to react to their commands. However,
32
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
--
---
---
--
---
--
--
knowing now what causes the constipation, I am no longer affected by it. I now
defecate without any problem. In this case, knowledge is freedom.
sleep deprivation. All of this leads to sleep deprivation, which then becomes a
symptom itself. This is designed to weaken the victim’s body as well as his mind
and cause him to have motor, household, and other accidents. In addition, it makes
the victim more vulnerable to mind control. Conversely, the attackers’ device can
also make targets incredibly sleepy and actually cause his eyes to close
involuntarily. There also appears to be a particular form of vibration that will “wire”
the target to keep him awake at night.
the sensation of crawling insects on the face and neck.
intense itching. This can be any place on the body. They often will make it seem
like a mosquito bite or a fire ant bite. The itching is normally on the hands or the
feet.
twitching of the fingers. The attackers not only want to annoy you but also
convince you that you are developing Parkinson’s disease.
partial loss of sight. The attackers do something to the eyes that make them feel as
if a grain of sand is underneath the eyelid. They also cause pin pricks in the eyes. I
have lost much sight in my left eye as a result. I do not wear glasses to read or to
drive. Until a few months ago, I could read the TV captions clearly. Now I have to be
very close to the TV set to see the captions and I often have double vision and
blurred vision, especially in the left eye. In addition, the lips and mouths of speakers
on TV are not in sync with their words. I also recently discovered while watching
Wheel of Fortune on TV that the movements of objects on TV are likewise not in
sync. When the participants in that program spun the wheel, the result on my TV (or
in my vision) was about two clicks of the Wheel of Fortune off what they should
have been.
Destabilization of hand-to-eye coordination, causing targets to strike their hands
against objects, misstep, bump against objects, stumble, and misjudge their
distances.
inability to open left eye in the morning. The attackers often do something to my left
eye during the night. In the morning when I wake up, I can hardly open the left eye.
twitching eye lid, usually the left eye. The attackers cause this because of my
taunting them, telling them that certain actions and things are amazing and adding
“but then anything is amazing to the pervs. Just being able to open both eyes at the
same time is utterly amazing to them.”
throbbing in the head. This has something to do with “mining” the brain or it is part
of the psychological conditioning to make the target believe that he must reveal his
thoughts.
aches and pains in various parts of the body. I am very physically active; thus, the
attackers attempt to cripple my knees and my right arm and hand (I am right
handed) to keep me from being able to work. They can also cause arthritic-type pain
33
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
--
---
--
--
---
--
--
in the hands, pains in the lower back, and extreme pain in the legs by striking the
sciatic nerve.
unnatural salivation. The pervs’ device can cause me to salivate at night while I
sleep as well as during the day when I am active. For no reason, spittle will
sometimes seep from the corner of my mouth. I can feel the sensation when it
issues from my gums.
conversely, dry mouth.
tingling vibration focused on the outside of the right side of the nostril (it can, of
course, focus on any location). As a result of the vibrations (or perhaps lasering)
on that area, a small brown bump has appeared at that location. That bump remains
very sensitive and often runs and forms a scab. It was later found to be cancerous.
involuntary physical movements. For example, when I type my emails and
computer documents, the pervs’ software, which constantly pummels my brain,
causes me to reverse certain consonants and vowels, slowing down considerably
my typing speed. Other targets have suffered serious falls, when the devices
caused their knees to buckle. The attackers’ device can also cause the arms and
legs to flail and jerk involuntarily. I have awoken while sleeping when one of my
arms flailed into the head board. Occasionally, when I nod on the sofa, the attackers
cause one of my legs to jerk involuntarily.
heart flutters and irregular palpitations. In particular, the attackers cause the heart
to beat at a far greater than normal rate, or at least they lend the perception that it is
beating rapidly through psychological or perhaps post-hypnotic suggestions. The
attackers want the target to believe that his heart is overworking and that he may
suffer a heart attack, stroke, or chronic heart problems.
extreme sensitivity to light. Now, I must wear sunglasses at all times whenever I’m
outside because of my eyes’ sensitivity to glare.
pressure on the bladder, causing the victim to want to urinate very often. Because
of that sensation, I underwent two painful and costly prostate procedures with a
urologist before I knew the real cause of the problem. The pervs still apply pressure
on the bladder; however, now that I know that it is their evil work, it does not bother
me.
sores in various areas. The attackers continually vibrate (or laser) the outside of my
right nostril, which remains continually sensitive. That area scabs over, loses its
scab, and then scabs over again. A brown mole-like bump appeared at that point,
which became an indentation. The attackers have telepathically referred to it as the
“mark of the beast” or “mark of the lamb.” A spot has also developed on my chin,
where I often feel the tingling and stinging of their lasering.
high and sudden temperature rises in the body. Those may be psychologically
induced, as I have heard the attackers remark “123 degrees.” That term may be
post-hypnotic code, causing my mind to imagine that my body will reach 123
degrees. The feet and lower legs, in particular, are normally very warm.
34
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
– stopped-up ear canals. A hearing specialist whom I once visited told me that my
hearing canals were “sucked-in.” I now know that that is induced by the attackers'
device(s). That condition hinders my hearing and allows the attackers' programmed
material that I hear to have greater effect.
-- pressure (causing numbness) on bridge of nose, the kidneys, and the prostate.
-- intense itching on the scalp. This is sometimes preceded or followed by pin pricks
on the scalp.
-- constriction in the esophagus and hiatal hernia.
-- “faux” heart beat that occurs on the back opposite the heart or on the head. This is
purely neurological, as I can tell my mind that there is absolutely no connection
between my real heart beat and the beat that feels like it is a heart beat. It
immediately stops. That throb-like faux heart beat occurs as I sit watching TV or
using the computer.
-- electrical-like buzz in the groin and on the right hip. This vibration is different from
the body vibration and appears to be designed to stimulate the penis and vagina to
cause sexual reactions.
-- artificial heating of the body. Microwaves are supposed to cause the body to heat.
-- acute pain on hands and feet. In the latter, attackers like to concentrate on the
callused part of the sole, usually the part near the smallest toe.
-- tops of feet, including the toes, feel rigid and numb.
A target recently (2011) informed me that the attackers infect the hair follicles in her
head by entering her home in her absence and sprinkling some type of powder in the
rooms. The powder reacts with her hair. The roots become infected, and the only way
that she can relieve the pain is by plucking out the infected hairs That effect is very
unusual.
My physical symptoms include most of those listed above. Other targeted individuals
have experienced other symptoms, perhaps in addition to some of those I have listed.
For example, many other victims develop psoriasis, fibromyalgia, carpal tunnel
syndrome, rheumatoid arthritis, and other physical ailments. It is only logical that if
scientists know what causes diseases, they can perhaps also cause those diseases.
For example, by playing with a target’s immune system, they can cause psoriasis and
by learning to manipulate muscles and muscle tissue, they can cause fibromyalgia.
Scientists must know what causes a disease to find a cure for that disease. Thus, they
can also perform the reverse, causing the disease. Non-targets will have difficulty in
believing that those scientists exist whose purposes are less than noble. Targets know
that they exist.
Gastric problems are one of the favorites of the attackers, for they are seemingly easy
to promote. By vibrating the bowels and also whispering to the victims’ brains, attackers
35
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
can cause frequent bowel movements. Making victims defecate often is psychological
as well as physical. That action humiliates victims and keeps them from leaving home,
further isolating them. Conversely, attackers can also constipate victims using similar
physical and neurological means. Constipation makes victims feel bad in general and
also makes them more prone to anxiety, listlessness, and weight gain.
My attackers often cause a pain near my right hand on the other side of my arm from
my wrist bone. I can only believe that they seek to cause carpal tunnel syndrome,
which they believe will interfere with my writing. However, now I am acutely aware of
their aims, their tactics, and many of their methods, so I can successfully ameliorate
those pains through my own form of mind control.
Most, if not all, of the symptoms and ailments listed above, can be delivered by remote
through an assortment of software used by a computer that connects to involuntarily
implanted microchips. The computer software is aided by the unheard subliminal voices
of the attackers, which themselves may be rendered through the same software. The
specialized software coupled with the synthetic telepathy subject victims to incredulous
electronic and neurological torture.
The physical symptoms named above are a very deliberate and important part of the
attackers’ protocol. The objective is to make the target continually aware of his
seemingly hopeless situation. That in turn causes sleep deprivation and anxiety. The
feeling of hopelessness, sleep deprivation, and anxiety lay the groundwork for mind
control, the ultimate aim.
Many targets seek to escape those physical symptoms and their neurological attacks
by relocating to another site, even to a different country. As far as I know, no target has
ever succeeded in escaping those REA activities. Moreover, those effects, including
the V2K, occur whenever targets are in airplanes or when they are far underground.
That fact implies that at least some portion of the REA attacks is made via satellite and
that there must be some way to contact the subject, i.e., implant.
The electronic jolts and vibrations also affect domesticated animals. My attackers can
beam their frequencies (or whatever it might be) in broad waves that cover very wide
areas, including my yard and the adjoining pasture. My dog, which is an outside pet, is
much affected by the electronic assault methods despite her being in excellent health
and getting regular checkups by the veterinarian. She often trembles violently and
appears frightened. At times, she pants heavily, gulping for air, and almost collapses.
She very often also shakes her head as if she is trying to get something out of or off her
head. I have taken her to the vet twice for that symptom, and he diagnosed her both
36
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
times with an ear infection and prescribed her medicine. Despite that, after almost three
years, she still shakes her head. My cat, on the other hand, does not seem to be
affected by the electronic effects. Gender could not be a factor, as they are both
spayed females.
Jolts and Vibrations
Almost every victim of electronic stalking and mind control mentions electrical-like jolts,
or shocks, and vibrations when discussing his symptoms. The jolts and vibrations not
only cause targets discomfort and remind the targets that they are being monitored but
they also serve a neurological purpose. It took me a very long time to learn that those
sensations are essential elements of mind control. Here are some of my thoughts about
them.
Jolts – This effect is felt physically; however, it may also be aided by psychological
suggestion. This sensation may work along with “post hypnotic” suggestions planted in
the target’s subconscious through the attackers’ subliminal voices to prepare the
victim’s mind for interrogation and programming. The target’s subconscious has been
previously advised by the attackers that when they feel the jolts, they will open their
minds and thoughts to the attackers. Thence, the attackers are able to exploit more
easily the target’s mind.
Vibrations – Vibrations may be partially psychological or, if not, be augmented
psychologically. Usually a jolt precedes the vibrations. I believe that the target may
have already been conditioned by hypnotic pre-suggestion to believe that following the
jolts, he will feel vibrations. Likewise, he has been further conditioned, or sensitized,
that once he feels the vibrations, he is supposed to open up his mind and thoughts to
the attackers.
In addition, the vibrations sap the energy from a target’s body. It is well known that
microwaves are capable of rendering a person lethargic to the point of being unable to
exert the least amount of work. Indeed, those microwave vibrations can make a target
so weak that he can hardly stand and walk.
The vibrations signal the target’s brain that he will submit to the attackers’ voices.
Then, those voices instruct him how he is supposed to react. For example, while
vibrating a target, the attackers will often tell the target that he will go to sleep. While
he is sleeping, the attackers interrogate him, probably with the fMRI. They also tell the
victim that when he wakes, he will have no memory of the interrogation.
37
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Vibrations are not simply conducted at random but are deliberately aimed at specific
parts of the human body at varying intensities to accomplish specific purposes.
Stomach vibrations, for example, cause much discomfort and gas on the stomach. That
lends itself to attackers’ causing anxiety and disquiet in the target. Vibrations in the
groin area cause sexual arousals or make that area vulnerable to sexual arousals
caused by other interventions. The vibrations can focus on the penis or the vagina,
causing a tickling sensation. Those around the heart, combined with pin pricks by the
attackers in that location, help to reinforce the target’s idea that he is experiencing a
heart attack. Vibrations in the duodenum cause gastric disturbances and indigestion,
which likewise help induce anxiety in the victim. Once again, the vibrations alone do
not cause those effects. The attackers’ verbal instructions during the vibrations
determine how a target reacts to the vibrations.
Very importantly, prolonged vibrations on the torso can cause constipation and can
even cause blockage of bowel movements. The attackers will normally vibrate that area
while the target sleeps. The vibrations harden the stool. That plus the inaudible voices
to the target’s subconscious telling him that he will be unable to have a bowel
movement can send the target to the emergency room to have the compaction removed
physically. Taking stool softener gel caps after each meal lessens the possibility of
extreme constipation.
I have noted that the vibrations also vary in intensity, in duration, and in the way they
are applied. This suggests that different vibrations have different functions. The length,
location(s), and intensity of the vibrations probably contribute to the attackers’ desired
effects.
Although it may be possible to deliver the jolts and vibrations from a long distance by
satellite, they can also be directed from a far shorter distance. When I first experienced
the vibrations, I was in a hotel room. I could hear the occupants in the adjoining room
laughing and giggling; thus, I presume that they were behind the vibrations, perhaps
using some type of handheld device. They were about twenty feet from me, and the
vibrations were extremely intense.
Regardless of the origin of and the method behind the jolts and vibrations, they have a
powerful psychological effect, causing the victim anxiety. Targets should keep in mind
that one of the main objectives of the attackers is either to drive him insane or to
convince others that he is insane. The attackers’ ability to produce extreme anxiety in
their victims causes the latter to seek out psychiatrists. The resulting psychiatric
attention effectively ends the target’s credibility concerning mind control.
38
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
None of the attackers’ actions is solely to harass you physically. Every symptom that a
target feels, smells, sees, tastes, or hears takes him closer to mind control, the ultimate
objective in causing the victim to self-destruct. Knowing that fact can help a target
defend himself against the attackers’ objective.
The jolts and vibrations serve several purposes: (1) to remind the victim that he is
targeted and monitored ceaselessly; (2) to disturb his rest and sleep, resulting in sleep
deprivation, one of the attackers’ principal tools; (3) to cause apprehension and
continual uneasiness, contributing to anxiety; (4) to condition, or sensitize, the target to
cooperate with the attackers. The latter will normally consist of interrogations, data
gathering, and subliminal commands by the attackers.
Targets can use their minds to counter the purposes of the jolts and vibrations. After all,
their targeting is aimed at their minds. First of all, they should realize that the jolts and
vibrations themselves are not normally lethal. The exception is when they act in
consonance with the attackers’ subliminal voices suggesting that the target is suffering
a heart attack and other harmful conditions. Knowing that, targets can instruct their
minds that when they feel the jolts and vibrations, those minds will not cooperate with
the attackers’ intentions. Moreover, they can instruct their minds that they will not
succumb to the negative suggestions of the attackers. Targets can learn to use their
own brand of psychology to thwart the neurological assault of the attackers.
(2) Monitor movements. The attackers not only know one’s vehicular movements but
they can also view him and follow his movements on his property and even inside his
house. Once they “hook” the target with their equipment, they have ready access to him
at all times. Their torture follows the target wherever he goes, even to other states and
abroad.
Many targets believe that cell phones may play a role in monitoring their movements;
however, if they are correct, that use is not universal. It is true, however, that many TIs
trace the origin of their electronic torture and mind control to the early 2000’s, when cell
phone usage was becoming increasingly more popular. In my opinion, the cell phone
itself is not a device used in targets’ torture but only a useful tool of the people who do
so. I have intentionally gone days without using or being near cell phones, and my
physical and neurological attacks continued unabated.
It is also true that cell phones have to be used in gang stalking, which goes right along
with REA. In fact, the stalkers could not coordinate their harassment against targets
without the use of cell phones or some type of walkie-talkie. Cellular phones may even
somehow be used with the device that renders the electronics effects on victims. It is
known that cell phones carried on one’s person near credit cards can cause those
39
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
cards to malfunction and wear out quickly. Credit cards are one of the hundreds of
items that operate through the RFID (radio frequency identification).
The cell phone, however, has nothing to do with the voices and other physical and
neurological effects. I have purposely left my cell phone behind on various occasions to
determine whether it might figure in the REA. It simply does not. I have gone days
without being around a cell phone. If it is used at all, it may be used in locating some
targets. However, its main usage is for the attackers’ convenient communication
concerning the target.
The attackers appear to be able to map out your house or apartment. They probably
first locate your residence, using Google Earth or some other program of that type, and
then learn the configuration of the structure. Once they have the layout of your house
or apartment, they seem to divide it into grids, probably with the help of an
architectural-type computer program. Then, they slowly zoom in on various locations
where you habitually sit, stand, or lie and program those locations on their device. In
my case, they first located the chair in the living room where I sit, then the lavatory and
commode in the bathroom where I stand. Finally, they had programmed every area of
the house, and they were able to jolt me and vibrate me in any location inside my
house. We know that devices and methods exist for accomplishing those actions.
The attackers seemingly make a grid map of the target’s dwelling. Then, they track the
target within his dwelling and learn his habitual locations within the dwelling. Using the
grid map and their computer software, the attackers can program their device to
perform various effects on the target in those locations. Their computer would probably
use a Microsoft tool bar. The attackers probably only have to highlight that particular
grid on their screen and then open Tools on the tool bar to choose from a variety of
physical and psychological effects with which to hit the target.
Likewise, in my opinion, cell towers and electrical power lines in themselves are not
used specifically for electronic torture. Nevertheless, like the cell phone, the cell towers
and power lines perhaps somehow aid the attackers in their operations.
(3) Hear and record one’s conversations along with those with whom one talks.
This can be done even in a moving vehicle or while on foot in a rural area. The
harassers occasionally record and play back to the victim excerpts of some of those
conversations in his brain. The attackers can also record a person’s voice and then
later simulate that same voice.
(4) See through the victim’s eyes. One’s eyes are controlled by his brain; thus, by
controlling the victim’s brain, the attackers can probably also see whatever the victim
40
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
sees. Not only that but with their specialized software they can also see what he thinks.
Nevertheless, some of what the attackers lead the victims to believe that they can see
may be another example of deception through psychological trickery. For example, the
attackers often comment on what I am watching on TV or what I am doing in the house.
They may know that because of my brain’s processes, as the brain is in constant
motion as I watch TV and do chores around the house. Someday we shall know.
(5) View the victim’s interior and zoom in on any part or organ of the body, even in
the darkness. EKG, CT scans, and functional MRIs can be performed by remote. The
attackers probably use the GPS with directed sound to see and torture the target’s
body by remote. NASA has long used similar telescopic instruments for carrying out
delicate space operations. Although the attackers can target specific areas both on and
in the body, that capability is greatly enhanced by communication with the targets’
brains, i. e., using synthetic telepathy.
(6) Inject holographic pictures or images into a victim’s thoughts. In my case, the
attackers have shown images of my son drowning, pictures of what Christians believe
to be that of Jesus, pictures of family members and friends, sometimes in suggestive
poses, and countless numbers of unknown individuals in induced dreams and thoughts.
Some of the unknown individuals in the dreams may be images of the attackers and
their accomplices themselves, which they display for the fun of it. They are safe in
doing this, as the victim usually will not know them and the victim will also very quickly
forget those images due to the attackers’ ability to blank out their memories. In addition,
their computer software can cause targets’ brains to view all people and all situations in
sexual and negative contexts. Again, this is pure mind control.
I may be an unusual target, for I can not only talk back to the attackers but can also
project images back to them. I often show images of piles of writhing poisonous snakes,
many of them poised to strike. I’ve also shown them huge explosions followed by fire
and smoke. I can show them a kaleidoscope of colors, turning and twisting, and
blankets of symbols such as those used on the keyboard. I also show them my idea of
their appearances, which are, of course, very unflattering.
(7) Induce dreams, stage scenarios, and engage in subliminal interrogations. The
reader will see later that the attackers have the capability to read a target's thoughts
and project voices into his hearing. Those activities are best carried out while the target
sleeps. While the target is in the dream stage, the attackers cause him not only to view
dreams but also to participate in them. Indeed, the attackers describe situations and
talk the target through them. They do not perform that simply for fun but to make
suggestions to the target that re-enforce their objectives.
41
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
I have often awoken from induced dreams in which the attackers are telling me what is
happening and allowing my imagination to embellish the “dream.” Attackers also
interrogate the target while he is in the dream state. They do that in very subtle ways.
For example, they will introduce particular words and expressions and allow the target's
mind to being “processing” that thought. As the target contemplates those words and
expressions, the attackers question him about his thoughts about those particular key
words and expressions. They also begin sentences and then suddenly quit, leaving the
target to finish the sentences.
The attackers also implant false memories in victims. Their objective apparently is to
instill in victims guilt, shame, and remorse, which help the attackers achieve their
psychological mastery over the victims.
(8) Cause the target financial problems, ruin his credit, and drive him into
bankruptcy. Keep in mind that most targets live on fixed incomes and most of them
have to live frugally. Yet, the attackers employ a bag of tricks designed to drain the
target financially through the following actions.
-- Making the target spend thousands of dollars on remedies and gadgets that
supposedly neutralize or ameliorate the effects of REA and causing him to hire
detectives to investigate the REA.
-- Causing the target to make mathematical errors on his taxes and other documents
that result in substantial losses.
-- Affecting the target’s judgment that ends in his making faulty and costly decisions.
-- Destroying expensive household and other items, making targets have to replace
them. In my case, they have ruined two printers, two blenders, and other household
items. Their device, however, can only affect machines that have small motors or
batteries. My coffee makers, which have no motor, are not affected.
-- Distracting the target so that he forgets to pay bills on time, leading to his paying
costly penalties.
-- Creating problems with the electrical system and mechanical devices, especially
computers and printers, which make targets have to hire technicians to repair. I
have had to hire PC technicians many times paying from $95 to $250 a visit.
-- Urging the targets through their voice-to-brain subliminal suggestions to buy
expensive needless items.
-- Fomenting personal and other problems that require that targets hire lawyers. A TI
correspondent wrote about her taking videos of neighbors overtly harassing her and
then being arrested for that action. She had to hire a lawyer to get out of jail. Of
42
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
course, nothing happened to the harassers. Moreover, now that law abiding citizen
has an arrest record that will follow her to the grave.
-- Sending targets to hospital emergency rooms due to physical problems they cause
with their devices. One TI correspondent rushed to the ER on at least three
occasions when the attackers caused her throat to constrict, keeping her from
breathing. Most medical insurance policies do not pay the total costs.
-- Ruining the targets’ credit. The manipulators and their accomplices will steal credit
card and other statements from the targets’ mail boxes or “lose” them in the postal
system, causing targets to pay late fees; by whispering into the targets’ brains,
make them forget to pay bills; and interfere with the targets online payments to
cause them bill payment problems. The attackers have changed my passwords
many times to hinder my paying my bills and preparing online tax returns.
-- Robbing targets of their time by harassing them continually with electronic assault
and mind control, thus keeping them from tending to their business affairs. Very
often targets lose their jobs because of the REA distractions in their lives. I have
spent countless hours taking notes, recording them in my journal, corresponding
with other TIs, researching on the internet, and trying objects and ways to neutralize
the REA effects, time that I could have spent on home improvement projects and
other useful activities. I am a very able genealogical researcher, and I used to
spend hours a day at that pastime. Now I very seldom do family research because
of the many distractions that affect my concentration.
Causing targets financial ruin is one of the aims of the attackers. Broke people are
usually harmless and defenseless. Many of the targets with whom I have corresponded
have depleted their savings and have gone into bankruptcy because of the attackers.
Others have been forced into homeless shelters and still others have become virtually
street people. The attackers set out to break targets financially, and they often do.
The IRS is often used by the attackers to further their schemes. In a case that I know
of, the IRS charged a medium-income person one million dollars in back taxes. The
man had never made that amount in his whole working life. Through trumped-up
charges, the IRS sent the man to prison. Then, they targeted his wife with gang stalking
and electronic attacks. Never believe that the IRS is not political and is not the willing
tool of the powerbrokers.
(9) Knock out and interfere with the function of battery-operated or electrical
household items. In my case, the attackers have changed radio stations, caused
halogen flashlights to blink and go out, caused the tiny lights in a fingerprint reader
used for PC security to quiver, caused interference in TV programs, burned out
electrical wall outlets, caused microwaves not to function, burned out watch batteries
43
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
while the watch was on my wrist, changed the functions of certain keys on the keyboard
of the computer, and burned out the batteries in my smoke detectors, flashlights, and
other objects that use batteries – all by remote. In addition, they have ruined six
computer printers, two Weedeaters, three blenders, a food chopper, and other
electrical appliances, battery-operated, and motor-driven objects.
Their device can even cause the ink in ballpoint pens to congeal or dry up so that the
pens will not write. They can also make inanimate objects move. Once, as I stood in the
kitchen, the attackers caused the loose cap on a gallon container of milk to flap upward
several times. They probably thought that would rattle me. Instead, I ridiculed them by
telling them that they were unable to flip the cap completely off. All of this suggests that
the attackers use directed silent sound beamed in by a radio frequency and guided by
the GPS to complement the software used with microchips. For some reason, their
device seemingly cannot disarm appliances that do not have motors, such as a simple
electric coffee maker, which operates through only a heated coil. They can, however,
damage the functions on the more elaborate electric coffee makers.
(10) Manipulate the target’s computer and telephones (more about that in a
following section).
(11) Discredit the target by making him appear insane or demented. They will also
spread rumors about the target designed to isolate him from neighbors. Those rumors
will usually suggest that the target is a drug pusher or user, a child molester (one of
their favorites), a wife-beater, a common street walker or male prostitute, a rip-off artist,
a closet drunkard, a white collar thief, a racist, an anti-Semite (another of their
favorites), a suspected domestic terrorist, and others.
In addition to socially isolating the target, the attackers also seek to cause the target
anxiety and other psychological problems that drive him to a psychiatrist, who then
diagnoses him as schizophrenic. The attackers know that once the target sees a
psychiatrist and it becomes a matter of record, the target’s sanity becomes an issue.
Afterward, whatever the target says will be treated as incredulous. This is important to
the attackers, as they know that the target will be discredited if he seeks out law
enforcement. Many of my target correspondents had already undergone treatment for
mental disorders before they discovered that their problems were caused by exterior
forces.
(12) Monitor and manipulate the target’s emotions. Their software allows them to
use the target’s pulse rate and probably other methods to record emotions such as
anxiety, panic, fear, frustration, anger, sadness, loneliness, and others. The emotions
44
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
actually appear in the form of words that surface in your thoughts, e.g., frustration,
loneliness, anger. In addition, the attackers continually whisper those words into your
brain, which actually causes those emotions. Attackers use loop play tapes of their
talking whose design is to play on the target’s emotions. (More about subconscious
talking later.)
Moreover, their computer software is programmed to alert the attackers when targets
think of certain topics. In my case, a computerized female voice will say in a reproving
manner, “Max!” At that point, the attackers cease their continual general talking and
instead concentrate on that topic. A voice on the computer often says “Good” when I
think along the lines desired by the attackers. I retort that the attackers would not know
“good” if it dropped on top of them. Those verbal observations are probably automated
and come from the computer software that the attackers synchronize for the targets.
This re-enforces the conditioning of targets that the attackers attempt to accomplish.
Monitoring victims’ emotions will also indicate whether they are lying when the
attackers ask targets questions. In addition, the attackers employ a particular type of
software that exacts the true answers. I often tell them wrong answers. I can project to
them false images and wrong answers to their questioning without their detecting them.
However, if I do so, I must concentrate on that action. Unless I am very alert, my mind
signals them the true answers. For example, I take vitamins. If I tell the attackers that I
am now taking zinc and I am actually taking niacin, after I think zinc, my mind will then
think niacin.
(13) Cause mood swings. Attackers will try to tear down a victim’s self-esteem by
filling him with guilt and constantly belittling him. They will often fill the victim with
emotions that cause moods that range from explosive anger to total complacency.
Those mood swings are seen by many observers as a mental disorder.
(14) READ A VICTIM’S THOUGHTS. There is irrefutable proof that university, medical,
independent researchers, and defense contractor scientists have developed various
devices and methods that, when operated with computer programs, are capable of
reading human thought. Many of those methods have been patented. Scientists know
that certain radio frequencies can pick up the natural frequencies of the human brain.
My attackers at first made me believe that their equipment picked up only a few oneand two-syllable words of my thoughts. I even heard them talking excitedly about
picking up those fragmentary thoughts. That was total deception. They have had the
ability to pick up complete thoughts for many years. Their “discovery” was only a part of
the mind game, which must be very amusing to the attackers. In reality their device
45
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
actually intercepts a target’s thoughts BEFORE those thoughts fully develop in the
target’s conscious. The attackers always hear the target’s thoughts a few words before
the target becomes conscious of their thoughts.
For some time, my attackers have repeated my thoughts in their subliminal talking. At
first I thought that their repetitions of my thoughts was simply another psychological tool
thrown into the equation to annoy me. However, I now believe that perhaps the
attackers are repeating my thoughts for the benefit of accomplices or their superiors
who are listening on radios, cell phones, and other instruments. Or they are making
recordings of what they hear on their ear phones.
People think without realizing that they are thinking. They cannot help thinking. That is
quite natural. But, strangely, once targets are aware that the attackers can read their
thoughts, the targets subconsciously articulate those thoughts carefully, knowing that
somebody else is “listening.” Instead of simply thinking naturally, targets become very
conscious of their thoughts and will make sure that those thoughts are very clear. They
will even “explain” those thoughts.
Moreover, whenever they handle or use an object, they will think the name of that
object. Certain software used by the perpetrators causes targets to articulate those
thoughts and even visualize them. When I take my vitamins, for example, the software
makes me form the thought of each one and name the particular vitamin as I take them.
When I think of a person, the software will cause me to visualize that person.
One of the major objectives of the attackers’ mind reading ability is to interrogate the
victim. Their device and software include a remote lie detector. The attackers
interrogate the target through their subliminal voices to his brain (whether or not the
target hears the voices), and the software indicates whether his answers are true or
not. Knowing about the attackers’ lie detectors, the target can often deceive them by
introducing several answers. As the attackers try to get the target to identify the correct
answer, the target can totally confuse the attackers by introducing incongruent
information. The target can also have just as much fun playing that game as the
attackers! I enjoy frustrating the attackers who think that they control my life.
The attackers’ software also allows the attackers not only to hear targets’ thoughts but
also to see those thoughts. Of course, some of the targets’ thoughts are not his own but
are induced by the attackers. As a target’s thoughts occur, the attackers’ computer
program will use the target’s thoughts or his induced thoughts to steer him in a
particular direction to a specific topic. The attackers reinforce the computer’s capability
by whispering instructions to the target.
46
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Sometimes the attackers will say only one word to the target’s brain. That word can be
the name of a person, the name of a food that they want you to eat, or the name of a
topic that they want the target to think about. I have learned that whenever I get a
sudden thought while watching TV or puttering, that thought is usually an induced
handler topic. Thus, I intentionally get off of that thought.
The attackers want targets eventually to be unable to distinguish their own thoughts
from the attackers’ induced thoughts. Their objective is to control that person’s mind
and actions. I have learned to separate out my natural thoughts from the attackers’
induced thoughts that they want me to repeat as if they were mine. With practice, all
targets can develop that defensive ability. I often tell my attackers telepathically, “if your
thoughts and commands just happen to coincide with my natural thoughts and actions,
it is mere coincidence, you assholes.”
I have already mentioned that mind control cannot be achieved without the subliminal
voices. Likewise, it cannot be accomplished without the computer programs that the
attackers use. Those programs not only make sound effects, simulate voices, and
perform other readily discernible sounds but they also program many of the mind
control functions. For example, the computer can program a target’s thoughts to view
people in a negative context. A target’s thoughts about a specific person can be
programmed in a specific way, and they can also be programmed differently for
particular persons.
Programmed thoughts about others are often sexual; they can also make the target
believe that a person is stealing from him, that another person is poisoning him, that a
person is talking about him behind his back, etc. They can also program the target to
act and react in certain ways. The programmed thoughts and actions aid the attackers
in totally isolating the target from society and convincing him and others that he is
crazy.
The attackers probably hear one’s thoughts using a headset attached to a computer.
My attackers have tried to make me believe that my thoughts also appear on their
computer in written form and can be printed out. To convince me of that, the attackers
subliminally exaggerate the pronunciation of some words, for example “the,” as if they
are second graders reading from a book. I do NOT believe that one’s thoughts can yet
be made to appear as prose. In the future, however, that will almost certainly be
possible.
The attackers’ equipment and software can also see and record the very images that
your thoughts see. In other words, they can also see what you see in your thoughts on
their monitor. Science fiction? Hardly. Knowing that they can see my thoughts, I have
47
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
learned to project images, scenes, and actions to the attackers. Sometimes when I hear
good jitterbug music, I show myself dancing. They comment on the dancing steps.
The mind reading capability not only gives stalkers access to everything in the victim’s
mind but also provides them massive amounts of information about friends and family
members of victims. The stalkers feverishly exploit this information 24/7. In my case,
the stalkers constantly whisper the names of my son, two sisters, friends and
acquaintances, and even people whom I do not really know but who might creep into
my thoughts to gather information about those individuals. Knowing my thoughts also
gives the stalkers my computer passwords (and thus control over my communications),
information about my business matters, and previous knowledge of my actions and
movements.
While dozing, I have awoken to thoughts that I knew were not my own. The attackers
were introducing past events, places, and people into my mind. The purpose was not to
“mine” information. They already knew that information. Their real motive was to make
me remember the event, place, or person to instill guilt/humiliation and/or to let me
know that they had that information. That is supposed to rattle me. It doesn’t.
The attackers’ equipment and software also have the capability of inducing “dreams”
and thoughts while the victim sleeps. In those dreams and thoughts, the attackers
introduce certain people, some of whom the victim knows, though not always very well,
and others who are unknown to the victim. In the dreams, they set up particular
scenarios in which the victim is the principal actor, doubtlessly to study his interaction
with the other actors. In those skits, the attackers actually direct the actors while
looking for signs of phobias, sexual foibles, anxiety, health problems, and other human
conditions and characteristics that they can exploit.
In addition to the induced dreams and thoughts, the attackers start sentences and then
stop, letting the victim finish those sentences. And they also flash photos before the
victim’s eyes while he is in a dream-like state of consciousness and ask him questions
about those people. I have awoken suddenly to see pictures being passed in rapid
succession before my eyes. Their monitors register the victim’s pulse rate, emotions
(including his sexual inclinations toward other people and his level of anxiety), whether
the victim is telling the truth about questions he is being asked, his dislike of or
fondness for certain people, places, or objects, and many other physical and
psychological reactions. The attackers’ objective is to instill fear and anxiety in the
targets.
(15) Transmit voices into the brain that only the victim can hear. Targets usually
refer to this as voice-to-skull (V2K) and sometimes as subliminal speech, synthetic
48
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
communication, telepathic communication, or microwave hearing. Because of the
importance of the voices in REA, I devote several following sections to that topic.
The Voices
Nobody quite understands how people can be made to hear voices. The device/method
is still a highly classified secret. That subliminal or telepathic (non-auditory)
communication occurs, however, is a proven fact. The U.S. Government has been
interested in that topic since the 1950s. Likewise, the Russians have long been
interested in telepathic communication and have even attempted to train their
astronauts to communicate non-verbally.
Keep in mind that only targets can hear the voices. That is part of the clever scheme to
keep targets from having witnesses and presenting evidence. However, a few targets
have devised ways to record the “silent” voices and turn them into readily heard ones.
One of those targets wrote me that he had succeeded in capturing the voices over a
DVR and then using a program to make the voices clearly audible. I later did just that.
When I first heard the voices in December of 2005, I was driving on the highway. The
radio in the vehicle was turned off, as it normally is when I drive. The voices seemed to
come from near the driver’s side door panel. My first thought was that a device, or a
bug, had been planted in the vehicle and was somehow being used to project the
voices. A sweep of the vehicle by a private detective the following day did not reveal a
bug. Still, it took me a couple of more days to realize that the voices were coming by
remote to or within my body and not from a bug in the vehicle.
The voices circumvent the auditory canal and go directly to the brain. How do I know
that? Pure logic. My tinnitus, or ear ringing, began at the same time as my neurological
torture, so there is a definite connection between the tinnitus and the torture. I wear
hearing aids. Yet, when I use them, the volume of the tinnitus remains constant and
does not increase. If the tinnitus were a function of the ear, it would logically become
louder when I insert the hearing aids.
It took me several years to learn that there are actually three types of voices: (1)
projected voices, which can be projected into the target’s surroundings probably by
using directed sound via satellite; (2) “audible” voices, or those heard in the targets
head or brain (V2K); and (3) “Inaudible” voices, those spoken at so low a volume and in
such a manner that they cannot be picked up by a target’s conscious but are heard by
a target’s subconscious. Discussions of each one of the voices follow.
Projected voices
49
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Ample evidence argues that a microchip is not required for attackers to project the
voices to targets. When Bush the younger attacked Iraq in 2003, the American invaders
used a device on the Iraqi troops known as the Voice of God. The Iraqi soldiers heard
Allah telling them, in Arabic, to throw down their arms and surrender. They did so by
the hundreds. Thus, it is a known fact that the U. S. military has the capability of
projecting to targets voice-to-skull talk. Targets who are able to hear the attackers’
voices recognize that the Voice of God device used on the Iraqis is very similar to the
device used on them. That the voice was used on thousands of Iraqi troops at the same
time means that the device employed can focus on a single individual, as in the case of
targets, or on a crowd of people.
However, the U. S. and its allies fighting in Afghanistan apparently have been unable to
utilize the “voice of god” in that country. Perhaps the Afghans have been advised about
that trickery by Iraqis and other Arabs who have joined them. If the reason is not the
Afghans’ knowledge of that neurological action, the device that produces the “voice of
god” must require some type of special environment. Why does the “voice of god” work
in Iraq when it does not work in Afghanistan? Both countries are arid and neither
country has a well-established electrical/communication system. Could geography play
a role in using the device?
When the “voice of god” was beamed in on the Iraqi soldiers, there were few cell
towers in Iraq to use as relays and also few cell phones, radios, TVs, and other devices
that in vast rural areas could be used as conductors. Moreover, it is highly unlikely that
Iraqi soldiers had been implanted with microchips. Furthermore, the highflying
American aircraft would have been too high to project those voices through
conventional speakers, and the lower-flying attack planes would have been too
occupied and fast- moving to pull off anything like the “voice of god.”
In my opinion, the only answer for the “voice of god” is that it was projected by remote
via a surveillance or spy satellite from a great distance. It is my guess that the voices
originated at the HAARP facility in Alaska or perhaps even at one of the many U. S.
military installations around the globe. That synthetic telepathy was practiced on the
Iraqi troops in 2003 proves that that method had already been tried and tested,
probably on American citizens in America. Distance would not be a factor. That
capability could come from near or far, for example, from Fort Meade, Maryland.
What condition is required for targets to hear the voices? The answer is still highly
classified; however, I suspect that first the target’s immediate surroundings must be
enveloped with an electromagnetic (EM) field. The attackers can undoubtedly either
create an electromagnetic field or use a natural electromagnetic field wherever the
50
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
target goes. To locate and focus upon that particular area would probably also require
the use of the GPS unless the device were used from very near the target. The voices
are projected into that EM field following the device's trajectory, either using the same
device, or perhaps by or with a computer. The voices permeate that entire area. The
target can hear them wherever he is; yet, others cannot. The “Voice of God” messages
beamed in on Iraqi troops suggests that V2K operates separately and perhaps
independently from the remainder of the electronic effects.
Any electrical outlet, appliance, or other source of energy aids the voices by increasing
the volume. However, those sources of energy only enhance the voices to make them
more “audible.” Even if all the electrical and other energy sources are eliminated, the
voices can still be heard, though not as hard and clear.
If this is the method, the question remains unanswered about how a target can hear the
voices when he has other family members and visitors in his presence in that
environment. My attackers use V2K on me while I am working in the yard beside some
other person. The other person, of course, does not hear those sounds. That method
also does not explain how the target can hear the voices wherever he goes, in an
airplane, a vehicle, a cavern, or the inner recesses of a large building. That suggests
some type of embedded object in the target’s body.
The voices that I call “projected voices” occur in a victim’s surroundings. They are
apparently somehow beamed into the ambience. Motors and other devices help
resonate those voices. When I am cutting grass with the tractor in the pasture, the
voices can be heard over the noise of the motor.
I believe that the voices may be piggybacked over the GPS, as the GPS can be used to
track vehicles and also zoom in on houses. The voices that I receive apparently come
from an external source, as they are louder and clearer when I am outside, and I can
also muffle them partially by using earplugs. However, the attackers apparently have to
adjust their device or perform some function with it, for whenever I go into the yard or
the pasture, at first the voices are scarcely telepathically “audible.” Then, after a few
minutes, the voices get increasingly stronger.
I am guessing that the voices are probably projected to the electromagnetic field that
envelops the house and grounds and then find their way inside my house through
various electrical appliances and objects. The voices are definitely louder and clearer
when an electrical heat, a/c unit, refrigerator, or any other electrical appliance is
connected. That would certainly be possible using the GPS, as the perpetrators can
use an architectural program to produce a grid of the inside layout of the house.
51
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
“Audible” Voices
The “audible” voices, or regular V2K, are heard in or near the head, as opposed to the
projected voices, which come from the environment. These voices are those of the
actual attackers using V2K to convince the target that he is crazy, lie about family and
friends, confuse him, and attempt to keep him from engaging in any meaningful
activities. However, those same attackers also play V2K recordings. If the target listens
and takes note, he will learn to distinguish the recordings from the real time voices.
In my case, I have discovered that the V2K voices come through as loud and clear as
voices over the radio or TV; however, the attackers intentionally lower the volume. This
is for psychological effect, as we know that the lower in volume someone speaks to us,
the harder we have to listen. Moreover, the attackers want us to believe that the voices
are coming for a very long distance – and they very well may be. Occasionally,
however, the voices will spike and will sound very loud for a second or two as if the
speakers were standing beside me.
What does it mean that the voices occasionally come through so clearly? I do not yet
know. It could mean that the voices come from very nearby. It may mean that the s inbetween the whispered recordings, making it all sound like real-time whispering.
Therefore, the whispers are a labor-saving tactic on the part of the attackers.
It took me years to form an opinion about the origin of my V2K. If the “Voice of God”
story is true and not disinformation, the military can indeed project voices to targets’
brains or ears, probably the latter. However, in the case of targets who receive both the
electronic effects and the V2K, I believe that the voices come from the same
involuntarily implanted microchip. We know that the attackers use a variety of software
that carries out its functions via the microchip. In my opinion, projecting voices using
software with microchips would be as simple as using the software that produce the
physical and neurological effects. I would guess that the voices probably arrive to the
brain over nerve endings.
Over time, many targets who hear the voices learn that they can also talk back to the
attackers. Finally, the two parties establish a hostile dialogue. Once I found out that I
could also “speak” to the attackers telepathically, I used that two-way avenue to
ridicule, taunt, and demean them. Behind those voices are humans. I determined to
make them feel as bad as they attempted to make me feel.
One day soon the entire secret of the voices will be revealed—the sources, the
locations, the frequencies—and that will in turn reveal the identity of the perpetrators.
52
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
The discovery of the perpetrators will also reveal the software with which they
accomplish the mindreading, the lie detections, the other neurological trickery, and the
physical effects. Once the secret behind the voices has been made public, the whole
apparatus will break down, for the perpetrators cannot perform their dirty work without
the use of the voices.
“Inaudible” Voices
The “inaudible” voices normally are not heard even by those targets who hear the
regular V2K. The inaudible voices can be either real-time whispers, or pre-recordings.
Very often they take the form of loop play tapes to the victim’s subconscious, instead of
to his conscious, telling him what to say and how to act, making deviant sexual
suggestions, and deprecating the victim in many other ways. They also attempt to
program the target by repeating messages. These voices, audible only to a victim’s
subconscious, are used to create schizophrenic and paranoid symptoms in the target.
Attackers using the “silent” voices try to create multiple personalities in the target by
telling him over and over that he is various persons. The target will usually know those
persons whose personalities the attackers attempt to impose in them. The attackers will
also use the audible voices to attempt to create multiple personalities. My V2K
speakers will often say, “He’s something else.” The expression is said in such a way
that it suggests that the victim has done something spectacular. What it really is doing
is suggesting that I am somebody else. The inaudible voices, those not heard
consciously by targets, are far more dangerous than the audible ones.
The device used for mind control on targets imposes thoughts in the minds of those
targets to make them act irrationally. Targets do not at all feel that those thoughts are
irrational or that they are compelled to perform those deeds and acts. The thoughts
appear perfectly natural though often very negative in nature and perhaps aggressive.
Those actions that cause targets to look crazy are a direct result of attackers’
whispering and talking subliminally into the targets subconscious.
Using the inaudible voices, the attackers cause severe anxiety or other nervous
conditions in victims by filling their subconscious full of garbage. This drives many
victims to see a psychiatrist. That is exactly what the attackers want, for after the
victims visit a psychiatrist, their complaints of electronic torture are not credible. After
the targets have seen a psychiatrist, the attackers can then begin their full electronic
assault, knowing that nobody will believe the targets.
All targets of electronic stalking know about the V2K, or the audible voices. However,
they will not be aware of the inaudible ones. I was targeted for years before I
53
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
accidentally discovered the subconscious voices, and I have learned how to pick up
those voices. The attackers do not want that information disseminated, for once targets
learn about the inaudible voices, they cannot be psychologically manipulated and they
can live without fear of the attackers. I have learned to do so. Remember that MIND
CONTROL CANNOT BE ACCOMPLISHED WITHOUT THOSE TWO TYPES OF
VOICES, especially the “inaudible” voice.
The voices represent the master element in mind control. Every target who is
electronically harassed by remote is also subjected to mind control. Mind control is
achieved by voices of the attackers instructing the target’s subconscious and
programming him through suggestions to his brain. The voices can be projected into
both the subconscious as well as the conscious. That is not theory; it is fact. I hear both
of those two types of voices.
Readers who receive electronic and mind control effects, and especially those who can
“hear” the “audible” voices, read the following few paragraphs very carefully. As already
stated, in addition to the “audible” telepathic talking (audible only to the target), mind
control targets should be aware that their attackers also continually speak into their
brains in voices so low in volume that the targets’ consciousness does not pick them
up.
The victim is completely unaware of those “inaudible” voices, which makes them all the
more dangerous. It took me years to “hear” those subconscious voices. Many targets
never hear them. Nevertheless, they are there. The subconscious talking by attackers
makes that capability one of their most formidable weapons in mind control.
Through their sub-conscious talking, the attackers control what you think of and how
you react to people, including your spouse, parents, siblings, and children. They control
how you perform on your job site, how you view your job, and how you interact with
your colleagues. They also control your daily life: what TV programs you watch and
your opinions about them; what newspapers you read and how you interpret that news;
where and how you grocery shop; even when you go to the bathroom and what and
how much you eat. Only those targets who hear the attackers’ voices can know the
extent to which the attackers’ consummate evil influences targets’ thoughts and actions.
I discovered what I call the “inaudible” voices strictly by accident. One night as I lay in
bed, I noticed that whenever my beard stubble brushed against the pillow, causing
friction, I could hear voices in addition to those voices that I already “heard” via the
V2K. I experimented by intentionally brushing the hairs of the beard against my pillow,
and each time the attackers’ voices became more intelligible.
54
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Finally I caught a word and then a phrase. After many attempts, I distinctly heard a
Deep South-sounding voice saying, “You’re horny.” That short sentence was repeated
time after time. Then, I realized that it was not an actual real-time voice but the
recording of a voice over a loop-play tape continually telling my subconscious that I
was horny. As most targets know, the voyeur attackers are fixated on sex. I have no
idea how many years the attackers had pummeled my mind with those loop play tapes
before I discovered their presence.
Over the next few months, I discovered an additional voice being projected into my
subconscious through a similar loop-play tape. That discovery, like the first one, was
also accidental and occurred while in bed. One night when I turned from my back onto
my side, my ear brushed the pillow. In the quietness of the night, the ear brushing the
pillow caused me to hear a human-like sound. After repeatedly brushing the outside of
my ear canal with the palm of my hand, I began to distinguish a word. After performing
that action many times using various strokes and angles, I very clearly heard a voice
repeatedly telling me, “Trust me.” As in the first case, the voice came over a loop play
tape.
A later incident revealed still a third subconscious loop play tape. Here is what
happened. I keep the hairs at the entrance to my ear canal closely clipped. One night
when I scratched my itching ear, my finger touched the clipped hairs, and I caught the
sound of a voice. By repeatedly touching and moving my finger over the clipped hairs, I
could finally make out what the voice was saying. The voice was saying, “You want
me.” Like the other voices, this one also came over a loop play tape.
On the surface, the expression “you want me” appears to be sexual in nature. However,
I later learned that in addition to the sexual connotation, the statement “you want me”
also applies to food, alcohol, tobacco, and other topics. The attackers’ objective was to
cause me to become out of shape and fat. Before discovering the expression “you want
me,” I noticed that when I grocery shopped, I came back home with many sweets and
mainly carbohydrates. After learning the attackers’ intention, I started grocery shopping
more carefully. Many targets tell me that they gain much weight after being targeted.
The reason is that the attackers are urging them through the “inaudible” voices to eat
and drink more than they should and consume high caloric foods.
The loop play tape “you want me” also applies to tobacco products or anything else that
can be harmful to one’s health. I like to smoke an occasional cigar. At one point, I found
myself craving and chain smoking the cigars. Now I know the reason. Whatever the
“you want me” suggests, it will be to the detriment of the target.
55
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Months after discovering the subliminal talking to my subconscious, I again found
another area that revealed the attackers’ voices. This time, I intentionally played with
the beard stubble between my nose and my mouth with my first and second fingers to
see whether that area could detect the voices. Gradually, the friction from rubbing the
stubble produced sounds. By repeatedly massaging that area, the sound took shape. A
voice on a loop play tape repeated, “I hate you.”
On still another occasion, I discovered the voices as I scrambled eggs in a teflon skillet
and stirred them with a regular metallic spoon. The bottom of the skillet had concentric,
slightly ridged circles in the bottom. As I scraped the bottom of the skillet with the metal
spoon, I heard voices. By moving the spoon across the skillet over and over, I could
finally determine what the voices were saying: “Slow it down,” which is a code
expression whose meaning I do not yet know. Another voice was repeating “black on
white.” That may have been an attempt to make my subconscious believe that blacks
were behind my REA activities. Both expressions came over loop play tapes.
I also found that I often heard their voices when I slid a hard object over another hard
object, like a china cup over a ceramic counter top, creating friction. Even when I
exercise on my weight machine, I hear words coming from the friction caused by the
pulleys. I also hear the “hidden” voices whenever I rub my hand over my pillow at night
while my ear in on the pillow. The friction apparently picks up the subconscious voices
and makes them “audible,” much like an old phonograph needle on a record.
The attackers occasionally change the wordings of the loop play tapes. The only loop
play tapes to my subconscious that have remained unchanged are the ones saying,
“You’re horny” and “You want me.” Those tapes play continually 24/7. The loop play
tapes try to program a target without his knowledge. For some time, the attackers have
played loop play tapes in an attempt to create multiple personalities, an old MKUltra
objective, telling me that “You’re Joe” or “You’re Ted.” In every case, I know the
persons whose names the attackers are using to try to form multiple personalities. I let
the attackers know that I am aware of their objective by replying, “No, you bastards, I’m
His Majesty the Most Worshipful Max Harrison Williams the Magnificent. Always have
been, am now, and always will be.”
Over time, I discovered that dozens, perhaps scores of synthetic voices bearing short
messages continually hammer my brain in the form of loop play tapes. The attackers
are obviously attempting to befuddle my mind with the many simultaneous tapes. They
are also trying to program me into associating sex with the names of family members
and friends of both genders, including my son and my little granddaughter, as they
attempt to cause erections when they call those names. That action is obviously
intended to cause me to avoid those people, thus isolating me from my support group. I
56
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
tell the attackers contemptuously, “There’s no association, morons!” But such is the evil
and perverse nature of the monsters who serve as attackers.
That the attackers can aim so many loop-playing tapes at my brain simultaneously
indicates the sophistication of the methods used in mind control. This implies that the
main handler operates a very good computer. Without a computer, mind control could
not be achieved.
I urge mind control targets to test themselves to find out whether they are being
influenced by the inaudible voices. One way is to experiment with your ears. Place the
palm of your dominant hand (that will usually be the right hand) over your ear with the
large part of your palm well below your ear. Then, while pressing on your ear, swipe
your palm upward a few inches. Do this repeatedly, experimenting with the pressure of
your hand on your ear and the position of your hand. At first, you will pick up only an
unintelligible “sssssh” sound. However, by repeating the process many times and
listening very closely, you will begin to distinguish words. The words will consist of a
phrase or short sentence, which is repeated over an unending loop play tape. You can
hear the words in either ear.
How the Inaudible Voices Are Used
The inaudible, or subconscious, voices take many forms, and their uses are almost
limitless. Here are some of them.
-- Giving victims negative commands. Their commands are often very subtle, for
example: “If I were you, I’d . . . ; I think that you should . . . .; and Why don’t you . . . .” In
addition to the commands, the attackers, by employing the inaudible whispers, cause
victims to misplace items, blank out names, dates and events, make errors while
calculating and writing, say things out of context while talking with others, and act in
strange ways that are completely alien to their usual demeanor and behavior. They
also employ the inaudible voices to cause, for example, a targeted driver to take the
wrong highway exit when he knows very well the location of the correct exit.
The perpetrators also attempt to ruin the health and looks of targets by encouraging
binge eating. They whisper to victims that they are voraciously hungry or that they
should eat more sweets than usual. Their aim is to get the target hopelessly out of
shape and debilitated. Their whispered commands are often sinister, causing targets to
harm themselves. Some targets have actually committed suicide as a result of
suggestions by the attackers and holographic images to that effect.
57
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
The power of suggestion to the brain’s subconscious is truly amazing. The attackers
condition targets for mind control by inducing “dreams” in which the victims plays out
whatever role the attackers assign him. On one occasion while I slept, the attackers
caused me to believe that I was an elderly Confederate veteran of the Civil War
reminiscing about his experiences in the battle of Gettysburg. I was telling about my
horse being shot and going down, about my being wounded, and about seeing
comrades blown to bits with cannon balls. I woke from the “dream” with real tears in my
eyes.
Attackers use known traits of victims in issuing their commands. For example, I am a
strong believer in politeness, and I try to instill that quality in my grandchildren. Thus,
knowing that, the attackers preface their commands with “please.” Thus, instead of
simply saying, “go to sleep,” they will say, “Please go to sleep.” Or they often say, “I’d
appreciate it if . . . .”
-- Making statements about the victims’ family members and friends intended to cause
estrangement of relations between them and the victims and thus isolate the victim. In
my case, the attackers continually mention my son, to whom I am very close, and my
two sisters, always while attempting to cause an involuntary erection. Such is the evil
nature of the REA assailants. I telepathically tell the attackers that they cannot damage
my relationship with my son, that my love for him and his family is undying, eternal, and
unconditional. Despite that, they continue to attempt to cause me to think of them in a
different manner and instill guilt in me.
Usually family members believe that a target is delusional. If they do believe that their
relative is being harassed, they are placed in a very difficult position. If they support the
target, they perhaps put themselves and their family in danger of also being attacked. If
they do not support the loved one, they are effectively isolating that individual from his
family support system on which people have always relied.
Many of the targets are parents and grandparents. If they are ostracized, they must live
without the emotional support of their family members. Moreover, their grandchildren
must grow up without seeing and interacting with their grandparents. It is a no-win
situation for the target and his family members. I know a target who has not seen either
one of her two children or her several grandchildren in over a decade.
-- Causing victims to think in negative terms about almost everybody and everything.
Their device(s) cause absurd thoughts in victims. For example, I have an elderly first
cousin whom I like but to whom I am not particularly close. We rarely visit. Yet, one day
while thinking about calling her, the thought of being an heir of hers surged into my
mind. My cousin has three children, several grandchildren, and even great58
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
grandchildren. That negativity colors many of my normal thoughts. Their software also
causes me to hear negative and suggestive words in place of ordinary words when I
watch TV or listen to the radio.
-- Blanking out certain thoughts. The attackers’ whispering can not only cause targets
to think about the topics that they project into targets’ minds but also cause targets to
fail to think about important matters. The attackers delight in making targets forget
appointments with people, leave items behind that they intended to take with them, and
forget where they place common household items. The attackers also apparently enjoy
causing targets to remember people whose names the attackers have blanked out of
the targets’ minds. After the target tries hard for several minutes to remember the
name, the attackers will suddenly allow the target to remember that name. This creates
a psychological dependency on the attackers for information.
-- Making threats. My attackers have often told me that they were going to burn down
my house. On other occasions, they have told me that they were going to cause my son
accidents, going to send “the death squad,” and going to cause renal failure. I simply
laugh at them.
-- Introducing deviant sexual ideas and feelings that victims would dismiss and reject if
they were conscious of them. The attackers continually emphasize incest, necrophilia,
and other sordid sexual acts in their talking. I cared for my bedridden mother for eight
months before she died; on one occasion, the psychopaths who attempt to control my
mind showed me a holographic picture of my climbing into bed with her just after she
died. The evil and sickness of the attackers is sometimes unbelievable.
-- Creating in victims a lack of confidence in themselves by disparaging their
capabilities and accentuating their faults. Whenever I work on home improvement
projects or assemble items, the attackers ridicule, taunt, and curse during the efforts,
telling me that I’m doing it wrong. Indeed, they do their best through their voices to my
brain to cause me to make errors. Knowing that and hearing their constant voices, I am
very careful in what I do. Although they do sometimes cause me to make errors, they
cannot stop me from starting and finishing projects--successfully.
-- Sending victims on wild goose chases and believing things that are not true. This has
happened to me on various occasions. Once, for example, the attackers sent telepathic
thoughts about the owner of a defunct radio station in another city that I suspected may
have been a clandestine site of the local operations center, and I actually went and
located his house. On another occasion they convinced me that surveillance bugs were
hidden throughout my house, and I took screws out of receptacles and other items. On
still another occasion, they convinced me that I had psychic powers that allowed me to
59
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
determine the locations of implanted devices on other targets. I even informed some of
those targets where their devices were located. I later learned that the attackers amuse
themselves by causing targets to believe that they possess special powers.
They also made me believe that my nephew’s business computer had been hacked to
obtain his business transactions and accounts and that one of his employees was
responsible. I even told my nephew about it, which made him question my sanity. In
addition, they caused me to believe that a particular local Pentecostal church was
responsible for the electronic and mind control activities employed against me. The
attackers even provided a fake name of the minister of that church. On another
occasion, they provided me the name of an FBI agent in Houston, a fake one, of
course, with whom I was supposed to get in touch. I attempted to enlist the help of still
another nephew who lives in Houston in getting in touch with that agent. After having
contacted the nephew, I realized that it was a ruse. The damage that they sought,
however, had already been done, for that nephew was sure that I was losing it.
The attackers still attempt to delude me. However, experience is very valuable. I now
know to question whatever thought comes to mind. In traveling, I must be very careful,
for the attackers will cause me to make errors in driving, for example, turning at the
wrong exit or missing an exit ramp. At home while carpentering, I measure twice and
concentrate on remembering the number, as the attackers will introduce a different
number in my mind.
-- Convincing the target that he is crazy. One of the aims of the handler sociopaths is to
cause the target to think that he is losing his mind. My attackers very often remark
subliminally, “He’s crazy.” I tell the attackers who monitor me that if I am crazy
everybody should be crazy, for I am very content with my life. On the other hand, I tell
them that they endure a “shitty” existence.
-- Inducing anxiety. (More about anxiety later.)
-- Extracting information. By asking questions with their whispers, the attackers can
learn information not only about the target but also about his relatives and friends. For
example, whenever the target thinks of a person, he will usually first think his given
name. Let us say that the person who comes to the target’s mind is named Joe. All the
attackers have to do is ask to the target’s subconscious, “Joe who?” The target then
tells the attackers Joe’s surname. I have attempted to resist telling the attackers
surnames; yet, there is something in the human brain that makes him think of the last
name whenever someone asks “Who?” The attackers’ computer also has a lie detector
program as well as a program that compels the speaker to tell the truth when he is
asked a question, a type of mechanical “truth serum.” The attackers, of course, know
60
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
that and use it to their advantage in obtaining information about many people whom the
target knows.
Although the attackers know your social security, credit card, and driver license
numbers, your email passwords, and your checking and savings account numbers, they
will normally not use that information for criminal purposes. They have strict orders
from the powerbrokers not to do anything that can be traced. Thus, the attackers are
not swindlers and con-guys though they may try to convince the target that they are. My
attackers often suggest that for a certain sum of money, they will let off. That is pure
deception. I answer them by saying, “Let off? I’m not about to let YOU bastards off the
hook!”
-- Getting the target to trust them. That was borne out in the subconscious voices that I
discovered, saying continually through the loop play tape, “Trust me.” My attackers also
continually tell me in the “audible” subliminal talking to trust them. I laugh at them and
ridicule them for thinking that I might ever possibly trust them. Trust psychopathic
criminals? Never.
-- Causing targets to see holographic images. Most targets who receive the voices also
complain that they see horrible holographic depictions. The attackers also used that
conditioning technique on me, causing me to see my son drowning and other
heartrending scenes. I marveled at the ability of the attackers to project holographic
pictures to my brain until I learned their secret. I later learned by holographic images
derive from the attackers’ subconscious telling the target what is happening. The target
then draws upon his knowledge and experience to embellish and visualize that
occurrence, creating the holographic images. In other words, the holographic images
stem from a target’s own brain.
One night as I prayed to The Great Spirit, images of Jesus (as seen in depictions of
that person) popped into my mind. As soon as they appeared, I wiped them out by
superimposing a smiley face over the image. Then, I heard the Shitface voice
whispering, “Jesus, Jesus . . . .” At last, now I know how the holographic images are
projected into the brain: the attackers whisper what they want you to see and tell you to
view them. The target actually manufactures his own holographic images. Here is how
it works.
The attackers describe what is happening. The target’s subconscious listens to the
attackers’ descriptions, and it conjures up a mental picture that fantasizes whatever
subject the attackers want the target to see. In my case, when the attackers whispered
“Jesus,” my brain went back to my youth, when I used to see pictures in Protestant
churches of what Christians imagined was the man called Jesus. It was a picture of a
61
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
bearded man in a purple robe kneeling with an aura of light around his head. When
attackers induce a holographic image, the target’s mind goes back to movies he has
seen, childhood impressions, things that he has heard, and real life experiences to
build that holographic image that the attackers want him to see. Now, whenever the
attackers attempt to project a holographic image into my mind, I simply say, either
subliminally or aloud, “That’s bullshit.” The image immediately dissipates, as it cannot
exist if a target closes his mind to it.
Attackers use the subconscious voices on the target long before they start employing
their electronic torture tricks on him. After mining the target’s memories and thoughts
and gathering information from all other sources, they use the voices to convince the
target that he is crazy. The target is supposed to (1) commit suicide, (2) seek out a
psychiatrist, or (3) act or say something that will allow authorities to make him get a
psychological evaluation. All three actions neutralize the target: The first action
physically eliminates the target; the second two actions destroy the target’s credibility.
However, knowing is conquering. After I had been made to look ridiculous several times
by my attackers, I learned to discipline my mind from falling for the attackers’
subconscious commands. I am now very careful about what I do and how I go about it.
The attackers also used to delight in making me forget to take items with me when I left
the house and forget where I had placed other items. I used to sometimes lock my keys
in the vehicle. Now I make a concentrated effort to ensure that when I leave the house I
have everything I intended to take with me. I also now rarely misplace items in the
house because I am much more alert. My memory has actually improved.
Before I discovered the hidden voices, I suffered a bout of extreme anxiety attacks,
underwent two painful prostate procedures, and made many judgment errors. Now that
I know the cause of those situations, they will never happen again. Let me repeat that
targets who get the electronic harassment also get the voices. Although you may not
hear the voices, know that they are being projected into your subconscious. The
subliminal loop play tapes leave no doubt at all in my mind that psychiatrists and
psychologists played a major role in developing the protocol for the mind control
element of REA. Psychologists probably even serve as attackers in some cases and
advisors in others.
Tactics Using the Voices
The attackers will oftentimes disguise their voices. The attackers who attempt to
manipulate me now use three human voices, and one voice in particular, 24/7.
Simulations can easily be made by computer programs that are readily available in any
62
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
computer store. Various attackers will alternate using the same several simulated
voices. Moreover, using their specialized software, they can mimic regional accents in
a very authentic manner.
The attackers can also clone the voices of people to use for their own purposes. They
usually clone the voice of the victim and use that voice on the target himself. That is
purposeful. Remember that psychiatrists and psychologists designed the attackers’
software. The designers knew that a target would be more comfortable and would
relate more easily to a person using the same accent and the same type voice. It is
also a taunting mockery of the target.
Monitoring a target requires constant vigilance and alertness, meaning that the
attackers cannot perform longer than three or four hours at a time. That suggests that
in most cases the attackers must work in shifts, each shift using the same voices. The
objective of using the same voices on each shift is to make the target think that the
same three or four voices that he hears are monitoring him twenty-four hours a day.
The attackers use simulations of voices not only to deceive the target into thinking that
many people are continually monitoring him but they also disguise their voices to keep
targets from possibly identifying them. Moreover, using the same voices allows the
attackers to employ many pre-recorded materials, recorded in the same voices.
The attackers must follow a very detailed training manual. Probably ninety per cent of
that manual is pure psychology. At first, the attackers normally use the voices only to
depreciate the victims with ugly names and talking, and then they gradually begin to
talk directly to the victim. In my case, there are three principal voices as well as a faroff, shrill-sounding voice that sounds like a female shouting. All of that is deception.
The shrill far-sounding voice is synthesized to sound shrill and distant, and one single
person can use all three voices. In addition, several attackers rotate in shifts, using the
same three voices. Moreover, males can assume female voices and vice versa. The
attackers can also hit certain keys on their computer to repeat often-used phrases and
sentences and to start loop play tapes.
The attackers can program certain actions to take place at certain times. Voices with
particular messages are played to the target’s subconscious as he sleeps. They can
also program their device to send jolts to targets whenever those targets are immobile
for longer than, say, ten minutes, and they can program the hours at which targets will
receive the jolts and vibrations and the circumstances under which they receive them.
They can perhaps even pre-determine the strength of those vibrations, based upon the
targets’ thoughts.
63
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Even much of the subliminal talking of the attackers is automated. Many of the
subliminal voices that targets hear are pre-recorded and played back either continually
or at programmed times. The automation allows the attackers freedom of movement
and limits the manpower required for monitoring targets. With automation, one single
handler can efficiently monitor a target for many hours at a time. It is also highly
probable that the attackers have a handheld device that allows them to perform their
tricks while on the go.
From the outset, the attackers will attempt to make the victims believe that their
targeting must be their fault, and they will attempt to fill the victims with guilt. Nothing
could be farther from the truth. There is a court system set up to handle crime, and it
has functioned for millennia. Victims must always keep in mind that the attackers are
the criminals, not the victims.
The attackers seek to establish a personal type of relationship with the target. That
does not mean that the relationship is amicable. What the attackers want targets to
think is that the attackers know them and have known them for years. That is an
important psychological point for the attackers as they ply their neurological software,
including the voices. My attackers often tell me that they went to school with me.
Although they most certainly did not go to school with me, that ties them to me
psychologically from an early age.
Using the V2K, the attackers capitalize on the simplest actions of the target. For
example, if a target has the natural thought of hanging up his coat and start to do so,
the attackers will order him to hang up his coat. Thus, the target appears to respond to
the command by the attackers. That is a ploy on the part of the attackers to establish a
dependence of the target on their orders and instructions, thus re-enforcing mind
control.
The attackers constantly repeat certain phrases to the target and make suggestions to
him, oftentimes of a sexual nature. As they make those suggestions, they mention
names of family members and friends of the target. After hearing those suggestions day
after day, finally, the target expects to hear those phrases and expects to hear the
innuendos. The next step is for the target to start relating to those suggestions and
believing them. That is psychological conditioning or sensitizing. I believe that many of
the aberrant acts that we see in the media stem from subliminal suggestions that
perpetrators of REA make to targets, most of whom do not know that they are targeted.
Attackers will also introduce into the target’s mind a list of words that are supposed to
instill guilt, shock, doubt, and shame into the target’s thoughts. The target is instructed
64
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
subliminally that when he hears words on TV, the radio, and in person that sound
similar to those imposed upon his mind by the attackers, he will instead hear the latter.
It took me a long time to figure out what was happening. Afterward, it didn’t matter what
words I heard.
Many targets believe that the perpetrators of the REA also have the ability to
communicate with third persons, or persons who ordinarily might interact on a daily
basis with the target. They believe that persons are instructed subliminally to say
certain things and use certain words that cause the target to believe that they are
accomplices out to do the target harm. This is called “directed conversation.” Those
third parties are not aware of their brain manipulation. Unlike willing and paid
accomplices, those third parties unknowingly do the attackers’ evil work. I still have not
decided whether or not this is accurate. I tend to think that because victims’ brains are
being manipulated, they also believe that others in their surroundings can be
manipulated by the attackers.
A few years ago, the attackers started repeating my thoughts back to me (2008). There
are several possible explanations for the attackers’ doing that: (1) They are recording
those thoughts on a digital voice recorder, which they probably forward to another
location. (2) They are repeating the thoughts to others either present or also monitoring
me by phone who cannot hear those thoughts. The thoughts are probably picked up
over earphones attached to the computer. Perhaps only one person can listen at a
time; thus, they repeat the thoughts to others. (3) They simply seek to annoy me and
continually remind me of their capability of hearing my thoughts. (4) The continual
repetitions heighten anxiety. The objective may be a combination of all of those
possible scenarios.
As the target forms thoughts in his mind, the attackers’ computer apparently provides
the attackers dates, biographical facts, and other information to add to and embellish
the target’s thoughts. The purpose of this is to intimidate the target into believing that
the attackers are all-knowing. The attackers, in fact, often blank out data in the target’s
mind so that they can supply the information to him. That action seeks to establish a
target's dependence on his attackers. The attackers include all professions and
occupations. For example, if the target is a carpenter, one of the attackers on every
shift will be very knowledgeable of carpentry.
Very curiously, the attackers use many odd means to project their voices. When I
shower, the attackers cause voices to come over the falling water. The second I turn off
the water, the voices stop. The voices obviously are not actually in the water. The water
only provides an energy source, which picks up the loop play tapes and other
recordings from that area that are playing at the time. Once again, that hints at directed
65
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
sound. They can even cause my stomach to “growl” and inject words and phrases into
the resulting growling sound. Sometimes when I push or pull an object and friction
occurs, I can hear the attackers’ voices. I gradually learned that the voices are also
recorded on loop play tapes and played continually to my subconscious, constantly reenforcing the attackers’ objectives.
In the case of the stomach’s growling, I used to think that the attackers projected their
voices into my stomach. However, I later decided that the many voices and recordings
of voices instead are projected into the electromagnetism that surrounds my house and
surroundings. When the attackers cause my stomach to growl, either the noise or the
friction picks up the voices. I may be wrong. The attackers can also inject their real-time
voices into the growling. The same case applies to running water and the various
appliances. The attackers know that those sounds pick up the frequencies with the
voices.
The attackers may also know several major languages. If not, their computer software
can interpret those languages. That type software has been available for years and is
in fact used to make actors in movies appear to be speaking different languages from
the original ones used in making the films. Latinos, Afro-Americans, and East Indians
have physically cooperated with the attackers in harassing me at various times;
however, they were probably simply accomplices and not a part of the REA teams.
One night I woke suddenly to hear the voice of a young-sounding, male East Indian
saying to me, “(A name) is in the bathroom vomiting.” The name was my oldest and
best friend, who was in his last battle against stomach cancer. The attackers had been
trying for some time to create multiple personalities in me using the names of friends
and relatives, including that particular friend.
The voice of the East Indian was a real-time voice, and the speaker obviously did not
realize that I had awoken. I have East Indian friends and have traveled in India; thus, I
instantly recognized the unusual pronunciation of English by the East Indian.
Accidentally hearing that sentence by the East Indian causes me to think that perhaps
the powerbrokers who mastermind the electronic stalking and mind control projects may
outsource some of their targeting. My microchip may even have been manufactured in
India although it is more likely that it was manufactured in Israel.
The attackers can also simulate the projection of voices. Once a worker was repairing
the roof of an adjacent building, and I heard him talking about me. However, strangely
nobody else was near him. I later discovered that the attackers can use a target’s V2K
to make him think that voices also come from outside his body. They can manipulate
66
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
the V2K for it to sound as if it is coming from afar. That is pure deception. It is done with
their software via the method used for V2K.
As in the case of the electronic torture, the voices will follow the target wherever he
goes. That suggests that satellites may somehow be used to project the voices. In a
2003 article named “Shocking Menace of Satellite Surveillance,” author John Fleming
writes that satellites are employed for “manipulating a person's mind with an audio
subliminal ‘message’ (a sound too low for the ear to consciously detect but which
affects the unconscious). In trying thereby to get a person to do what you want him to
do, it does not matter if the target is asleep or awake.”
At least one target with whom I have communicated believes that targeting is now an
industry. The crime world has somehow obtained the secret of targeting, and they hire
out those services. I do not believe that is the case, for if it were, the FBI would not
hesitate in looking for the criminals.
It is my understanding that satellite use, except for the GPS, requires knowledge of the
nomenclature of the satellite and its codes/signals. If that is true, individuals and
renegade groups would not be able to make use of them – unless they were provided
the codes/signals. If satellites are not used, then some other wide-ranging object such
as radio towers and cell phones may very likely provide the constant contact required
for conveying the electronic effects and the voices, i.e., mind control.
Targets often debate whether their electronic torture and mind control is conducted via
satellite or by local assailants. The answer is probably both. One group of assailants
probably “hooks” the targets in some yet unknown manner and then uses a satellite to
turn them over to local attackers. A field of electromagnetism around the target may be
necessary to relay the electronic effects and V2K. I get the V2K continually 24/7, with
only very short intermittent periods of quiet. For a long time, I have thought that the
electronic effects and voices were projected by satellite. However, I acknowledge that
they could also come from a local source, perhaps through directed sound
Targets who hear the voices know that the voices can also be projected over
household motors such as air conditioner/heating units, space heaters, and even grass
cutters or tractors used outside. Motors create motion, and the motion in turn causes
vibrations, or frequencies. Even the sound and motion of running water, as in a shower,
creates frequencies. I believe that the attackers’ voices are projected into a field of
electromagnetism that surrounds a target and the voices then find an outlet in anything
that produces a vibration, or a frequency, including our brain.
67
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Even the sound and vibration of a target’s breathing provide frequencies that may allow
the reception of the voices. If I am correct, (a) the voices come over a field of
electromagnetism that blankets one’s domicile and surroundings rather than focusing
directly on a target’s skull and (b) the directed voices require some object or substance
in the target’s body to allow him to hear the voices; otherwise, anybody near him could
hear the same voices.
The voices are crucial to mind control. Mind control cannot be carried out without them.
In using the voices, the attackers seek several objectives: (1) Make the target doubt his
sanity. (2) Cause the target not to be able to distinguish his own thoughts from the
thoughts sent to him by the subliminal voices. The thoughts inserted and injected into
the target‘s mind through the subliminal voices mingle with the target’s own thoughts.
The brain cannot readily separate the natural thoughts from the inserted thoughts. This,
of course, influences the target’s actions immensely. Those actions are normally
negative and adversely affect his well being.
(3) Distract the target. By constantly filling his mind with ugly, directed, and oftentimes
meaningless garbage, the attackers confuse the target’s mind. That makes him very
vulnerable to mind control actions. The attackers do not have to be skillful
psychologists to do this. Most of the content injected is crude and extraneous. (4)
Cause the target to hear words and phrases intentionally programmed for him to hear
while watching TV and listening to normal conversation. Usually those words and
phrases that he is programmed to hear will be either very negative thoughts,
suggestions of suicide, or nasty sexual suggestions. He is led to believe that they are
his own thoughts although they are not; thus, this is similar to Number 2 above.
For those targets who receive the voices, your attackers will attempt to appear helpful
and make you believe that what they are telling you is for your own good and that you
will be better off if you follow their advice. Nothing could be farther from the truth. What
they are trying to do is gain your confidence to get you accustomed to following their
orders. The attackers are not there to do you good but to do you harm!
The creation of multiple personalities is not just a meaningless, fun exercise for the
attackers; indeed, it has a very real objective. The target’s additional personalities are
not random identities but those of other people whom the targets know. The reasoning
is that the target and his other personalities might share some of the same
characteristics, thoughts, and ideas. The creation of multiple personalities was one of
the objectives of the CIA-sponsored MKULTRA Project.
Codes in V2K
68
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
In “talking” to the victim’s brain, the attackers use code words and expressions. Many of
the codes are embedded in their statements and not readily recognized as code; others
are very obviously code. Regardless of how the codes are stated, they signal to the
target’s brain certain reactions that the attackers expect of him. That suggests that the
target was hypnotized at some point. If a victim notices the context, or situation, in
which the attackers use the codes and his mind responds to their codes, it is not
difficult to figure out the meaning of most of those codes. The target must have been
previously hypnotized; otherwise, the codes would be meaningless to him and he would
not respond.
Early in my targeting, a voice seemed to be instructing the other attackers on some
facet of mind control. That voice said to the others (paraphrased), “First you start out in
a simple manner, asking the target ‘How old are you?’” I gradually learned that that was
not at all an instructor teaching other attackers mind control techniques but instead a
code that opened my mind to the attackers’ use of age progression in plying me with
questions concerning various phases of my life. I have awoken many times to hear a
handler telling me that I was a certain age and asking me questions. The attackers can
also make the target focus on time periods in the lives of other family members and
friends.
The codes that the attackers use are used for particular mind control objectives. For
example, in my case: “I scream,” or “ice cream,” both pronounced the same, instills
anxiety. I was supposed to think that the code was ice cream; however, I later deduced
the real meaning: “I scream,” designed to induce anxiety. The code “come in,” spoken
as if they were inviting someone into their home, opens up the victim’s mind to
questioning; The expression “beats the shit out of me” makes the victim feel an urge to
defecate; and “I see you” and “I hear you” prepare the victim psychologically for brain
“mining” by the attackers. “Go git ‘im” causes an involuntary erection. All attackers may
have their own codes.
The code words and expressions used by the attackers strongly hint that the attackers
employ hypnotic pre-suggestions to trigger thoughts and actions in targets. The codes
consist of proper names, place names, objects, phrases, and sentences. Several times
I have awoken suddenly during the night, when the attackers have not yet realized that
I was awake, to hear very weird music and the drone of a kind of singing, or chanting,
using particular words. On one occasion, a male was chanting, and I heard the word
“vibrate” or “vibration” and my code name “Estados Unidos.”
Other Uses of the Voices
69
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
The REA assailants are also able to project voices and other sounds through objects
near the victim, i.e., the TV, a PC, and other electrical devices and even into the open
air near him. Their sounds can take the form of knocking on the walls, wind and rain,
dogs barking, falling stacks of lumber, and birds cooing or singing. Some of those
sounds might be heard by others if they were present; however, the stalkers are careful
not to make the noises if there are visitors. I live alone, as many victims do, and my dog
often barks at some of the noises that the stalkers project into the yard and pasture.
One can buy computer programs that make those same sounds.
The stalkers can send their voices through a radio, even when the radio is turned off.
They can also make you think that people at nearby tables in restaurants and other
public places are talking about you by projecting voices into your ears/brain that seem
to come from their direction. (Directed sound again?) In applying their evil, the
electronic stalkers make use of equipment that changes their voices to hide their
identity. Voice changing programs are readily available on the internet for purchase.
They can also duplicate the voices of people with whom you often talk.
The attackers also bombard your brain with loop play tapes using words that they want
you to hear on TV and radio. Probably through hypnosis, the attackers instruct the
targets that they will hear those words whenever the syntax, syllables, prefixes and
suffixes in the language used on TV and radio sound similar to the loop play words. I
discovered that while watching TV. The speakers were saying words that I knew had no
relation to their subject matter. It took over a year to figure out that the attackers were,
in effect, substituting their words for words used by the speakers.
The attackers’ voices have also programmed me to reverse many of the letters in words
that I type, for example, placing a particular vowel before a particular consonant or vice
versa. I used to type accurately. Now I have to be very careful in typing and then go
back and review what I have written before sending anything by email. Usually simple
words like “about” become “aobut.”
V2K Can Be Recorded
Several targets have succeeded in recording their attackers’ V2K. I am one of those
who have done so. Let me hasten to mention that I did not initiate that action, for I am
not at all technically inclined. Here is what happened.
A target with whom I corresponded first told me about capturing the sounds of his
attackers. He explained that he had bought a small digital voice recorder, had recorded
the ambience around him, and then had used a program called Audacity to enhance
70
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
any sounds that the recordings might have picked up. He was astounded to hear
words, phrases, and expressions spoken by his attackers.
I followed his advice and his instructions, first buying a small Olympus DVR. In a
location far from appliances and other distractions, I recorded the silence around me.
Then, I sent the recordings by computer to my target friend, as my attackers had muted
the volume on my PC and I had not yet gotten a technician to correct it. The other
target listened to my tapes and heard many distinguishable words. Some of the words
and phrases that he heard on my recordings were instantly meaningful to me; others
had little significance to my knowledge to the targeting.
The other target had sent his recordings to a nationally renown sound expert, who had
verified the findings of my target friend. At his suggestion, I also sent my recordings to
that same technician. Three paragraphs of the technician’s report follow.
them.
Dr. Max H. Williams states that he has been a victim of remote-delivered electronic physical and
neurological attacks by unknown parties using unknown devices since no later than summer of
2005. In December, 2005, he began to hear voices that were not his. Others around him could
not, however, hear those voices. Advised by another victim that there was a method to record
the voices, Dr. Williams decided to make that effort. In January, 2011, Dr. Williams bought an
Olympus digital voice recorder and recorded the ambience around him to determine whether he
might be able to pick up the voices. He contacted me on February 1st, 2011 and asked if I would
listen to fourteen sample recordings of various lengths, taken at various times, and analyze
I decided to take his case.
. . . I went into the audio structure a bit deeper and found amazing vocal patterns that I have
only heard on two other cases in my ten years of experience. The actual Hz (Hertz) levels
contained in one of his files were of a paranormal nature in that they were not of the normal
sample rate pattern of Dr. Williams’s recording device. Those frequencies found were, in my
opinion, of a man-made or unknown origin.
The actual frequency numbers and settings were, in fact, in my opinion, deliberate to Dr.
Williams. I was able to isolate the following frequencies in the area surrounding Dr. Williams:
The right channel frequency is 1429.32 Hz and the left channel is 1438.36 Hz. The actual
location
of the transmissions is unknown, but I believe that they may be very close to his vicinity.
In
analyzing the recordings, I discovered one dominate male voice captured at a decibel level of
46.7 and was able to amplify this voice to an understandable level. Although I could not clearly
hear the entire statement of this male voice, I was able to hear certain words. The actual voice
message that I heard is quite clear and appears to be giving Mr. Williams some kind of
instruction.
That technician is costly to hire. Short of that part of the recording process, the cost is
not great. My small digital tape recorder that the other target recommended cost a little
71
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
over a hundred dollars at Best Buy. The Audacity program can be downloaded free of
charge. If it is no longer free, it will not be expensive.
What is it worth to capture the voices of your attackers? I cannot say. However, now I
have a statement from a recognized audio expert certifying that there are indeed voices
in my surroundings, which means that I am not delusional. The certification may also
be of some value should the local or other authorities ever attempt to force me to
undergo psychiatric treatment. Even if a target cannot afford the assistance of a
technician, he can study and analyze his own recordings. In so doing, he may hear
some subliminal communication from his attackers that might prove meaningful in
determining the identity of his assailants.
Summation of Capabilities
Of those fifteen capabilities discussed above, Number 14, mind reading, and Number
15, voices, loom above the others in conquering the victim’s mind and spirit. In fact,
hearing voices and having minds read sound so incredible that most victims do not talk
about their experiences. Those who do so are usually believed to be delusional. After
all, if one hears voices and believes that people can read his thoughts, he must be
crazy. And that is exactly what psychiatrists tell victims, that they suffer from dementia
or paranoia-schizophrenia.
Several targets with whom I have corresponded claim that their attackers can inject
mind-altering and body-function drugs into their bodies. While that may be possible, it
presupposes that those drugs have already been deposited somewhere in their bodies
and poised for release at some point. That probably can actually be done. However, I
suspect that the targets’ attackers deceive them into believing that those drugs are
being administered by playing with their minds. Again, post-hypnotic suggestions may
figure in that belief.
I consider myself very fortunate to know that I am targeted and to be able to hear both
the audible and the inaudible voices. Once a target realizes that he is targeted, he can
counter many of the attackers’ induced actions and symptoms. It is far better for a
victim to know that he is targeted than for him to suffer strange symptoms and act in a
bizarre manner that causes him and others to question his sanity without knowing the
reason.
Remote-Induced Ailments and Conditions
72
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Through the use of unknown and unseen instruments employed by remote and also the
use of neurological assault, conducted mainly with the voices, the attackers can induce
a variety of ailments, diseases, and conditions in targets. Many of the symptoms of
electronic stalking and mind control have already been listed. Some of the induced
effects are physical and can either be visibly seen, detected by medical instruments, or
measured. Other effects are purely psychological and cannot be detected. Several
conditions have both physical and psychological origins. I discuss below some of those
handler-induced effects under three headings: (1) physical, (2) psychological, and (3) a
combination of both physical and psychological.
Physical
Using unknown and unseen instruments by remote, the attackers can slowly debilitate
a target physically. One of their instruments acts as a type of “laser.” By continually
lasering certain parts and organs of the target’s body, the attackers can induce various
kinds of cancer, including pancreatic, lung, and skin cancer. The tactic involves
repeated assault so that the cells do not have time to repair themselves, thus causing
cancer.
The attackers induced basal cell carcinoma on my right nostril in that manner. Night
after night after I retired and lay still in bed, I felt a laser-like beam passing over my
face. The laser felt like it was perhaps a quarter of an inch in diameter. After exploring
my face for a while, it would focus on my right nostril and remain there for several
seconds. Sometimes I felt a pin prick sensation when it focused on that spot.
After feeling the laser on my nostril for several months, a small mole-like knot
somewhat darker in color than the remaining skin appeared there. I knew of course that
the attackers had caused the small knot. I visited a dermatologist to see if my
suspicions were correct. Surely enough, a biopsy found that the spot was cancerous. In
looking back in my journal, I found fifty-two references to the “lasering” before the
dermatologist diagnosed the spot as cancerous.
One target with whom I communicate had his intestines perforated by probably the
same laser-like instrument. As a result, doctors had to perform a very serious operation
on the target to remove most of those intestines. Afterward, he could no longer work
and make a living for himself. Attackers can also cause appendicitis, fibromyalgia,
hiatal hernias, herniated disks, arthritis, poor eyesight, poor hearing, and other
detectable ailments and conditions. There is a wide pattern of physical assaults on
targets’ bodies by remote. Targets are virtually helpless against those attacks.
Psychological
73
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
The attackers’ neurological weaponry also causes many ailments, diseases, and
conditions of a psychological nature that are not detectable. One of the main
psychologically-induced conditions is what doctors refer to as Alzheimer’s disease. The
attackers induce that condition in a methodical fashion. They first begin working on the
target by blanking out the names of certain persons, places, or objects in the target’s
mind. Thus, when talking with others the victim will often pause and search for a word.
The attackers gradually blank out more and more words, causing the victim to become
increasingly less functional. Then they blank out familiar locations. Those victims often
forget where their houses are located while driving and end up having to be rescued
and taken home. They later even forget the locations of the bathroom and how to
perform their bodily functions. They forget the names of family members and friends.
Many of those people who today are diagnosed with Alzheimer’s are victims, not
patients.
Many targets know for a fact that their attackers can blank out thoughts in their minds.
That has frequently happened to me although I have learned largely to override the
attackers’ effects. The attackers use a computer to enter words, places, objects,
people, and many thoughts familiar to the victim into their data system, and they then
program their software to blank out those thoughts in a slow manner that makes the
victim look like a sufferer of dementia. The blanked-out thoughts gradually destroy the
victim’s mind, resulting in the disease commonly called Alzheimer’s. The attackers’
subliminal suggestions and commands to the victim augment the effect of the computer
software.
Someday scientists will know that many, if not most of the Alzheimer sufferers are
instead victims of electronic stalking and mind control. And they will know that the
disease is not natural but is induced by remote. Scientists will know, but will the
powerbrokers and their controlled media allow that knowledge to be revealed?
Just as targets know about the attackers’ ability to blank out thought, they also know
that the attackers’ directed energy weapons can sap the energy of targets and cause
complete lethargy. Chronic Fatigue Syndrome (CFS) is a fairly recent phenomenon that
first appeared in the 1970’s. I would be willing to bet my last dollar that it is an induced
condition. Likewise, dermatitis, another relatively recent condition, is probably also a
result of the attackers’ “lasers.”
The attackers’ neurological assault, mainly through the “hidden” voices, can also cause
targets to exhibit signs of behavior usually associated with schizophrenia and paranoia.
Psychiatrists will someday realize, if they do not already, that schizophrenic and
74
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
paranoid conditions can be and are regularly induced by the attackers’ remote
subliminal voices.
Combination
Some conditions appear to be caused by a combination of the attackers’ directed
energy weapons as well as psychological suggestions delivered through the attackers’
telepathic voices to the victims’ brains. One such condition is commonly called a
“pinched nerve.” The attackers can use their instruments to locate a victim’s sciatic
nerve, fix that location on the computer software, and relentlessly strike that nerve,
causing the victim great pain and debilitation. In addition to the attackers’ using their
instruments to cause a “pinched nerve,” they re-enforce the condition by continually
telling the victim subliminally that he is experiencing great pain. Many patients who are
told by doctors that they have a “pinched nerve” are instead only victims of electronic
stalking and mind control. Other conditions such as “restless legs” also have both a
physical and psychological origin. The attackers can touch the spine in a particular
location in such a way that it causes the sensation of restless legs. At the same time,
the attackers tell the victim through synthetic telepathy that he is feeling the “restless
legs” sensation.
Induced Alzheimer’s Disease
Whether or not Alzheimer’s is a bona fide disease is questionable, for Alzheimer’s can
be and is continually induced by victims’ attackers. How does it happen? Mind control.
The process is slow and methodical. The attackers start out by blanking out words in
the victim’s thoughts. The blanked-out word will be somebody’s name, a place, or an
object. Then, the attackers will provide that word to the victim through the whispers to
his subconscious. He suddenly remembers the word that he thinks he has forgotten.
That method creates a dependency on the attackers to supply words that the victim
believes he has “forgotten.”
Finally, after many months of causing the victim to forget words, the attackers begin
causing the victim to lose his train of thought while both thinking to himself and
especially in talking with others. They do that repeatedly, convincing the victim as well
as those around him that he is losing his mind. They keep blanking out more and more
thoughts. One day, the victim forgets where he lives, and he drives aimlessly around
looking for his house. Relatives later find him on the other side of the city. They take
his keys away from him and stop him from driving. He then forgets where the bathroom
is in his house. Much later, he has problems using his knife and fork when he eats. By
that time, he and his relatives and friends believe that he has an advanced case of
75
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Alzheimer’s. He takes very expensive medicine that is supposed to help him. It does
little to stop his slide into oblivion. In the end, he becomes little more than a vegetable,
breathing but not living.
I am certain that one of my brothers-in-law was a victim of induced Alzheimer’s. He was
a brilliant chemist who started his career with an oil company. He worked over the
years with several oil companies. Later, he bought land and developed a mobile home,
or trailer, park on it. In the latter work, he made enemies when he had to repossess
trailers or force renters to pay their rent. At some point, he was “hooked” by either
somebody in the oil companies or somebody who had something to do with the trailer
park. I knew nothing about targeting at the time. I watched as he slowly lost his mind.
He finally had to be led to the table, where he tried to eat with his hands. He had to be
led to his bedroom and be put to bed. He had to be bathed. He died in that mindless
condition.
Natural dementia has been around probably as long as humans have existed.
However, Alzheimer’s is a post-World War II disease that can be either natural
dementia, which is probably genetic, or induced. Each decade, we see more and more
Alzheimer’s. If Alzheimer’s is induced, who benefits from it?
First of all, it benefits the pharmaceutical companies that provide the medicines used to
treat it. Despite those medicines, I have yet to see them halt the advance of
Alzheimer’s, which is further proof that it is induced. Secondly, it is a way to neutralize
somebody in a seemingly natural manner. The Israelis neutralized Yasser Arafat
through induced Alzheimer’s. During the last six months of his life, he increasingly lost
his ability to think. By the time he died, he was practically a zombie.
I repeat that Alzheimer’s can be and is induced. It is induced through the software that
is used with the device that “hooks” the victim. Through that software, the attackers
whisper to the victim that he is losing his mind, and they blank out and supply thoughts
with the same whispers. Finally they blank out increasingly more of the person’s
memory. He eventually loses his ability to think.
The Attackers’ Use of Neurological Trickery
By using psychological trickery, the attackers convince targets that their attackers are
far smarter than they actually are. Here is one example of that duplicity. When using
synthetic telepathy on a target, attackers will often induce a thought or intercept a
target’s natural thought about a person, place, or object. They will then blank out of the
target’s conscious some aspect that the target was thinking concerning that person,
place, or object.
76
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
The target’s subconscious knows the missing, or blanked out, information, but not his
conscious. Since the attackers can read the target’s mind and thoughts, they pluck the
answer out of the target’s subconscious and then tell him the answer. That makes the
target believe that the answer came from his attackers and that they possess a vast
store of knowledge, whereas they got the answer from the target himself. The target
gives them the answer; not the reverse.
Let me give you an example of that trickery. While watching TV one evening, I saw a
story about Rock Creek Park, a sprawling, wooded acreage in Washington, DC where
many residents bike, jog, and walk. I remembered that a young Washington resident
was murdered in Rock Creek Park. She was an aide to a Congressman, and the
Congressman was under suspicion for a long while. Although I knew the name of the
woman, when the name surfaced in my conscious, it came up Sandra Levy.
The attackers had blanked out the young woman’s given name. However, they had
either seen or heard her real name in my subconscious. When they told me “Chandra,”
I was astounded. For a time I believed that they actually had that knowledge and may
have even been from the Washington area. After years of studying the attackers and
analyzing their actions, however, I later realized that the attackers were using the
method of “blanking out and filling in.” They had blanked out my thought and had then
made it look like their thought.
They also use that method for other purposes. For example, one day I looked in the
fridge for some pickle relish that I knew was there, yet I did not see it. Then I looked in
all of the kitchen cabinets. I still did not see it. Several days later I found the pickle
relish in the fridge exactly where I knew it should have been The attackers wanted me
to think that either I was losing my mind or that somebody had secretly entered my
house, taken the relish, and then re-entered my house to replace it (gaslighting). In
reality, the attackers had told my subconscious that I would not see the pickle relish, so
I did not see it. I have noticed that in my case the attackers can only temporarily blank
out a thought, and that thought will eventually return. Such are the neurological tricks
that the attackers play.
Knowing what the target is thinking, the attackers also attempt to impress the victim
with their knowledge. By using their high-speed computers, they research very quickly
topics that come to the target’s mind to tell him information about the topics. They even
sometimes guide the target psychologically to particular topics that they have already
sought information on for the same purpose. The attackers’ aim is to make the target
feel that they are super intelligent and informed. They usually are not. In actuality, they
retrieve most of what they know from the targets’ own minds and from the internet. Most
77
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
attackers have only very average minds, and many of them are undereducated for the
work that they pretend to do. Such is the neurological trickery that the attackers
employ.
A large percentage of the effects of electronic stalking and mind control represent
neurological tampering with the target’s mind. If a target has unusual difficulty in
swallowing food, if he has severe indigestion, or if he feels sudden strange aches and
pain, those occurrences are often the results of attackers’ using the subconscious
voices instructing his mind that he is experiencing those problems. Whenever I feel that
the attackers are causing a particular problem using their psychological tricks, I tell my
mind to correct that problem. It does.
Try it. Whenever you are hit the next time with some of those annoying and sometimes
frightening occurrences, tell your mind to find the area of your brain that the attackers
are using to do them and then tell it to stop the resulting effects. You are the owner of
your mind. You have to learn to use your good mind against the attackers’ neurological
trickery, a version of “fighting fire with fire.”
Before I go to sleep, I ask my mind to protect me and to remember the induced
“dreams,” staged scenarios, and other incidents that occur while I sleep. Recently while
sleeping, I suddenly woke choking. The attackers had told my mind as I slept that I had
swallowed some type of small white ball. I woke trying to get the ball out of my throat.
As I gasped and coughed trying to get the object unstuck, my mind signaled me that
there was nothing in my throat. The effects stopped instantly. My mind even recalled
hearing the attackers’ instructions while I slept, telling me that I was choking and
describing the object caught in my throat.
Another psychological trick on the part of the attackers is making targets believe that
they see them at all times, including when they use the bathroom. Because of that
deception, many targets are afraid to bathe and perform their bodily functions. It is true
that the attackers’ device(s) can view a target’s movements and his locations
throughout his dwelling, but the figure that they see is probably a tiny dot or shadowy
figure on their monitor. Since they know the target’s dwelling very well and can follow
that dot, they do indeed know when he is in the bathroom. They also hear the target’s
thought that he is going to the bathroom.
It may be true that the attackers can see what a target sees through his own eyes.
However, if so they cannot see his entire body, for the target himself cannot see his
entire body. Nevertheless, the attackers can read the target’s subconscious thoughts
and his thoughts determine his actions. For example, a target’s brain must register the
thought of shampooing his hair before the target actually performs that action. They
78
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
cannot see the target actually shampooing his hair because the target himself cannot
see that. Yet, the attackers know exactly what the target is doing in real time. They can
often tell him the brand of shampoo he is using because the target subconsciously
noted the brand name and the attackers read that thought. More trickery.
I suggest that if a target is sensitive about the voyeurs watching him in the bathroom,
he may want to use only a plug-in night light instead of the overhead light when he
bathes and does his bodily functions. If you believe that the attackers can see through
your own eyes, avoid looking at your private parts. If your eyes do not see them, the
attackers’ eyes most certainly will not be able to see them unless there is a hidden
camera in your bathroom. That, of course, is a very different issue.
I am beginning to doubt that the attackers can see what a target sees through the
latter’s eyes. That capability certainly seems to exist, but it may depend on how a target
is “hooked,” whether the attackers have that particular software, and whether the
attackers are trained to use it. In my case, the attackers have a parallel computer that
acts as my computer. Technicians might call it a “shared” or a “ghost” computer. I
believe that they also have a parallel, or shared, satellite system that acts as my TV.
Using the same satellite TV provider that I do, the attackers use their TV as if it were
mine. When I watch TV, my brain registers what channel I am turning to, so the
attackers turn to that same channel. Thus, they can see and hear what I see and hear. I
doubt, however, that they are viewing the TV from my eyes, for one night when I turned
off the TV, I could still hear the audio part of the program that I had been watching. The
attackers must have left their TV on and my hearing picked it up.
Here is another reason that I doubt that they see through my eyes. In 2009, the
attackers set about destroying much of my eyesight. Before they started attacking my
eyes with pin pricks, I could read the TV captions perfectly. Now the captions are
largely blurred and I have difficulty reading them. Whenever I read the captions and get
a word wrong, the attackers correct that word. Use logic. If they saw the captions
through my eyesight, they would see only the same blur that I see and would be unable
to correct the words that I read incorrectly.
The attackers have the capability of blanking out words and substituting other words.
For example, a friend of mind once told me something about her boyfriend, calling him
Tim. I later referred to Tim, and she corrected me. It was Steve. Now, there is little
resemblance between the word Tim and Steve. The attackers were trying to give my
friend the perception that I could not remember his name and that I was perhaps losing
my memory. In another instance, on a TV program one night an Afro-American
79
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
character commented that there were no other whites around. He was the only AfroAmerican there, so the attackers caused me to hear “white” instead of “black.”
Synthetic telepathy to a target’s subconscious also engages in trickery by getting the
target accustomed to obeying the attackers’ commands. Here is how it works.
Whenever I defecate, for example, my attackers always tell me to wash my hands.
They know, of course, that I never fail to wash my hands after bowel movements. I also
use a large amount of black pepper on my food, so the attackers always tell me to add
black pepper. Those commands concerning a target’s routine actions are Psychology
101 material, meant to accustom the target to obeying the attackers’ instructions.
Every thought, perception, idea, feelings, emotion, what one senses, and even his
ambulatory ability and other physical functions emanate in the brain. The scientists who
developed the device/method used in electronic stalking and mind control and the
scientists who wrote the trainer manual for that process were acutely aware that the
brain controls everything that we do. That knowledge drives a large part of the torture
that targets are subjected to, much of which is purely psychological in origin. And that
very deeply implicates psychiatrists and psychologists in the torture matrix.
Anxiety, One of the Attackers’ Main Tools
Inducing anxiety in victims is one of the attackers’ objectives. Targets should be aware
that anxiety is an altogether induced symptom, created by the attackers’ through
whispering and playing loop play tapes to the victim’s subconscious.
I define anxiety as a high state of nervousness, a feeling of un-wellbeing, and a sense
of unsettledness in a person. It places one on edge, full of fright but not knowing what
is frightening him. It robs the victim of sleep, for he is even afraid to sleep. It keeps him
from eating because he thinks that the food will choke him to death or it does the
opposite, causes him to stuff himself with food when he does not want or need it. He is
apprehensive, depressed, defensive, disoriented, disgruntled, and unfocused. He is
unable to concentrate. He cannot make plans, and even if he can, he cannot execute
them. In my opinion, anxiety is the worst possible condition short of death itself. One
must experience it to know what I am talking about.
The attackers know a victim’s most vulnerable emotional moments, which are usually
the result of some traumatic negative action like a divorce, a house foreclosure, the
loss of a job, or the death of a loved one. They play up that loss with the hidden voices,
causing the victim extreme anxiety. Indeed, he often does go over the edge into full
panic, for the anxiety will eventually become panic, which drives a victim to a
80
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
psychiatrist, gets him committed to a psychiatric clinic, or causes him to take some
other drastic action such as suicide.
I have always been a very positive, upbeat, optimistic person. Nevertheless, not
knowing about the attackers’ subconscious communication at the time, I became a
victim of anxiety in the summer of 1999, not long after my mother died. One day I was
sitting in the patio enjoying the sunlight and fresh air when I suddenly panicked. I had
never experienced panic attacks. The anxiety worsened over several months. The
psychological panics occurred daily. I woke up in the morning from almost sleepless
nights dreading for another nightfall to come, for the panics were even more severe at
night.
I developed a fear of water although I shower daily and sometimes even two or three
times a day in hot weather. That did not keep me from bathing; however, I dreaded to
see it rain, and could not stand the thought of getting wet in the rain. I could not eat a
filling meal, as it triggered still more anxiety. I began losing weight and looking
haggard. Finally, I asked my nephew’s wife, who was a nurse, to make me an
appointment with a psychiatrist to find out what was going on.
I saw the psychiatrist twice and took two prescriptions of Prozac. Then, a greater force
took over, and I gradually rose above that problem. The psychiatrist dismissed me after
two visits, telling me that I did not need him. That turned out to be very true. In a few
months, I quit the drugs completely and have not taken them since then. And I shall
never take prescription anti-depressant drugs again, certainly not for anxiety.
The attackers continue to this day to attempt to induce anxiety as it is one of their most
formidable weapons. They especially try to cause anxiety when someone close to me
dies, as in the case of my aunt, the last of ten aunts and uncles, or one of my oldest
friends. However, now that I know that my anxiety was caused by the attackers’
subconscious talking over loop play tapes, I will never again allow the attackers to
induce panic attacks. I was supposed to commit suicide back in 1999; instead, I
cheated them out of that objective.
The attackers also use physical effects caused by their computer software to create
anxiety. For example, they create a heavy pressure on the bridge of my nose and
cause “faux” heart attacks that are tactics to induce anxiety. Targets should be aware,
however, that the “silent” voices to a victim’s subconscious are the main cause of
anxiety in targeted individuals.
For the Skeptics: U.S. Patents On Subliminal Suggestion & Mind Control
81
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Patents show that all of the symptoms and effects of mind control that I have discussed
above are not only possible but that many have also been utilized for decades. A fellow
target sent me the following list of patents. That person writes: “These are just a portion
of the patents available on the web that deal with mind control, mental and emotional
influencing, perception engineering and brain functioning performed remotely and/or
directly through the electronic media and other venues and methods of application.
Keep in mind that these are patents filed in the public domain. Unknown and ‘black ops’
technology created within the military industrial complex obviously remain hidden.
Clearly, the ability to control the mental processes, attitudes, fears and perceptions of
mass America is far more advanced than the average American understands or would
like to believe.”
Method & Apparatus for Remotely Determining Information as to Person's
Emotional State
Stirbl, et al.
Abstract: In a method for remotely determining information relating to a
person's emotional state, a waveform energy having a predetermined
frequency and a predetermined intensity is generated and wirelessly
transmitted towards a remotely located subject. Waveform energy emitted
from the subject is detected and automatically analyzed to derive
information relating to the individual's emotional state. Physiological or
physical parameters of blood pressure, pulse rate, pupil size, respiration
rate and perspiration level are measured and compared with reference
values to provide information utilizable in evaluating interviewee's
responses or possibly criminal intent in security sensitive areas. USP #
5,522,386 (June 4, 1996)
Nervous System Manipulation by EM Fields from Monitors
Loos, Hendricus
Abstract: Physiological effects have been observed in a human subject in
response to stimulation of the skin with weak electromagnetic fields that
are pulsed with certain frequencies near 1/2 Hz or 2.4 Hz, such as to
excite a sensory resonance. Many computer monitors and TV tubes,
when displaying pulsed images, emit pulsed electromagnetic fields of
sufficient amplitudes to cause such excitation. It is therefore possible to
manipulate the nervous system of a subject by pulsing images displayed
on a nearby computer monitor or TV set. For the latter, the image pulsing
may be embedded in the program material, or it may be overlaid by
modulating a video stream, either as an RF signal or as a video signal.
82
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
The image displayed on a computer monitor may be pulsed effectively by
a simple computer program. For certain monitors, pulsed electromagnetic
fields capable of exciting sensory resonances in nearby subjects may be
generated even as the displayed images are pulsed with subliminal
intensity. USP # 6,488,617 (December 3, 2002)
Method and Device for Producing a Desired Brain State
Katz, Bruce
Abstract ~ A method and device for the production of a desired brain state
in an individual contain means for monitoring and analyzing the brain
state while a set of one or more magnets produce fields that alter this
state. A computational system alters various parameters of the magnetic
fields in order to close the gap between the actual and desired brain
state. This feedback process operates continuously until the gap is
minimized and/or removed. USP # 6,487,531 (November 26, 2002)
Signal Injection Coupling into the Human Vocal Tract
Tosaya, Carol
Abstract ~ A means and method are provided for enhancing or replacing
the natural excitation of the human vocal tract by artificial excitation
means, wherein the artificially created acoustics present additional
spectral, temporal, or phase data useful for (1) enhancing the machine
recognition robustness of audible speech or (2) enabling more robust
machine-recognition of relatively inaudible mouthed or whispered speech.
The artificial excitation (a) may be arranged to be audible or inaudible, (b)
may be designed to be non-interfering with another user's similar means,
(c) may be used in one or both of a vocal content-enhancement mode or
a complimentary vocal tract-probing mode, and/or (d) may be used for the
recognition of audible or inaudible continuous speech or isolated spoken
commands. USP # 6,430,443 (August 6, 2002)
Method and Apparatus for Treating Auditory Hallucinations
Karell, Manuel
Abstract ~ Stimulating one or more vestibulocochlear nerves or cochlea
or cochlear regions will treat, prevent and control auditory hallucinations.
USP # 6,426,919 (July 30, 2002)
Portable and Hand-Held Device for Making Humanly Audible Sounds
83
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Gerosa, William
Abstract ~ A portable and hand-held device for making humanly audible
sounds responsive to the detecting of ultrasonic sounds. The device
includes a hand-held housing and circuitry that is contained in the
housing. The circuitry includes a microphone that receives the ultrasonic
sound, a first low voltage audio power amplifier that strengthens the
signal from the microphone, a second low voltage audio power amplifier
that further strengthens the signal from the first low voltage audio power
amplifier, a 7-stage ripple carry binary counter that lowers the frequency
of the signal from the second low voltage audio power amplifier so as to
be humanly audible, a third low voltage audio power amplifier that
strengthens the signal from the 7-stage ripple carry binary counter, and a
speaker that generates a humanly audible sound from the third low
voltage audio power amplifier. USP # 6,292,688 (September 18, 2001)
Method and Apparatus for Analyzing Neurological Response to EmotionInducing Stimuli
Patton, Richard
Abstract ~ A method of determining the extent of the emotional response
of a test subject to stimulus having a time-varying visual content, for
example, an advertising presentation. The test subject is positioned to
observe the presentation for a given duration, and a path of
communication is established between the subject and a brain wave
detector/analyzer. The intensity component of each of at least two
different brain wave frequencies is measured during the exposure, and
each frequency is associated with a particular emotion. While the subject
views the presentation, periodic variations in the intensity component of
the brain waves of each of the particular frequencies selected is
measured. The change rates in the intensity at regular periods during the
duration are also measured. The intensity change rates are then used to
construct a graph of plural coordinate points, and these coordinate points
graphically establish the composite emotional reaction of the subject as
the presentation continues. USP # 6,258,022 (July 10,2001)
Behavior Modification
Rose, John
Abstract ~ Behavior modification of a human subject takes place under
hypnosis, when the subject is in a relaxed state. A machine plays back a
84
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
video or audio recording, during which the subject is instructed to activate
a device to create a perceptible stimulation which is linked, through the
hypnosis, with a visualization of enhanced or improved performance. After
the hypnosis, the user can reactivate the device at will, whenever the
improved performance, such as an improved sporting performance, is
desired. This will again create the perceptible stimulation and thus induce
the required visualization. USP # 6,239,705 (May 29,2001)
Intra-Oral Electronic Tracking Device
Glen, Jeffrey
Abstract ~ An improved stealthy, non-surgical, biocompatable electronic
tracking device is provided in which a housing is placed intra-orally. The
housing contains microcircuitry. The microcircuitry comprises a receiver,
a passive mode to active mode activator, a signal decoder for determining
positional fix, a transmitter, an antenna, and a power supply. Optionally,
an amplifier may be utilized to boost signal strength. The power supply
energizes the receiver. Upon receiving a coded activating signal, the
positional fix signal decoder is energized, determining a positional fix.
The transmitter subsequently transmits through the antenna a position
locating signal to be received by a remote locator. In another embodiment
of the present invention, the microcircuitry comprises a receiver, a
passive mode to active mode activator, a transmitter, an antenna and a
power supply. Optionally, an amplifier may be utilized to boost signal
strength. The power supply energizes the receiver. Upon receiving a
coded activating signal, the transmitter is energized. The transmitter
subsequently transmits through the antenna a homing signal to be
received by a remote locator. USP # 6,167,304 December 26, 2000)
Pulse Variability in Electric Field Manipulation of Nervous Systems
Loos, Hendricus
Abstract ~ Apparatus and method for manipulating the nervous system of
a subject by applying to the skin a pulsing external electric field which,
although too weak to cause classical nerve stimulation, modulates the
normal spontaneous spiking patterns of certain kinds of afferent nerves.
For certain pulse frequencies the electric field stimulation can excite in
the nervous system resonances with observable physiological
consequences. Pulse variability is introduced for the purpose of thwarting
habituation of the nervous system to the repetitive stimulation, or to
alleviate the need for precise tuning to a resonance frequency, or to
85
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
control pathological oscillatory neural activities such as tremors or
seizures. Pulse generators with stochastic and deterministic pulse
variability are disclosed, and the output of an effective generator of the
latter type is characterized. USP # 6,135,944 (October 24, 2000)
Method of Inducing Harmonious States of Being
Bowman, Gerard D., et al.
Abstract: A method of inducing harmonious states of being using
vibrational stimuli, preferably sound, comprised of a multitude of
frequencies expressing a specific pattern of relationship. Two base
signals are modulated by a set of ratios to generate a plurality of
harmonics. The harmonics are combined to form a "fractal" arrangement.
USP # 6,122,322 (September 19, 2000)
Subliminal Message Protection
Jandel, Magnus
Abstract ~ The present invention relates to a method and to a system for
detecting a first context change between two frames. When a second
context change between a further two frames occurs within a
predetermined time interval, the frames accommodated within the two
context changes are defined as a subliminal message. An alarm is sent to
an observer upon detection of a subliminal message. USP # 6,091,994
(July 18, 2000)
Pulsative Manipulation of Nervous Systems
Loos, Hendricus
Abstract ~ Method and apparatus for manipulating the nervous system by
imparting subliminal pulsative cooling to the subject's skin at a frequency
that is suitable for the excitation of a sensory resonance. At present, two
major sensory resonances are known, with frequencies near 1/2 Hz and
2.4 Hz. The 1/2 Hz sensory resonance causes relaxation, sleepiness,
ptosis of the eyelids, a tonic smile, a "knot" in the stomach, or sexual
excitement, depending on the precise frequency used. The 2.4 Hz
resonance causes the slowing of certain cortical activities, and is
characterized by a large increase of the time needed to silently count
backward from 100 to 60, with the eyes closed. The invention can be
used by the general public for inducing relaxation, sleep, or sexual
excitement, and clinically for the control and perhaps a treatment of
86
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
tremors, seizures, and autonomic system disorders such as panic attacks.
Embodiments shown are a pulsed fan to impart subliminal cooling pulses
to the subject's skin, and a silent device which induces periodically
varying flow past the subject's skin, the flow being induced by pulsative
rising warm air plumes that are caused by a thin resistive wire which is
periodically heated by electric current pulses. USP # 6,081,744 (June 27,
2000)
Electric Fringe Field Generator for Manipulating Nervous Systems
Loos, Hendricus
Abstract ~ Apparatus and method for manipulating the nervous system of
a subject through afferent nerves, modulated by externally applied weak
fluctuating electric fields, tuned to certain frequencies such as to excite a
resonance in neural circuits. Depending on the frequency chosen,
excitation of such resonances causes in a human subject relaxation,
sleepiness, sexual excitement, or the slowing of certain cortical
processes. The electric field used for stimulation of the subject is induced
by a pair of field electrodes charged to opposite polarity and placed such
that the subject is entirely outside the space between the field electrodes.
Such configuration allows for very compact devices where the field
electrodes and a battery-powered voltage generator are contained in a
small casing, such as a powder box. The stimulation by the weak external
electric field relies on frequency modulation of spontaneous spiking
patterns of afferent nerves. The method and apparatus can be used by
the general public as an aid to relaxation, sleep, or arousal, and clinically
for the control and perhaps the treatment of tremors and seizures, and
disorders of the autonomic nervous system, such as panic attacks. USP #
6,052,336 (April 18, 2000)
Apparatus and Method of Broadcasting Audible Sound Using Ultrasonic
Sound as a Carrier
Lowrey, Austin, III
Abstract ~ An ultrasonic sound source broadcasts an ultrasonic signal
which is amplitude and/or frequency modulated with an information input
signal originating from an information input source. If the signals are
amplitude modulated, a square root function of the information input
signal is produced prior to modulation. The modulated signal, which may
be amplified, is then broadcast via a projector unit, whereupon an
individual or group of individuals located in the broadcast region detect
87
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
the audible sound. USP # 6,039,688 (March 21, 2000)
Therapeutic Behavior Modification Program, Compliance Monitoring and
Feedback System
Douglas, Peter, et al.
Abstract ~ A therapeutic behavior modification program, compliance
monitoring and feedback system includes a server-based relational
database and one or more microprocessors electronically coupled to the
server. The system enables development of a therapeutic behavior
modification program having a series of milestones for an individual to
achieve lifestyle changes necessary to maintain his or her health or
recover from ailments or medical procedures. The program may be
modified by a physician or trained case advisor prior to implementation.
The system monitors the individual's compliance with the program by
prompting the individual to enter health-related data, correlating the
individual's entered data with the milestones in the behavior modification
program and generating compliance data indicative of the individual's
progress toward achievement of the program milestones. The system also
includes an integrated system of graphical system interfaces for
motivating the individual to comply with the program. Through the
interfaces, the individual can access the database to review the
compliance data and obtain health information from a remote source such
as selected sites on the Internet. The system also provides an electronic
calendar integrated with the behavior modification program for signaling
the individual to take action pursuant to the behavior modification
program in which the calendar accesses the relational database and
integrates requirements of the program with the individual's daily
schedule, and an electronic journal for enabling the individual to enter
personal health-related information into the system on a regular basis. In
addition, the system includes an electronic meeting room for linking the
individual to a plurality of other individuals having related behavior
modification programs for facilitating group peer support sessions for
compliance with the program. The system enables motivational media
presentations to be made to the individuals in the electronic meeting room
as part of the group support session to facilitate interactive group
discussion about the presentations. The entire system is designed around
a community of support motif including a graphical electronic navigator
operable by the individual to control the microprocessor for accessing
different parts of the system. USP # 6,017,302 (January 25, 2000)
88
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Subliminal Acoustic Manipulation of Nervous Systems
Loos, Hendricus
Abstract ~ In human subjects, sensory resonances can be excited by
subliminal atmospheric acoustic pulses that are tuned to the resonance
frequency. The 1/2 Hz sensory resonance affects the autonomic nervous
system and may cause relaxation, drowsiness, or sexual excitement,
depending on the precise acoustic frequency near 1/2 Hz used. The
effects of the 2.5 Hz resonance include slowing of certain cortical
processes, sleepiness, and disorientation. For these effects to occur, the
acoustic intensity must lie in a certain deeply subliminal range. Suitable
apparatus consists of a portable battery-powered source of weak
subaudio acoustic radiation. The method and apparatus can be used by
the general public as an aid to relaxation, sleep, or sexual arousal, and
clinically for the control and perhaps treatment of insomnia, tremors,
epileptic seizures, and anxiety disorders. There is further application as a
nonlethal weapon that can be used in law enforcement standoff
situations, for causing drowsiness and disorientation in targeted subjects.
It is then preferable to use venting acoustic monopoles in the form of a
device that inhales and exhales air with subaudio frequency. USP #
6,011,991 (January 4, 2000)
Communication System & Method Including Brain Wave Analysis...
Mardirossian, Aris
Abstract: A system and method for enabling human beings to
communicate by way of their monitored brain activity. The brain activity of
an individual is monitored and transmitted to a remote location (e.g. by
satellite). At the remote location, the monitored brain activity is compared
with pre-recorded normalized brain activity curves, waveforms, or patterns
to determine if a match or substantial match is found. If such a match is
found, then the computer at the remote location determines that the
individual was attempting to communicate the word, phrase, or thought
corresponding to the matched stored normalized signal. USP # 6,006,188
(December 21, 1999)
Speech Signal Processing for Determining Psychological or Physiological
Characteristics
Bogdashevsky, Rostislav, et al.
Abstract ~ A speech-based system for assessing the psychological,
89
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
physiological, or other characteristics of a test subject is described. The
system includes a knowledge base that stores one or more speech
models, where each speech model corresponds to a characteristic of a
group of reference subjects. Signal processing circuitry, which may be
implemented in hardware, software and/or firmware, compares the test
speech parameters of a test subject with the speech models. In one
embodiment, each speech model is represented by a statistical timeordered series of frequency representations of the speech of the
reference subjects. The speech model is independent of a priori
knowledge of style parameters associated with the voice or speech. The
system includes speech parameterization circuitry for generating the test
parameters in response to the test subject's speech. This circuitry
includes speech acquisition circuitry, which may be located remotely from
the knowledge base. The system further includes output circuitry for
outputting at least one indicator of a characteristic in response to the
comparison performed by the signal processing circuitry. The
characteristic may be time-varying, in which case the output circuitry
outputs the characteristic in a time-varying manner. The output circuitry
also may output a ranking of each output characteristic. In one
embodiment, one or more characteristics may indicate the degree of
sincerity of the test subject, where the degree of sincerity may vary with
time. The system may also be employed to determine the effectiveness of
treatment for a psychological or physiological disorder by comparing
psychological or physiological characteristics, respectively, before and
after treatment. USP # 5,954,630 (September 21, 1999)
FM Theta-Inducing Audible Sound
Masaki, Kazumi, et al.
Abstract ~ An audible sound of modulated wave where a very lowfrequency wave of about 20 hertz or lower is superposed on an audio lowfrequency wave effectively stimulates Fm theta in human brain waves to
improve attention and concentration during mental tasks when auditorily
administered. The audible sound is also effective in stimulation of human
alpha wave when the very low-frequency wave lies within the range of
about 2-10 hertz. Such audible sound is artificially obtainable by
generating an electric signal which contains such a modulated wave, and
transducing it into audible sound wave. USP # 5,954,629 (September 21,
1999)
Brain Wave Inducing System
90
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Yanagidaira, Masatoshi, et al.
Abstract ~ Sensors are provided for detecting brain waves of a user, and
a band-pass filter is provided for extracting a particular brain waves
including an .alpha. wave included in a detected brain wave. The bandpass filter comprises a first band-pass filter having a narrow pass band,
and a second band-pass filter having a wide pass band. One of the first
and second band-pass filters is selected, and a stimulation signal is
produced in dependency on an .alpha. wave extracted by a selected
band-pass filter. In accordance with the stimulation signal, a stimulation
light is emitted to the user in order to induce the user to relax or sleeping
state. USP # 5,935,054 (August 10, 1999)
Magnetic Excitation of Sensory Resonances
Loos, H.
Abstract - The invention pertains to influencing the nervous system of a
subject by a weak externally applied magnetic field with a frequency near
1/2 Hz. In a range of amplitudes, such fields can excite the 1/2 sensory
resonance, which is the physiological effect involved in "rocking the
baby". USP # 5,922,016 (July 13, 1999)
Apparatus for Electric Stimulation of Auditory Nerves of a Human Being
Wagner, Hermann
Abstract ~ Apparatus for electric stimulation and diagnostics of auditory
nerves of a human being, e.g. for determination of sensation level (SL),
most conformable level (MCL) and uncomfortable level (UCL) audibility
curves, includes a stimulator detachably secured to a human being for
sending a signal into a human ear, and an electrode placed within the
human ear and electrically connected to the stimulator by an electric
conductor for conducting the signals from the stimulator into the ear. A
control unit is operatively connected to the stimulator for instructing the
stimulator as to characteristics of the generated signals being transmitted
to the ear. USP # 5,868,103 (February 9, 1999)
Method and Apparatus for Controlling an Animal
Boyd, Randal
Abstract - An apparatus for controlling an animal wherein the animal
receives a control stimulus of the release of a substance having an
91
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
adverse effect upon the animal as a corrective measure. The apparatus
includes a transmitter for producing a transmitted field, and a releasable
collar for attaching to the neck of the animal. The collar includes a
receiver for receiving the transmitted field and for producing a received
signal, a control circuit for determining when the received signal indicates
that the animal requires a corrective measure and for producing a control
signal, a container for containing the substance having an adverse effect
upon the animal, and a mechanism for releasing the substance from the
container into the presence of the animal upon the production of the
control signal by the control circuit. In use, the transmitter is set to
produce the transmitted field and the collar is attached to the neck of the
animal. As the animal moves about, the receiver in the collar receives the
transmitted field and produces a received signal. The control circuit
determines when the received signal indicates that the animal requires a
corrective measure. A control signal is produced by the control circuit
when the determination is made that the animal requires a corrective
measure. Upon the production of the control signal, the substance having
an adverse effect upon the animal is released from the container and into
the presence of the animal. USP # 5,784,124 (July 21, 1998)
Supraliminal Method of Education.
D'Alitalia, Joseph A., et al.
Abstract - A method of behavior modification involves having a patient
view supraliminal video messages superimposed upon an underlying
video presentation. The video messages incorporate messages wherein
at least some of the messages link a desired modified behavior to positive
feelings of the patient. A supraliminal message generator and
superimposer iteratively selects individual messages for display from the
sequence of messages, decompressing the messages as required, and
places the selected messages in a buffer memory of a video generation
device. A processor of the supraliminal message generator and
superimposer then fades the selected message from an invisible level to
a visible level on the video display, and then fades the selected message
from the visible level back to the invisible level. USP # 5,649,061 (July 15,
1997)
Device and Method for Estimating a Mental Decision
Smyth, Christopher
Abstract ~ A device and method for estimating a mental decision to select
92
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
a visual cue from the viewer's eye fixation and corresponding single event
evoked cerebral potential. The device comprises an eyetracker, an
electronic biosignal processor and a digital computer. The eyetracker
determines the instantaneous viewing direction from oculometric
measurements and a head position and orientation sensor. The electronic
processor continually estimates the cerebral electroencephalogramic
potential from scalp surface measurements following corrections for
electrooculogramic, electromyogramic and electrocardiogramic artifacts.
The digital computer analyzes the viewing direction data for a fixation and
then extracts the corresponding single event evoked cerebral potential.
The fixation properties, such as duration, start and end pupil sizes, end
state (saccade or blink) and gaze fixation count, and the parametric
representation of the evoked potential are all inputs to an artificial neural
network for outputting an estimate of the selection interest in the gaze
point of regard. The artificial neural network is trained off-line prior to
application to represent the mental decisions of the viewer. The device
can be used to control computerized machinery from a video display by
ocular gaze point of regard alone, by determining which visual cue the
viewer is looking at and then using the estimation of the task-related
selection as a selector switch. USP # 5,644,363 (July 1, 1997)
Apparatus for Superimposing Visual Subliminal Instructions on a Video
Signal
Mead, Talbert
Abstract - A subliminal video instructional device comprises circuitry for
receiving an underlying video signal and presenting this signal to
horizontal and vertical synchronization detection circuits, circuitry for
generating a subliminal video message synchronized to the underlying
video signal, and circuitry for adding the subliminal video message to the
underlying video signal to create a combination video signal. USP #
5,586,967 (December 24, 1996)
Method & Recording for Producing Sounds and Messages to Achieve
Alpha & Theta Brainwave States
Davis, Mark E.
Abstract - A method and recording for the use in achieving alpha and
theta brainwave states and effecting positive emotional states in humans,
is provided which includes a medium having a musical composition
thereon with an initial tempo decreasing to a final tempo and verbal
93
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
phrases recorded in synchrony with the decreasing tempo. USP #
5,562,597 (October 8, 1996)
Method & Apparatus for Reducing Physiological Stress
Van Dick, Robert C.
Abstract - Physiological stress in a human subject is treated by
generating a weak electromagnetic field about a quartz crystal. The
crystal is stimulated by applying electrical pulses of pulse widths between
0.1 and 50 microseconds each at a pulse repetition rate of between 0.5K
and 10K pulses per second to a conductor positioned adjacent to the
quartz crystal thereby generating a weak electromagnetic field. A subject
is positioned within the weak electromagnetic field for a period of time
sufficient to reduce stress. USP # 5,551,879 (September 3, 1996)
Dream State Teaching Machine
Raynie, Arthur D.
Abstract ~ A device for enhancing lucidity in the dream state of an
individual. The device includes electronic circuitry incorporated into a
headband for the user to wear while sleeping. The circuitry includes a
detector for fitting adjacent to the eye of the sleeping individual, for
detecting Rapid Eye Movement (REM), which occurs during the dream
state. The detector emits a signal that is evaluated by additional circuitry
to determine whether or not REM sleep is occurring. If REM sleep is
occurring, a signal is generated to operate a recorded, which typically
plays prerecorded messages through the headphones engaging the ear
of the sleeping individual. USP # 5,539,705 (July 23, 1996)
Ultrasonic Speech Translator and Communication System
M. A. Akerman, M., et al.
Abstract - A wireless communication system, undetectable by radiofrequency methods, for converting audio signals, including human voice,
to electronic signals in the ultrasonic frequency range, transmitting the
ultrasonic signal by way of acoustic pressure waves across a carrier
medium, including gases, liquids and solids, and reconverting the
ultrasonic acoustic pressure waves back to the original audio signal. This
invention was made with government support under Contract DE-ACO5840R2l400, awarded by the US Department of Energy to Martin Marietta
Energy Systems, Inc. USP # 5,507,291 (April 16, 1996)
94
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Apparatus for Determination of the Condition of the Vegetative Part of the
Nervous System
Lerner, Eduard
Abstract - Apparatus for use in the determination of the condition of the
vegetative part of the nervous system and/or of sensory functions of an
organism, i.e. a human being or animal. The apparatus comprises
devices for generating and supplying to said organism at least one
sensory stimulus chosen from a group of sensory stimuli, such as visual,
sound, olfactory, gustatory, tactile or pain stimuli, and devices for
measuring the skin potential and the evoked response of the organism to
a stimulus. The measured data are processed by processing devices for
automatically controlling the supply of at least one stimulus for providing a
non-rhythmical sequence of stimuli. Preferably, pairs of stimuli are
supplied for developing a conditioned reflex. USP # 5,480,374 (January
2, 1996)
Method and Apparatus for Reducing Physiological Stress
Van Dick, Robert
Abstract ~ Physiological stress in a human subject is treated by
generating a weak electromagnetic field about a grounded electrode by
the application of pulses of between 5 and 50 microseconds each at a
pulse rate of between 0.5K and 10K pulses per second to a power
electrode, the power electrode and grounded electrode being coupled to
high voltage pulse generation means. A subject is positioned within the
weak electromagnetic field for a period of time sufficient to cause an
increase in his or her alpha or theta brain wave levels. USP # 5,479,941
(January 2, 1996)
Device for Inducing Altered States of Consciousness
Harner, Michael
Abstract ~ A rotating device for producing altered states of consciousness
in a subject is provided. The subject's body rotates about a point in the
center of the body support means at a speed between about 10 and about
60 revolutions per minute. In a preferred embodiment the direction of
rotation is periodically reversed. USP # 5,392,788 (February 28, 1995)
Method and Device for Interpreting Concepts and Conceptual Thought...
95
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Hudspeth, William J.
Abstract ~ A system for acquisition and decoding of EP and SP signals is
provided which comprises a transducer for presenting stimuli to a subject,
EEG transducers for recording brainwave signals from the subject, a
computer for controlling and synchronizing stimuli presented to the
subject and for concurrently recording brainwave signals, and either
interpreting signals using a model for conceptual perceptional and
emotional thought to correspond EEG signals to thought of the subject or
comparing signals to normative EEG signals from a normative population
to diagnose and locate the origin of brain dysfunctional underlying
perception, conception, and emotion. USP # 5,356,368 (October 18,
1994)
Method & Apparatus for Inducing Desired States of Consciousness
Monroe, Robert E.
Abstract: Improved methods and apparatus for entraining human brain
patterns, employing frequency following response (FFR) techniques,
facilitate attainment of desired states of consciousness. In one
embodiment, a plurality of electroencephalogram (EEG) waveforms,
characteristic of a given state of consciousness, are combined to yield an
EEG waveform to which subjects may be susceptible more readily. In
another embodiment, sleep patterns are reproduced based on observed
brain patterns during portions of a sleep cycle; entrainment principles are
applied to induce sleep. In yet another embodiment, entrainment
principles are applied in the work environment, to induce and maintain a
desired level of consciousness. A portable device also is described. USP
# 5,352,181 (October 4, 1994)
Method & Recording for Producing Sounds and Messages
Davis, Mark E.
Abstract: A method and recording for use in achieving Alpha and Theta
brain wave states and effecting positive emotional states in humans to
enhance learning and self-improvement, is provided which includes a
medium having a musical composition recorded thereon with an initial
tempo decreasing to a final tempo and verbal phrases, comprising
between approximately 4 and approximately 8 words, recorded in
synchrony with the decreasing initial tempo. USP # 5,330,414 (July 19,
1994)
96
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Brain Wave Inducing Apparatus
Yasushi, Mitsuo
Abstract: A random signal generator outputs a random noise signal to a
band pass filter which selectively passes frequency components in the
frequency range of a desired brain wave from a subject. The output of the
band pass filter is supplied to an automatic level controller. The automatic
level controller sets the output of band pass filter to a predetermined
amplitude. Then, the output of the automatic level controller is fed to a
stimulating light generator, which converts the output of the automatic
level controller into a light signal for stimulating the subject in order to
induce the desired brain wave from the subject. The light signal is then
emitted into the subject's eyes. USP # 5,289,438 (February 22, 1994)
Method & System for Altering Consciousness
Gall, James
Abstract: A system for altering the states of human consciousness
involves the simultaneous application of multiple stimuli, preferable
sounds, having differing frequencies and wave forms. The relationship
between the frequencies of the several stimuli is exhibited by the equation
g = 2.sup.n/4 .multidot.f where: f = frequency of one stimulus; g =
frequency of the other stimuli or stimulus; and n = a positive or negative
integer which is different for each other stimulus. USP # 5,245,666
(September 14, 1993)
Personal Subliminal Messaging System
Mikell, Bruce T.
Abstract ~ A personal subliminal messaging system includes a wide
range linear subliminal modulator (43), a digital audio recording or play
device (46), a microphone (51) to pick up the sound at the ear, and an
earpiece (50) to deliver the subliminal message. The sound level at the
user's ear is detected and measured. After risetime and decay
conditioning of the varying dc control signal, the wide range linear
modulator (43) uses this signal to control the level of the message to the
earpiece (50). The user adjusts the system for a liminal of a subliminal
level. The psychoacoustic phenomena of Post Masking is used to
increase the integrity of the message in subliminal messaging systems.
97
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
USP # 5,270,800 (December 14, 1993)
Subliminal Message Generator
Sweet. Robert L.
Abstract: A combined subliminal and supraliminal message generator for
use with a television receiver permits complete control of subliminal
messages and their manner of presentation. A video synchronization
detector enables a video display generator to generate a video message
signal corresponding to a received alphanumeric text message in
synchronism with a received television signal. A video mixer selects either
the received video signal or the video message signal for output. The
messages produced by the video message generator are user selectable
via a keyboard input. A message memory stores a plurality of
alphanumeric text messages specified by user commands for use as
subliminal messages. This message memory preferably includes a read
only memory storing predetermined sets of alphanumeric text messages
directed to differing topics. The sets of predetermined alphanumeric text
messages preferably include several positive affirmations directed to the
left brain and an equal number of positive affirmations directed to the right
brain that are alternately presented subliminally. The left brain messages
are presented in a linear text mode, while the right brain messages are
presented in a three dimensional perspective mode. The user can control
the length and spacing of the subliminal presentations to accommodate
differing conscious thresholds. Alternative embodiments include a
combined cable television converter and subliminal message generator, a
combine television receiver and subliminal message generator and a
computer capable of presenting subliminal messages. USP # 5,224,864
(July 6, 1993)
Method of Recording and Reproducing Subliminal Signals that are 180
Degrees Out of Phase
Woith, Blake F.
Abstract ~ A subliminal recording includes both subliminal message and
mask signals applied to both tracks of a two track recording medium. The
subliminal message signals are identical in content, and are recorded in
an out-of-phase relationship. The mask signals are recorded in phase.
The resulting recording may be utilized in the conventional manner for
subliminal recordings. By combining the composite signals in an inverted
relationship, the mask signals cancel while the subliminal message
98
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
signals are additive, thus allowing the presence of the subliminal
message signal to be confirmed on the recording. USP # 5,221,962 (June
22, 1993)
Subliminal Device having Manual Adjustment of Perception Level of
Subliminal Messages
Backus, Alan L., et al.
Abstract: A method and apparatus for presenting subliminal visual and/or
audio messages which allows user verification of message content and
presence, as well as proper adjustment of message obviousness while
accounting for ambient conditions and user sensitivities is disclosed. This
method and apparatus also presents synchronized reinforced sensory
input of subliminal messages. This is performed by simultaneously
overlaying images received from a VCR over a plurality of television
signals. This apparatus directs overlay images over RF television signals
having both audio and video components USP # 5,215,468 (June 1,
1993)
Method and Apparatus for Introducing Subliminal Changes to Audio
Stimuli
Lauffer, Martha A., et al.
Abstract ~ A method and apparatus for introducing gradual changes to an
audio signal so that the changes are subliminal. The changes can involve
tempo and volume, for example, and can take the form of a gentle
gradient having ever increasing/decreasing ramp-like changes over a
sufficient duration, or a more complex program involving several gentle
gradients. In the preferred embodiment, an enhanced audio play-back
device such as a portable audio cassette recorder can be programmed to
subliminally alter the characteristics of a standard pre-recorded tape
containing music, for example. As a motivational tool during walking,
jogging or other repetitive exercise, the tempo is gradually increased over
a period of time to encourage a corresponding gradual (and subliminal)
increase in physical exertion by a user whose rate of movement is
proportional to the tempo of the music. The tempo can be either manually
changed in conjunction with a subliminal program, or by itself in an
override mode, or by itself in a version of the present-inventive audio
play-back device which allows only manual tempo alternation. In an
alternate embodiment, a special pre-recorded tape contains subliminal
changes in tempo, for example, for play-back on a standard audio
99
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
cassette recorder (which operates at one speed, only) to cause the same
effect as the preferred embodiment. USP # 5,213,562 (May 25, 1993)
Method of Inducing Mental, Emotional and Physical States of
Consciousness
Monroe, Robert A.
Abstract: A method having applicability in replication of desired
consciousness states; in the training of an individual to replicate such a
state of consciousness without further audio stimulation; and in the
transferring of such states from one human being to another through the
imposition of one individual's EEG, superimposed on desired stereo
signals, on another individual, by inducement of a binaural beat
phenomenon. USP # 5,194,008 (March 16, 1993)
Subliminal Image Modulation Projection and Detection System and
Method
Mohan, William L., et al.
Abstract ~ Weapon training simulation system including a computer
operated video display scene whereon is projected a plurality of visual
targets. The computer controls the display scene and the targets, whether
stationary or moving, and processes data of a point of aim sensor
apparatus associated with a weapon operated by a trainee. The sensor
apparatus is sensitive to non-visible or subliminal modulated areas having
a controlled contrast of brightness between the target scene and the
targets. The sensor apparatus locates a specific subliminal modulated
area and the computer determines the location of a target image on the
display scene with respect to the sensor apparatus USP # 5,175,571
(December 29, 1992)
Glasses with Subliminal Message
Tanefsky, Faye, et al.
Abstract ~ A pair of subliminal imaging spectacles is provided with a
matched pair of visual subliminal images designed and placed so as to
merge into one image due to the stereoscopic effect of human vision and
thus to impart a subliminal message to the wearer. USP # 5,170,381
(December 8, 1992)
Method for Mixing Audio Subliminal Recordings
100
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Taylor, Eldon, et al.
Abstract ~ Audio subliminal recordings are made in which in addition to
using a primary carrier, such as music, two audio channels are used to
deliver subliminal messages to the brain. On one channel, accessing the
left brain hemisphere, the message delivered is meaningfully spoken,
forward-masked, permissive affirmations delivered in a round-robin
manner by a male voice, a female voice and a child's voice. On the other
channel, accessing the right brain, directive messages, in the same
voices, are recorded in backward-masked (or meta-contrast). The three
voices are recording in round-robin fashion with full echo reverberation.
The audio tracks are mixed using a special processor which converts
sound frequencies to electrical impulses and tracks the subliminal
message to synchronize the subliminal message in stereo with the
primary carrier. The processor maintains constant gain differential
between the primary carrier and the subliminal verbiage and, with the
subliminal verbiage being recorded with round-robin, full echo
reverberation, ensures that none of a message is lost. The primary carrier
should be continuous music without breaks or great differences in
movements. USP # 5,159,703 (October 27, 1992)
Silent Subliminal Presentation System
Lowery, Oliver
Abstract: A silent communications system in which nonaural carriers, in
the very low or very high audio frequency range or in the adjacent
ultrasonic frequency spectrum, are amplitude or frequency modulated
with the desired intelligence and propagated acoustically or vibrationally,
for inducement into the brain, typically through the use of loudspeakers,
earphones or piezoelectric transducers. USP # 5,151,080 (September 29,
1992)
Method & Apparatus for Inducing & Establishing a Changed State of
Consciousness
Bick, Claus
Abstract: An electroacoustic device includes a sound generator as well as
a system for producing synthetic human speech, connected to a
modulation stage for superimposing the output signals thereof. The
superimposed output signals are applied via an amplifier stage to one of
a headphone system or loudspeaker system. USP # 5,135,468 (August 4,
101
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
1992)
Method & Apparatus of Varying the Brain State of a Person by Means of
an Audio Signal
Meissner, Juergen P.
Abstract: A method of varying the brain state of a person includes the
steps of supplying the first audio signal to one ear of the person,
supplying a second audio signal to the other ear of the person, and
substantially continuously varying the frequency of at least one of the first
and second audio signals to vary the brain state of the person. USP #
5,134,484 (July 28, 1992)
Superimposing Method & Apparatus Useful for Subliminal Messages
Willson, Joseph
Abstract: Data to be displayed is combined with a composite video signal.
The data is stored in a memory in digital form. Each byte of the data is
read out in sequential fashion to determine: the recurrence display rate of
the data according to the frame sync pulses of the video signal; the
location of the data within the video image according to the line sync
pulses of the video signal; and the location of the data display within the
video image according to the position information. Synchronization of the
data with the video image is derived from the sync pulses of the
composite video signal. A similar technique is employed to combine
sound data with an audio signal. Data to be displayed may be presented
as a subliminal message or may persist for a given time interval. The data
may be derived from a variety of sources including a prerecorded or live
video signal. The message may be a reminder message displayed upon a
television screen to remind the viewer of an appointment. The data may
be stored in a variety of different memory devices capable of high speed
data retrieval. The data may be generated locally on-line or off-line and
transferred to memory which stores the data necessary to create the
message. USP # 5,128,765 (July 7, 1992)
System for Implementing the Synchronized Superimposition of Subliminal
Signals
Dingwall, Robert
Abstract ~ An apparatus and system for the controlled delivery of a
subliminal video and/or audio message on to a source signal from a video
102
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
tape player or similar. The source signal is divided into audio and video
portions. A video processor reads sychronization information from the
source signal. A controller transmits a stored subliminal image at
designated times to a mixer amplifier fully synchronized with the source
signal. Concurrently, an audio subliminal message is applied to the
source audio at a volume level regulated at some fraction to the source
audio. The combined signals are transmitted to a monitor for undistracted
viewing. USP # 5,123,899 (June 23, 1992)
Method & System for Altering Consciousness
Gall, James
Abstract: A system for altering the states of human consciousness
involves the simultaneous application of multiple stimuli, preferable
sounds, having differing frequencies and wave forms. The relationship
between the frequencies of the several stimuli is exhibited by the equation
g = s.sup.n/4 .multidot.f where: f = frequency of one stimulus; g =
frequency of the other stimuli of stimulus; and n=a positive or negative
integer which is different for each other stimulus. USP # 5,052,401
(October 1, 1991)
Product Detector for a Steady Visual Evoked Potential Stimulator and
Product Detector
Sherwin, Gary
Abstract ~ An automated visual testing system is disclosed which
presents an alternating steady state visual stimulus to a patient through
an optical system that modifies the stimulus image. As the image
changes, the patient produces evoked potentials that change. The
evoked potentials are detected by a product detector which produces the
amplitude of the evoked potentials. The product detector includes filters
which isolate the patient's evoked potentials, a modulator which detects
the response using the stimulus source frequency and a demodulator that
determines the amplitude of the response. The product detector detects
the level of the steady state evoked potential signals even in the
presence of substantial background noise and extraneous
electroencephalograhic signals. These detectors can be used to monitor
the evoked potential produced by visual, aural or somatic steady state
stimuli. The components described above can be used to produce a
system that can determine to which of several different displays an
observer is paying attention by providing images that blink at different
103
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
frequencies and product detectors for each of the stimulus frequencies.
The product detector producing the highest output indicates the display
upon which the observer is focused. USP # 5,047,994 (September 10,
1991)
Supersonic Bone Conduction Hearing Aid and Method
Lenhardt, Martin, et al.
Abstract ~ A supersonic bone conduction hearing aid that receives
conventional audiometric frequencies and converts them to supersonic
frequencies for connection to the human sensory system by vibration
bone conduction. The hearing is believed to use channels of
communications to the brain that are not normally used for hearing. These
alternative channels do not deteriorate significantly with age as does the
normal hearing channels. The supersonic bone conduction frequencies
are discerned as frequencies in the audiometric range of frequencies.
USP # 5,036,858 (August 6, 1991)
Method & Apparatus for Changing Brain Wave Frequency
Carter, John L., et al.
Abstract: A method for changing brain wave frequency to a desired
frequency determines a current brain wave frequency of a user,
generates two frequencies with a frequency difference of a magnitude
between that of the current actual brain wave frequency and the desired
frequency but always within a predetermined range of the current actual
brain wave frequency, and produces an output to the user corresponding
to the two frequencies. One apparatus to accomplish the method has a
computer processor, a computer memory, EEG electrodes along with an
amplifier, a programmable timing generator responsive to the computer
processor for generating the two frequencies, audio amplifiers and a beat
frequency generator driving a visual frequency amplifier. USP #
5,027,208 (June 25,1991)
Therapeutic Subliminal Imaging System
Dwyer, Jr., Joseph, et al.
Abstract ~ A therapeutic subliminal imaging system wherein a selected
subliminal message is synchronized with and added to an existing video
signal containing a supraliminal message. A television receiver or video
recorder can be used to provide the supraliminal message and a video
104
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
processing circuit varies the intensity of that perceptible message to
incorporate one or more subliminal images. USP # 5,017,143 (May 21,
1991)
Method and Apparatus for Producing Subliminal Images
Backus, Alan, et al.
Abstract ~ A method and apparatus to produce more effective visual
subliminal communications. Graphic and/or text images, presented for
durations of less than a video frame, at organized rhythmic intervals, the
rhythmic intervals intended to affect user receptivity, moods or behavior.
Subliminal graphic images having translucent visual values locally
dependent on background values in order to maintain desired levels of
visual contrast. USP # 4,958,638 (September 25, 1990)
Non-Contact Vital Signs Monitor
Sharpe, Steven, et al.
Abstract ~ An apparatus for measuring simultaneous physiological
parameters such as heart rate and respiration without physically
connecting electrodes or other sensors to the body. A beam of frequency
modulated continuous wave radio frequency energy is directed towards
the body of a subject. The reflected signal contains phase information
representing the movement of the surface of the body, from which
respiration and heartbeat information can be obtained. The reflected
phase modulated energy is received and demodulated by the apparatus
using synchronous quadrature detection. The quadrature signals so
obtained are then signal processed to obtain the heartbeat and
respiratory information of interest. USP # 4,924,744 (May 15, 1990)
Apparatus for Generating Sound through Low Frequency and Noise
Modulation
Lenzen, Reiner
Abstract ~ In an apparatus for generating sound, there are provided a
plurality of channels for generating sounds. Each of the channels includes
a memory for storing waveform data, and at least one of the channels
includes a noise generator so that various kinds of sounds including
rhythm sound-effects sound, effects sound-vibrato etc. are generated.
There is further provided a controller by which voice sound signal is
passed through the channels so that artificial sound, voice sound etc. are
105
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
generated. There is still further provided a circuit for adjusting an
amplitude level of a whole sound which is obtained by mixing output
sounds of the channels so that far and near sound is produced. Further,
each of the channels includes left and right attenuators which divide a
channel sound into left and right channel sounds. Still further, the
apparatus comprises a low frequency oscillator for controlling a depth of
frequency modulation, and a controller for writing sampling data of a
predetermined waveform into serial addresses of a memory. USP #
4,889,526 (December 26, 1989)
Non-Invasive Method & Apparatus for Modulating Brain Signals
Rauscher, Elizabeth A.
Abstract: This invention incorporates the discovery of new principles
which utilize magnetic and electric fields generated by time varying
square wave currents of precise repetition, width, shape and magnitude to
move through coils and cutaneously applied conductive eletrodes in order
to stimulate the nervous system and reduce pain in humans. Timer
means, adjustment means, and means to deliver current to the coils and
conductive eletrodes are described, as well as a theoretical model of the
process. The invention incorporates the concept of two cyclic expanding
and collapsing magnetic fields which generate precise wave forms in
conjunction with each other to create a beat frequency which in turn
causes the ion flow in the nervous system of the human body to be
efficiently moved along the nerve path where the locus of the pain exists
to thereby reduce the pain. The wave forms are created either in one or
more coils, one or more pairs of electrodes, or a combination of the two.
USP # 4,883,067 (November 28, 1989)
Method & Apparatus for Translating the EEG into Music
Knispel, Joel, et al.
Abstract: A method and apparatus for applying a musical feedback signal
to the human brain, or any other brain, to induce controllable
psychological and physiological responses. A signal representing the
ongoing electroencephalographic (EEG) signal of a brain preferably is
obtained from the electrode location on the scalp known as CZ or P3 in
clinical notation. A signal processor converts the ongoing EEG into
electrical signals which are converted into music by synthesizers. The
music is acoustically fed back to the brain after a time delay calculated to
shift the phase of the feedback in order to reinforce specific or desired
106
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
ongoing EEG activity from the scalp position of interest. The music is
comprised of at least one voice that follows the moment-by-moment
contour of the EEG in real time to reinforce the desired EEG activity. The
music drives the brain into resonance with the music to provide a closed
loop or physiological feedback effect. Preferably, the musical feedback
comprises additional voices that embody psychoacoustic principles as
well as provide the content and direction normally supplied by the
therapist in conventional biofeedback. The invention contemplates
numerous applications for the results obtained. USP # 4,877,027
(October 31, 1989)
Hearing System
Brunkan, Wayne B.
Abstract: Sound is induced in the head of a person by radiating the head
with microwaves in the range of 100 megahertz to 10,000 megahertz that
are modulated with a particular waveform. The waveform consists of
frequency modulated bursts. Each burst is made up of 10 to 20 uniformly
spaced pulses grouped tightly together. The burst width is between 500
nanoseconds and 100 microseconds. The pulse width is in the range of
10 nanoseconds to 1 microsecond. The bursts are frequency modulated
by the audio input to create the sensation of hearing in the person whose
head is irradiated. USP # 4,858,612 (August 22, 1989)
Hearing Device
Stocklin, Philip L.
Abstract: A method and apparatus for stimulation of hearing in mammals
by introduction of a plurality of microwaves into the region of the auditory
cortex is shown and secribed. A microphone is used to transform sound
signals into eletrical signals which are in turn analyzed and processed to
provide controls for generating a plurality of microwave signals at different
frequencies. the multifrequency microwaves are then applied to the brain
in the region of the auditory cortex. By this method sounds are perceived
by the mamal which are representative of the original sound received by
the microphone. USP # 4,834,701 (May 30, 1989)
Apparatus for Inducing Frequency Reduction in Brain Wave
Masaki, Kazumi
Abstract: Frequency reduction in human brain wave is inducible by
107
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
allowing human brain to perceive 4-16 hertz beat sound. Such beat sound
can be easily produced with an apparatus, comprising at least one sound
source generating a set of low-frequency signals different each other in
frequency by 4-16 hertz. Electroencephalographic study revealed that the
beat sound is effective to reduce beta-rhythm into alpha-rhythm, as well
as to retain alpha-rhythm. USP # 4,821,326 (April 11, 1989)
Non-Audible Speech Generation Method & Apparatus
MacLeod, Norman
Abstract: A non-audible speech generation apparatus adn method for
producing non-audible seech signals which includes an ultasonic
transducer or vibrator for projecting a series of glottal shaped ultrasonic
pulses to the vocal track of a speaker. The glottal pulses, in the
approximate frequency spectrum extending from 15 kilohertz to 105
kilohertz, contains harmonics of approximately 30 times the grequency of
the acoustical harmonicsgenerated by the vocal cords, but which may
nevertheless be amplitude modulated to produce non-auduble speech by
the speaker's silently mouthing of words. The ultrasonic speech is then
received by an ultasonic transducer disposed outside of the speaker's
mouth and electronically communicated to a translation device which
down converts the ultrasonics signals to corresponding signals in the
audible frquency range and synthesizes the signals into artificial speech.
USP # 4,777,529 (October 11, 1988)
Auditory Subliminal Programming System
Schultz, Richard M., et al.
Abstract: An auditory subliminal programming system includes a
subliminal message encoder that generates fixed frequency security
tones and combines them with a subliminal message signal to produce an
encoded subliminal message signal which is recorded on audio tape or
the like. A corresponding subliminal decoder/mixer is connected as part of
a user's conventional stereo system and receives as inputs an audio
program selected by the user and the encoded subliminal message. The
decoder/mixer filters the security tones, if present, from the subliminal
message and combines the message signals with selected low frequency
signals associated with enhanced relaxation and concentration to
produce a composite auditory subliminal signal. The decoder/mixer
combines the composite subliminal signal with the selected audio
program signals to form composite signals only if it detects the presence
108
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
of the security tones in the subliminal message signal. The decoder/mixer
outputs the composite signal to the audio inputs of a conventional audio
amplifier where it is amplified and broadcast by conventional audio
speakers. USP # 4,734,037 (March 29, 1988)
Message Screen
McClure, J. Patrick
Abstract: A transparent sheet is disclosed having a message thereon. The
sheet has a first side adapted to be attached facing a plate which is
normally viewed by a viewer and a second side facing the viewer. The
message is arranged to be readably intelligible from the second side but
is not liminally visible to the viewer when viewed from a normal viewing
distance from the second side under normal viewing conditions. The
message has a subliminal effect upon the viewer when viewed from the
normal viewing distance from the second side under normal viewing
conditions. A viewer can electively subject him or herself to subliminal
messages while viewing television at leisure. USP # 4,717,343 (January
5, 1988)
Method of Changing a Person's Behavior
Densky, Alan B.
Abstract: A method of conditioning a person's unconscious mind in order
to effect a desired change in the person's behavior which does not
require the services of a trained therapist. Instead the person to be
treated views a program of video pictures appearing on a screen. The
program as viewed by the person's unconscious mind acts to condition
the person's thought patterns in a manner which alters that person's
behavior in a positive way. USP # 4,699,153 (October 13, 1987)
System for Assessing Verbal Psychobiological Correlates
Shevrin, Howard, et al.
Abstract: A system for assessing psychobiological conditions of a subject
utilizes a plurality of words which are selected to be in four categories as
critical stimuli. The words are presented by a tachistoscope to the subject
in subliminal and supraliminal modes of operation. Subliminal stimulation
of the subject is achieved by presenting the selected words for an
exposure period of approximately one millisecond. The supraliminal
exposure time is approximately thirty milliseconds. Prior to stimulation, the
109
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
subject is diagnosed in accordance with conventional psychoanalytical
techniques to establish the presence and nature of a pathological
condition. The words are selected and categorized in four groups:
pleasant words, unpleasant words, words related to a diagnosed
conscious pathological condition, and words related to a diagnosed
unconscious pathological condition. The brain wave responses which are
evoked by the stimulation are collected via electrodes and analyzed in
accordance with a transinformation technique which is based on
information signal theory for establishing a probabilistic value which
corresponds to the information content of the evoked responses. USP #
4,692,118 (September 8, 1987)
Video Subconscious Display Attachment
Mould, Richard E.
Abstract: An apparatus and method for introducing messages to the
subconscious mind is disclosed, which includes a panel positioned
adjacent a television screen, with the panel having non-distractive
messages imprinted thereon, such that as the subject consciously
focuses his attention on the video screen, his subconscious mind records
the message from the panel that is within his peripheral vision. USP #
4,616,261 (October 7, 1986)
Method & Apparatus for Generating Subliminal Visual Messages
Crawford, James R., et al.
Abstract: A system for generating a subliminal message during the
display of a normal television program on a television receiver utilizes a
personal computer to generate an RF carrier modulated with video
signals encoding the subliminal message. The computer runs under the
control of an application program which stores the subliminal message
and also controls the computer to cause it to generate timing signals that
are provided to a single pole double-throw switch. The source of the
normal television program and the video output of the computer are
connected to the two switch inputs and the switch output is connected to
the television receiver antenna system. The timing signals cause the
switch to normally display the conventional television program and to
periodically switch to the computer output to generate the subliminal
message. The video output of the computer includes horizontal and
vertical synchronizing signals which are of substantially the same
frequency as the synchronizing signals incorporated within the normal
110
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
program source but of an arbitrary phase. USP # 4,573,449 (March 4,
1986)
Method for Stimulating the Falling Asleep and/or Relaxing Behavior of a
Person
Warnke, Egon F.
Abstract: A method and apparatus is provided with which a person
suffering from sleeplessness can be more easily relaxed and may more
rapidly fall asleep. In particular, sound pulses are emitted by an electroacoustic transducer, according to the cadence of which, the person
seeking to fall asleep is induced to breathe in and out over a
predetermined period of time. By suitably selecting the pulse sequence
frequency, the pitch and the amplitude of the sound pulses may be
adjusted thereby enhancing the process of falling asleep. USP #
4,508,105 (April 2, 1985)
Shadow Generating Apparatus
Whitten, Glen, et al.
Abstract ~ Disclosed is an apparatus for inducing various brain wave
patterns through visual stimulation. The apparatus comprises a pair of
spectacles or other viewing apparatus having a liquid crystal display
embedded in each lens. By repetitively activating and deactivating the
liquid crystals, shadows are generated which are perceived by the subject
individual wearing the viewing apparatus. Responding to the frequency of
shadow generation, the subject's brain is thereby induced to generate
sympathetic brain wave frequencies. The apparatus finds particular utility
in the generation of alpha waves. Because learning is enhanced when the
brain is in the alpha state, activities such as listening to tapes or lectures
and the like can be carried out with greater facility. Shadow generation is
accomplished through the use of a timing mechanism for each liquid
crystal display and the frequency for each is adjustable over a wide
range, permitting synchronous or asynchronous timing. USP # 4,395,600
(July 26, 1983)
Auditory Subliminal Message System & Method
Lundy, Rene R., et al.
Abstract: Ambient audio signals from the customer shopping area within a
store are sensed and fed to a signal processing circuit that produces a
111
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
control signal which varies with variations in the amplitude of the sensed
audio signals. A control circuit adjusts the amplitude of an auditory
subliminal anti-shoplifting message to increase with increasing
amplitudes of sensed audio signals and decrease with decreasing
amplitudes of sensed audio signals. This amplitude controlled subliminal
message may be mixed with background music and transmitted to the
shopping area. To reduce distortion of the subliminal message, its
amplitude is controlled to increase at a first rate slower than the rate of
increase of the amplitude of ambient audio signals from the area. Also,
the amplitude of the subliminal message is controlled to decrease at a
second rate faster than the first rate with decreasing ambient audio signal
amplitudes to minimize the possibility of the subliminal message
becoming supraliminal upon rapid declines in ambient audio signal
amplitudes in the area. A masking signal is provided with an amplitude
which is also controlled in response to the amplitude of sensed ambient
audio signals. This masking signal may be combined with the auditory
subliminal message to provide a composite signal fed to, and controlled
by, the control circuit. USP # 4,388,918 (June 21, 1983)
How Targeting Affects Victims’ Looks
What only a few targets realize is that their attackers not only want them to appear
mentally disturbed but also physically unappealing. I can only imagine that the
attackers receive much sick pleasure out of doing that. However, another reason for
wanting targets unattractive is to socially isolate them. Here again psychology plays a
role, as a target becomes very self-conscious about his/her looks and stays home
alone to avoid people. The methods for affecting the looks of targets are truly diabolical
and evil and demonstrate years of study of causes and effects. Here are some of the
ways that the attackers accomplish their objective of making targets unattractive.
-- Cause targets either to gain an enormous amount of weight or lose enough weight to
look emaciated. They prefer to make targets gain weight. They do this by playing loop
play tapes to the victim’s subconscious, making suggestions about food and about the
victim being hungry. They can even cause the victim’s stomach to feel empty when it is
not empty. Loop play tapes played to targets’ brains constantly urge targets to eat
sweets and greasy un-nutritious foods. The attackers even show the targets pictures of
food in their minds. Moreover, they manipulate the targets’ senses of taste and smell to
choose unhealthy foods over healthy ones. All of this is done neurologically.
112
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Recent studies also reveal that sleep deprivation causes overeating and weight gain.
The attackers have known that for eons, and they ceaselessly attempt to deprive the
target of sleep.
-- Cause burn marks and sores on a target’s face and arms, the most visible parts of
his/her body. This type of electronic harassment suggests some type of laser. I know of
several cases in which the faces and arms of very attractive women became scarred
and damaged through that process.
-- Cause wrinkles on victims’ faces. I am well preserved for a seventy-four year-old
man. Friends often remark about my lack of wrinkles. A niece noted that my forehead
had no wrinkles but was perfectly smooth. The perverted attackers set out to change
that by causing wrinkles on my forehead. Readers who are not targets will have a hard
time believing this. However, many targets can attest to the truth of that assertion.
In the spring of 2011, I noticed that my forehead seemed to be under a load of
pressure. The entire forehead felt like something was pressing on it. I knew that the
pressure was not natural but was induced by the attackers. Finally, the reason for the
pressure was revealed to me.
For months the attackers had told me through the V2K that I had a frown on my face. I
often woke at night hearing them repeating that. Then, I discovered the presence of a
loop play tape making the same statement time after time after time. I am a smiler, not a
frowner. In the morning when I get up, I hear the attackers telling me that I am frowning.
The attackers were using the power of suggestion to try to cause me to frown and thus
form wrinkles on my forehead.
To help them achieve their objective, the attackers caused constipation by restricting
the muscles in the lower part of my large intestines near the anus to prevent
defecation. At the same time, I heard the attackers repeating, “Don’t shit. You won’t be
able to shit.”
Making a target very physically uncomfortable helps the attackers to convince targets
to frown, thus causing the wrinkles. Although I am still relatively free of forehead and
other face wrinkles, the attackers are continually attempting to cause them.
-- Reshape a target’s nose by making it longer and wider. Yes, that is what I said. By
applying continual pressure on the bridge of the nose with facets of their device, the
attackers can actually cause a victim’s nose to become both longer and wider. The
principle is much the same as that of braces on teeth: the continual pressure on the
teeth, actually move the teeth. Likewise, continual pressure on the cartilage of the
nose, moves the cartilage forward and outward. The attackers often place that type of
113
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
pressure on my nose. I laugh at them and tell them that thanks to them, I’ll have a very
British nose!
-- Cause a target, usually a male, hair loss. The attackers can kill the hair roots on the
scalp using their electromagnetic and other devices by remote, causing the loss of hair
and preventing its natural re-growth.
-- Cause a target unsightly psoriasis, usually on very conspicuous places on the body,
especially the face and arms. This is different from the burn marks and sores previously
mentioned, for psoriasis covers a much larger area and gives an appearance of leprosy
or some other equally ugly skin disease. Psoriasis is one of the attackers’ favorite
induced conditions. This is done physically by whatever the device might be that the
attackers employ aided by psychological suggestion through the subconscious voices.
-- Cause the target to look worn and haggard. This is done through both physical and
neurological suggestions that deprive the target of sleep. Dark circles underneath the
eyes, wrinkles and frown lines, sunken cheeks, and pursed lips are all signs of sleep
deprivation and make the target unappealing and personally uninviting.
-- Cause targets to believe that their bodies exude offensive odors. One target from the
United Kingdom wrote that he was ashamed to go around people, for he smelled very
bad. He probably had no body odor at all. Yet, the attackers made him believe that he
stank through neurological suggestions to his mind.
-- Cause a target to lose much of his/her eyesight and thus force him/her to wear
glasses. The attackers can damage targets’ eyes through aiming pin pricks (again
perhaps fine lasers) into particular sections of the targets’ eyes. With repetitive pinpoint
precision, the attackers can cause a target nearsightedness or farsightedness or an
astigmatism in only a matter of days or weeks.
-- Cause targets to walk in a strange manner by striking pain in targets’ spinal columns.
The pain causes targets to stoop as they walk or to assume very bad posture in sitting.
-- Cause targets to neglect their personal hygiene. The attackers make targets believe
that they are seen in the shower, when they are using the bathroom, and wherever else
they might be. Targets are reluctant to disrobe because they believe that the voyeurs
are watching them; thus, they stop bathing. The attackers can also cause targets not to
bathe by making targets actually fear water. I enjoy my frequent showers, telling the
attackers to watch me all that they wish. After all, they can’t disclose what they see to
anybody except another sicko. I defy them in every possible manner.
114
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
-- Cause targets to appear odd by appearing in ball caps lined with foil and several
layers of clothes, even in warm weather, to attempt to shield themselves from the
electronic effects.
The attackers bolster this capability by continually telling the target how ugly and stupid
he or she is through both the V2K as well as the “silent” voices, damaging their selfesteem. After all, probably over ninety per cent of what the attackers do is
psychological.
The reader may give little importance to the above information about targets’
appearances. Nevertheless, appearances are very important, as they affect a target’s
sense of self-worth and his psychological outlook. The attackers do not attempt to
make targets’ unattractive simply for the fun of it. They know that if a target is made to
look or feel unattractive, that target becomes insecure and anxiety prone. Their
objective is purely psychological – to isolate the target from others and increase
anxiety. However, what targets should realize is that other people really do not care
much at all about a target’s looks as long as the target is clean and dressed in a normal
manner.
Victims Allow Targeting to Become a Way of Life
An objective of the attackers is to cause targets to focus on their targeting during every
waking moment, either in thinking about, researching it, or talking with other targets by
phone and email about it. Such is the all-consuming nature of the electronic and mind
control assault that targets mold their lives around it. Targets continually search for the
perpetrators, the methods used, and shielding that might protect them from the REA.
Doing so creates an obsession that permeates and dominates their entire life. Indeed,
their defense against REA becomes a way of life, a life style as it were.
Target friends of mine wear padded clothing, aluminum in their caps, and special socks
and stockings. Most of them try to hide those protective items; others wear them
openly, thereby making them appear mentally disturbed to unknowing viewers. They
put up shielding devices in their abodes, sometimes using metal sheeting, rubber
coverings, and thick foam-filled objects. They use a particular lighting system. They
cover electrical outlets. They place cardboard, insulated cloths, and other strange items
over the floor. Some targets use a special type of paint to cover their bedroom walls.
No shielding device to date has proved permanently effective against REA.
Many targets spend most of their waking hours writing emails and messaging about
their REA experiences and theories. I do not condemn them for that, as they work
zealously in trying to end their suffering from the cowardly perpetrators. Nevertheless,
115
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
that activity limits their ability to go on with their lives and makes that endeavor the
focal point of their lives, practically isolating themselves, just as the perpetrators seek
to do. Targets’ lives must maintain balance. Although I spend several hours a day on
targeting issues, I try to balance my life with other non-target activities.
It’s often said that when schoolteachers get together, they invariably talk about their
academic life. The same truism applies to targets of electronic and mind control
assault. Whenever targets visit each other, REA provides often the sole topic of
conversation. That is quite natural, for the only thing that many targets have in common
is their REA. In fact, REA brings together people who, were it not for that commonality,
would probably never meet.
It is impossible for targets to dismiss what is occurring to them. However, they can
control the extent to which they allow it to affect their lives. Although I think about REA
during all of my waking hours and although I get the attackers’ V2K both when I’m
awake and while I sleep, I have determined not to let that outwardly affect my life. My
house looks no different from those of non-targeted people. I do not wear bizarre items
either at home or when I leave the house. I do not continually talk about REA even with
those few friends and family members who know about it. I continue with a life style that
is normal for me.
Many targets believe that the attackers can see them when they shower and perform
their bodily functions; thus, many targets will not disrobe completely to bathe. My
attackers tell me that they see me in the bathroom, which automatically causes me to
doubt that they actually can do so since they are chronic liars. I laugh at them and tell
them, “Well, hell yes you can see me, you idiots. Anybody with eyes can see me. Here I
stand in full view!”
Instead of spending the largest part of their lives with developing or finding shielding
and contemplating REA, targets might best use that time (1) to strengthen family ties
and bonds of friendship; (2) to concentrate on their work, if they are employed; (3) to
look for work if they are not employed and are employable; (4) to engage in home
improvement projects; (5) to train their minds to concentrate on the positive elements of
life, and (6) to provide moral support to less fortunate targets. We targets must not
allow electronic stalking and mind control to become a way of life but rather only one
facet of our lives.
Targets and Non-targets
Shortly after starting my journal, I began researching the topic of REA and
communicating with many other victims. Almost invariably those victims, like I, had
116
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
ignored signs of electronic stalking and had not realized for a very long time that they
were targeted. That is one of the techniques that the stalkers use. The electronic
torture and mind control activities are “progressive.” Electronic and mind control
stalkers begin very slowly and gradually increase the intensity of the electronic and
mind control effects until finally they are too obvious for targets to ignore. Although
many of the effects are similar, they do vary from target to target. Many of the targets,
for example, do not hear the voices. Nevertheless, the voices are there. (More about
voices later.)
Targets include all races, ethnicities, both genders as well as both same-gender sex
preferences, ages, physical conditions, all sizes and weights, religions and beliefs
about religions, social backgrounds, educational backgrounds, levels of I.Q., all types
of philosophies and schools of thought, both liberals and conservatives, occupations
and professions, all incomes or degrees of wealth (excluding the very wealthy), political
thought, all attitudes toward the government, all attitudes about war and peace,
veterans and non-veterans, and others.
I have studied many cases of TIs, looking for commonalities among the targets. Here
are several possible commonalities among targets. There may be others.
• Physically-invasive medical actions. All targets have had some type of surgical
procedure (either minor or major or routine), shots and inoculations, or dental work.
That may be indicative of complicity of the medicine profession in the conspiracy of
silent torture by remote.
• Diversity. Some TIs believe that inventors and researchers working under the
auspices of the U. S. military and intelligence establishment selected them for
experiments carried out to test various neurological and perhaps biological warfare
patents and hypotheses. That belief is not farfetched. Thus, the many differences that I
find among the targets may be purposeful, for the experimenters will want a diverse
sampling of the entire U. S. population. Diversity and variation are required for the
validity of the testing. The results of the experiments must reflect and rest upon tests
covering elements of the entire population.
•Adopted targets. Quite a few targets who I know or with whom I’ve communicated are
adopted. There appears to be some experimentation being conducted on adopted
children versus natural children, probably testing the environmental versus the
hereditary theory.
117
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
•Twins. Some targets believe that experimenters are interested in how the brains work
in siblings, especially twins. If that is true, that harkens back to Mengele’s experiments
with twins in Germany before and during WWII.
Despite those possible commonalities named above, I have found no one single
common characteristic or condition among targets that stands out. The absence of a
principal commonality may be important, for it either re-enforces the idea that a
government uses the entire range of the American population for experimentation or
suggests that the attacks on targets come from more than one single source. Moreover,
it suggests that many of the targets are simply “decoys” who draw attention away from
the real targets (more about decoys in a following section).
Most of the targets are probably just ordinary law-abiding citizens who mind their own
business. However, other targets such as “whistle blowers,” dissidents, free thinkers,
Survivalists, and others may be considered threats to the system. There are probably
even those targets who pose genuine security threats. Other targets who in the past
were not security threats will become real security threats due to their torture as they
are driven unwittingly to commit crimes or commit them in desperation.
Unfortunately, many ethics-deprived citizens, particularly in the inner cities, have seen
targeting as a way of making money without working for it. Those people feign
symptoms of targeting to be declared mentally unstable. They are then provided state
funding for the mentally disabled. According to stories told by actual targets, those
pretended targets also sometimes become accomplices of the perpetrators.
There does indeed appear to be a national REA program directed against homosexuals
and lesbians in the United States, Canada, and perhaps other countries. I believe that
program is subterfuge, or deception, on the part of the powerbrokers. The
powerbrokers probably employ Radical Right attackers to harass gays to confuse and
distort the larger picture. The attackers are not aware that the real reason behind the
REA is to wipe out any dissent against the powerbrokers, who represent the U.S.
Government, or the status quo. The principal targets are the anti-government and the
anti-Zionist elements of the population.
If experimentation is indeed a reason for targeting, the powerbrokers perhaps choose
targets who they believe might have something to hide. They count on the skeletons in
the closet to keep the targets silent, a form of unspoken blackmail. A few targets have
served time in prison for non-violent crimes. Others have experimented with drugs.
Many are closet homosexuals. Those are not facts that targets likely want known. The
attackers count on that and instill further guilt to traumatize targets psychologically.
118
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Notwithstanding, I believe that the aim of the powerbrokers is to “hook” the minds of the
overwhelming portion of the American population. Despite their minds being “hooked,”
most Americans will not be affected. Most of them will never be subjected to electronic
torture and mind control, for most Americans are compliant, non-thinking, pleasure and
material seekers. Nevertheless, being hooked means that they remain at the instant
whim of the powerbrokers. With the whole population placed under that system, the
powerbrokers can pick and choose targets as they please or as the situation arises.
That FEMA has established secret concentration camps throughout the United States
is no longer simply rumor. The occupants have probably already been chosen.
REA is not peculiar to the United States. People in countries all over the world are
reporting electronic and neurological assaults. Many Western targets live in Canada
and the United Kingdom. In Asia thousands of Chinese, Indian, and Australian targets
are beginning to surface. Most African countries appear to have few targets.
Nevertheless, targets who travel to Africa will probably continue to suffer the effect of
their REA.
Strangely and perhaps suspiciously, the following Americans appear largely exempt as
a class from electronic harassment and mind control.
•Congresspersons and high ranking U. S. Government officials, including
ambassadors. Lower ranking employees and ex-employees of government, however,
are often targeted, especially “whistleblowers” and those discontented with the status
quo.
•Governors and other high ranking state-level officials.
•Clergy. However, members of Protestant Fundamentalist, Roman Catholic, Jewish,
and other churches often become targets. Some of those victims complain that their
churches may be involved in their harassment.
•Law enforcement officers. Although I have heard obliquely of police officers being
electronically assaulted, I have never actually corresponded with or read a complaint
by a law enforcement target. The exclusion also applies to prison authorities, U. S.
marshals, Border Patrol, DEA, the entire U. S. intelligence community, including the
Secret Service, sheriffs, and sheriff’s deputies.
•CEOs and very successful businesspersons.
•High ranking military officials. On the other hand, enlisted personnel are often targets.
•The medical community. I have recently learned that there are two doctors who claim
to be targeted. I have spoken with one of them. If they are genuine, they are indeed
exceptions.
119
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
•The wealthy. I have never known of a millionaire having been victimized by REA. Most
of the targets are middle-class workers, small business owners, retirees, and
sometimes financially- and socially-marginal persons.
•Judges and lawyers. The perpetrators know that judges and lawyers possess
credibility and also know the laws and would thus be able to leverage law enforcement
into action.
•Persons with considerable expertise in radio and electronics, who could perhaps
eventually figure out what device is being used and how.
There are two logical and plausible reasons why most of those particular people are
not targeted: (1) Those non-targets are a part of the conspiracy, either directly or
indirectly, and thus protected. (2) The perpetrators know that those targeted groups
would possess the intellectual credibility and the power to command investigations of
their attacks. Perhaps some members of those groups are indeed targeted but have
noticed no symptoms that reveal that fact. If they are targeted, the attackers would
make every effort not to alert them to any tell-tale signs.
Foreign countries have attempted to influence U. S. domestic and foreign policy for
many years both directly and through domestic political action committees (PACs).
Several foreign countries now have the capability to perform electronic stalking and
mind control activities for that purpose. Logically, those foreign countries will target the
following Americans: (1) the sitting president and possible candidates for the
presidency; (2) key members of Congress; (3) top U. S. military brass; (4) CEOs of
large companies, particularly those firms with defense contracts; (5) selected clergy; (6)
writers, producers, and media personnel; and (7) other influential persons. Can there
be any doubt, then, that our CIA-FBI and other intelligence services know about
electronic stalking and mind control and protect those probable targets from that
activity, especially those seen in Numbers 1-3?
Psychological Triggering
Whether targets get only organized stalking or electronic stalking and mind control,
they all report the use of words, signs, sights, smells, tastes, and other things that
“trigger” certain emotions. The attackers employ triggers as a part of their neurological
scheme. For those triggers to work, the targets first have to be sensitized, or preconditioned, to them. Pre-conditioning to those triggers is probably accomplished
through hypnosis or the subconscious voices. Triggering is purely psychological.
In my case, the attackers use names of people and places to trigger emotions. They
have also programmed particular locations within the house to trigger those emotions.
120
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Those specific locations trigger loop play tapes that are designed to evoke certain
emotions, which normally include suspicion of others, anger, doubt, hatred, sexual
thoughts, and others.
They also use trigger expressions such as “(the name of a person) is just crazy about
you.” While repeating that sentence, the attackers vibrate the private parts. They are
clearly attempting to create erotic feelings for that person, who in most cases is a good
friend or a close relative.
Some targets are triggered by colors, various forms of lights, numbers, signs and
gestures made by perp accomplices (and probably innocently by other people), certain
pictures and words on TV, car honking, and a variety of other ways. To non-targets
those triggers appear perfectly normal, as they are unaware of the frequency and
consistency of those triggers in targets’ lives. Attackers consider triggering very
important to their psychological objectives by repeating the same themes. The Nazis
used repetition to condition the German people. The triggering reminds targets that
they are indeed targeted, that they are continually monitored, and that they are
powerless to prevent or stop the harassment.
Conditioning targets to notice and react to triggering aids the attackers’ efforts to
isolate the targets, for targets become very sensitized to those triggers, making them
suspicious of strangers and even relatives and friends. Targets begin avoiding those
people or act in very odd ways around them. Thus, triggers play a psychological role in
targets’ eventual estrangement from society.
Some targets have had success in detriggering triggers using the same psychology that
the attackers employ. The targets sometimes use the triggers intentionally very
frequently to diminish the emotional effect of them. Others use psychological
“disassociation,” by telling themselves repeatedly that there is no association between
the triggers and what the triggers are supposed to do.
The Essence of Mind Control
As already stated, if a target receives remote-operated electronic effects, he probably
also receives the hidden voices and thus mind manipulation. However, he may not at
first hear those voices. Some targets never hear the voices. Nevertheless, they are
there.
Attackers “hook” targets’ minds and hear their thoughts for years before they start the
actual mind manipulation. In addition to “mining” the targets’ thoughts and watching
their activities, the perpetrators interview people who know the targets, their family
121
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
members, and their friends. The object is to reconstruct the target’s entire life, identify
all relatives, friends, and acquaintances of the target, and learn any smut and
dishonesty connected to the target to later make him feel guilt. Finally, armed with all of
the data that they have retrieved from the targets’ own minds, along with the targets’
files and records obtained from various sources, the attackers begin their assault.
Friends and relatives of the targets often unwittingly divulge information about the
targets through “friendly” conversations with the perpetrators’ accomplices. In addition,
sometimes the accomplices pose as law enforcement officers and private detectives to
intimidate people into telling all they know about targets. Actual law enforcement
officers also doubtlessly cooperate in some cases. Only with the total of this knowledge
about the target can mind control be used effectively.
Mind control follows a well established plan, based far more on psychology than on
electronic assault. There are three phases to that plan.
(1) First, is the intelligence gathering stage mentioned above. (2) Next, the attackers
condition, or sensitize, the victim by assaulting him with the various symptoms and
conditions caused by their directed energy weapons. It is during this phase that the
victim is conditioned to respond to the various codes introduced probably through
hypnotism. (3) And finally the attackers start their telepathic interrogations, induced
dreams, scripted scenarios, and other mind manipulation methods.
In the last phase, the attackers often pepper the targets with the “audible” voices (V2K),
which only the target hears. Their aim is to neutralize the victim by (1) rendering him
incapable of functioning in society, (2) causing him to commit suicide, or (3) murdering
him in planned accidents or through induced diseases such as cancer
Mind control is achieved through a combination of psychological trickery and electronic
effects. The electronic effects are largely utilized to re-enforce the psychological
aspects of mind control. Although the electronic effects are painful and sometimes even
debilitating, they are usually bearable. As long as people have control of their minds,
they can normally handle pain. On the other hand, mind control seeks to dominate both
the mind and the body of targets, to gain absolute control over those persons and
manipulate their every thought and action.
Make no mistake about it; attackers are highly trained in both psychology and
computer/electronics. Their backgrounds may not have been psychology; yet, they
have been taught how to apply it. They are probably far more adept at applying and
understanding the electronics than the psychology. However, whoever wrote the ultra122
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
secret training manual, probably a team of psychiatrists and intelligence interrogators,
were masters in psychological application.
Mind control seeks to disenfranchise the target of his ability to function through a series
of clever psychological tactics. We have already mentioned several of those. Here are
some others.
(1) Knowledge of surveillance. After a long period of observation and “mining” the
targets’ thoughts, the attackers let targets know that they are objects of electronic
surveillance. They reveal that they know intimate details of the targets. The total loss of
privacy of thought unnerves the targets and makes them still more vulnerable to other
psychological and electronic attacks.
(2) Loss of control of thought. Not only do attackers know the targets’ thoughts but they
also plant thoughts in those targets. Targets find themselves thinking of subjects and
performing acts that they ordinarily would not think or do. Those thoughts occur at
strange times. Certain thoughts and reactions occur time after time. Many of them are
sexual in nature. Targets may at first believe that those thoughts and actions are their
own and they may be somewhat puzzled by them; however, they eventually learn that
those thoughts and actions stem from subconscious suggestions made to the targets’
mind through V2K.
(3) Making the target appear crazy. Through subliminal whispering, attackers make
targets very forgetful. They forget names of people whom they know well. They forget
where they place objects. They forget to do things on their list of things-to-do. By
projecting voices, attackers convince targets that others are talking about them. All of
that makes targets think that they are losing their minds or developing Alzheimer’s.
Those same actions suggest to observers the same message. All true TIs are acutely
aware of that mind control objective.
(4) Assigning guilt. The attackers’ computer can cause targets to hear certain words
entered into the attackers’ computer whenever they watch TV or converse with others.
The words triggered usually deal with sex, violence, and other negative topics. Targets
start believing that they are actually thinking those words. That causes them guilt,
which aids the attackers in instilling and re-enforcing that very guilt.
Mind reading and subliminal talking programs leading to mind manipulation are
perfected, in full usage, and being carried out on a massive scale both in the United
States and abroad. Nevertheless, many areas of the targets’ mind still remain to be
probed and studied. Involuntary brain mapping and neurological experiments
concerning those areas doubtlessly continue.
123
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Searching for Shielding and Remedies
After one discovers that he has become “hooked,” he naturally grasps at ways to ward
off the electronic and psychological abuse and neutralize the source. Targets calls that
“shielding.” That effort becomes costly. Most targets are simply plain, low- to midincome people, and dealing with electronic assault and mind control places a great
strain on their financial resources. The attackers know this and encourage targets to
spend their money on useless gadgets and remedies.
The actions that I took to find a way to detect and neutralize whatever causes the
electronic effects and voices (mind control) are too numerous to describe in detail. I will
only summarize some of those actions.
-- Services. (1) Paid $300 to a private detective to look for a bug in my vehicle and (2)
$750 to another P.I. to provide information about a person I had reason to suspect. (3)
Had about $3,000 of dental work performed to re-do that which had been done abroad.
(4) Had x-rays and a CT Scan made. This totaled well over $5,000. (5) Paid $1,200 for
analysis of DVR recordings. (6) Paid $250 for a “psychiatric evaluation.”
-- Gadgets. (1) Installed an NCH Tone Generator program in my computer. (2) Bought
and wore a small stone medallion that was said to afford some kind of protection. (3)
Purchased a Walkman-type device called the Jammer, which was useless. (4) Bought a
Spy Audio Jammer that produced static supposed to keep outsiders from listening to
telephone conversations. (5) Purchased a dozen small objects composed of metal
shavings and crystals held together with heavy glue called Orgone Blasters. (6)
Ordered and used a small device called the BIOPRO “Home Harmonizer,” whose
manufacturer should be jailed for fraud. (7) Bought and used two devices, the RF Bug
Detector and the Zap Checker, Model ZC185, to detect and measure
electromagnetism. (8) Bought an expensive radio scanner that I thought might interfere
with the attackers’ frequencies. (9) Bought and used neodymium magnets. (10) Bought
a 2-way mirror to keep in front of PC monitor. (1) Many other objects, programs, and
devices. I spent several thousand dollars on those items and materials. (11) Tried
wearing a “cap” invented by a TI, which was supposed to lessen the V2K. That
invention was provided free of charge for testing. (12) Bought a TV-advertised remedy
for tinnitus at $160 (at this writing, the treatment has not arrived). (13) Tried a free trial
version of a “cap” composed of small metal discs believed to counter the REA. It did
not. (14) Bought a product called Quietus, which is supposed to eliminate tinnitus. It
cost $179 and did nothing. (15) Purchased a small digital voice recorder to record the
environment around me, $118, and a LessEMF generator that is supposed to reduce
electromagnetism, $190.
124
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
-- Experiments. (1) Walked the outside perimeter of my house with small radio. If it lost
its station and started buzzing, it was supposed to mean that my attack was land
based. The stations remained clear. (2) Used ear plugs. (3) Exchanged a mattress with
springs for one without them. (4) Encased head with aluminum foil at night and wore a
ball cap lined with foil. (5) Turned several radios on at the same time tuned to different
frequencies. (6) Coated a cotton cloth with peanut butter, wrapped it in plastic, and
wore it over my head at night. (7) Took massive amounts of recommended vitamins and
minerals. (8) Took for about nine months a chelating substance called Detoxamin,
which cost over $1,000. (9) Constructed a Faraday Cage of chicken wire with an
outside copper grounding rod. (10) Made and used a blanket made of heavy aluminum
foil to sleep underneath. (11) Placed aluminum foil over the bedroom windows. (12)
Used two 3 volt watch batteries, the positive side taped to one ear and the negative
side, to the other ear, at night. (13) Deliberately exposed myself to lightning during
electrical storms. (14) Tried recommended isometric exercises. (15) Turned off the
main breaker at night, cutting off all electricity within the house. (16) Placed ceramic
tiles underneath my mattress. (17) Used Dramamine tablets daily. (18) Bought Orgone
blasters. (19) Bought copper Brillo pads, unwound them, and wore the copper mesh
under a cap. It accomplished nothing. (20) Bought a headband with small microphones
to mute the V2K while I slept, $30.
Those efforts and expenditures yielded little or no result. My advice to other targets is
“save your time and money and treat yourself to a night out on the town.” Several web
sites advertise electronic and other objects and machines that are supposed to
neutralize the electronic effects and mind control assault. In large part, those sellers
are opportunists who are making a load of money scamming desperate victims.
Instead, I have learned to use my mind to counter the electronic effects. I urge all
targets to experiment with using their own minds against their attackers attempting to
capture their minds. Scientists tell us that humans use only about ten per cent of their
brains. Targets must learn to develop parts of the remaining ninety per cent. Although
the electronic harassment no longer bothers me, the subliminal voices endure. I have
not yet found any satisfactory way of neutralizing those voices. Nevertheless, they
bother me less every day.
After reading about targets rushing to the emergency room time after time because of
the attackers’ electronic torture, I determined early in my harassment situation that I
would not follow that path. Instead, I deal with the electronic assault and mind control
and defy the attackers. My guiding principle is “Whatever happens happens.” Be sure
that a breakthrough will occur that exposes how electronic stalking and mind control
125
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
operates and the evil persons behind them. As I often telepathically tell my attackers,
“The secret will come out, you bastards. Nothing lasts forever. And time is on my side.”
The Perpetrators of REA
Many targets believe that the U.S. Government targets U. S. citizens with electronic
stalking and mind control for experimental purposes. Although I do not doubt for a
second that the government engages in REA, either directly or indirectly, I do not
believe that in my case it is necessarily the U.S. Government. Here is why I say that. I
have intentionally conveyed radical and terrorist thoughts to my attackers that would
have gotten me arrested for questioning if they worked with the U.S. Government.
For example, I have “talked” (through synthetic telepathy) to my attackers about
blowing up cell towers, bridges, and other infrastructure, about joining the Hezbollah or
al Qaeda, about detonating a bomb at a law enforcement convention, and many other
alarming illegal and terrorist activities. If my attackers were government agents, they
would be obligated to pass on that information, leading to my arrest under the Patriot
Act. Yet, I have never been approached by law enforcement or U. S. intelligence about
those “plans.”
My research leads me to believe that my attackers work for Israel with the
acquiescence of my own government, for the attackers enjoy the protection of all levels
of law enforcement and government. The actual attackers may be a pro-Israel Christian
Fundamentalist group, a pro-Israel PAC or “benevolent society,” American agents who
willingly perform Israel's missions in the United States, or other elements of a Radical
Right. Israeli agents and their accomplices operate within the United States with almost
complete freedom and impunity.
Targets often form an idea about who their perpetrators by thinking back and
“connecting the dots.” That is what I did. Still, our opinions cannot be supported by fact,
which is obviously the aim of the attackers and their powerbrokers. In actuality, we
have little proof about the actual perpetrators of REA, or the perps, and how they
operate. What we think that we know is only conjecture before the courts.
Nevertheless, logic, research, and experience lead targets to their own conclusions.
Here are mine.
I believe that probably two different groups are involved in “hooking” the minds of
targets and carrying out the REA on those targets. Those groups operate on two
different levels.
126
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
(1) The first group represents national and perhaps international leadership, or the
powerbrokers. This group controls the device(s) and methods used for that purpose
and keep those devices and methods as a closely guarded secret. That probably
means that the high-tech and sophisticated “hooking” process belongs to the
intelligence agencies and the military or to those who are somehow connected with
their operations.
The FBI knows about REA yet does nothing to stop it, so it must necessarily be a part
of the first group. The FBI field offices doubtlessly form the nuclei for the fusion centers.
Several cities and towns fall within the region that comprises each fusion center. The
FBI ensures that the target is “hooked” and then turns him over to the nearest or most
feasible group of attackers along with the target’s files. The attackers are encouraged
to add to that information and use the totality of that data in their mind control (V2K)
activities. The head of each group of attackers answers to the field office in whose
jurisdiction his group falls. The attackers may be local or they may be thousands of
miles away.
The CIA is also doubtlessly involved in the first group. On March 2, 2010, a story came
out in the Washington Times that suggests that the CIA is a loosely-run intelligence
operations riddled with corruption. In the article, a CIA communications-technology
specialist named Todd Brandon Fehrmann was trying to sell stolen high-tech CIA
equipment to a private individual. Those state-of-the-art items included “several
handheld spectrum analyzers — high-technology devices with military applications that
can measure and check cell-phone signals and equipment . . . .” The article quoted
Anritsu, the manufacturer of the devices, as explaining that “the analyzers have several
uses, including measuring cell phone base-station signals, mapping signal strength to
determine where to place antennas, base stations and signal repeaters.” That type
equipment could very obviously be used for electronic stalking and mind control.
The members of the first group play only a leadership role and are very few in number.
The device(s) and methods used to “hook” targets’ brains to torture and exert mind
control over those targets are a closely guarded secret. Only high-level Federal
officials in the intelligence agencies, high executive branch officials, and the military
would have knowledge of and control over those device(s) and methods and be able to
keep them secret over a long period of time. Although most of the decision-making
personnel and many of the mid-level employees and lower level personnel in those
organizations know about the electronic and mind control devices and methods, they
do not know the precise instruments or how they work.
127
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
We do not yet know what devices and methods the masterminds use to “hook” targets.
In my case, the constant factor is the tinnitus, which, since the inception of the current
EMSC, has never faltered. Although the tone occasionally changes, the ringing is
always present. Thus, I believe that there is a direct connection between the device
that hooks – and keeps the target hooked – and the tinnitus. Even the voices that I get
24/7 and the jolts and vibrations and other physical effects are not continual; yet, the
tinnitus is.
However, after a target is “hooked,” he has to be accessed somehow by the people
who actually carry out the electronic and mind control assault. The target probably
possesses some object or substance in his body peculiar to that person that allows the
second group, or the attackers, to locate him. That characteristic may be an
identification number, much like objects scanned in stores. Once hooked, the targets
remain hooked. In fact, the attackers probably cannot change the frequency and almost
certainly cannot cut off the frequency. Only the first group can do that.
Those persons who control the device(s) and methods used in electronic and mind
control assault are the “masterminds,” who probably also select many of the targets
found on the “hit list.” In addition to targets that they place on the hit list, they probably
add other targets recommended by big business, “friendly” foreign countries, heads of
religious groups, high-ranking politicians, and other parties. We know far less about
the masterminds than we do the second group, which actually employs the REA.
However, make no mistake about it. The same person, persons, organization, or
government unit that have the power to hook a target also have the finances and
personnel to keep that target hooked for life. I know of no target who has been freed
from his REA torture. That continuity hints that an organization rather than an individual
calls the shots, as an organization can carry out a sustained action over a very long
period of time. My attackers have told me, “We’ve spent a lot of money on you.”
(2) The second group consists of the rank-and-file conspirators, including the actual
attackers, who may be (a) ex-military and military-connected personnel and (b) ex-law
enforcement and their extra-oficio employees on the state and local levels. The second
group performs the actual work on the targets once those targets are hooked. Their
activity depends mainly on the adroit use of computers and their software by the
attackers as well as in providing the V2K.
The second group makes few decisions. It is charged with the responsibility of carrying
out the electronic and mind control activities. It employs the actual electronic effects
and mind control assaults on targets after the masterminds “hook” those targets. This
128
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
group is very large in number and varied in its make-up and modus operandi. Let us
examine some of those possible second groups, or attackers.
-- Fusion Centers
In the last years of the Bush administration, the Department of Homeland Security
created “Fusion Centers” that “share information and intelligence [with state and local
organizations] within their jurisdictions as well as with the federal government.” At this
time (2009), there are about sixty centers and plans to create still others. Those sixty
centers probably coincide with the sixty FBI field offices.
The heads of the field offices probably select the sub-groups that serve as attackers.
Those sub-groups then assign the actual individual attackers. Only the heads of those
groups have contact with the authorities. The attackers themselves do not
communicate with law enforcement and intelligence agents.
The word “fusion” means melting together. The Centers do indeed fuse units widely
dispersed over the entire national territory of the United States of America. Big Brother
has you covered. DHS intelligence officers operate in Fusion Centers in twenty-four
states, including my state of Louisiana, and also in the District of Columbia. Plans call
for more than a hundred federal professionals at those centers by the end of this year
(2009). Much of the communication between the DHS and the centers is classified
“secret.”
-- Infragard Units
Michael Rothschild’s article in the February issue of The Progressive called “FBI
Deputizes Business” identifies businesses as possible perpetrators of electronic torture
and mind control. The article states that the FBI formed a group of businesses called
the Infragard in 1996 under the Clinton administration (1992-2000) ostensibly to stem
and PRE-EMPT any perceived terrorist threat within the United States. The meaning of
“terrorist threat” is at best very vague and gives those essentially FBI-sponsored
vigilante groups the legal right to attack American citizens with absolute immunity. Law
enforcement not only permits those groups to operate but probably also assists them.
A series of programs called “Conspiracy Theories” with Jesse Ventura aired over
TruTV in December, 2009 and January, 2010 exposing many shady dealings of the U.
S. Government. One of those early January programs dealt with the Infragard. Probably
to offset much public criticism of that organization due to the “Conspiracy Theories,” the
Department of Justice started a web page on the Infragard on January 14, 2010. As
one might imagine, the Infraguard operates under the FBI field offices as do the fusion
129
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
centers. The Infragard web site has a link that is supposed to pull up the locations of
the local chapters of the Infragard; however, when I tried to access those locations, it
would not allow me to pull up that page.
One of the pages of the Infragard Web site outlines its Code of Ethics. Of the seven
points made in the Code of Ethics, two of them state that members will “not knowingly
be a part of any illegal or improper activities.” The last point reads: “Protect and respect
the privacy rights [underscoring is mine], civil rights, and physical and intellectual
property rights of others.” Thus, if Infragard members are involved in electronic stalking
and mind control activites, they clearly violate their own code of ethics. Interestingly,
there is no penalty, such as expulsion or being legally charged with a crime, if members
violate the code. Thus, the code is meaningless.
I did some online research on the Infragard. Their web page encouraged readers to
contact them, so I did. Here is my email.
Sirs: I have been a target of electronic stalking and mind control activities carried out by unknown persons
by remote for many years. Many fellow targets believe that members of Intragard may participate in those
illegal activities although their code of ethics requires them to respect the privacy and civil rights of other
citizens. Can you state categorically that neither the Infragard nor its members conduct domestic spying
and electronic harassment on other American citizens? Thank you.
As the reader might imagine, I never heard back from the Infragard.
Bush recognized the Infragard in his post-9/11 attack on democracy as a key element
in quelling any opposition or suspected opposition to his regime within the United
States. FBI Director Robert Mueller called those civilian groups the “first line of
defense.” It does not require a molecular physicist to imagine the abuses that are
certain to accompany any such para-law enforcement program.
Many of those Infragard “businesses” are Fortune 500 firms, including companies that
hold defense contracts with the U. S. Government. Telecommunications providers such
as AT&T, Verizon, and others, the U. S. Postal Service, UPS, FedEx, and the satellite
TV providers also are often named by targets as perpetrator organizations. Other
businesses are small independently-owned companies.
The tentacles of the Infragard organizations reach into the smallest towns and even
into rural communities. In sparsely populated areas such as many parts of the Deep
South, Infragard probably depends on small firms and businesses owned by ultraconservatives and even “approved” individuals to spy on and exert mind control upon
selected targets. The Infragard’s weapons include monitoring targets’ computers and
telephonic communication, physically spying on and “investigating” those targets,
130
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
stalking them, interfering with their mail, monitoring the targets’ business and business
contacts, entering the targets’ homes in their absence, and vandalizing their property.
The Infragard and the Fusion Centers count on local groups and law enforcement to
support the government’s increasing surveillance of and interference with American
citizens’ everyday activities. Those organizations along with the FBI and other
intelligence and law enforcement operatives represent an overwhelming presence of
Big Brother in the lives of all Americans. Although surveillance alone does not
constitute electronic and mind control assault, it would be a simple matter to take
constant surveillance to the next step in parceling targets out to vigilante-type groups of
trained attackers for physical and neurological torture.
The FBI itself simply does not have to manpower to provide agents as attackers.
Moreover, the government has absolutely nothing to gain from torturing people
electronically. The FBI probably monitors only the most serious “terrorist” threats and
turns over other targets on the “watch list” to its cooperating civilian groups.
Psychological studies clearly prove that many people welcome an opportunity to stalk
and perform their evil on helpless targets. Perhaps they get that opportunity through
“helping” the FBI and the intelligence community. Those citizen criminals doubtlessly
get a high from their sudden empowerment to employ voyeurism, electronic torture, and
mind control on others by remote with complete anonymity and even protected by law
enforcement.
For the sake of argument, let us consider that the FBI is NOT involved in electronic
torture and mind control but knows about it. If the FBI is unwilling to apprehend the
criminals who perform the REA, they might at least warn the American public about that
activity as they often do about identity theft and other crimes that are not nearly as
serious. The fact that they do not advise Americans of that criminal activity further
clearly indicates that the FBI has something to hide and is in fact deeply immersed in
that odious felony against American citizens on American soil.
-- Department of Homeland Security
The DHS heads the fusion centers. It is probably also deeply involved in the Infraguard
program. It doubtlessly also uses FEMA for its domestic spying.
The DHS organizational chart shows that it has a military advisor, an Intelligence and
Analysis section, a Science and Technology section, and a National Cyber Security
Center. The DHS thus contains all the units that targets know figure somehow in our
electronic stalking and mind control.
131
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Now for the part that should jolt awake every American who cherishes his freedom of
privacy, choice, and expression: One of the mandates of the DHS is to develop and
deploy “anti-terrorism technologies by providing liability protections for providers.” In
other words, the scientists and other inventors and makers of equipment and know-how
for carrying out electronic and mind control activities cannot be sued or prosecuted.
How very convenient. Despite that presumed immunity, future court cases will decide
against it.
One need only look at the Department of Homeland Security web site to learn their
objectives and capabilities. Here are some excerpts from that site in Homeland
Security’s own words (the italics are mine).
Homeland Security harnesses our nation's scientific and technological resources to
provide Federal, state, and local officials with the technology and capabilities to protect
the homeland.
Research is designed to counter threats to the homeland, both by evolutionary
improvements to current capabilities and development of revolutionary, new
capabilities.
Homeland Security’s Advanced Research Project Agency “engages industry,
academia, government, and other sectors in innovative research and development,
rapid prototyping, and technology transfer to meet operational needs.”
The Department partners with universities to bring together the nation's best experts
and focus its most talented researchers on a variety of threats that include agricultural,
chemical, biological, nuclear and radiological, explosive and cyber terrorism, as well as
the behavioral aspects of terrorism. [This could mean the REA.]
-- Neighborhood Watch/Community Watch.
Those and similar local organizations have also been increasingly used for gathering
information about fellow Americans. Contrary to their intended purposes, those groups
sometimes operate as para-law enforcement bodies to carry out their own
interpretations of the laws. With the passage of The Patriot Act, those sub-groups find
it ever easy to stalk persons who do not fit their ideas of the “norm.”
-- Christian Fundamentalists
I am thoroughly convinced that Christian Fundamentalists participate in electronic
stalking and mind control. However, I do not know whether those so-called Christians
are acting alone or whether the churches themselves are actually involved. I’ve
corresponded with hundreds of other targets, and in a great many of their cases, they
mention a Christian Fundamentalist preacher who they believe figures somehow in
132
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
their ordeals. The aim of that group appears to be a “social reconfiguration,” in which
every American is made to subscribe to their version of Judeo-Christian principles.
That so-called Christian element may also be involved in my situation. Although ample
evidence leads me to believe that the Israelis and pro-Israeli Intelligence agents first
targeted me, they have probably long since turned me over to an extremist Right Wing
group, probably religious nut cases, for monitoring me with the full knowledge of the
pro-Israel FBI and perhaps unwitting but compliant law enforcement. The Israelis are
masters at getting others to do their dirty work.
In recalling past events and connecting the dots concerning my targeting, I
remembered an incident in the fall of 2001 that could connect the Fundamentalists to
my present targeting. Here is the story. A former high school classmate later became a
“born again Christian” and a lay Baptist preacher. Our high school group held a class
reunion in 2000, and that classmate began including me on a list of email recipients of
a religious-oriented newsletter that he sent out. A pharmacist, he had become
financially successful and he often traveled to Russia and other countries in his work as
a lay-preacher. The recipients of his newsletter were mainly very religious church
people, some of whom were well-off and well-connected.
At first I did not mind getting those round-robin email messages. They usually dealt with
the classmate’s trips abroad. Although the content of his newsletter showed a very
religious bias and, to me, indicated a narrow-mindedness on the part of the writer, that
did not particularly bother me. Rather, I was pleased that the classmate had become
financially comfortable and had something in his life that he enjoyed doing.
The attacks on September 11, 2001 changed what otherwise might have continued as
simply a communications link between the classmate and me. His next newsletter after
that infamous event included an inflammatory and extremely anti-Moslem diatribe from
one of his sons condemning the 9/11 attackers and Moslems in general. I felt
compelled to answer that statement, for not to answer suggested that I agreed with his
beliefs.
Thus, for the first time after being included on the list, I wrote back, saying that though I
abhorred the deaths caused by the attacks, I could understand the motive that drove
the attackers. I explained that the 9/11 attackers saw us as the enemy because of a
shortsighted U.S. foreign policy that always favored Israel against the Arabs. I stated
further that only Israel stood to gain from the 9/11 attacks, as it would cause us to go to
war against the Arabs and Moslems. That, of course, happened.
133
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
I received a vicious reply from that son in which he practically equated me with
Benedict Arnold. We engaged in two or three sharp exchanges that were circulated to
all of the names on the long mailing list. Many of the addressees were well-known
Christians, some of them with ties to high-ranking office holders and other government
officials. The writer’s father, my old classmate, who obviously sided with his son’s
views, accused me of using his email newsletter to push my own agenda, while it
appeared to me the opposite. I reminded him that I had not asked to be placed on his
list of recipients but that as long as I was there I had to speak out against rhetoric that
was hateful, misleading, and uninformed. I asked him to remove my name from his
email addressees.
A short while after that I began noticing signs that my computer had been hacked. I
received an email over an additional email account that I used from a person using a
different given name but the same family name. He left no doubt who he was. He
wanted me to know that he had illegal access to my computer. Yet, he was supposedly
a devout Christian. Of course, it is also possible that my real attackers made it appear
that that particular person was doing the hacking.
At any rate, my classmate and his family are “born again” Christian Fundamentalists,
who do not distinguish today’s Israelis from the Old Testament Israelites. They identify
very closely with Israel. Like other Fundamentalist religious groups, they hold seminars
in Israel at institutions that they establish there, and they host group trips to the Holy
Land. They believe that the Israelis are God’s “chosen people.”
I do not mean to imply that the classmate and his family may be my attackers, as I had
already been targeted long before the 9/11 incident. However, that people of the
Religious Right align themselves closely with Israel means, in my opinion, that they
could be used by that country for its own purposes, even in the USA. Moreover, they
are the type to report to the FBI an email such as mine, which blamed 9/11 on the US’s
acquiescence to and support of Israel’s schemes and policies against the Arabs. They
did not need to report it, however, for I am very open in my criticism of US subservience
to Israel.
Evangelist Pat Robertson is one of the best known spokespersons for Israel and also
one of Israel’s most devoted supporters. He even made a trip to Israel when it invaded
Lebanon in 2007 to provide encouragement to the Israeli army. Readers may also
recall that Robertson suggested that President Hugo Chavez of Venezuela be
assassinated. Nut cases such as Robertson abound on every hand. George W. Bush is
also a “born again Christian.” Many targets trace their REA to the period 2000-2008,
the Bush administration years.
134
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Every facet of society in the United States of America falls under the influence of
Judeo-Christian theology. If you do not believe that, watch programs such as Jeopardy
on TV. References to events in the Bible make up a large percentage of the questions
asked. Most of our given names are of Biblical origin. Towns, counties, communities,
and churches take their names from those found in the Bible. Much of our legal system
is based on Biblical law. Yet, we condemn Moslems for their theocracies. With an
overwhelming percentage of the population Christian, it is little wonder that the
powerbrokers take advantage of the Fundamentalists in furthering their aims.
The Fundamentalists seemingly consider themselves more patriotic than most
American citizens. Although I had been monitored probably by pro-Israeli government
entities for years, my doubtful patriotism and anti-Zionist views conveyed through my
emails in the classmate’s newsletter might have also triggered the inclusion of the
Christian Fundamentalists in my REA. As tools of Israel, they probably would not find
targeting other Americans for electronic and mind control assault inconsistent with their
religious beliefs.
Some researchers believe that the NSA’s aim is to “Christianize” the population through
the voices conducted in REA. I believe that conversion to Christianity is only a part of
the overall plan to make all Americans conformists and to wipe out non-conformists.
Supposedly, Christians will be more compliant with and less questioning of what the
powerbrokers do and the wars that they wage. Indeed, my attackers continually ply me
with Christian sayings and Bible references, scream at me that I am “going to hell,” tell
me that the Israelis are my friends, a real joke, and show me holographic images of
Jesus. That is either sickness or deception. It very well may be the latter, for when I
exasperate the attackers, which I often do, they lose their “Christian” demeanor to call
me a “son-of-a-bitch” and curse and rant. I tell them that they are about as Christian as
an earthworm.
The Radical Right
Mary Mapes is a former CBS producer who broke the story about the Abu Ghraib
torture and other abuses. She was fired by CBS because of the Far Right backlash
after “60 Minutes” aired her story about then-President George W. Bush's draft dodging
during the Vietnam War. [She could have also mentioned Dick Cheney’s five
deferments to avoid serving in Vietnam.] As a result of her expose, right wing Bush
supporters – clearly an oxymoron – waged a letter writing and internet blogging
campaign probably unparalleled since the advent of the internet. Mary called that group
The Radical Right.
135
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Such campaigns are not spontaneous; they are orchestrated. I believe that Mary was
correct about a Radical Right. However, I also believe that it is used as a tool of the
powerbrokers who seek to control this country. The powerbrokers are probably
unconcerned by many of the causes that the Radical Right stand for. Yet, they meld
those elements, some of which are even at odds with other members of the group, into
a formidable pressure group for the powerbrokers' ends.
Some, or perhaps even most of the various groups, have legitimate purposes. Many, or
perhaps most of them, may be well meaning. However, they are duped or mislead into
doing what they perceive is best for the United States of America by the powerbrokers,
who do not have the best interests of the USA or its people at heart.
I believe that the Radical Right represents many socio-economic and religious
components, composed of the following: (1) many of the Christian Fundamentalist
churches, (2) Pro-Lifers, including many members of the Roman Catholic Church; (3)
the businesses that participate in the InfraGard, including the media and the banking
industry; (4) law enforcement on every level; (5) the intelligence community, both
domestic and foreign; (6) many PACs and civic organizations; and (7) higher echelons
of all three branches of government on the Federal, state, and local levels, including
the state attorneys general. That does not, of course, mean that every member of those
groups represents the Radical Right. Although the membership includes Republicans,
Democrats, Independents, and other political parties, the guiding principles of the
Republican Party probably dominate.
An anomaly is the university system. Universities are basically liberal in their
philosophies. However, they submit to the powerbrokers and the Radical Right due to
the Federal funding that they usually receive from one avenue or another. Moreover,
many university science laboratories work in conjunction with the powerbrokers in
providing research furthering biological and neurological warfare. More than eighty
universities and research institutes took part in the MKULTRA program from the 1950s
into the 1970s.
In my opinion, the Radical Right probably comprises easily a fourth of the US
population. Several characteristics of the Radical Right give it power. First of all, it
exercises control over the American society through the influence of the executive,
judicial, and legislative processes. Secondly, it is highly organized. And thirdly, it
reaches into the farthest corners of the national territory. The aims of the powerbrokers
may not necessarily represent the aims of many groups of the Radical Right;
nevertheless, the powerbrokers largely call the shots.
The powerbrokers behind the Radical Right decide who the friends and foes of the US
are, and they also decide when, where, and how we fight our almost continuous wars.
136
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
They manipulate the stock market and control the Federal Reserve Bank. They make
our laws, including, for example, the Patriot Act. They determine what we watch on TV,
what we buy and sell, and how much of our income we pay in taxes.
Those same powerbrokers also decide who actually fights our continuous wars. Years
ago the powerbrokers had Congress to pass laws outlawing conscription. Today the
U.S. Armed Forces is now completely “voluntary.” What does that mean? It means that
only young men from the poor and the lower middle classes, many of them Latinos and
other ethnicities, volunteer for service and thus fight those wars. A “volunteer” army
eliminates the powerbrokers’ family members from service, exactly what it was intended
to do.
From a TI perspective, it appears that the overall aim of the powerbrokers and their
Radical Right is to fashion the US into its own view of a Judeo-Christian society. That
means eliminating all freethinkers, whistle blowers, and liberal elements who pose a
threat to those views. Conformity is their final objective. There is to be no dissent.
However, since the US still supposedly operates under a time-honored Constitution,
the Radical Right has to pursue its goals in an oblique manner not inconsistent with the
written guarantees of that Constitution; thus, the advent of organized stalking and
electronic stalking and mind control activities by unseen persons using unknown
devices by remote that increasing numbers of Americans endure and that others face.
A facet of that objective appears to be a type of “social cleansing.” In addition to those
targets already named, other persons engaging in family planning and abortion, in
alternative life styles, in the drug culture, in liberal causes, and ex-cons and those who
are seen as hopelessly disadvantaged, uneducated, and financially dependent are
deemed “expendables.” I suspect that the entire American population is undergoing
systematic targeting by the powerbrokers to accomplish their objective. At their whim
and order, any citizen can find himself on the “expendable” list and subjected to
relentless electronic torture and mind control, the ultimate aim of which is his complete
neutralization, including death.
The Radical Right organizations appear to emphasize the recruitment of members who
are young, educated, and technically gifted. They especially look for members who
possess computer skills, a knowledge of telephone and other communications, and a
proficiency in electronics. Although not requisites, members of the Radical Right are
more likely than not middle-class white males who are Christians or perhaps Jews.
Others are not necessarily excluded but probably find that they are subjected to greater
scrutiny than other members.
137
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Four young men who recently (January, 2010) attempted to compromise Senator Mary
Landrieu's communications system in her New Orleans office probably typify the
members who are recruited by the Radical Right groups. The men, all in their midtwenties, have close ties to powerful Republicans, and two of them have connections
with Israel. One of the young men, who had performed ex-oficio services for the CIA,
had spent time in Israel. The four lawbreakers probably do not consider themselves
either Rightists or Radicals. Indeed, if asked about their political leanings, they would
probably call themselves Conservatives or Moderates.
In the Radical Right's twisted concept of Utopian society, the family unit is the basis. I
believe that is one of the reasons why the preponderance of REA targets, including
many elderly people and divorcees, are single. Moreover, single people and those
living alone are more vulnerable to the powerbrokers' electronic and neurological
weapons and probably more easily managed.
Once those “undesirables” are hooked, the powerbrokers seek to either brand them as
mentally incapable or cause them to commit suicide. In either case, they are
neutralized. If either one or both of those efforts fail, the victim, or target, will be
hounded until he loses his job or livelihood, becomes financially insolvent, and bereft of
options concerning his future. At that point, once prostrated, if the target is considered
recoverable and worth the effort, he will undergo a sustained “re-education” program
through electronic stalking and mind control methods.
The recent economic crash may not have been altogether unforeseen, unplanned, and
unpreventable. The crash plunged millions of middle-class Americans suddenly into
bankruptcy and financial ruin. Imagine the opportunities presented to the powerbrokers
either to neutralize or re-educate many of those people who currently do not subscribe
to the Judeo-Christian concepts of the Radical Right.
My attackers often tell me subliminally, “That hardheaded son-of-a-bitch does not
understand what we're doing.” I reply subliminally, “Oh, yes I do understand what
you're trying to do, you sorry bastards. I understand all too well. That is why I live to
bring you sacks of shit down.”
I intend to be one of those incorrigible subjects who will not bend under any
circumstances. The Great Spirit accepts me for who I am. That is who I intend to remain
– for as long as I live. I know that I am an obstacle to their objective, and I am very
proud of that fact.
I have already learned how to ward off the worst of the attackers' electronic attacks; I
hope to earn soon how to eliminate the V2K. I want to be among those who finally
expose the cowardly and evil electronic stalking and mind control apparatus and bring
138
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
it crashing down with a thunderous thud on the heads of the attackers. That will most
definitely happen. I often tell the attackers, “Time is on MY side.”
A “Master Plan”
One morning in early 2010, the attackers said something to me through their synthetic
telepathy about a “master plan.” As usual, I laughed at them and ridiculed them, telling
them that I had no interest in a master plan. One of the attackers whom I call Shitface
insisted, “You don’t understand. YOU are a part of that master plan.” I laughed again
and replied, “I also have a master plan, and you are NOT a part of it.”
The attackers were probably engaging in their usual deception and lying when they
talked about a master plan. On the other hand, there may be a group or groups in the
United States that seek to establish a sick version of Utopia in which many people will
be excluded. Electronic stalking and mind control may be the vehicle for the genocide
required to establish that homogeneous society. If that is correct, the master plan will
almost certainly be a United States of America governed by the Radical Right’s JudeoChristian teachings.
Does that sound too right winged to be true? Not really. I know Evangelicals who, I am
sure, would welcome the creation of a Fundamentalist Christian-type government
theocracy in the United States similar to those in the Islamic republics. You probably
do, also. Is there a movement afoot to put such a master plan into effect? If so, such a
theocracy would almost certainly exclude Moslems, Buddhists, atheists, agnostics, and
perhaps Roman Catholics and Orthodox Jews on religious pretexts. On the social level,
it would probably also exclude divorcees, lesbians, homosexuals, welfare recipients,
the very poor, social activists, and any other person who poses a threat to their
intended master plan.
Dual Electronic Stalking Systems
I believe that the U. S. Government does target Americans for experiments and other
reasons. Indeed much existing and emerging information supports that belief. However,
after many years of victimizing Americans through the military, intelligence community,
the FBI and other Federal agencies, perhaps the penal system, and probably approved
research institutes, the powerbrokers may have lost control of that secret means and
methods. Today those device(s) and methods have probably fallen into the hands of
other elements who pursue their own agendas. Thus, there is a dual, or parallel,
system of electronic stalking and mind control that pervades the USA, on the one hand
the U.S. Government and on the other hand, rogue elements of various types.
139
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Moreover, I believe that high officials in the U.S. Government “approve” various people
to be “sold” or let out to various groups, companies, and even countries. This is not an
official government action but one made by top persons in the government privy to top
secret projects. Those whose names are on the secret list can be experimented upon,
tortured, or otherwise neutralized.
Use your reasoning ability. Why do the FBI and other law enforcement and intelligence
agencies refuse to investigate targets’ complaints of electronic stalking and mind
control? I suggest that they cannot investigate targets' claims of REA without taking the
risk of exposing their own program of REA. Thus, the governmental powerbrokers
instruct law enforcement, state attorneys-general, and others not to interfere. In the
meantime, the non-government forces' use of electronic stalking and mind control has
proliferated. Today various non-government groups and organizations probably
cooperate loosely with each other to carry out their own objectives and to help each
other using the secret device(s) and methods.
The non-government groups are probably Far Rightists. As U. S. demographics change
and minorities become more visible, as gay rights and abortion rights groups get
increasing recognition and power, as generational have-nots become more restive, as
white collar and other criminals get more daring, as the disparity between rich and poor
grows wider, radical groups have formed to seek to maintain the status quo. It is always
the ultra-conservatives and radical rightists who wish to slow down social, political,
religious, and economic change.
Despite the oratory skills and the liberal leanings of the current president, it is an
inescapable fact that the executive and upper echelons of government represent the
powerbrokers. In addition, the non-governmental abusers of Americans' rights also
represent the powerbrokers. Any way that a researcher views the situation, he will
probably conclude that the powerbrokers that represent one group or another sponsor
both the government REA program and the non-government rogue REA programs. This
means that the proliferation of electronic stalking and mind control can be viewed as a
conflict of social classes, with the shrinking middle class and the growing lower income
strata pitted against the powerbrokers and those whom they approve.
The Executive Branch and the Constitution
If the U.S. Government is involved in remote-delivered electronic physical and
neurological torture, it must be carried out through the executive branch. Most
Americans today know that American civil and human rights have deteriorated in recent
years. The erosion of those rights appears to be in direct proportion to the growth of
140
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
power of the executive branch. This paper does not purport to provide a history of the
evolution of our Constitutional government; however, I believe that I can make the case
that the Constitutional checks and balances system contrived by our Founding Fathers
no longer works. Despite the best efforts of the founders of this nation to institute a
government composed of three equal branches, the executive branch by the beginning
of this century and this millennium had managed to achieve dominance over the other
two. There is no longer a balance of power. The executive branch far outweighs the
other two branches.
The executive branch contains some powerful elements that have allowed it to gain
dominance over the remainder of the government: The President heads the Armed
Forces and through his appointees supervises the intelligence and Federal law
enforcement agencies, which include offices that operate in secrecy with no
supervision from Congress; he liaises with heads of foreign governments, including the
United Nations; and he interacts directly with universities, research institutes, and
manufacturers and contractors for the government. He also is the boss of a plethora of
unelected personnel that run the government regardless of what party is in power
(although Civil Service discourages the patronage system, it also builds and
perpetuates power).
In recent years, the President’s power to pardon has become a powerful tool of that
branch. The framers of the Constitution intended that power of the president to be used
to pardon those who had not taken up arms against Great Britain or those who had
actually fought on the side of the Mother Country (Tories). However, since that period,
successive presidents have seized upon that power to pardon common criminals and
white collar criminals, thus using it as a political tool.
The size of the legislative and judicial branches and their aides has remained relatively
constant. On the other hand, the executive branch has grown into an insatiable
monster, employing millions of people, either directly or indirectly, in scores of
agencies, bureaus, and offices. The executive branch is today one of the largest
employers in the United States.
The takeover of the executive branch did not happen overnight. The powerbrokers
have very often used war or the threat of war as a pretext that allowed that branch to
rise above the remaining two branches and to reduce or eliminate rights guaranteed to
Americans under the Bill of Rights. The attack on the Twin Towers caused Congress to
give George W. Bush unprecedented powers. Once again, this paper is not a primer on
American rights. However, to make my case that presidents have striven to strengthen
the executive branch and curtail American rights, I offer a few illustrative points about
several chief executives.
141
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Woodrow Wilson (1912-1920)
• Started a secret group called MI-8, or the Black Chamber, the forerunner of the
National Security Agency (NSA). That organization spied on “friends and foes alike.”
• During WWI, Congress passed the Espionage Act in 1917 and the Sedition Act in
1918 to discourage opposition to the war. In its September 2006 internet edition, the
UT [University of Texas at Austin] Watch called those acts “the most serious attacks on
the civil liberties of Americans since the short-lived Alien and Sedition Acts of 1798.”
UT further states: Wilson tried to strengthen the Espionage Act with a provision giving
broad censorship powers directly to the president.
• Wilson allowed his postmaster general to use “his new censorship powers to
suppress all mail that was socialist, anti-British, pro-Irish, or that in any other way
might, in his view, have threatened the war effort.”
• Wilson established The Creel Committee on Public Information, which asked all
Americans to "report the man who . . . cries for peace, or belittles our efforts to win the
war." Send their names to the Justice Department in Washington.”
• A 1995 UT Watch report sums up the Wilson administration’s American rights record:
“After World War I, the Wilson administration's attacks on civil liberties increased, now
with anticommunism as the excuse. Neither before nor since these campaigns has the
United States come closer to being a police state.* That summation was written, of
course, before the events of September 11, 2001.
Franklin Roosevelt (1932-1945)
• As early as 1939, Roosevelt allowed British agents to wiretap Americans who were
believed to be aiding the Nazi cause.” (The War Years: Part 1, The Failure of the FBI)
• Afraid that the U.S. would be drawn into the war in Europe, Congress passed the
Neutrality Act. Yet, despite the intentions of Congress, FDR conspired with Winston
Churchill to undermine the Congressional act and restrict American rights.
• Once the U.S. entered the conflict, Roosevelt issued Executive Order 9066, which
incarcerated Japanese citizens. The wording on that order carefully avoided its real
purpose, stating that the Armed Forces could designate military zones "from which any
or all persons may be excluded."
• Later, Roosevelt inspired the formation of the National Committee for Religious
Recovery, which allied business and religion against the threat of Communism (thus,
providing a precedent for President Clinton’s Infragard).
• Roosevelt’s Director of the FBI J. Edgar Hoover put specified American citizens under
surveillance and created secret files on many citizens.
142
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
• Approved the development of the Atomic Bomb, a secret kept from even his vice
president as well members of Congress.
Harry Truman (1945-1952)
• Created the National Security Agency, believed by many targets to be the
government unit responsible for most of the electronic stalking and mind control.
William J. Clinton (1992-2000)
• Established the Infragard, using businesses and other Americans to spy on
Americans.
George W. Bush (2000-2008)
Little needs to be said about the usurpation of our rights under Bush. Reeling from the
surprise attacks of September 11, 2001, the legislative branch, the Congress,
capitulated to the executive branch when it passed the Patriot Act, giving the President
unprecedented and unrestrained powers. The language of that act was vague enough
to allow the President total leeway in waging the so-called War on Terror. There was
not one single limitation on the President’s power in those statutes.
For almost five years, under the ubiquitous Patriot Act, Bush’s team acted legally in
carrying out their illegal activities. Then on August 17, 2006, a lone and little-known
United States District Court judge challenged his power. Without going into the
circumstances, I shall simply quote from Judge Anna Diggs Taylor’s decision, as seen
in Anthony D. Romero’s In Defense of Our America: “It was never the intent of the
framers [of the Constitution] to give the president such unfettered control, particularly
when his actions blatantly disregard the parameters clearly enumerated in the Bill of
Rights. The three separate branches of government were developed as a check and
balance for one another.” Judge Taylor ruled that not only did wiretapping violate the
principle of the separation of powers but it also clearly conflicted with Amendments I
and IV.
The judge’s ruling was aimed at the presidency but it applied to all areas of law
enforcement on all levels of government. Several of the Amendments of the Bill of
Rights deal with violation of individual and personal rights under the Patriot Act: I
(freedom of speech), II (freedom from unlawful search), IV (full faith and credit), V (due
process of law), VI (accused to be informed of the nature of his crime), VII (trial by jury
under “the rules of common law”), VIII (cruel and unusual punishment), IX (other rights
not spelled out are not to be abridged). Among the latter would be the freedom of
143
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
privacy of thought, of which targets who receive the attackers’ mind control effects have
been totally deprived. The Supreme Court and other courts have remained strangely
mute in defense of our personal rights.
In December, 2005, Bush addressed the nation on that issue, acknowledging that
activity. Understandably, Attorney General Alberto Gonzales vigorously defended the
administration’s illegally spying on Americans. Since then, little has changed. In effect,
the executive branch stood down the judicial branch and won. It is not that the
Constitution has failed; it is that it has been ignored and undermined by power-hungry
factions both inside and outside the Federal Government.
Judge Taylor’s decision had no effect on the excesses of the Bush administration. Two
years after Judge Taylor’s “cease and desist” order, Bush on July 17, 2007, signed an
Executive Order that allows Federal authorities to seize assets of dissenting citizens
who "directly or indirectly" hinder Bush’s Iraq War agenda. If Bush’s tactics against war
protestors were not a sufficient threat to American rights, on October 23, 2007, the
House of Representatives passed legislation called “The Homegrown Terrorism
Prevention Act,” which allows law enforcement to arrest individuals whom they suspect
hold radical ideas BEFORE they “turn violent.” With powers that broad, it is not difficult
to perceive that they also allow using high-tech surveillance and neurological weaponry
on those targets to determine whether they are violent or about to turn violent.
Subsequent legislation such as the Cybersecurity Act of 2009, which gives the
executive branch the authority to spy on citizens’ email and other communication, has
given Bush’s successor increasing power. Under President Obama, the takeover of
Americans’ personal rights is complete. The executive branch is winner over the other
two branches when it pertains to the “protection” of American rights.
In civics class many years ago, I learned that the executive branch only enforced the
laws passed by the legislative branch and interpreted by the judicial branch. Yet, many
of our personal rights have been curtailed merely by “executive orders.” Although I am
not a Constitutional lawyer, it appears that executive orders can only apply to the
executive branch; otherwise, they encroach upon the powers granted to the other two
branches of government. Yet, the president continues to churn out “executive orders”
that have comprehensive applications.
All Presidents apparently believe that the American people should trust them in taking
the necessary actions to protect them. We have trusted them. The result is that we
have traded the protection of our bodies for the loss of our rights. It is ironic that my
attackers tell me subliminally on a daily basis, “Trust us.” Yeah, sure.
144
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
The Actual Attackers
We can, at this point, only imagine what kind of persons make up the attackers. Here is
my concept of those persons. The attackers themselves are only trained hirelings. They
do not know the intricacies of how targets are hooked; they only know how to carry out
the techniques of electronic torture and mind control on the targets. If attackers work
under the aegis of the FBI, as many targets believe, they probably will have security
clearances and will be sworn to secrecy. That probably means that if the perpetrators
use civilians, those civilians are retired law enforcement officers, ex-military, and exand retired local, state, and Federal and state government employees. The civilians will
probably be deputized as Federal Marshals, Special Agents, or given some such title.
The attackers who think that they control my life have told me subliminally that they are
protected. Indeed, under the Patriot Act, those deputies would not be subject to
prosecution. However, once tested before the court, that provision of the Patriot Act
will almost certainly be struck down. People cannot be deputized to break the law
before the fact on peers who have not been charged with a crime. The test case will
probably go to the Federal District Court or even to the Supreme Court before it is
finally decided against the attackers. That may be the break that targets look for in
determining who is doing the REA and how.
Handling targeted individuals has probably become an underground occupation.
Attackers are selected on the basis of their proven loyalty to the status quo (ex-military
and ex-police), potential years of service (although probably retired, the attackers must
be young enough to produce for a number of years), their various professional qualities
and capabilities (specialists in computers and electronics, agents with previous
psychological operations, or psyche ops, experience, and telecommunications
engineers), and their psychological profiles. In some cases, religious leaders may be
selected for their Right Wing views and then trained and sworn to secrecy. The FBI has
shown that it uses those right wingers for its purposes.
I believe that the attackers’ superiors provide them with complete biographies of the
targets before the assailants begin their attacks. In that manner, the attackers know the
strengths and weaknesses of their prey. As the attackers focus on the victims with their
remote device(s) and thus read the minds of the targets, they learn still more about the
victims. They add those details to the biographies.
The attackers probably do not work casually in their off-hours; their work is full time.
Why do I say that? Well, because each shift of attackers has to advise the other shifts
about what they did to and learned about the target and what the target’s actions and
reactions were. That requires much coordination among the shifts. The off-duty shifts
145
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
must either listen to the recordings or watch the videos of the preceding shifts, or
otherwise be briefed, so that no gap will occur in the continual psychological
harassment of the victims.
Nevertheless, they will sometimes goof. For example, knowing how close I am to my
little granddaughter – I babysat her the first year of her life -- my attackers continually
tried for months to convince me through the V2K that my son, her father, was molesting
her. Then, months later, another shift of attackers told me that my son was going to
heaven but I was not! Some inconsistency! So, despite their pile of knowledge about
the targets, the attackers’ work is full of imperfections.
Through our two-way subliminal communication, I call the attackers “the f—k ups.” One
of the attackers recently told me that I had cost them “a lot of money.” I laughed and
told them I was only beginning, that I was not only going to break them but was also
going to bring them down.
Attackers for the most part are of only average intelligence – and sometimes far below
average – and largely uninformed citizens. They are probably recruited from Far Right
groups, people who in their twisted minds that they are somehow aiding the USA, or
from ex- types who do it for the money. Although the attackers are paid for their
services, they perform their sadistic activities with fervor. Most of them have probably
been duped into believing that they are performing a public service in carrying out their
criminal activities.
In my particular case, the attackers are obviously of Deep South origin and possess
very limited intellectual capacity. If they are not from my locality, they are from a very
similar locality. Whenever I ridicule them mercilessly, which is frequent, they very often
retort in childish manners. They cannot digest what I say fast enough to reply quickly
and cleverly. Perhaps they believe that since they are the unseen attackers, they have
a decided advantage over me. Indeed they do. However, I go about my life in the same
way that I always have without letting their electronic and neurological outwardly affect
my life.
When attackers are selected and hired, they are advised that their job is for life. They
take an oath, which includes swearing not to divulge their operations at any date and
giving their complete fidelity to the “system.” They are permanent employees in the
most literal sense. Thus, some of the attackers who began their work decades ago will
probably already be in their seventies by now, perhaps even in their eighties. Since it is
very difficult for attackers to do their work without their spouses’ knowledge, the
spouses are also very often hired as attackers. In other words, there are almost
146
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
certainly many husband and wife teams of attackers. I believe that entire dysfunctional
families may be recruited as attackers.
The attackers’ earlier experience and their training after their selection prepare them to
carry out their work systematically and perfunctorily without any touch of human
emotions. Their work is work. Like murder-for-hire killers, the attackers carry out their
assignments. Allowing any emotion or empathy for their targets to enter into their work
would emasculate their mission, which is to neutralize the target totally – one way or
another.
The attackers must necessarily work in teams, and the members of those teams will not
change, for they depend on continuity to capitalize on their knowledge of the target -his contacts, his business affairs, his sexual activities, his behavior pattern, and his
thoughts. A team will consist of at least six attackers working probably three eight-hour
shifts. In rare cases, there may be only one handler per shift using recorded tapes and
other programs to make it appear that there are many persons involved. In many cases,
there are a larger total number of attackers working shorter shifts of four to six hours
each.
I now feel certain that the groups of attackers, at least in my case, probably operate in
shifts from several areas many miles apart. One of those groups, probably a local one,
has the major responsibility for harassing me. All of the groups of attackers probably
watch my activities and communicate with each other perhaps by closed circuit TV, cell
phone, or some other means. The several groups of attackers are chosen to cover
every phase of a target’s life. Through interviews with people who know my family and
from extracting my memories, they have intimate knowledge of the rural community in
which I was raised, which is located in an adjoining parish, and they also know about
my entire family.
There is also at least one member of my attackers who is Spanish speaking, as I
speak, read, and write Spanish. The Spanish used in that group is not translated
Spanish but spoken Spanish. It would make sense in my case for one group to know
Spanish, for I lived for years in Latin America. The attackers give each target an
identification code name. Because of my familiarity with Latin America, mine is
“Estados Unidos” (United States). They may also be trying to make me believe that my
attackers are Hispanics.
To cover all aspects of my life, which the attackers have admirably done – I reluctantly
give the evildoers that credit – would require groups familiar with: the community in
which I was born and spent the first fourteen years of my life; with the Washington, DC
metropolitan area; with my university studies; with my career and the colleagues with
147
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
whom I worked; with my military record; and with the countries in which I had lived and
the languages used in those countries. The attackers with that knowledge could not
possibly be gathered into a single group. Therefore, I am reasonably sure that several
groups act in consonance by remote. The coverage provided by the round-the-clock
handler groups probably explains why I get no obvious neighborhood stalking.
Using deception, the attackers will attempt to convince the target that the REA network
is far broader and more influential than it actually is. Their voice simulations and
recordings give targets the perception that at least three or four attackers are present
at all times; whereas, oftentimes probably a single individual is manipulating the
simulated voices. Moreover, if the target receives the voice-to-skull (V2K) talking from
the attackers, the attackers will take credit for any negative event that happens in the
everyday life of the target though many of those actions are simply natural
occurrences. Using the computer software, the attackers will also try to appear far more
intelligent and informed than they actually are.
Rapid communication is indispensable to the attackers and their accomplices. That
probably means that they use cell phones or walkie-talkies, which make the attackers
very mobile. In addition, the attackers and their helpers make heavy use of the internet
for their criminal activities. A photo is made of the target before or early in the
harassment process, and that photo is circulated in round-robin fashion over the
internet by email. Everybody who uses the internet knows how that works: Photos of
the targets, including pictures of his vehicle and house, are sent by accomplices to all
of the addresses on their email accounts. Those addressees in turn send the same
message to their list of addresses. It exponentially widens until literally thousands of
people have received the message with the photos. That internet network works
marvelously for the attackers, for wherever the target goes, he is recognized and
harassed.
There is a psychological impetus behind the group effort to harass the target. Many of
the participants, or secondary accomplices, are persons just “having a little fun. Many
people who often use the internet and who have time on their hands seize the
opportunity to participate in a harassment scheme. It is exciting for them. It gives them
power. To some participants, such an action stimulates them sexually. They do not
ponder the effect that their actions might have on the target. Moreover, the attackers
will have disseminated scandalous rumors about the target along with the photos.
Enlisting unwitting accomplices in an internet harassment scheme is far easier than
most targets imagine.
My attackers have attempted through their 24/7 voices, or V2K, to make me believe
that they represent particular groups. First, they pretended to be and continue to
148
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
pretend to be Christians. In addition, they have purported to be extortionists, law
enforcement, vigilantes, the military, various ethnic groups, political groups, and other
people and organizations. The attackers often tell targets that they are CIA or FBI. If
that happens, it is absolutely false. If the CIA and FBI were involved in electronic
stalking and mind control, they most certainly would not divulge that to the targets.
Attackers utilize their mind control methods at maximum efficiency at night once targets
go to sleep. Thus, I believe that the best-educated and most knowledgeable attackers
and those who are most adroit at using psychology probably operate on the night shift.
The day-shift attackers are probably much more proficient in dealing with matters
involving the professions, trades, and occupations, i.e., everyday activities of the
target, than they are at exercising mind control.
It is very important for all attackers to know everything possible about the target. Thus,
members of the handler team will know each other well, and they will discuss the
targets among themselves. Attackers may even consist of husband and wife teams or
several family members working together. There is evidence that the attackers can
operate from several different locations in consonance with each other; however, if that
is true, one of the attackers in one of the locations must operate the super computer
that performs much of their electronic and mind control functions.
The attackers’ psychological harassment can be effective only if they also know what
family members and friends think about the targets. Therefore, they may indeed also
“hook” the minds of those people surrounding the targets. If not, they will directly and
indirectly devise ways to talk with those family members and friends to pry information
from them. I have seen much evidence of that from things that the attackers have said.
One of the attackers who does the V2K on me is a female whose voice sounds much
farther away than the others. That, of course, is probably deception through sound
distortion. Moreover, it may be a recording, as the attackers very often play recordings.
The attackers may not necessarily know all of the accomplices who assist them in
neighborhood stalking and other activities. The accomplices are probably contacted by
cell phones using codes to advise them of the target’s location and to advise them of
their tasks. The female voice may not even be female at all due to the capability of the
attackers to simulate voices.
The attackers’ operational sites will probably differ from locality to locality, depending
on the identity of the attackers. If renegade or regular law enforcement are directly
involved, secure departments of police stations and sheriff’s offices may be utilized. As
law enforcement facilities operate 24/7, round-the-clock activities by attackers would go
unnoticed. If individuals outside of law enforcement work as attackers, their operational
149
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
sites may be located in safe sections of churches, businesses, communications
providers’ facilities, and private residences. There is growing evidence that the
attackers are linked by cell phones and other communicating devices; thus, they would
not have to have a particular attack site.
Every TI knows that his attackers are professionally trained in the application of their
electronic torture and mind control methods. The entire electronic stalking and mind
control scheme took years in the making and involved experts in many fields. Attackers
will be completely aware of the importance of psychology in torturing the victim. It is
abundantly clear that psychologists and psychiatrists had a hand in developing those
skills and training those attackers. It is known that that group assisted the CIA and the
US military in developing interrogation and torture methods used against Guantánamo
detainees, a program approved by The American Psychological Association.
Attackers are well trained in operating the various mind control and electronic torture
computer programs, in psychology and human behavior, and in interrogation
techniques. They are also briefed about the targets and either provided written
information about the targets or allowed to take notes on them. Details used by
attackers in mind control on the targets would be impossible to remember without
recording them in some manner. Information revealed by attackers show clearly that
they have access to government and other files on the targets.
I’ve recently come to believe that at least one of the attackers is either in the medical
field or has been given some training in physiology. I can feel some device (call it laser
for the moment) probing certain areas. The operator is looking for the sciatic nerve,
various optic nerves, the urethra of the penis, certain organs, particular muscles, and
other key areas on the body. That person probably uses a type of dial or pointer to
ferret out the exact spot on the target’s body that he wants to affect.
The attackers use a combination of specialized computer software along with
subliminal talking to accomplish the mind control portion of REA. Neither the computer
software nor the subliminal talking alone can conduct mind control. First, the software
programs must be employed for the attackers to detect lying, force targets to tell the
truth, register their emotions, and “soften” the targets. Then, with the aid of the
software, the attackers interrogate and continually ply their vicious hateful drivel
through the voices, or V2K. Continuity is very important in carrying out mind control.
The idea is to give the targets no respite from those activities. Their aim is to wear them
down. They often do, and many of the targets commit suicide.
Once the targets’ conditioning has been achieved, the attackers begin “mining” the
victims’ thoughts and memories by asking questions, staging holographic scenarios for
150
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
the target to act out, projecting pictures and images before the target to pick his
thoughts about them, inducing dreams in which the target interacts with known and
unknown other people, listening to his natural thoughts, and eavesdropping on his
conversations with others.
Through local accomplices, the attackers will locate old friends and relatives of the
target and through guile and misrepresentation will extract information about the target.
No area or time period in the target’s life is left untouched by the interrogators. The
attackers will “mine” those thoughts and memories for the slightest bit of information
that will allow the attackers to manipulate that individual. The attackers, or
interrogators, are trained to apply psychology .
A paper on the NSA’s interrogation techniques gives an example that explains the
interrogation process and mind probing much better than I.
The subliminal message delivered to you could be "Mr. Jones, imagine that
the IRS were auditing your taxes. Think back to a time you have cheated on
your taxes and that you are worried that the IRS might find out in an audit. If
you have never cheated on your taxes and have nothing to fear you will feel
an itch on your right-hand ear lobe that will go away when you scratch it. If you
can be caught by an IRS audit, you will feel an itch in the left nostril of your nose
that will disappear after you itch [sic] it twice." From your perspective, you have
just had a fleeting thought about your past tax returns and had an innocent itch
(thought label). To the NSA On-Duty Officer (ODO), or interrogator, you have
just communicated to him whether you have ever: 1) cheated on your taxes,
and 2) If the IRS could catch you in an audit.
If the target’s thoughts indicate that he has cheated on his taxes, the interrogator will
delve more deeply into the matter to determine the item, date, and amount. The next
step is for the interrogators to pass that information to a higher agent, who will advise
higher-up officials in the IRS. That official in turn will order the appropriate IRS office to
audit the target’s tax return for that year. As a result, the target is likely to be heavily
penalized and perhaps even imprisoned for tax evasion. That target has then been
discredited by having to pay a large sum to the IRS or being made a felon. The target is
effectively neutralized.
In applying their neurological methods, the attackers will tell the targets stories about
events in their early lives (which they probably gather primarily from the targets’ own
thoughts). They will know every friend and acquaintance of the target, every relative,
and every enemy. They will know the target’s foibles and his virtues, his prejudices and
his ideals, his likes and dislikes, and his fears and strengths; his religious beliefs and
how strongly he holds those beliefs; how he feels about the government and the
government’s leaders; his income, his investments, his net worth, the banks that he
151
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
uses, his bank account balances down to the penny, his usual expenditures, including
his utility and other accounts, his credit card numbers and the card balances and
payments, and how he spends his money.
They will also have copies of the target’s FBI and Army records, his education records
from Kindergarten through high school, and his college/university transcripts. They will
know his sexual preference, his sexual habits, his sexual hang-ups, his sexual potency
or impotency, and any sexual indiscretions. They will know what social clubs, political
organizations, bars, restaurants, and churches that the target attends. They will know
the people whom he visits and who visit him.
Attackers are not chosen at random. Although computers can mimic accents to a
certain extent, the effected speech will not be perfectly authentic. Thus, the attackers
chosen will have total familiarity with the target’s area and will know the sayings, the
expressions, and the vernacular of that locality. My attackers speak with an
exaggerated Deep South accent. That attackers fit that mode does not necessarily
mean that they will still live in and operate from that area; their locations are yet to be
determined.
The backgrounds and educational levels of the attackers will also often approximate
those of the target. I come from a rural background; thus, my attackers have a general
knowledge of farming, crops, and rural life. They also have knowledge of carpentry,
plumbing, drywall preparation, electricity, and other skills, as I am often engaged in
home improvement projects. However, the attackers will try to give the target the
impression that they know much more about his environment and work than they
actually do. Attackers operate in pairs or in small groups working in shifts to
complement each other in covering the entire spectrum of the target’s everyday world.
Knowing that I appreciate politeness, the attackers use politeness to persuade me to
obey their commands. Sometimes to make me remain in bed longer in the morning, the
attackers play a synthetic telepathy recording of a female saying, “Please do not get
up. Please remain in bed a while longer.” The recording sounds like an automated
announcement on a public transit, for example, “Please remain seated until the train
comes to a complete stop.” One of them also often says, “I’d appreciate it if you’d sleep
late tomorrow morning.”
The attackers can actually cause somatic illnesses in targets through the power of
suggestion. I woke early one morning to hear the female attacker repeating, “Chest
cold. Chest cold. You’re going to have a chest cold.” If a target is unaware of those
voices, in all likelihood he will develop a chest cold due to the power of suggestion.
152
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
However, being able to hear the attackers wards off those psychologically-induced
somatic illnesses. I did not get a chest cold.
The people who carry out mind control through the voices will attempt to convince the
targets that they are far greater in number than they actually are and more politically
connected than they actually are. In early 2010, the attackers told me that I was going
to be served a warrant by the local authorities. I told them that I had done nothing to
receive a warrant, so let them come.
On another occasion, they told me that they were going to send the “Death Squad” later
that night. I told them, “Send those bastards on.” I made a joke out of it, telling them
that I was going to leave the outside doors unlocked that night because the members of
the “Death Squad” would otherwise be too dumb to get inside. I did indeed leave the
doors unlocked and showed the attackers before I retired that they were unlocked. .
The attackers are psychopathic criminals who break many laws. Here are some of
those criminal acts for which someday they will stand trial: (1) stalking with malicious
intent, (2) physical and psychological harassment, (3) coercion (in attempting to make
the victim do things that he/she does not want to do with their mind control methods),
(4) psychological and virtual rape, (5) breaking and entering (which they often do to
intimidate the victims by unlocking locked doors, turning back clocks, moving items in
rooms, hiding other items, etc.), (6) burglary and theft (which they commit when they
enter a victim’s home and take items to confuse and disorient the victim), (7) recording
a victim’s conversations without his/her consent, (8) voyeurism (through their ability to
view the victim), (9) assault and battery (by using electric shock, etc. against the
victims), (10) slander (by circulating rumors and stories about their victims), (11) libel
(when those rumors and stories are put into print in the form of emails, etc), (12)
computer hacking, (13) phone tapping, (14) first degree murder (when a victim suffers a
fatal car crash because of sleep deprivation), and (15) attempted murder (when their
plans do not succeed), (16) in many cases, assisting a suicide, (17) torture, and (18)
acts of terrorism. In addition, the attackers break many FCC laws regulating
communication and the use of frequencies and the air ways.
When the secret of electronic stalking and mind control is finally known and the
criminals behind it brought to justice, the powerbrokers will attempt to use the Patriot
Act and other Executive Orders and legislation to protect the attackers. They will not be
successful. The courts will find that no government employee, nobody working for the
government, nor any other individual, regardless of his job, can receive immunity from
breaking the laws. Former Nazi concentration camp guards have unsuccessfully made
the argument before the court that they were only acting under orders.
153
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Once the system that employs electronic stalking and mind control comes crashing
down, the attackers and their known accomplices will become “the fall guys.” It will
probably take several years to charge and convict them. In the meantime, the
powerbrokers will be making their plans. Convicting the higher-ups will be much more
difficult.
To Dialogue or Not to Dialogue (with Your Attackers)
Many targets who receive the V2K, or the voices, and have the ability to respond to the
attackers do not do so. They believe that communicating with the attackers somehow
makes it easier for the attackers to access their thoughts and manipulate those
thoughts. That may be true; however, no proof exists for that idea. Each target who
gets the V2K must decide whether he should dialogue with the attackers or not.
I do communicate with the attackers using synthetic telepathy, as I want to encourage
them to talk so that I can pick up clues about their identity. In addition, I get a large
amount of satisfaction in vilifying the attackers in language that would embarrass
Howard Stern. Although the attackers employ continual deception, they still leave hints
about their locations and identities. I often record their remarks in my journal and study
them for clues to their identity and location.
By verbally sparring with the attackers, I have gleaned much information by
remembering and recording what they say and analyzing it. I may have misinterpreted
some of that information; nevertheless, I feel that most of my conclusions are correct. I
have learned that the attackers
-- are truly inherently evil;
-- have Deep South roots, although I am not fooled by their fake Gomer Pyle and
Minnie Pearl accents; I listen closely to how the attackers pronounce words, the
grammar that they use, and how they say something. On various occasions, my
attackers have misused past participles (for example, have drank) and pronounced the
word sheriff as shurf (typically Southern and perhaps Mid-Western rural)..
-- probably come from or are only one generation away from rural USA;
-- have a familiarity with the various trades;
-- are augmented by others on weekends (perhaps for their entertainment);
154
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
-- possess software that allows them to make one of those persons or recordings of a
person appear to be talking at a distance (although that person is not distant);
-- use their V2K voices on both the conscious and subconscious levels (I caveat this
statement by admitting that some of the subconscious voices may be pre-recorded and
played from a distance);
-- seek to induce anxiety as a very high priority;
-- have access to my various personnel files, including my military record;
-- pretend to portray the U. S., Israel, and Judeo-Christianity in the most favorable light;
-- have been in contact with friends and relatives that knew my family years ago or with
accomplices who knew them;
-- are funded and sponsored by an organization, most probably from the Radical Right,
that probably works for a foreign country. They do NOT represent the United States
Government although leaders in the government appear to know about them and
protect them by not investigating;
-- use their physical harassment to trigger responses and enhance their neurological
objectives;
-- must manipulate some type of device during their physical harassment (for as they
talk, they sound distracted, as if they are adjusting or controlling some type of
instrument);
-- are not quick witted;
-- work in shifts;
-- work in teams of from one to three persons, using prerecorded voices and loop-play
tapes in addition to their own real-time simulated voices;
-- have received basic training in the application of psychology although they perform
poorly;
-- follow an agenda that is probably political rather than socio-religious and financial;
-- have only very limited influence among the middle- and high-income strata of society;
155
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
-- procure their accomplices primarily from the low income and the very low income
strata of society;
-- have limited formal education and most of their education is technical in nature;
-- possess poorly developed verbal skills;
-- are mainly middle-aged although there are younger and older members of the group
and accomplices;
-- know each other well and are perhaps in some cases husband and wife teams;
-- are not in the I. Q. range of rocket engineers (smile);
-- are highly frustrated by their inability to exploit what they doubtlessly believe to be
my vulnerable points;
-- are awed by my prowess in turning their elementary psychology back on them;
-- attempt to destroy my belief in and reliance on The Great Spirit and instead make me
conform to the Christians’ Jesus Christ and their version of God;
-- seek to achieve a sick version of behavior modification;
-- lie consistently about everything (even when they know that I will soon find out the
truth) to distract, deceive, and induce anxiety.
Thus, although some targets disagree with me, I would encourage targets to dialogue
with their attackers. Targets have little to lose, as the attackers know what they think
anyway. Targets can play the same game that the attackers play by drawing them into
conversational topics that reveal information about themselves. Yes, the attackers will
attempt deception at every turn, but they are only human. They often let down their
guard and divulge information unwittingly.
I not only dialogue with the attackers to gather clues to their identity but I also use it to
turn their use of basic psychology back upon them. Here is an example. They often ask
me how old I am. That question is designed to make me very conscious of my age,
seventy-three, which they believe will remind me of my date with mortality. By doing so,
they seek to induce anxiety. It does not happen. Instead, I ask them the same question
followed by a statement such as, “At your ages, your shitty health conditions, and your
156
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
frustration at not being able to control me, you could have a fatal heart attack or a
debilitating stroke at just any moment.” I continue with, “See what I mean? Time is on
my side. I get healthier, stronger, and keener minded every day while you (censored)
suffer every ailment known to sub-humans.”
My targeting has led me to develop a very colorful vocabulary, which I use only with the
attackers, whom I refer to as “the attackers,” or “the pervs.” They sometimes tell me,
“You didn’t used to use that dirty language.” I reply, “I didn’t used to know you rotten
sacks of s—t, either.” They are correct. My language used to be gentlemanly. I was
often referred to as the true Southern gentleman. My new expanded vocabulary
probably comes as a result of (1) the attackers’ computerized neurological programs
that cause me to think in negative terms as well as (2) my conscious attempt to express
my utter contempt for the attackers and what they do.
In the English language, expressions such as “Leave me alone” simply do not send the
same message as, “F—k off, you pools of buzzard puke.” Some targets may believe
that in using such language I have allowed the attackers to bring out the worst in me.
On the contrary, I call it an effective psychological defense mechanism. As I often tell
the attackers, “I don’t know why you m----- f------s have targeted me and it probably
doesn’t matter. The Great Spirit accepts me exactly the way I am – language, character
defects, political and social views, and all. So, f—k yourselves.”
I am the youngest of four children in my family. The oldest child, my brother, died in
1997 at seventy-four. My older sister is eighty-six and the younger sister, seventy-eight.
The attackers continually whisper that my eighty-six year old sister “wants” me.
Naturally they are suggesting sex. They also tell me that my son “wants” me. That could
be nothing but sexual in content. There is little defense against vile, warped, cowardly,
remote-delivered V2K whispers like those except retorts such as I have mentioned.
The Use of Hypnotism
Hypnotic suggestions definitely play a role in the mind control portion of REA. The CIA
and FBI have long been interested in the use of hypnotism for mind control purposes.
We know that hypnotism can be performed by indirect means such as television and
music and can also be administered while a target sleeps. It is very likely that early in
the surveillance stage the attackers or somebody working with them perform hypnotism
on the target that causes the target to react in a predetermined manner to certain posthypnotic codes. The attackers then later use those codes through their subliminal
talking to the target’s subconscious that trigger the target’s post-hypnotic actions and
reactions.
157
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Probably from 50% to 75% of the communication from the attackers in my case
involves some form of code. For code to function as intended, the target has to have
been instructed beforehand about how the code is supposed to affect him. The posthypnotic codes will be contained within normal-sounding statements and words spoken
through V2K to targets. In my case, for example, the attackers through synthetic
telepathy make code statements such as “I see you” or “I hear you,” which is intended
to open up my mind to the attackers’ questions and mind control activities.
Without hypnosis, or some similar hypnosis-type method, the attackers’ functions and
effectiveness would be greatly reduced, for they could only listen to a target’s thoughts
and not be able to “mine” those thoughts. Certain “trigger” words and expressions
represent post-hypnotic commands to the target. When he hears those trigger words,
he knows to cooperate with the attackers’ questioning and interrogations. He had to
have been previously conditioned about the meanings of those trigger words;
otherwise, those command codes would fall meaningless on the target’s consciousness
and sub-consciousness.
Here is my idea about how hypnotism works. Early in a victim’s targeting, a hypnotist
will convince the target’s subconscious to make him respond to the attackers’ questions
in the future. The hypnotist will make up a story that sounds plausible to the target’s
psyche. For example, he will tell the target that he is a storehouse of knowledge that
could be used to save mankind. The target believes himself to be the savior of the
human species, and he is convinced that he must impart that knowledge for the good of
the world. Thus, whenever a target hears a question, regardless of the nature of that
question, he responds as if his answer were critical for a waiting desperate world.
The target will have been previously instructed through hypnosis to answer truthfully to
any questions asked by the attackers. He will have also been told to visualize his
thoughts. Thus, whenever he thinks of a person, he visualizes that person’s face. The
attackers then record that face and ask the target, “Who’s that?” The target will
normally answer with only a given name, let us say, “Joe.” The attackers next ask him,
“Joe who?” The target answers, “Joe Jones.” Such is the tactic of the handler
interrogators.
Simply listening to a target’s thoughts may not reveal the information that the attackers
seek. However, using hypnosis, the attackers are able to “mine” the target’s thoughts.
Hypnotism is re-enforced by computer software, normally used by intelligence
agencies, that determines whether a target is lying or being purposely vague, evasive,
or deceitful.
158
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
By asking the target questions, attackers not only extract information about the target
but also about people whom the target knows. Intelligence officers use that technique
on Moslem captives in the so-called War of Terrorism. Expert interrogators can extract
an astonishing amount of information from a hypnotized target on his friends and
acquaintances. Water boarding is used as only a tool to frighten prisoners. Indeed
today water boarding is a useless torture method used by only the sadistic. The real
information comes from the interrogators’ neurological gadgets and methods.
The attackers can not only extract information from targets but they can also delete
information in targets’ minds. My attackers often do that. They will often steer my mind
to a particular scenario in which there are certain people whom I know. Yet, I cannot
remember the name of one of them. After I try for several seconds to recall the name,
the attackers supply the name. The idea is to establish a dependency on the attackers’
information. It also re-enforces the concept that the attackers possess all of the power
and that the targets are helpless.
My attackers often play mind games for those purposes and perhaps out of boredom-what could be more boring than monitoring somebody in the same setting day after
day? They recently took my mind to the geography of Scandinavia. Geography is one
of my favorite topics, and I know the countries and their capitals. Yet, as I thought
about the countries of Norway, Finland, and Sweden, they blanked out the capital of
Sweden. Then, they asked me the capital. Later, by going through the alphabet, I
remembered, that it was Stockholm. The attackers tried to make me believe that they
had provided me the answer, which they will often do to attempt to establish your
dependency on their input.
Hypnotism is also used to make a target believe that he cannot hear or see well. To
cause a target to become hard of hearing, the hypnotist will instruct the target that he
will not hear certain common sounds, such as the th sound, the sh sound, or the shun
(tion, cion, sion) sound. He will also tell the target’s mind that it will not hear a particular
vowel or that the vowel o will sound like the vowel a. He will even command the target
to hear certain “trigger” words or planted words instead of the actual words. For
example, “first” will sound like “dirt,” “constitution” like “prostitution,” and “cyanide” like
“suicide.” The words substituted will normally have the same number of syllables.
Likewise, the hypnotist will attempt to cause the target physical problems by instructing
him, for example, that when he sees a lamp post light, it will look orange instead of
white or that it will have three concentric rings around it. This naturally interferes with
the target’s eyesight. It causes the victim to believe that he is losing his sight or that he
has an astigmatism or cataracts.
159
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Coordination between the Powerbrokers and the Attackers
No stalking activity, whether conventional or electronic, can be carried out without a
conspiracy. That conspiracy probably includes the following elements: (1) The
powerbrokers, or masterminds. (2) Go-betweens, or liaison agents, representing the
masterminds. Those go-betweens are probably heads of the FBI field offices, who
probably coordinate with the Infragard and Fusion Centers. (3) Attackers, who actually
carry out the electronic and mind control activities. (4) Accomplices, who play only
support roles as ground stalkers and who may not even be aware of the electronic and
mind control functions. Some of them are opportunity accomplices who may make
certain signs and gestures to targets that they run into in stores. Others actually follow
the targets in vehicles and harass them in other ways. Few of those accomplices are
permanent members of the team. They come and go.
The relentless remote-operated electronic assault and mind control activities, often
accompanied and re-enforced by gang stalking, are enormously labor intensive and
costly. It is not likely that a company or a business would spend those funds on a single
individual. However, the company or group may receive secret funding from the federal
government that is not kept on their regular books. Some PACs and religious groups,
working under government protection and with government funding would provide
excellent cover for state-sponsored domestic terrorism.
In addition to hooking the minds of the targets, attackers also invade the minds of the
targets’ family members and close friends. Only the target is permanently monitored.
The family members and friends are only sporadically monitored to fill in information
about the target. The major organization, or the masterminds, probably allow the
handler groups also to identify additional targets.
Collateral Targets
Just as in warfare, there is collateral damage to innocent people when targets are
attacked. In almost every case of targeting, members of the target’s family will also be
victimized. Very often, those secondary targets are innocent children. In my case, my
grown son has also been subjected to electronic torture and mind control since no later
than 2001 although he is still unaware of it. Here are some of his symptoms, which
targets will readily recognize.
-- His hands often cramp so badly that he cannot open his fist. Cramping is one of the
favorite tools of the attackers.
160
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
-- He has developed psoriasis, which targets often mention as an induced symptom. In
2001, his entire body was covered with psoriasis sores.
-- He has itching spots on his feet, a very common handler symptom though there is
no evidence of a mosquito or other insect bite. He has scratched those places so
hard that they have bled and later formed sores.
-- He is distracted and does not hear certain sounds.
-- He has also developed an insatiable appetite that has led to an out-of-control eating
disorder due to the subconscious voices of the attackers urging him to eat. That in
turn has resulted in an enormous weight gain.
-- He has short-term memory loss. While performing home improvement projects, he
very often cannot remember the measures that he has taken.
– He has sudden striking pains in his back that appear to have no physical origin.
– He sometimes has to fight going to sleep as he drives.
All of those symptoms are similar to those caused in targets by the attackers. My
attackers often make threats concerning my son and attempt to make me believe things
about him that I know are false. They have also told me telepathically on many
occasions that he is in the “hospital” or the “emergency room.” Those terms are simply
code employed by the attackers. I have not yet determined the precise meanings of
those particular codes unless the attackers mean that he is under their surveillance and
control.
It is increasingly clear that the targeting covers two or more generations of targets
either simultaneously or in succession. In looking back, I now also know that my aged
mother was targeted. In addition, I believe that my little eight year-old granddaughter
has been a target for at least the last three years. I visited my son and his family when
she was about five. I slept at night in a bedroom adjoining hers. One night I heard her
talking. I got up and peeked in the room several times when I heard her talking to make
sure that she was okay. I thought at first that perhaps she had been talking in her
sleep. Now I believe that she was talking with the perps through their subliminal voices
to her subconscious while she slept. Of course, her talking could have been attacker
deception playing her prerecorded taIking into my consciousness. However, if it is true
that she is targeted, four generations of my family have been targeted within a period of
not longer than ten or fifteen years, as my mother was almost certainly a target for her
last ten years or so. Many other targets have reported similar situations.
Targets suffer from brutal physical and psychological torture. Yet, they can get some
small satisfaction out of the fact that the attackers, who are obviously already seriously
disturbed individuals, gradually become more psychologically ill and socially
maladjusted the longer they ply their evil work. They are psychopaths in the strictest
161
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
terms. The attackers become consumed with the power that they think that they
possess.
Over the years the torture and voyeurism that the attackers employ weighs upon their
degenerate minds. I enjoy telling my psycho attackers that I have complete freedom of
movement and action but, on the contrary, they have to spend their time focusing on
me! Although the attackers obviously enjoy making people suffer and although they
doubtlessly receive handsome salaries for their efforts, they become victims of their
own sick activities, and their evil handiwork eventually leaves them as mentally affected
as their targets. I often tell my attackers, “I hope to hell that you bastards don’t have
children and grandchildren. If you do, they’re probably either in prison or the asylum or
will shortly be there.”
The Attackers’ Strategy
What happens when a victim is targeted for electronic stalking and mind control? Logic
and experience tell me that the person or organization that orders the targeting will
provide the attackers the target’s FBI files, which include his military and employment
records, and any other data they may possess. The FBI or other organizations will have
“watched” that individual for years before he is officially targeted. They will have
generated a massive amount of data on the target. In addition to that data, either the
initiator of the targeting or the attackers will hire accomplices to work up a personal
background on the target.
Those accomplices will probably be professional private investigators, ex-law
enforcement officers, ex-military, or ex-government employees. Sometimes they will
pose as law enforcement officers and other times as old friends of the family.
Oftentimes they will manage to run into people “accidentally” who know the victim or
the victim’s family members, particularly those who have known several generations of
that family, to collect anecdotes and stories about the victim and his family members.
They probably wear a hidden tape recorder when they talk with those persons.
At the same time, the attackers will begin “mining” the target’s thoughts and
communications to obtain the names of people, places, actions, and dates that figure in
the target’s life, particularly searching for foibles of the target upon which they later
capitalize in their mind control activities. Thus, a target’s memories contribute to the
data that the attackers amass. Finally, all the accumulated data on the target is
gathered into a comprehensive file on that person, computerized, and studied by a
group composed mainly of psychiatrists, psychologists, professional interrogators,
computer and media personnel, and propagandists.
162
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
The team members look for certain weaknesses in the individual to form a suggested
strategy for “handling” the target based on what they know about the target. That is
almost everything about that individual. Effectively, that strategy seeks to eliminate the
target as a functional human being; elimination sometimes means death by slow torture
or the suicide of the target. Finally, a representative of the group will discuss the
strategy with a spokesperson of the attackers, and the attackers begin using that
strategy in a 24/7 attack on the target’s body and brain.
The strategy will include the following actions. (1) Attack the target’s reputation and
credibility. The investigation into the victim’s background by private investigators and
persons posing as law enforcement officials first arouses suspicions those friends and
neighbors who are interviewed. The attackers will appoint various accomplices to let
drop certain knowledge about the targets to his friends and family members. That will
be done in a very casual, natural-appearing manner. (2) Isolate the victim by casting
suspicions, spreading rumors, interfering with his postal and email communications,
causing problems between the target and his friends and family members, and making
him look crazy.
(3) Ruin the target financially by causing him to make bad financial decisions, spend
money on items to reduce the effects of the REA, lose his job or business due to the
REA, and by using other tactics. (4) Create a level of frustration and helplessness that
cause the target to become a recluse or even commit suicide. The strategy is not
considered finished until the target is dead or incarcerated in a mental institution for the
remainder of his life. (5) Determine through experimentation what electronic torture
methods might be most effective in re-enforcing their mind control methods.
Anxiety, the Ultimate Weapon of the Attackers
As we targets know, many victims of organized stalking, electronic stalking, and mind
control commit suicide. That act does not result from the physical electromagnetic
harassment or even from the neurological effects, including the synthetic telepathy
voices. Any target can endure the physical pain and the psychological harassment.
Instead, the suicides are caused by anxiety.
I shall repeat ad nauseam that every target who gets the directed energy and
electromagnetic attacks also gets the subconscious voices. I believe that victims of
gang stalking are probably also electronically monitored and subjected to mind control.
Most targets will not be able to hear those subconscious voices. However, I somehow
learned to hear them. That I can hear those voices on a deeper level may be
accidental, a special gift, or something sent to me by a Higher Power. Whatever the
reason, I am very grateful for that ability.
163
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
I have already mentioned that I was struck in the mid-1970’s by something similar to
anxiety and again in 1999 with extreme anxiety. At the time, I had no idea that I had
been targeted since the ‘70’s. The second round of anxiety can best be called a panic
attack, which was the most horrible feeling that I have ever experienced in my life. It
occurred during a period in my life when I was most vulnerable: my mother had just
died; my remaining two siblings were angry with me over my executorship of the estate;
I was selling my home; and I was trying to figure out what to do and where to go next. I
asked a niece who is a nurse to recommend a psychiatrist. I made an appointment with
that psychiatrist, and when after two visits he told me that I did not need him, I rose
above the anxiety problem and went on with my life. That was before I realized that
psychiatrists were accomplices of the powerbrokers. I do believe, however, that that
particular psychiatrist was among the few who had not sold out to the system or at least
had not sold out completely.
In the meantime, in late 2005 I learned that I was a target. The attackers’ harassment
program included electronic attacks and synthetic telepathy voices. I got the V2K 24/7.
Naturally, I was supposed to hear those voices. Only much later did I learn to hear the
voices of my attackers that I was NOT supposed to hear. Those voices – I call them
“silent” or subconscious voices – were too low in volume for my conscious to hear.
They were aimed at my subconscious to keep me from hearing them.
After I began to catch the subconscious voices, which were usually conducted by
repetitious loop play tapes, I realized that the attackers’ main objective was to cause
anxiety. The attackers knew that my son and I enjoyed a particularly close relationship,
and they set out to wreck that relationship while at the same time filling me with anxiety.
They have failed in both objectives. Yet, they continue to send voices to my
subconscious about my son and his family, for example, that my son had drowned, that
he had lung cancer, that he had been taken to the emergency room, that he was
molesting his little daughter, that he was going bankrupt, that he was involved in
prostitution, that my daughter-in-law had breast cancer, and anything else that they
think will induce anxiety.
But as the old expression goes, something happened on the way to the forum. I am no
longer the vulnerable target of the mid-1970’s and 1999. Now cognizant of what
produced my previous anxiety and now able to hear the voices used to induce it, I am
an expert on anxiety. I not only can handle it but I can also anger and frustrate the
attackers. I tell them, “There is absolutely NOTHING that you can do to me physically
or neurologically to induce anxiety.” That pisses the attackers off, which give me a
great deal of satisfaction.
164
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Interference with Targets’ Communication System
Rule Number One in the attackers’ user manual probably reads – Isolate the target. By
hacking the computer and tapping the phones, the attackers are able to interfere with
the target’s communication system and thus harm his relationships with family members
and friends. To a target, his communications system can be a life line. Once a target’s
communications are compromised, the attackers find it far easier to perform their
electronic and mind control attacks on him.
I live in a rural area where it is difficult to obtain fast speed internet service. When I
found out that Hughes.net offered DSL in rural settings, I subscribed to their service,
and the fee was deducted directly from my bank account. I was very pleased to be able
to communicate with other TIs using high speed internet. The attackers, however, set
out to remove that advantage.
After several months, the attackers began using pop-ups with the Hughes.net logo
telling me that there were problems with my payment. At the time, I believed that the
pop-ups did indeed come from Hughes.net, and I finally became so annoyed that I
canceled my service. Only later did I learn that the attackers were manipulating my
computer and using the pop-ups with the Hughes.net logo. They knew that I would use
the high speed computer to work against them, and they set out to take that tool away
from me. They succeeded. I went back to using the much slower dial-up internet just
what the attackers wanted.
Hughes.net turned my account over to a collection company. However, when I sent that
company entries from my journals describing the harassing pop-ups and my phone
calls to the company, which did not resolve the issue, they dropped their demand. I feel
sure that the powerbrokers instructed them to drop the matter, as they did not wantI
have no way of knowing whether personnel who work for Hughes.net were involved in
the internet interference. However, that they dropped their claims indicates that
Hughes.net is aware of such interference.
After canceling the Hughes.net contract, I obtained dial-up internet service through a
local provider. At first, although slow, it functioned reasonably smoothly and efficiently.
Then, the attackers began their assault on my dial-up internet access, and it got
increasingly slower. Everybody has his own idea about what constitutes slowness, so
let me explain that when I say slow, I mean that it often takes from five to seven
minutes to pull up a web page, sometimes longer.
In addition, features that once functioned well began malfunctioning: the “Reply” button
on emails often delays for several minutes or the reply space never appears; a pop-up
165
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
often states, “Internet Explorer cannot display the web page;” sometimes new emails
end up embedded in old emails; videos will not open or, if opened, will stop every few
seconds and pause for a couple of minutes; the Delete Browsing History does not
function; “Sending” takes several minutes; the mouse clicks do not open the web
pages; and my emails often do not arrive to correspondents and vice versa.
I have spent hundreds of dollars on technicians to correct the mal-functions. The
installation of a more powerful modem helped only minimally. My defragmenter and
other programs seemingly do not help. Deleting the browsing history does not improve
the speed. The internet service becomes increasingly slower. The attackers are
determined to interfere with my communication and make it difficult for me to use the
internet. Their mission is to isolate me, frustrate me, take much of my time, and cause
me to spend money on repairs.
Several people in my same locality use an AT&T 3G satellite plug-in to speed up their
internet communications. I ordered the small device and hired a PC technician to install
it correctly. Although he successfully installed the program, he tried for hours to get it
functioning and failed. His services cost me almost five hundred dollars. A few months
later, I ordered the 3G device again and this time attempted to install it myself. Once
again the program installed itself perfectly, but after spending hours on the phone with
AT&T technicians, I could not get it to work. The device showed that it was getting a
very strong signal, which means that it should have functioned correctly.
Once when I called my internet provider to ask if they could improve the online
performance, I mentioned that my PC had been hacked. The technician with whom I
was speaking remarked, “It’s impossible to hack dial-up internet.” I did not know
whether to laugh or try to convince him about how wrong he was. I let it pass.
Hacking probably is not the correct term to call what the attackers do with a target’s
computer. They actually take possession of it. They have somehow established a
parallel, or shared, system whereby one of their computers literally becomes my
computer. Not only are they able to manipulate the contents of my computer but they
also have created “ghost” web sites for those that I frequently visit and for my emails
accounts.
Later, I contacted Hughes.net to explain about the hacking. I was able to re-subscribe
to Hughes.net, which improves my ability to communicate with others. Although the
attackers have tried to cause me once again to cancel Hughes.net, I continue using
that company as an internet provider.
166
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
I recently discovered that the attackers are able to intercept my emails and edit,
substitute, or delete my attachments. I sent a correspondent an attachment that
contained two hundred pages. He wrote back that he had read all seventy pages. The
attackers had intercepted my email and had deleted over a hundred pages of the
attachment. Since discovering that handler capability, I have checked with
correspondents about what they received from me.
The attackers also interfere with my land line phone and cell phone. The first ring on
both phones has a different tone from the following rings. Apparently the attackers’
listening device picks up after the first ring. I have many “wrong numbers.” When I
advise them that they have the wrong number, instead of hanging up, they remain on
the line, an old telephone trick that allows the caller to tap the phone if the answerer
hangs up first. When I curtly ask them to hang up, I get a click, as if they have hung up,
but get no dial tone, another old telephone trick. When I finally get ugly with the caller,
he at last hangs up and I get a dial tone. The callers are apparently only accomplices
wanting to get in on the attackers’ action.
On the phone, the attackers often cause my voice to echo so that I can hardly hear the
other person. Of course, the echo can only be heard on my end. The attackers also
cause very noisy static and other strange noises. They have even interjected their
voices, which probably only I can hear. On occasion, they have redirected my calls so
that the call will be answered by their accomplices, just as they obviously did when I
thought that I was talking with Hughes.net personnel. Very often they make it difficult to
make and receive calls.
Interference with the target’s PC and telephone is designed not just to annoy the target
but to isolate him socially and impose difficulty in conducting business. It also causes
the target to question his sanity, especially if he has not learned to hear the voices.
The social isolation, frustration, and doubts about a target’s sanity lay the groundwork
for the attackers’ neurological assaults and the target’s anxiety.
Before I got Hughes.net, I had dial-up internet service. My attackers used the telephone
jack for some purpose when the computer was connected to that jack. While I used the
PC, I played a small radio to drown out the V2K. There was always much static, and the
radio will not pick up signals when facing certain directions, not always the same
directions. Whenever I finished using the computer, I would disconnect it from the
telephone jack. The second I disconnected the cord, the radio station immediately
blared forth strong and clear.
Attackers also interfere with the regular mail sent to and from post offices and through
mail delivery companies. Targets’ ”snail” mail often goes astray. If I have to use the
167
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
post office, I pay a higher fee to obtain proof of mailing or delivery confirmation.
Packages from UPS and FedEx often do not arrive.
The Use of Sex as a Mind Control Tool
Out of the hundreds of targets with whom I have communicated who can “hear” the
voices and suffer from electronic and neurological torture, most of them reported that
their targeting involved sex in some manner. That is for good reason, for sexuality is
one of the most easily exploited human characteristics. Although targets may not have
well-formed political, social, religious, and other ideas, they all have longstanding and
ever-present sexual ideas. The attackers look for foibles, and the one foible that every
human being has in common is sex.
Although the attackers’ use of sex makes them appear degenerate—and the attackers
are indeed classic sociopaths—the employment of sex does not come simply from the
attackers’ imagination. Instead, it is a very useful tool for the attack plan. The
psychiatrists and psychologists who developed the plan of attack knew people’s sexual
vulnerabilities, and their plan concentrates on and exploits those vulnerabilities.
Remember the graphic sexual photos of Arab prisoners in Abu Garaib? Being stripped
of their clothing and forced to pose naked in lewd ways was very purposeful.
Sex is big business. If you do not think so, watch the frequency of Cialis, Viagra, birth
control medicine and devices, and condom ads on TV. Moreover, notice that many ads
show scantily-clad, good-looking young men and women when their appearance has
little or nothing to do with the item being advertised. Many of the stand-up comedians
use sex jokes and make innuendos about sex as parts of their acts. Movies and TV
shows employ sex to a large degree, even when graphic sex is not required to develop
the plot..
Thus, sexual thoughts, libido, and sexual activities are important reasons to pursue
brain mapping, which means huge profits for pharmaceutical companies and
researchers. Even more important to the powerbrokers, the information derived
provides the intelligence community another weapon in its neurological warfare
arsenal, as sex has been used for hundreds of years in espionage. It has brought down
many powerful people, including many Congresspersons, Governors, religious leaders,
and other public figures. It has also long been used as blackmail to force compliance
from those individuals.
Attackers find out a target’s sexual thoughts and preferences, and they fully exploit that
knowledge. However, although they are born perverted voyeurs and get much pleasure
out of harassing a target with induced sexual thoughts and images, sex is not their real
168
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
objective. They know that their intimate knowledge of a target’s sexual thoughts
shatters a target’s self-esteem, instills guilt, and forces him into silence and
compliance. They use that as a tool to induce anxiety, confusion, fright, frustration, and
humiliation in the target.
The attackers use sex to break up relationships. When a male victim is having sex or
masturbating, the attackers will use the inaudible voices to tell him that he is having
intercourse with his mother or sister or son or daughter or brother. That causes his
penis to go flaccid and ruins the sexual act. The purpose is to cause a rupture in his
physical relationships and to cause sexual frustration. That lends to anxiety, one of the
attackers’ most effective weapons.
A common thread often used by the attackers, particularly those who are obsessed with
sex, suggests that the attackers are engaging in a sick version of behavior modification.
What behavior can be more vile, harmful, and unlawful than that of the attackers? I
have not heard from one single target whose behavior has been modified to the extent
that he has been freed from his electronic and mind control assault. Moreover, if the
attackers are supposed to be the models that targets become through behavior
modification, that theme is a ridiculously treacherous, twisted, warped deception.
Sexual thought wafts through the target’s ideas on politics, religion, social problems,
economics, and every other phase of human life. That is what makes sex a very
important part of the attackers’ neurological assault protocol. Loop play tapes making
sexual suggestions to a target’s subconscious and sexual stimulation of the target by
using computer software greatly influence the target’s sexual thoughts. In my case, the
“You’re horny” loop play tape is supposed to heighten any sexual thought. I have no
idea how long that tape has played to my subconscious, but it has doubtlessly affected
my sexual thoughts for years. Those actions are carefully and cleverly manipulated for
their effect on the target.
The perpetrators sometimes go to amazing lengths to ensnare their victims, sometimes
even sending paid predators to seduce those victims. Many targets trace their targeting
back to brief romantic encounters. Some targets later claim that the people with whom
they had an intimate relationship were sent by the perpetrators. Although their
allegations cannot be proved, espionage has been conducted during trysts and feigned
romantic liaisons for hundreds, probably thousands of years.
Attackers instruct the target subliminally through hypnotic pre-suggestions that when he
hears certain trigger words and phrases, he is to experience an arousal. In my case,
the attackers use corny code words and expressions such as “crazy,” “barbeque,” “go
git ‘im,” and “please don’t do that to me” to induce erections. Those trigger words and
169
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
phrases are often used in conjunction with slight vibrations on the sexual organ to
cause an arousal. The vibrations are enhanced by the attackers’ subliminal whispering.
Targets glean information about targeting in strange ways. One evening in November
2011, Jay Leno on his nightly show made reference to the Israelis discovering that a
very slight electrical charge on a man’s penis helped cure impotency. He, of course,
made a joke of it. The attackers also use an electrical charge to cause erections in
concert with the attackers’ “inaudible” whisperings. I am very sensitive, and
occasionally I can feel a very slight vibration on my penis as the attackers talk. By
using my mind, I can prevent an erection. Also, in the evening before going to bed, I
take a couple of aspirins, which are known to prevent erections.
Causing unwanted erections in men and unwanted orgasms in women are a favorite
tactic of the attackers. Loss of sexual control is demeaning to the victims and creates a
feeling in them of utter helplessness. I know one targeted woman who has endured
forced orgasms for thirty-five years. It is a way for the attackers to assert psychological
control over the victims by showing them their power.
The attackers can actually decrease and inflate the size of a male victim’s penis. I
suspect that they use both physical and neurological methods for that action. They can
probably also distort the size and shape of a female victim’s vagina in the same
manner.
The attackers have to be classic degenerate voyeurs, but their actions are very
purposeful. They are following the attack protocol. I use my own brand of psychology
against theirs. I often tell my attackers through our form of synthetic telepathy
communication system, “Learn some f—king psychology, you turds, to know why you
psychos are sitting there feeling like s—t while doing the warped crap that you’re
doing.”
Because of the importance of sex in electronic targeting and in everyday life, sex is the
focus of many experiments. I believe that many of the cases of sexual exploits of
minors are caused by attackers controlling the minds of the predator. The attackers’
intentions are both to experiment on and to incriminate the target.
In addition, it also appears that the experimenters are interested in transgender
phenomena. In recent years, many people have undergone transgender
transformations. Although some of those cases are probably natural, I believe that
others are perhaps due to the influence of attackers, who have convinced them
subliminally that they are “in the wrong body.” Farfetched? Hardly. Experimenters have
carried out truly barbaric and inhuman sexual experiments on targets and captives,
170
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
particularly since WWII. Today, neurological sexual experimentation has taken the
place of physical sexual experimentation.
Recently (March, 2010), in one of the online communication venues for targeted
individuals, targets discussed whether or not their attackers could see them in the
bathroom when they bathed and performed their bodily functions. Whether it is true or
not, attackers convince targets that they can be seen while bathing and showering.
They use that tool to humiliate the target and keep him from bathing regularly. Once
again, sexuality enters the picture.
The attackers use sex as a tool to isolate the target. They seek out the people with
whom the target is closest and then use sexual innuendo and blatant lies to estrange
the target from those persons. In my case, they often tell me that my son is molesting
his daughter. I tended my little granddaughter the first year of her life while her mother
finished her college studies, and thus there is a very strong bond between us. The
attackers know that. They hoped that I would discuss their accusation with my son and
that that action would strain or end our relationship. I tell the attackers daily that they
have failed miserably to convince me of their evil lies. As the attackers hammer away at
my family relationships, I work just as hard to strengthen them.
Humiliation of targets using sex causes a feeling of helplessness in targets. Male
targets experience involuntary erections and female targets, artificially-induced
orgasms. Both males and females are sodomized. Again, this is accomplished through
a combination of psychology and electronic manipulation. Here is an example: I began
experiencing a partial erection throughout the day and night, and I knew that that was
not natural. Then, one day while washing my hair I brushed the small hairs at the
entrance of the ear canal, and each time I did I heard, “You’re horny.” The subliminal
voices were toned so low in volume that my conscious could not pick them up.
While watching TV, I often feel the sensation of half-erection during programs and ads.
That induced sensation appears to have no particular trigger and thus it could be preprogrammed to occur at certain times. Moreover, the images that are portrayed when
the urges commence are varied and not even always suggestive topics and scenes.
Whenever I feel those artificial urges, I also hear the attackers whispering the names of
family members and friends. They are trying psychologically to associate those people
with sex and thus embarrass me into avoiding them or acting strangely while around
them. Their elementary psychology does not work! I often tell them, “You scudsballs
know no psychology; you can’t associate or disassociate.”
In addition, attackers tell targets through their V2K to the subconscious that targets
have to defecate or urinate. This causes them to lose control of their bowels and
171
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
bladders. That condition, along with the partial erections, is clearly intended to
humiliate the target and instill a feeling of despair and helplessness.
In addition to using induced erections and orgasms as weapons, attackers also cause
impotence in male targets. They accomplish that through the subconscious layer of
synthetic telepathy, whispering to the targets that they cannot achieve an erection, that
the object of their affection is diseased and ugly, that their lovers are their sisters or
mothers or brothers or fathers, and a variety of other statements that cause targets not
to be able to perform. Constant loop play tapes making those same suggestions
enhance the attackers’ objective. The induced impotency causes frustration,
humiliation, and anxiety in the target and leads to marital problems that often end in
broken relationships and divorce.
Many targeted correspondents tell me that their electronic stalking and mind control
began after a brief romantic relationship. I believe that some type of device exists,
perhaps a nano-microchip, that can be introduced vaginally, anally, and perhaps
through the male urethra. The instances of victims’ sexual interactions and their later
targeting are too numerous to be coincidental.
The psychologists and others who devised the attackers’ user manual seized upon sex
as a major tool in their neurological program, for sex can somehow be applied to any
person, place, or object. Sex particularly lends itself to adaptation to the inaudible
voices that permeate the target’s thoughts. However, once a target knows about the
sadistic use of sex in his targeting, he can use the same psychology that the attackers
employ to weaken and sometimes completely offset its effects.
The Attackers’ Accomplices
Accomplices help the attackers in various ways. Without the accomplices, the attackers
would not be able to operate effectively. They may not be able to operate at all. If we
are to believe that much of the electronic stalking and mind control is carried out
through microchips implanted in unknowing targets, those small devices would very
likely have to be implanted by medical personnel. There is much circumstantial
evidence that doctors, nurses, and others do indeed implant microchips. They are
perhaps misled into that crime by the powerbrokers, who explain that the microchips
will only be used to track the targets. Regardless of the reason why the medical
community cooperates, they are violating the Hippocratic Oath, various laws, and
human rights in doing so.
Other accomplices aid the attackers’ electronic and mind control assault by physically
stalking the targets. Targets who receive the electronic and mind control effects also
172
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
often complain of organized stalking in their neighborhoods and other places. The
accomplices are normally people of all walks of life who have been enlisted by the
attackers to participate in the REA by harassing the targets. They are often volunteers
who get an adrenalin rush and a perverse sense of pleasure and power in being able to
bother others. Some accomplices who live near the targets and render their fulltime
services to harass them are paid salaries or receive other benefits from their help.
Attackers are permanent personnel. On the other hand, accomplices are not
necessarily permanent employees and they probably receive only on-the-job training.
They usually only provide on-site organized stalking, and although they are often paid,
they do not have any on-hands dealings with the actual handler operations. The
accomplices are intentionally kept out of the tight operations circle, for the greater the
number of people that knows about the electronic and mind control operations, the
greater the risk of discovery.
Electronic and mind control assailants also often depend on local accomplices to help
with their aims. I classify the accomplices as active and passive. The first group (the
actives) participates in street theatrics, gaslighting, and gang stalking; the second
group (the passives) knows what is going on but keeps quiet. Unknown persons have
entered my house in my absence on several occasions and taken items and rearranged
other items although that does not happen often in my case. I get very little overt
harassment from organized stalkers.
In October of 2008 while I was away on a several-day trip, someone entered my house
and took from the center of my bed a round magnet with which I always sleep that
measures two inches in diameter by a half inch in thickness. That magnet never leaves
my bed and my house. When I change sheets, it goes right back into the bed. I later
found the magnet in January, 2009 in the back of a little-used closet. Sometimes the
intruders will enter again in the target’s absence to replace the object in its original
location to make him think that he is losing his mind, one of their main objectives.
Targets call that tactic “gas lighting.”
Accomplices of the REA perpetrators perform the actual foot work. Many of the
accomplices work in legitimate businesses such as delivery organizations. In my case,
UPS has failed to deliver at least five items that I ordered or that someone was sending
to me. Two of the items were returned to the senders without my being notified. Never
once did a UPS driver leave a notice on my door or in my mailbox that he had
attempted to deliver packages. Accomplices also work among law enforcement, in the
postal system, telecommunications companies, especially local internet providers, and
other legitimate businesses.
173
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
The local helpers of the REA assailants usually do not forcefully enter houses of
targets but use either a master key or an electronic device that opens any locks.
Likewise, they will never steal any item of great value. After gaining entry, the
accomplices will rearrange items in the house or place them in locations where the
target would never put them. Their mission is: to make the victim think that he is going
crazy (gas lighting); to let the target know that they have the power to enter whenever
they wish; to remind the target that he is under constant watch; and to frighten or
intimidate the target.
Once, in my absence accomplices dropped a 9 volt battery and six AA batteries into my
garbage disposal, which I later discovered when I turned on the disposal. The batteries
had come from a night table drawer where I keep them. That meant that the
accomplices had inspected every area of my house and had gone through all of my
belongings. Covert entry does not often happen in my case; however, it occurs
frequently in the case of many other targets.
Items taken will often consist of anything that they believe might be helpful in their mind
control efforts. For example, on one occasion, intruders stole from my desk a roster of
an English-as-a-Second-Language class that I had taught. That theft probably
represented additional sleuthing into people whom I know, as they often mention
names when they talk to me through the V2K. Most of their information came from the
attackers’ mining my thoughts and memories.
Although the accomplices are not permanent employees and often are not even paid
(except perhaps in “favors” in fixing traffic tickets, etc.), they play an important support
role in electronic and mind control assault. Without the goon squads who openly
harass some targets, burglarize their houses, sabotage their electricity, water, and
appliances, surreptitiously enter their domiciles for “gas lighting,” strew rumors, collect
extraneous information about the targets’ lives, and interfere with the targets’
communications, the attackers’ work would be much harder, perhaps even impossible.
Communications companies and internet providers almost certainly cooperate with the
powerbrokers and their handler employees. We see that in the way targets’ computers
are manipulated by remote. Although the attackers include computer experts, even
those experts could not perform many of the things done to the targets’ email and other
computer material without going through the targets’ internet providers. Likewise, the
telephone companies doubtlessly allow the attackers access to their facilities to
accomplish many of their phone tricks.
In all, I have experienced very little physical stalking, illegal entries, gaslighting, and
other on-site activities. That may be due to my living in a very rural area with no nearby
174
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
neighbors as well as the ability to protect myself. It could also indicate that my targeting
largely comes from afar and is not local.
“Decoy” Targets
Duck hunters understand the word “decoy.” Decoys are artificial ducks usually made of
a light material that floats easily on water. At a distance, they look exactly like ducks.
Hunters place them on water in areas where wild ducks are known to fly over to entice
the ducks to land. The remote attackers use the same tactic.
Most of the targets are decoys, which deceives both targets and the public about the
real targets. Most of those “decoy” targets are just plain citizens, but among those
citizens are certain groups. The targeting of homosexuals, for example, is probably a
result of the powerbrokers’ false target, or decoy, tactic. That makes it look like
homosexuals as a group are being targeted. The underlings who carry out the orders
do indeed loathe homosexuals, and they carry out their tasks gleefully. They do not
know the true targets.
That does not mean that homosexuals are always decoys. Iconoclasts can be
heterosexual, homosexual, or asexual. Thus, doubtlessly some homosexuals are true
targets.
The hodge-podge of targets is cleverly intentional, as it keeps researchers from
identifying the real targets – the social, economic, religious, and political nonconformists. Their targeting is designed to throw researchers off track. And it does.
The major targets are the politically incorrect citizens, or non-conformists, who threaten
the status quo, represented by the powerbrokers. Those political liabilities include
whistleblowers, political and social activists, the militias, the survivalists, antigovernment “subversives,” some arch-conservatives and some arch-liberals, antigovernment writers and journalists, and others who “rock the boat.” In other words, they
are non- conformists who threaten the status quo. Probably only one out of ten targets
is a true target. The others are decoys.
The distinction between the real targets and the decoy targets does not affect at all how
the two groups are treated. Both groups are subjected to the same degree of organized
stalking and electronic and neurological torture. Likewise, both true targets and decoy
targets are subjects of experimentation. All targets are expected to spend the rest of
their lives targeted. The powerbrokers want to eliminate their intended targets while at
the same time obtaining valuable research data from both the true targets and the
175
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
decoy victims. Using decoy targets to confuse the issue is a brilliant part of the attack
plan.
Deception
Deception characterizes the electronic targeting. The powerbrokers seized upon
September 11, 2001 and George W. Bush’s subsequent actions to deceive targets into
believing that their torture began after 2001. That is colossal deception. The fact is that
most of those victims who claim to have been targeted in the period 2001-2010 were
probably targeted years before then. However, the perpetrators waited until then to let
them know that they were targeted, leading them to believe that they were only recently
targeted.
The attackers, or attackers, also use deception to thwart efforts to detect the assailants
and their devices/methods. That deception begins with the target’s physical harassment
by remote. When a victim is struck with REA, he first believes that the objective is to
torture him physically. Although the attackers gleefully apply those torture techniques,
their real and end objective is mind control. Experimentation figures greatly in that
objective.
One of the best examples of deception is seen in the voice-to-skull (V2K) contact
between attackers and targets. The attackers use simulated voices and simulated
accents. They also often change their voices and employ recordings of other voices to
convince the target that there are several attackers present at all times. Computer
programs that allow the attackers to achieve that deception are widely available.
Attackers will also attempt to persuade the target through deception that they represent
various ethnic, religious, political, racial, and other groups. They once told me that they
were from south China. They have also used stereotypical Deep South black accents
and Hispanic accents. I often get “wrong number” calls from black- and Latino-sounding
people from various area codes in the United States.
They very often pose as Christians and try to make the target believe that they are
practicing behavior modification. In many cases, the attackers supposedly try to convert
the targets into good “Christians,” which, considering the cruelty and unlawfulness of
the criminals using the devices, is a real joke. Nevertheless, those tactics sometimes
work. A few targets have even allowed themselves to become “converted” only to
discover that their conversions did not end the effects of the REA. Again, total
deception.
176
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
In my case, the attackers often show me holographic pictures of a man in robes who is
generally believed by Christians to be Jesus and tell me that I am going to hell. Again,
that is total deception. I taunt them that the picture could not be authentic because it is
not autographed. I have learned to project back to the attackers holographic pictures,
so I often toss back their holographic picture of Christ showing him in drag, wearing
spike high-heel shoes, earrings, and lipstick. The attackers pretend to be very
affronted. That also is deception, for the attackers possess no shame, morals, or
decency – and certainly no religion. Moreover, the holographs themselves are
deceptions (read about holographs in another section of this paper).
The religious conversion ploy was noted by a whistleblower who worked with the U.S.
National Security Agency (NSA) under a defense contract. That person wrote in an
internet article: “. . . the subject is unknowingly given hypnosis while the subject is
completely awake and is tortured and punished with this hypnosis into a predetermined
behavior by the National Security Agency; . . . the behavior is usually extremely
religious, is called ‘reborn’ by the church, with the subject's life-long goal of ‘a personal
relationship with Jesus Christ.’” The NSA uses this technology [electronic stalking and
mind control] to resocialize (brainwash) the US civilian . . . population.”
There may indeed be a link between the U. S. Government and Fundamentalist
churches. It is worthwhile noting that many Christian churches today receive
government grants, an act once believed to violate the principle of separation of church
and state, which began in the 1970’s. Many so-called Christians are thinly disguised
bigots. When I ask TIs to describe their symptoms, when those symptoms began, and
their general physical environment, they very often mention that a hostile
Fundamentalist minister lives next door, across the street, or very nearby. A law
enforcement officer will also often live very close.
Despite the deception, every target knows that the attackers themselves cannot
possibly be true Christians and could not possibly be truly religious in any fashion.
Christians do not torture people, break up families, cause people financial hardships,
hack computers and tap phones, intercept mail, stalk people, invade people's minds,
and attack people sexually. Neither do good Moslems, Jews, Shintoists, Hindus,
Buddhists, and others. If the scumbags who handle targets are Christians of any type,
the spiritual world of Christianity has no validity.
The attackers also cleverly use deception in confusing targets concerning shielding.
They allow some types of shielding to be partially effective for some targets and not
effective for others. They also allow some types of shielding to be effective for a few
days only to disappoint the targets by resuming the electronic and neurological attacks
a few days later. Targets argue over the shielding devices and methods. That is by
177
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
design, its purpose being to delude targets about shielding. To my knowledge, no type
of shielding has proven entirely protective for all targets.
The attackers have the capability of deceiving targets through hacking their computers
and tapping their phones. For example, when attackers use AT&T to call from a nonexistent area code using a non-existent number, targets think that company cooperates
with the attackers. I recently got a call from 111-111-1111. The phone’s Caller I.D.
showed, “Unknown name.” Some of those communications providers probably do allow
the use of their facilities by the attackers at the request of the Government; however,
whether they approve or not, the attackers are able to use their communications
systems.
Attackers can even hack into targets’ email accounts to send messages that damage
the reputation and credibility of those hapless victims. Several targets have
accidentally found some of those fake messages on the internet while communicating
with others. One of their favorite tricks is planting kiddie porn in targets’ computers
through attachments not readily viewed. They can also intercept victims’ emails and
edit, substitute, or delete their attachments. That has happened in my case.
Extortion is another deception. My attackers have mentioned various amounts of
money to me for payment to them on several occasions, suggesting that the payment
would end the REA. That is absolute deception. In the first place, the protocol that the
hireling attackers must follow probably prohibits that the attackers ask for or receive
money from targets. And secondly, the attackers do not have the authority to determine
when, if ever, a target is released from his torture. Only the powerbrokers who control
the handler hirelings can do so. The corollary to the extortion deception is offering the
victim rewards if he joins them. The attackers have urged me on several occasions to
join them. I laugh at them.
The attackers also deceive through playing “good cop-bad cop.” My attackers always
deride my work efforts and methods in their subliminal talking as I carry out home
improvement projects. They taunt and belittle me as I work. Then, after a few minutes of
blustering and disparaging the activity, one of the attackers will make a very
complimentary remark about some aspect of the work. I am supposed to warm up to the
“good cop” and then cooperate with him in his mind control efforts. To an educated
target, their psychology is insultingly juvenile. I call it “pre-nursery school psychology.”
They also deceive targets into believing that they have been poisoned. Many targets
complain that the food and beverage kept in the refrigerator taste strange, and they
think that their attackers have poisoned it. The attackers often do toy with the target’s
senses, making their taste buds play tricks on them. Sometimes targets become ill after
178
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
eating or drinking something that had been previously opened and left in the fridge, reenforcing their belief that they have been poisoned.
The attackers do indeed have the capability of causing severe indigestion and other
gastric problems, and they can even induce vomiting. They want targets to believe that
somebody is entering their domicile and poisoning the food and drink. That is part of
their psychological bag of tricks, and it is far too overt to fit into the attackers’ covert
operations. Only rarely do attackers and their accomplices actually enter victims’
houses to tamper with their food. More deception.
Attackers will often deceive targets into believing that they are law enforcement officers
and intelligence agents. If the attackers were either, they certainly would not convey
that to the targets. Whenever attackers identify themselves through V2K as local law
enforcement or the FBI or CIA, targets can be sure that they are most definitely NOT.
Their deception even involves national politics. In the 2008 Presidential Election, I
supported Barrack Obama, and I was among only a handful of white voters in my area
to do so. The attackers vociferously lambasted me subliminally for my views, instead
lauding McCain and often praising George Bush and Dick Cheney. They wanted me to
believe that they were pro-Bush elements. The objectives of the attackers cut across all
political, religion, and economic thought.
Many targets believe that cell phones are used as weapons by their attackers and
accomplices and that they are attacked from cell towers. I confess that at one time I
also believed that; however, after studying the causes and effects, I believe that neither
the cell phone nor the cell tower can be used as weapons although they are used to aid
the attackers’ communication and perhaps their ability to locate us. There may even be
a way for cell phone users to press certain numbers and signals to cause some
physical effect on targets. If that is true, the cell phone itself does not actually do
anything but only communicates with the attackers’ device(s), which delivers the effect.
There is no doubt that the attackers use cell phones extensively, but as tools, not as
weapons. I believe that information widely disseminated on the web about the role of
the cell phone and cell towers in our REA is largely deliberate misinformation and
deception.
Lights are also often used to deceive targets. Several correspondents believe that
lights shining from their neighbors’ houses are used on them as weapons. I suggest
that that is intentional deception. The neighbors are probably only accomplices who
focus the lights on the targets at the attackers’ bidding. The attackers then plant the
idea in the target’s psyche that his electronic and mind control effects stem from the
179
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
lights. If the lights were causing the targets’ REA, all they would have to do is change
locations to avoid those effects.
If a target gets the V2K, his attackers will make him think that they do all of the talking
that he hears in real time. That is absolutely false and deceptive. If a target notices,
much of the attackers’ talking is repetitive. That is for good reason, for the attackers
often use pre-recorded drivel while they sit there and occasionally intersperse that
material with their real time voices.
In addition to playing the pre-recorded material interspersed with their real time voices,
the attackers can also with the touch of a key or symbol on their computer keyboard
cause targets to hear pre-recorded words, phrases, and sentences. In my case, they
often play the sound of a shrill female voice screaming at me. The voice, message,
pitch, and cadence are always the same, a very obvious recording.
Duplicity and deception are practiced in every form, particularly with those targets who
hear the synthetic telepathy. For some time, my attackers have repeated my conscious
thoughts back to me. In doing so, they use a voice similar to mine to try to make me
think that it is an echo of my real voice. One day I intentionally relayed to them a
thought but stopped suddenly at the first syllable of a four- or five-syllable word. The
attackers did not realize my trick fast enough. The second voice finished that long
word. So much for the “echo!”
An exception to their repeating my exact words occurs when I pray to The Great Spirit.
Every time I use the word “day,” the handler who is repeating my thoughts will say
“damned day.” The word “damned” is code and is symbolic of my being on their hit list,
thus damned, or condemned. Does that bother me? Not at all. Knowing the evil, sick
nature of the attackers, I feel pride at being included on their hit list. I often tell them,
“Whatever you nut cases stand for, I am against it. I’m on the opposite side.”
As already mentioned, the attackers have damaged my eyesight so that images on TV
and the captions appear blurred. I thought for a long while that the damaged eyesight
came from pin prick sensations that the attackers caused to my eyeballs, particularly
the left one. However, I later realized that my failing eyesight is caused by either (1) a
computer program that controls one’s eyesight, perhaps a special microchip invented
supposedly for the seeing impaired or (2) neurological suggestions to my subconscious
that affect the eyesight. The attackers can accomplish the latter by instructing a target’s
subconscious for example that when it sees a number seven, it will look like a number
one. They can use variables of that neurological method to make what a target sees to
appear blurred and unintelligible. Remember that the name of the game is mind control.
180
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Deception is also used in organized stalking by accomplices of the attackers. Here is
an example: You are being interviewed for a job and the interviewer is friendly and
appears very interested in hiring you. Then, the interviewer suddenly gets a phone call,
and when he hangs up, his demeanor changes. He icily informs you that he cannot hire
you without giving you any other explanation. He abruptly ends the Interview. This is
pure theatrics. The interviewer had been warned in advance to string you along and
then dash your hopes for the job. That is the way the perps operate.
Such is the nature and the planning of deception that it may have even been used in
convincing targets that microchips are the basis of their electronic stalking and mind
manipulation. A grand deception! The powerbrokers may have spread misinformation
about microchips for years, knowing that finally targets were going to realize that their
torture could have come from other devices. By the time the truth emerged about
capabilities of “hooking” targets without using microchips, the myth of microchips will
have become firmly established and difficult to dislodge.
The perps attempt to delude the targets, especially those who receive the V2K, about
their identity. That is, of course, intentional, and it is done in an oblique manner. The
attackers will very rarely say that they are a specific group. If they do, they are lying.
However, they will make statements, use expressions, and make insinuations that lead
targets to believe that they belong to various groups and organizations. Here are some
of the ones they have tried to make me believe that they represent.
-- Mexicans or U. S. Hispanics. The powerbrokers do indeed often use Latinos as
accomplices; however, the powerbrokers are NOT Latinos. In my case, the attackers
sought to deceive me into thinking that my assailants were Mexicans/Hispanics
because of my strong stance on illegal immigration.
-- Local law enforcement. The attackers have never stated that they are local police or
sheriff’s deputies; however, they often talk about an “investigation.” I tell them to
investigate their asses off.
-- CIA/FBI. I intentionally goad the attackers. When I think of the CIA, for example, I
think, “Waterboard those bastards to death.” The attackers act incensed. Likewise, I
often telepathically call the FBI “the fuck-ups.” Again, the attackers pretend to be
offended.
-- Extortionists. On several occasions, the attackers have demanded certain sums of
money, promising on delivery that they would, “Let me go.” I reply, “It’s not a matter of
letting ME go. No, it’s I who’s not letting you scudsballs off the hook.” I often add, “You
181
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
cowardly pieces of s—t don’t worry me at all; on the contrary, I worry the very hell out of
you!”
-- U. S. veterans. I opposed both the 1991 and the 2003 Iraq wars. I also oppose our
presence in Afghanistan. I often make telepathic insulting remarks about American
politicians who have endorsed those wars and the officers who engage in them. One of
the attackers once told me that he had served in Vietnam. I told him (through synthetic
telepathy), “You stupid jerk, no wonder we lost the f--king war.”
-- Foreigners. In addition to Mexicans, the attackers have told me that they are Chinese
living in south China.
-- Local posse comitatus. The attackers have often told me to leave the parish, that
they were sending the “death squad,” and that they were going to burn my house down.
I tell them, “Bring it on, you cowardly little turds. I’m not budging.”
-- Republicans. I was a Democrat for many years before switching to Independent.
However, I supported Barrack Obama in the last election and I still support much of
what his administration does. The attackers often ridicule me for my belief in President
Obama, wanting me to think that they are Republicans and that they are anti-black.
-- Evangelicals. One of the continual themes that the attackers peddle is “born again”
type Christianity. They often remark, “You’re going to hell.” They make allusions to
Jesus and other Christian symbols and even project religious holographic images into
my mind. I retort with, “Yeah, you lovely, kind, upstanding, angelical pieces of shit. You
are such exemplary Christians!”
-- Blacks. Like Hispanics, blacks often participate as accomplices in organized stalking
activities. The attackers often simulate Southern-type blacks in “wrong number” calls,
and they project voices to me when I’m in the presence of blacks, trying to make me
think that the voices are those blacks.
-- White supremacists. The attackers often make remarks similar to KKK propaganda
and berate me for friendships with blacks and others.
-- East Indians. East Indians are occasionally accomplices. On several occasions, East
Indians have entered the scene of my stalking. However, although Indian scientists
probably do have electronic and mind control technology, the East Indians who figure
in my stalking are probably simply pawns.
182
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
-- Zionists. As the reader already knows, I am avowedly and fervently anti-Zionist. The
attackers attempt to convince me that I am wrong and that Zionists, and Christianity
and Judaism are the pillars that hold up the world. They often tell me, “The Israelis are
your friends.”
-- Anti-gays. The attackers often allude to friends who are gay, and they make fun of
me when I correspond with gays.
-- Behavioral modification experts. As already mentioned, if one of the attackers’
objectives is behavior modification, it is a sick modification. They often induce dreams
depicting children and then, through their software and neurological whisperings,
attempt to cause erections, thus associating the erections with the children. They also
mention relatives of both genders while attempting to cause the arousals. There is no
doubt in my mind that the attackers attempt to modify behavior, but they seek to
develop a depraved behavior doubtlessly to attempt to discredit the targets.
-- Neighbors. The attackers have called my attention to outside street lights at my
neighbors and tried to make me believe that somehow the lights were responsible for
my electronic stalking. They have also planted ideas in my mind that those same
neighbors are plotting against me.
-- Former neighbors. The attackers enjoy recounting anecdotes from my early life in the
community where I grew up. They talk about people whom I knew back then. Learning
that information is very easy. If their objective is to make me believe that former
neighbors are part of the scheme, they have failed.
-- Distorted patriots and “The Radical Right.” I often ridicule anything that relates to the
Far Right. I sing ridiculous words to the tune of The Star Spangled Banner. The
attackers pretend to be affronted.
-- Former classmates. One of the attackers’ favorite taunts is that they went to grammar
school with me. In the Deep South where I grew up, we called elementary schools
“grammar schools.” I ridicule them when they tell me something about grammar school
by remarking, “You nitwits, everybody knows that you didn’t even go to grammar
school. You couldn’t have because you don’t know any f--king grammar.” They say the
same thing about going to high school with me. The object is to make me suspicious of
those former classmates and perhaps even avoid them. It does not work. Finally, the
attackers dropped using “grammar school” as a reference and began using “high
school.”
183
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
The imbeciles do not stop to think that if they claim to have attended either grammar
school or high school with me, it automatically eliminates them from being black or
Hispanic or foreign. I went to segregated all-white elementary and high schools, and in
those days, there were no Indians, Hispanics, or any other ethnic group in my area. It
also eliminates my current neighbors, for none of them went to school with me.
Moreover, I know the classmates who went into law enforcement, the armed forces, and
government work. There were very few who did so. The attackers would never allow
targets to pin them down to such a small number of possibilities. As for the remainder
of the deceptive groups, much of the population in my area could easily be
Evangelicals, Republicans, White Supremacists, anti-gay, Zionists, and the types to
participate in a posse comitatus.
-- Pro-Israel Jews and/or Israelis. Building upon their perceived notion that I am antiSemitic, the attackers often state in whispered voices so low in volume that my
conscious can scarcely distinguish them, “(My son, whom they call by name) is a Jew.”
I call that pre-nursery school psychology on their part. Their reasoning is that if I hate
Jews, by associating my son with Jews, I will also hate him. Just another futile attempt
on their part to drive a wedge between my son and me. Their statement also serves the
reverse: if I love my son, I’ll also love Jews. The disingenuous attempts by the attackers
to use psychology are sometimes utterly amazing. My attackers also state in the same
low voices that usually only my subconscious picks up, “Israel is your friend.” Yeah,
sure. So are coral snakes, scorpions, and man eating sharks.
-- Experimentalists. Particularly in their mind games, whenever I use my mind to thwart
their efforts, a recorded voice will repeat, “Good.” Although I know that the voice is a
recording, I usually reply, “What would you sick bastards know about good?”
The attackers not only attempt to confuse targets concerning the attackers’ identities
but they also try to confuse targets about the reasons that they are targeted. They will
say and do things that will imply that you are targeted because, for example, you are
unpatriotic, that you are some type of social deviant, that you have done something
dishonest, that your religious beliefs condemn you to hell, that you are the wrong ethnic
group, that your politics is not correct, and other reasons. That is a part of the targeting
plan.
If readers get the microwave telepathy, the above deceptions are probably all too
familiar to them. Targets should not be confused by what the attackers tell them, as
they are chronic liars. Lying and deception are a major part of the overall evil targeting
scheme.
184
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Impostors and Disinformation Agents
The powerbrokers employ an army of disinformation agents who flood the internet with
erroneous and misleading information on REA. Every country has an intelligence
agency with an operational section whose aim is to spread false propaganda over the
media. The United States of America is no exception. The propaganda machine
spreads misinformation over the internet through several types of “plants.” Some
examples follow.
•Webmaster “plants.” Persons with web sites visited by many people pretend that they
were abducted by aliens, tormented by people who look like lizards, and subjected to
rituals performed by Reptilians. They link REA with UFOs. One of the favorite lies is
that a group of families called the Illuminati or the Masons seek to control the world.
More recently, the misinformation agents have convinced many targets that they come
from a particular genetic strain or blood line and were thus targeted before or from
birth. Many of the TIs who actually believe those things are very well meaning and have
been convinced of those inaccurate concepts through voice-to-brain emissions. That is
exactly why we call that activity “mind control.”
•Internet blogger “plants” intentionally strew erroneous material in their online blogs.
•Members of various TI internet forums write pedantic, argumentative, and
misrepresentative emails in the forums. In those emails, they refer viewers to lies
disseminated in bogus web sites and other locations. Some of those TI “plants” relate
convincing stories; however, usually they trip over their many lies and astute TIs can
often identify them as impostors.
•Authors publish lies and misleading information in on-line articles, in magazines, and
even in books about electronic assault and mind control.
Not all of the information spread on the internet and in articles and books is false by
any means. Even many of the people who disseminate misinformation and
disinformation are very sincere. I do not
pretend to be expert in determining which information is false and which is true;
however, I have learned that much of it is utter deceptive. Electronic assault and mind
control itself is incredible enough without being compounded by deliberate lies
disseminated by the REA perpetrators.
Let me be perfectly clear. The perpetrators of mind control are NOT aliens from outer
space. NOT members of the so-called Illuminati. NOT men who can change to reptiles
185
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
and lizards and other paranormal shapes. NOT ritualistic sex lords seeking sex slaves.
NOT men seeking to wipe out particular blood lines and genetic groups. NOT the
Masonic Order although some of them may be Masons. Targets who believe those
deceptions have been successfully manipulated by the perpetrators.
Even should the perpetrators be one or several of the above, the government has to
know about their electronic activities. Hundreds of intelligence agents continually
search the air waves for unrecognizable electronic signals. They could not fail to locate
the frequencies over which the perps perform their electronic stalking and mind control.
That proves to my satisfaction that the perpetrators pursue an agenda approved by the
government’s powerbrokers.
The powerbrokers behind electronic torture and mind control fear the targets’
networking over the internet. Web sites dealing with REA are often subjected to
internet intimidation by having their information deleted or otherwise compromised.
Some targets have had to change the names of their sites several times because of
that interference. The internet may well become the catalyst that exposes the REA
devices and methods and who lies behind them.
Experiments and the Government
In the Cold War that followed upon World War II, the oligarchies that ruled the world’s
governments saw the usefulness of mind control as a weapon. Although leaders at first
probably perceived mind control as a neurological weapon to be used only on foreign
populations, they also recognized its value in quelling civil uprisings and controlling the
domestic population. In the United States of America, although the CIA and other
intelligence-gathering and law enforcement agencies have intentionally destroyed most
of the records that incriminate them, shreds of remaining evidence show that the
Government has conducted mind control experiments on U. S. citizens on American
soil since the 1940’s.
If the aim of the Federal Government is only surveillance of possible terrorists, there
would be absolutely no need for the use of directed energy weaponry and mind control.
Thus, there must be another explanation for the electronic effects and mind control
activities. That explanation is doubtlessly experimentation. Some targets believe that
the government is past the experimentation stage and is now employing the results of
that experimentation. While the latter is probably true, there is no end to
experimentation. Experiments are ongoing and never ending, as they lead to still more
spin-off experiments.
186
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
The government has the keenest interest in two principal areas, the genes and the
brain. The former includes DNA studies. The government finances countless projects in
research institutes and university labs to map every molecule of the human brain and
determine its function. To do so requires experimentation. Much of that experimentation
must be performed on unknowing and involuntary human subjects to be accurate.
The Government as a whole does not conduct experiments. The U. S. Government
consists of three branches: the executive, the legislative, and the judicial. The latter two
can be eliminated as experimenters based on pure logic. Thus, if the Government is
indeed involved in REA, it must be through the executive branch, which includes the
Department of Defense, Department of Homeland Security, and all intelligence and law
enforcement organizations. Fusion Centers, Neighborhood Watches, Infraguard, and
other watchdog-type entities also fall under the executive branch of government. That
the electronic stalking and mind control activities might emanate from the executive
branch of the U. S. Government helps explain why the intelligence and law
enforcement offices under that branch refuse to take action on targets’ complaints.
That may also help to explain the experiments. The DOD continually searches within
the business/manufacturing complex, including pharmaceutical companies, as well as
academia for inventions that are applicable or adaptable for use in neurological
warfare. Thus, those inventions have become very lucrative, as the DOD not only funds
many of the research projects but also buys the resulting devices and methods, paying
millions of dollars for the patents and copyrights or for the development of those
patents and copyrights under defense contractors. From the 1950’s to the 1970’s, more
than eighty U. S. institutions, both public and private, participated in developing
devices and methods for controlling the human mind using public funding. The irony is
that victims of electronic stalking and mind control are paying for their own torture.
Each section of the brain and many tiny nuclei and cells of the brain determine all of
the person's thoughts and bodily functions. The U.S., Russia, China, Israel, and other
countries compete with each other in mapping the human brain. That purpose is not
purely humanitarian but a competition for neurological dominance over the remainder
of the world. Scientists work tirelessly toward that end, for knowing how the brain
functions and malfunctions provides the basis of mind control.
The study of intelligence is important for brain mapping and thus mind control. An
online article by Amanda Gardner, a Healthday Reporter, on February 26, 2010,
describes what scientists have determined about “intelligence.” She quotes Jan
Glascher, a postdoctoral fellow in the department of humanities and social sciences at
the California Institute of Technology in Pasadena and lead author of a paper
187
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
appearing in that week's issue of the Proceedings of the National Academy of
Sciences, as saying that their studies show that "general intelligence relies on the
connection between the frontal and the parietal [situated behind the frontal] parts of the
brain. Those are "connections between the gray matter, or cell bodies, and the white
matter, or connecting fibers between neurons. . . ."
Paul Sanberg, professor of neurosurgery and director of the University of South Florida
Center for Aging and Brain Repair in Tampa, states that studies such as those ". . .
allows them to systemize [sic] and pinpoint areas important to intelligence." Learning
those “pinpoints” is what the experiments are all about.
To sell the software, devices, or methods to the U. S. Government for its neurological
warfare and domestic control programs, the inventors must present credible evidence
that they work. To do so requires that every patent or copyright be tested and re-tested
in experiments to be deemed functional and useable. Those tests can only be carried
out on human beings, and for the tests to be valid, the test subjects must be completely
unaware of the testing. When proof of the successful testing is presented to the
government, the inventors have to reveal the names of those targets who are tested
and present a profile of those persons. Thus, some government agency probably
retains the names of those victims in its files.
Interest in brain mapping makes a good case that experimentation is one of the causes
of electronic stalking and mind control assault. In addition to specific persons chosen
for testing because they possess some particular characteristic, other targets may
simply be targets of opportunity. Still others be selected because they are considered
anti-government, domestic terrorists, or likely to become domestic terrorists. Others
may be alcoholics, drug addicts, and other categories of “expendables” that law
enforcement would approve removing through a twisted concept of social cleansing.
Our remote attackers use the same devices and techniques as those proven to be
owned and used by the U. S. Government. If the U. S. Government does not engage
directly in the electronic stalking and mind manipulation effects, it is certainly in
collusion with those who do. I use the word “collusion” because if a person or
organization aids and abets an illegal action, he or it is a “collaborateur.” That makes
that person or organization equally guilty.
A Rationale for Electronic Stalking and Mind Control
Why would any person or organization spend so much money, time, and effort in
“hooking” a target and then blitzing him by remote with continual and barbaric directed
188
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
energy weapons, electromagnetism, and mind control? Two reasons come to mind. The
perpetrator(s) either wish to (1) neutralize the target or (2) use him for experimentation.
Sometimes the two objectives coincide.
The first reason, neutralization, comes in many forms: ostracizing him, making him
unemployable, breaking him financially, causing him to commit suicide, or gradually
murdering him with the accumulated and sustained effects of the electronic stalking. It
is probably safe to say that all types of harassment, organized stalking as well as
electronic stalking and mind control, seek the neutralization of the target. The
perpetrators decide whether only to harry the victim or eliminate him entirely.
If units of the United States Government were involved in the neutralization of a target,
there would be absolutely no need for the continual torture and mind control of the
victim unless those units first wished to extract information from the target. Even then,
isolating the victim and causing him much personal suffering appear far more drawnout and probably less cost-effective than would be necessary simply to retrieve
information from that target. Unless rogue elements of the government who wish to
inflict as much damage on the target as possible are involved, I believe that the
government would deal far more directly with the victim in neutralizing him.
Thus, it is my opinion that the U. S. Government is probably not interested in electronic
stalking and mind control for only neutralization purposes. The government would be
far more interested in the experimental results of the torture. The perpetrators are far
more likely to be nut cases representing the Radical Right, hate groups, perhaps
certain Far Right rogue groups from the executive branch, foreign governments who
have axes to grind with the particular targets, and vendetta cases involving the private
(and sometimes public) sector(s). Nevertheless, intelligence and law enforcement know
about those attacks and do nothing to prevent them.
The second reason, experimentation, may not preclude eventual neutralization.
However, the perpetrators are more interested, at least initially, in using the target to
test their electronic and mind control theories. Mapping the brain is a high priority. They
obviously view the target as “expendable,” so if the victim dies or commits suicide as a
result of the experiments, they simply replace him with another target.
When we ask the question “Who would gain the greatest benefit from
experimentation?,” the U. S. Government now enters the picture. The government
stands to advance greatly its neurological and biological warfare program through
experimentation on involuntary targets. So do foreign powers using American citizens
as targets. In addition to the government(s), the private sector and particularly
pharmaceutical companies also often require testing on human subjects to perfect and
market their products, especially those dealing even remotely with mind control.
189
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
On the other hand, the Radical Right, hate groups, Far Right rogue government
groups, and those seeking vendettas, would have little interest in experimentation.
Their sole aim is to make life unbearable for the target and eventually neutralize him. In
attempting to determine the identity of their perps, targets would do well to consider
these points.
The Experimentation Process
If indeed experimentation is one of the causes of electronic stalking and mind control, it
must be carried out through several sequential steps.
-- First of all, teams of psychiatrists, psychologists, electrical and other engineers, radio
experts, physicists, medical personnel, propagandists, and others representing
scientific equipment manufacturers, research institutes, and universities must gather
information on and conduct research into the most efficient, quickest, and most costeffective form of neurological enslavement. The teams work independently on specific
segments of neurological forms of capturing the brain. The purpose is that few
scientists involved will know the entire process.
-- Then, the many research results must be packaged into a useable method for
application by an ultra-secret group of professionals in every field. Although the private
sector has the means to perform the research and produce the devices and other
results of the research, only an apparatus such as a government, with its wide range of
authority, unlimited financial resources, and cover of secrecy can turn those efforts into
a combined and viable product. That product is a mind control method for capturing the
minds of humans for their total manipulation and control.
The method had to first be spelled out in narrative, probably in the form of a user-type
manual, much like instructions for using a machine or assembling an object. Those
manuals are so highly classified and protected that only the highest government
officials can access them. Most government officials do not know of their existence.
The manual is probably recorded on a thumb-drive type device that cannot be copied
and probably fewer than a half dozen of them exist.
-- The product, or the neurological blueprint for conquering human minds, however, is
meaningless without a delivery system that links the research results with the targets.
Thus, a means must be developed to “hook” the human brain through some process.
That process must be remote, as targets will not voluntarily submit to mental castration,
and it must be silent and secret, so that targets will not realize that their minds have
been “hooked.” We do not yet know what device or method is used to snare the human
mind but we shall in the future.
190
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
-- Once the delivery system is in place and the targets’ brains hooked, personnel must
be trained to test the device(s)/method(s). The original trainers had to have been the
scientists and others described in Number 2 above working directly under top
governmental authorities. Those trainers at first probably trained only a small group
who would serve as “attackers” to carry out the testing, or experiments, on human
targets. Once those attackers learned the techniques of mind control and the
device/method for applying them, they in turn trained others. The training was carried
out using no written instructions and thus leaving no evidence. Trained attackers now
doubtlessly number into the thousands or tens of thousands.
-- The results of the research and the delivery system must then be tested. Every
neurological objective must be tested on all of the targets, who serve as experimental
control groups for that purpose. The mind control components tested represent
thousands of individual experiments ranging from simple to very complex. That testing
began in the 1950’s, perhaps still earlier, and continues today. The testing is carried
out in prolonged and ongoing experiments on selected targets and groups of targets.
We shall discuss those experiments in the following text.
-- The data is collected and categorized, examined, and graded on the extent of
accomplishment of the desired neurological effects. The overall effect is analyzed by
experts. Data processing centers with super computers are established to record all
experimental results. The super computers use a series of key words to extract all
meaningful information, categorize it under certain topics, provide racial, gender, and
other statistics, and otherwise refine and edit that information in useable form.
-- The analyses lead to continual ongoing corrections and readjustments of the
neurological methods and the delivery system. Teams of experts continually work on
perfecting the system.
-- Then, the methods and device(s) are retested, which means that attackers must
receive occasional on-site instruction from representatives whose jobs are to update
and retrain the attackers. The instructors also doubtlessly communicate with the
attackers continually through secure email sites and telephone calls.
The neurological experimentation activities required years of preparation. Many very
intelligent people worked on the plan, doubtlessly including psychiatrists and
psychologists, behavioral scientists and other scientists in all areas of research, very
high level government bureaucrats, representatives of the U. S. intelligence community,
top level military leaders, scientific and government liaison personnel employed by big
business, top medical brains, probably selected religious leaders, and perhaps even
191
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
representatives of selected foreign “allies.” At first, the planners worked on the
device(s) for carrying out mind control, what they wanted those devices to accomplish,
and the techniques and methods of plying the mind control activities. The training and
testing would come later.
Inventions of countless devices and techniques have been patented, ostensibly for
humane medical interventions; however, one needs only little imagination to recognize
that many of those inventions are suitable for and probably actually intended for more
sinister purposes. I shall not attempt to discuss those inventions. One can search for
those patents on the internet. There are scores of them. Many of those items and
methods were clearly intended to be used for neurological warfare. Once those
inventions could be operated by remote, they were ready to be tested on human
subjects.
We still do not know the criteria that the experimenters used in choosing their human
guinea pigs. Nor do we know, once the targets were identified, how their minds were
seized for the experiments and the results monitored and recorded. Did the
Government provide a list of people, or types of people, for experimentation that it
considered “expendable?” Or did it insist on approving the targets used for
experimentation? The scientists who conducted the experiments hid behind innocuous
research titles and often argued that their devices and methods could improve the lives
of human beings. Yet, any perceptive reader could read between the lines in imagining
the military applications of those neurological inventions.
Experimenters must meticulously record their activities and show the results of those
activities. The guinea pigs used in those activities had to be identified through a name,
number, and probably some other symbol for purposes of documentation, discussion,
and retesting. Thus, the real names of the targets and their backgrounds and personal
data must be recorded in some classified files.
Why the U. S. Government Would Permit Experiments on Americans
Why would the United States Government allow those inventors and military
contractors to experiment on Americans on American soil? Logical answers do not
challenge one’s imagination. Think about it. Here are several plausible reasons:
•Human resources to serve as experiment testers, or attackers, are readily available in
the United States to carry out the experiments on selected human targets. Consider
some of the possibilities for attackers: active and retired military personnel, active and
retired law enforcement officers, highly trained technicians in labs, manufacturing
192
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
businesses, and other industries who have been laid off from work due to the current
economic conditions, recent college graduates looking for a job when few jobs are
available, and other personnel who do not work or who are retired. It is little wonder
then that the attackers know the regional accents and vernacular to use with targets in
particular locations in the country, for the attackers, just like the targets, represent a
profile of the American population. They are from all parts of the country.
•Targets in the United States abound. Naturally, the power brokers who sponsor the
experiments probably first looked for targets in the more vulnerable people and among
those citizens who might be considered by many as “expendable.” These include older
people, especially those in rest homes and other institutions, single men and women
who live alone, drug addicts and pushers, those who have been diagnosed with mental
conditions, and others. However, eventually the powerbrokers saw the feasibility and
the desirability of targeting individuals who might somehow pose political and other
threats to the establishment. Thus, when guinea pigs live in the immediate
surroundings, why go halfway around the world to find the guinea pigs?
•Targets for experimentation probably represent all ethnic, racial, gender, socioeconomic, political, and age groups, life styles, philosophies, educational levels, trades
and occupations, and many religious groups. Should local attackers have a hand in
selecting targets, those targets may include co-workers whom the attackers do not like,
neighbors with whom they don’t get along, merchants or businesspersons with whom
they have had difficulties, and even family members from whom they are estranged.
Most of targets with whom I have communicated appear “typical” Americans that cut
across every stratum of society. Other correspondents are ex-convicts (non-violent
offenses) and past drug users.
•Security is much better in the U. S. than it would be abroad. With the protection and
non-interference of law enforcement, the cooperation of psychiatrists who label TIs
schizophrenic, and the ability to tap phones and hack computers, secrecy can be
ensured in the United States much more easily than it could abroad. Moreover,
attackers in the United States will not be subject to capture as spies, jailed, and forced
to reveal the operations. Detection of United States experiments in other countries and
the exposure of those secrets could seriously damage the development of U. S.
neurological warfare projects and set the research back for years, as most of the
American people would probably oppose those activities once they were known.
•The United States population is extremely diverse and includes almost every ethnic
group in the world. Why go to China to target Chinese when they can be targeted in the
193
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
United States? I have corresponded with targets in the United States who are Oriental,
Caucasian, Negroid, and Native American.
Just how targets are selected is not precisely known; however, we can use logic in
exploring that method. Emphasis is probably given to what many people consider
“expendable” elements of the population, i.e., prisoners and ex-cons; old people in rest
homes; homosexuals and lesbians; gang members; anti-government activists and
suspected subversives; drug dealers and addicts; political dissidents, and other
“troublemakers.” Those people, however, do not possess all the qualifications required
for valid experiments. Thus, “non-expendable” citizens such as schoolteachers, small
businesspeople, scientists (including social scientists), students, and others may also
be targeted if they possess the characteristics that the experimenters seek.
•English is the dominant language for all computers. Thus, English is the preferred
language for the attackers. The data base on the experiments is kept in the English
language although the computers can also translate the data into other languages. are
also used by attackers and translated simultaneously by computers for the data
processing centers (more on them later).
•Logistics for managing teams, training personnel as attackers, and maintaining and
securing the data obtained are far easier within the United States than they would be
abroad; thus, the experimenters can exercise greater control over the experiments in
the United States.
•Managers of the teams and data collected have to operate in only four time zones in
the United States, as opposed to operating many hours away in foreign countries.
•The experiments can be carried out much more easily and economically in the United
States. Imagine having to recruit attackers covertly in a foreign country, ensure their
loyalty and secrecy, provide them the necessary equipment and training, and pay them
(probably in hundreds of off-shore foreign accounts in countries such as Switzerland
and the Bahamas). Although the government’s financing is limitless, it has to use its
“secret” money (those funds that the American public does not know about) wisely.
•The turn-around time between testing, analyzing, and making corrections can be
greatly reduced if the experiments are conducted in the U. S.
•U. S. military bases, the Pentagon, and other well-guarded installations provide secret
sites for use by trainers and data collection and processing.
194
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
•Many self-righteous United States leaders undoubtedly espouse a sick philosophy that
embraces “social cleansing.” In other words, “expendable” elements of the population
are deemed suitable for a Final Solution. Does that ring familiar? The military-business
establishment knows that it will have no problem getting assistance from sickos who
will participate in that scheme.
•At the same time, I believe that pro-Israel factions in the government see in the
experiments an opportunity to eliminate Israel’s enemies within the United States. I
have corresponded with several individuals who believed that they had been targeted
because of their views toward Israel and Israel’s policies. What better way to dispose of
your enemies than by ensuring that they be selected as targets for experimentation,
which often effectively eliminates those people as functional beings? Other “friendly”
countries may also be able to nominate targets within the United States.
•Satellite imagery pinpoints every house and temporary building, road or lane, and
every stream in the United States. That as well as the easier logistics and
communications of operating within the country’s borders, aids surveillance and
neurological assault immensely. By Googling, internet users can pull up images of their
own dwellings. Oftentimes, the occupants will be shown in the yards when the images
were taken. If the average citizen can do that, imagine what secret government
technicians and computer experts can do through satellites.
Some writers state that science has not yet reached a point at which it can develop
satellites capable of focusing on an individual in his house and following that target. I
totally disagree. Secret scientific capabilities are eons ahead of known scientific
capabilities. If scientists can send unmanned rocket ships to the moon and mars, land
those crafts, send out smaller remote-operated vehicles to gather rock samples and
other materials, bring them back to the ship, and then return the space ship to earth, all
by remote, they can most certainly contrive a method for targets on planet earth to be
handled by satellite by remote. The use of satellites along with GPS appears to me not
only possible but very likely. If satellites do figure in the REA, the range could be
thousands of miles.
In my case, it is not highly likely that my neurological assailants live very close, for I live
in a very rural area with no really close neighbors. That, of course, depends upon the
range of the neurological devices, which remains largely unknown. My nearest
neighbor lives about a quarter of a mile away. The next closest neighbor lives almost a
mile farther. Yet, others neighbors who live a short distance farther within the 360
degrees that radiate from my house and surrounding area could possibly be attackers.
195
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Moreover, when I visit family almost 200 miles away and travel to other places, even
abroad, I am subjected to the usual electronic and mind control activities both while
mobile on the road (usually voices only) and at the destinations (electronic assault as
well as voices and other mind control activities). Unless the attackers, knowing my
thoughts and my plans, notify other local attackers of my travels and locations, the REA
would have to come from quite a distance. That argues that satellites may indeed be
utilized for that purpose.
We know that satellites using GPS can find locations using geographical coordinates.
However, satellites would be useless if they could find a site and not be able to zero in
on a target. All TIs know that they are subjected to electronic torture and mind control
regardless of their geographic locations. Moreover, they can be singled out for torture
in a crowd or sitting with friends and family members.
Thus, logically targets must have something on or in their bodies that allows some
device or force to locate and focus on them. The scope of this paper does not include a
discussion of that method; however, I’ll simply mention that possibilities include an
implant (such as a microchip), an injection (in the form of a shot or inoculation), by
detecting targets’ voices or their particular DNA found on their skin, and perhaps other
methods.
Readers can probably supply other reasons why the United States government
experiments in the United States on its own people. Whether the testing is done in a
religious, political, economic, or social context makes no difference. They all have
military and human mind enslavement applications. Its end purpose represents
maintaining the status quo that revolves around the U. S. military-industrial machine.
Likely Experiments
I list below some hypotheses whose successful experimentation might prove applicable
in quelling a possible civil uprising, rendering foreign enemy troops unfit for battle, and
undermining foreign governments. Most of the experiments would be psychological.
Those hypotheses, or premises, are stated in the form of questions. These represent
only a small number of possible experiments. Readers will be able to add many others.
-- What type computer software works best with certain targets in certain conditions to
cause electronic and mind control effects?
-- Can computer programs be developed that will interact with the targets’ thoughts
without human involvement using the raw data stored in super computer?
196
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
-- Can a person be programmed to hate or react negatively to names of persons,
places, or things introduced into his mind?
-- What mind control techniques work best to alienate a person from his family
members and friends?
-- Can a person be programmed to become disloyal to his country and switch his
allegiance to another country?
-- What type targets responds best to the mind control methods used and conversely
what type targets can best resist those methods?
– How does intelligence and the I.Q. level affect electronic stalking and mind control?
− Can synthetic telepathy be used to create dependency on drugs, tobacco, or alcohol
and conversely cause an aversion to those items?
-- Can a person be programmed to react in a particular manner to post hypnotic code?
– Can loop play tapes to the target's subconscious make that person change his views
about race, ethnicity, politics, religion, sex, etc.?
-- What target groups, based on factors such as intelligence, age, gender, sexual
orientation, physical condition, the physique, education, color, language groups,
ethnicity, and other qualities, are most vulnerable to mind control?
– Can mind control be used to create multiple personalities in a target?
-- How long does it take for a tested victim to capitulate to a particular mind control
method?
– Can continual suggestions to a target's subconscious cause somatic disorders and
sickness?
– What effect does prolonged V2K have on a target's body conditions and functions
and his decision-making ability?
-- Is REA more effective if used with organized stalkers?
-- Can a person be sensitized to hear certain words in normal conversation or on
TV/radio through previous hypnosis?
197
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
-- Can the same mind control effects be carried out on a large group of targets at the
same time?
-- Can targets contrive methods for shielding against the effects of a neurological
assault?
-- Can a person be programmed to reveal his thoughts when he receives certain
signals, e.g., jolts and vibrations?
-- How does social isolation caused by the attackers affect a target’s ability to think and
function in society?
-- What effect do the various neurological methods have on the targets and do they
affect targets in the same manner and to the same degree?
-- What width of area and over what length of distance can the neurological methods
achieve the best results?
-- What elements of mind control work best on various types of persons?
-- What is the best method for attackers to track targets from place to place and from
country to country?
-- Can a person’s religious beliefs can be destroyed (and perhaps replaced with other
opposing beliefs)?
-- Can persons be induced to turn against their own country, their own family, their own
church group, their own friends, their own values, etc.?
-- Can pin pricks by attackers on the target’s body affect the body in the same manner
as physical acupuncture?
-- What is the optimum range for performing neurological activities on targets?
-- Are targets who live in rural situations affected the same way as targets in urban
areas?
-- Can targets be besieged by insects (African bees and fire ants, for example) by
tuning in a certain frequency that attracts those insects?
198
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
-- Can a person be covertly psychologically conditioned to think certain negative (or
positive) things about certain types of people based on ethnicity, color of skin,
nationality, religion, social level, education, political affiliation, personal philosophy,
etc.?
-- Can constant subconscious whispers by attackers conveying the same message
eventually persuade the target to believe that message?
-- Can neurological suggestions influence physical actions (or inactions) without the
targets being aware of the cause(s) and if so, to what extent?
-- Can targets be made to perform certain acts (perhaps unknowingly, as in
sleepwalking) or think certain suggested ideas?
-- Can targets be made to develop what psychiatrists term true schizophrenia,
paranoia, or obsessive compulsive behavior?
-- Can targets be forced to act out physically their frustrations, hatreds, fears, etc. on
others?
-- Will targets’ induced conditions affect their ability to operate as “normal” human
beings?
-- What conditions are most effective in rendering targets incapable of operating as
“normal” human beings?
-- Can targets be made to overcome their revulsion to various ideas and conversely
see repulsive actions in a favorable light. For example, can a Jew or Arab be made to
eat pork or can a perfectly normal person be made to commit incest?
-- Are there drugs, particularly “mood swing” drugs and anti-depressant drugs as well
as certain vitamins and minerals that can influence the outcome of particular mind
control methods on targets?
-- Can attackers blank out permanently certain thoughts in targets or eliminate certain
words and areas in targets’ thoughts?
-- Can the targets’ surroundings (location, house construction materials, implements,
electrical devices, etc), weather conditions, time of year (moon, seasons, etc.),
proximity to particular installations (oil refineries, relay towers, etc.) enhance the effect
of neurological weapons on those targets?
199
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
-- What foibles and vulnerabilities in targets can best be exploited for psychological
purposes and control of those individuals?
-- Which torture methods affect the targets the worst psychologically?
-- What is the most effective duration of a particular physical or mind control effect on
the target?
-- Can a target be made impotent using outside sources and conversely can his libido
be dramatically increased?
-- Can a target’s sexual orientation be changed through mind control, i.e., heterosexual
to homosexual and homosexual to heterosexual, and is it easier to achieve in particular
ethnic and racial groups, genders, etc.?
-- Can targets be made to say words out of context in speaking with others?
-- Can targets be made to view almost everything in his daily life in a negative context?
-- What physical stimulus and/or mind control method can get the best results from the
thought “mining” process?
-- Can targets be hypnotized through the use of certain pre-suggested words through
the TV, radio, or in conversation?
-- How can post-hypnotic suggestions reinforce the mind control methods?
-- What is the best way to train attackers of targets.
-- What human characteristics should recruiters look for in selecting trainers and
attackers?
-- What type of person makes the most effective attackers?
-- Can targets be made to believe absurd things that do not happen or do not exist? For
example, the U. S. intelligence community convinced a young Moslem detainee at
Guantanamo that he had lost both his hands and legs. Although he could visually see
that his arms and legs were there, he still believed that they were not.
200
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
-- What is the most effective interrogation technique for attackers in the mind “mining”
process, i.e., asking questions, showing photos to the target, making half statements
and allowing the target to finish, staging scenarios in which the target is the principal
actor, etc.?
-- Can mind control be used to cause insatiable appetite and conversely anorexia in
targets?
-- To what extent can a target’s visual thoughts expose information not revealed in the
target’s narrative or his answers to questions? (Examining those thoughts visually may
reveal clues concerning a particular strategic site or a particular weapon or an
impending action or a particular militarily- or politically-important person whom the
target knows whom the attackers may not have been aware of.)
-- Can attackers gain the confidence of the target in their telepathic conversations with
him? (They do this by providing helpful information to the target, warning him of various
dangers, and telling him to “trust” them.)
-- Can third parties be made to communicate telepathically with the target without the
knowledge of either one of them?
-- Can ocular diseases such as cataracts be caused by pinpointing laser beams to
certain areas of the eye?
-- What physical effects can be caused by psychological suggestion and to what
extent?
-- What type target can best analyze what is happening to him vis-a-vis mind control,
based on their profession or occupation, their educational level, their gender, sexual
orientation, ethnicity, etc.?
-- Can a psychological profile be developed for selecting both attackers and targets?
-- Can targets be made to commit suicide through whispering into their sub-conscious
thoughts of self-destruction? How do thoughts of suicide register concerning the
target’s emotions, i.e. blood pressure, heartbeat, anxiety level, nervousness, etc.?
-- What is the best technique to test the efficacy of interchanging or replacing attackers
for targets, especially when those targets move from country to country?
201
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
-- What type target can most easily be persuaded (either neurologically through
whispers, etc. or by bribes and other forms of compensation, etc.) to commit treason
and perhaps assassinate important figures?
-- Can experimenters improve their propagandistic capability to deceive the public re
the mind control experiments (disseminating misinformation through the internet,
psychiatrists, the media, law enforcement, etc.) as targets become more open and their
numbers become more threatening?
-- How can attackers work more effectively with their “allies” in mind control operations?
-- What emotions and mind control techniques are most likely to cause combat troops
to surrender?
-- What can be learned by showing targets holographic images and recording their
reactions to those images?
-- How can attackers improve induced “dreams” to fish for information?
-- How can information from recording targets’ levels of frustration, anxiety, irritation,
and other emotions under particular kinds and stages of stress be used to advantage?
-- Can targets’ be conditioned to react to certain smells, sounds, and tastes, and can
attackers change those senses?
-- How will damage or alteration of the targets’ eyesight (making them see double,
removing their “side vision,” causing them to see in various colors or not see certain
colors or images) affect the targets’ ability to function?
-- How can physical effects such as the pin pricks be used to best advantage and at
what point should they be used?
-- Can the attackers’ equipment cause cancer and/or other internal and external
diseases?
-- Can attackers cause amnesia in targets?
-- Can the attackers’ computer software make targets hear particular words entered into
the computer by the attackers in place of particular regular words on TV and on the
radio?
202
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
-- What type of target will most likely learn to “trust” the attackers?
-- Can attackers cause aberrant sexual thoughts and behavior in targets?
-- Can targets be made to consider dishonest actions when the targets are perfectly
honest?
-- Can attackers condition targets to perform actions outside of their regular routine
using sub-conscious communication?
-- Can attackers cause the target confusion in his geographical orientation and
movements?
-- Can aggressive, combative persons be made docile by remote mind control? This is
applicable with militant Jihadists and others.
-- Can hypnotic suggestions cause artificial erections, etc?
-- Can those erections and other sexual effects be utilized to cause in the target a
sense of frustration and anxiety or perhaps a misdirected sexual urge?
-- Can targets be made to perform an action that he will no longer remember afterward?
-- Can targets be estranged from close family members by subliminal suggestions
about those loved ones?
-- Can hypnosis be used effectively once attackers “hook” the target’s brain?
-- Can targets be conditioned to respond to certain code words and act out a response
desired by the attackers?
-- What visual damage will bother the target the most and to what extent will it affect his
ability to function?
-- Can targets be hypnotized through music, particular sounds, or at the sight of
particular objects, persons, or pictures?
-- Can targets’ pets be made to react to certain sounds or frequencies and to ignore
other sounds?
203
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
-- Can attackers cause certain diseases in targets through their actions or the power of
suggestion, i.e., Alzheimer’s, asthma, prostate problems?
-- Is there a particular hour of the day or night during which targets’ minds are more
vulnerable to “mining” by the attackers?
-- How do targets’ body functions react to thoughts of suicide: blood pressure,
heartbeat, etc?
-- Can hypnotic suggestions affect sexual thoughts and activities?
-- Can a target be completely immobilized by lethargy and fatigue through whispered
suggestions?
-- Can a target be made to feel very hot or very cold by hypnotic suggestion?
-- Can physical effects such as electrical-like jolts and vibrations condition targets to
release or reveal thoughts and, if so, to what extent?
-- Do rain and other atmospheric conditions affect the ability of handler to perform mind
control methods?
-- Are physical and psychological conditions caused in targets by the REA reversible?
-- Can persons whom the targets know or do not know be interjected into targets’
“dreams” by names mentioned by the attackers to the targets’ subconscious?
Readers can provide hundreds of other possible experiments. One can use his
imagination about the number of spin-offs those experiments might spawn. Each one
lends itself to several variations using that same experiment. All of the experiments
have the potential of use by the military and the intelligence community.
The Angry Flies Experiment
One day in the late fall of 2009, I took a load of pine straw into the fruit orchard to place
around the tree trunks against the approaching winter cold. I had hardly begun work
when a huge flying insect began attacking me. I use the word “attack” because that was
exactly what it was, an attack. I recognized the insect to be what we locally refer to as a
horse fly. However, it was by far the largest one I had ever seen. No other flying insects
were out, as it was late in the year for insects.
204
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
The horse fly circled and attacked me tenaciously. Although I flailed and fanned my
arms to shoo it away, no action on my part daunted it. It had the uncanny ability to
attack in my least defensible area, always on the upper back just below my neck and
between the shoulder blades, where I could not reach. It bit me hard time after time.
The attack lasted probably a full five minutes before the fly finally flew away, probably
satiated by the blood it had drawn.
As a longtime victim of electronic stalking and mind control, few things surprise me.
Because of the savagely aggressive nature of the horse fly, I immediately thought that
it was somehow the work of the attackers. I reasoned that the fly had perhaps been
trained to search out particular frequencies or perhaps to hone in on my particular
frequency. Over the next several weeks, I occasionally remembered the vicious attack
and pondered just how the attackers might have performed that trick.
Then, on Saturday, January 16, 2010, I found a feature story in the Yahoo News
entitled “Angry Flies May Help Explain Human Aggression” written by Marlene Cimons
of the National Science Foundation (NSF). That article proved very revealing. The
writer explained that biologist David Anderson, a scientist with the Howard Hughes
Medical Institute of Caltech, an institution partially supported by the NSF, had “set out
to learn whether [fruit] flies, like bees, can get angry -- part of a broader effort to study
how animal behavior relates to genetics.”
In the experiment, fruit flies were trained to become extremely aggressive by using
puffs of air to anger them. Anderson and his colleagues showed that under stress the
flies produced a chemical known as pheromone, which is linked to “specific neurons” in
the fly’s brain. The fruit fly’s brain consists of approximately 20,000 neurons, which are
“considered a valuable system with which to study the genetic basis of learning,
courtship, memory and circadian rhythms.” The writer went on to say that fruit fly
research has “been a powerful tool with which to study emotions,” . . . for “most of the
genes in the fruit fly are also in humans, including neurons that produce brain
chemicals associated with several psychiatric disorders.” Enough said.
That particular NSF experiment doubtlessly had nothing to do with the aggressive
horse fly that attacked me. Nevertheless, the article makes very clear that scientists are
interested in using flying insects in studying emotions in similar situations. Or are
scientists simply studying insects as models for building drones to spy on humans?
In a December 16, 2011 MSNBC U.S.News article on domestic spying drones, Sylvia
Wood quotes M. Ryan Calo, director for privacy and robotics at the Stanford Law
School's Center for Internet and Society, as saying “Drones are capable of finding or
following a specific person. . . .They can fly patterns in search of suspicious activities or
205
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
hover over a location in wait. Some are as small as birds or insects [emphasis is mine],
others as big as blimps.”
Other Experiments
Other experiments spin off the foregoing experiments. The list of possible neurological
experiments is endless. Perhaps that is why the number of targets does not diminish
but instead grows ever larger, for as neurological research increases, the need for
guinea pigs also increases. Likewise, to be considered valid, the experiments require
continuity, which means that the same targets must be used throughout the entire
experiment. That explains why once targets are “hooked,” they remain hooked. We are
seeing only the beginning of these evil and inhuman neurological experiments.
In addition to preparing for neurological warfare, the government undoubtedly is also
preparing to prevent civil disobedience from occurring. That is probably the reason why
very liberal political, civic, and union activists, radical organizations, particularly those
considered anti-government, environmental activists, whistleblowers, free thinkers,
Survivalists, extremists, nonconformists, independent cult-like religious groups, and
avowed socialists and anarchists are often targeted for experimentation.
The Creation of Multiple Personalities
Robert Louis Stevenson’s Dr. Jekyll, a scientist by day, and his other personality, or
alter ego, Mr. Hyde, a killer by night, has intrigued psychiatrists for years. The
intelligence agencies and scientists took that multiple personality concept and gave it a
new spin in developing its mind control program. Called “split and control psychology,”
the objective is to confuse the victim about his own identity for the purpose of total mind
control. As in the Manchurian Candidate, psychologists convince targets that targets
have additional personalities that cause them to commit acts that they would not
otherwise perform, such as murder. With that conditioning, a target readily accepts
assignments that he would not ordinarily take. In the cases of multiple personalities,
there is always an evil, calculating, deceitful personality versus a good or much less
evil one.
Readers have already read that I accidentally discovered ways to hear the continual
loop play tapes played to targets’ subconscious by their attackers. One day in late
2009, I rubbed my ears to hear what the loop play tapes were saying. In one ear, I
heard a handler’s voice saying over the continuous loop play taped message, “You’re
(the name of a person).” In the other ear, the same recorded voice was repeating,
“You’re (the name of a different person).” In the first case, the person was one of my
206
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
oldest friends; in the second case, the person was a distant cousin. To counter the
obvious intentions of the attackers, I often tell them, “I am NOT (name), and I am NOT
(name). I am ONLY Max Harrison Williams, always have been, always will be, and
nobody else.”
I have corresponded with only one other TI who has mentioned the multiple
personalities theme; nevertheless, I suspect that it is very often used on unsuspecting
targets. It does not require a super active imagination to think of the possible uses of
multiple personalities in carrying out intelligence and military actions in both domestic
and foreign situations. Ex-contractors. “killer-for-hire” types, for the military occasionally
remember that their other personalities were made to accomplish a mission and they
were supposed not to remember it. In my case, I have no idea what my other
personality is supposed to do, but I do know that my mind will never allow that other
personality to develop. Despite the attempts to control my mind, it is still mine.
Victims of Experimentation
Two dates are significant to targets: (1) the date when they first became aware that
they were targeted, and (2) the date that they believe, by “connecting the dots,” that
they were first targeted. Often there are several years between the two dates. It is far
easier to date the discovery of one’s targeting than to date the actual beginning of it. In
my case, for example, I was targeted as early as 1973, perhaps even earlier, but did
not realize it until 2005, thirty-two years later. In other cases, targets seemingly
discovered that they were targeted shortly after it probably occurred.
A small number of targets believe that they were targeted as infants or in very early
childhood for lifelong experimentation. If that is true, the current ages of those targets
suggest that their targeting may have begun in the late 1940’s or the 1950’s. That
would be consistent with the known facts. The FBI’s COINTELPRO project is said to
have officially begun in the early 1950s; it undoubtedly began earlier.
Documents found in the late 1960’s and the 1970’s reveal that the U. S. Government
began performing experiments on its citizens almost immediately following the end of
World War Two. Most of those experiments dealt with learning how the human mind
works and how it can be altered. The experiments took various code names: MKUltra
(MK stands for “mind control”), Monarch, Bluebird (later renamed Artichoke), Montauk,
and others. Those activities have been well researched, and the information is found in
many websites online; thus, I will not delve further into them here.
Almost two hundred public and private entities participated in those experiments,
including public and private universities, public institutions such as the National
207
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Institute of Health, defense manufacturers and contractors, pharmaceutical companies,
and independent researchers and scientists. Various U. S. Government agencies,
notably the CIA, were responsible for coordinating the results of those experiments and
working on the military applications of their data and inventions. Most of the
experimentation was contracted out.
In the late 1960’s when some of those experiments were brought to light, the CIA
destroyed most of its incriminating documentation. Nevertheless, a Congressional
investigation ensued in the mid-1970s, and the U. S. intelligence community was
enjoined from sponsoring the experiments. We know today that they did not stop the
experiments; they only made them more secret. At this very moment, scientists work
feverishly on brain mapping in the U. S. and other countries. No intelligent person,
much less a targeted individual, believes that those efforts are purely humanitarian in
nature. Nor does he believe that the subjects of the brain mapping projects are
necessarily voluntary. Most of the experiments would have no validity if the subject
were willing and knew what was happening.
“Black” budgets, shrouded in secrecy and embedded in regular Congressional
allocations, finance the ongoing experiments. Few government officials, including
probably the President of the United States, know the amount of money at the disposal
of the secret operatives of the CIA and the remainder of the intelligence organizations.
Clandestine units within those intelligence agencies seem to increase with each
successive administration.
The “black” operatives apparently have no Congressional oversight, and, I would
guess, little executive branch oversight. Likewise, the judicial branch does not become
involved in those secret operatives. After all, how can one challenge in court secret
units and their secret activities that do not officially exist?
I believe that electronic stalking and mind control is both punitive and experimental.
The dual purpose is particularly true in vendetta-type assaults: get rid of your enemy
and while doing so, learn all that is possible about physical and neurological torture.
Israel is the prime example of the perpetrator that would derive the greatest benefit
from dual purpose electronic stalking and mind control. That action conveniently
removes its enemies and at the same time provides opportunities for greater
neurological research. Other countries and elements within the United States have the
same motives.
Psychiatrists, Arch Enemies of Targets
208
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Do not believe for a second that psychiatrists do not know about electronic stalking and
mind control. About a year after I began receiving the continual effects of REA, I visited
the same psychiatrist whom I had contacted years earlier when I suffered from anxiety
induced by the attackers. I left him a summary of my REA experiences and my thoughts
about them. He read that summary, and apparently the content did not at all surprise
him, nor did he suggest that I was delusional. Instead, he encouraged me to write a
fictional book about those experiences. I told him that if I did write a book, it most
certainly would not be fictional.
Not all psychiatrists are involved in the REA conspiracy; they are simply defending their
field of study. Look at it from a practical viewpoint. If a psychiatrist actually believes that
a patient is a victim of REA, he loses that patient, for a psychiatrist can only treat real
problems with the victim’s brain, not what the stalkers do to his brain. To keep the
patient, the psychiatrist is compelled to call the victim’s condition paranoia,
schizophrenia, or dementia and then prescribe mind-altering drugs, which only
compound the stalkers’ effects. Psychiatrists operate within the narrow framework of
their medical school teachings based mainly on nineteenth century observations and
experiments. Their treatment usually consists of prescribing patients various forms of
anti-depressants.
Often psychiatrists will recommend extended treatment in a psychiatric facility for
victims who “hear voices.” That treatment is sometimes provided in the American
Gulag, or the nearest insane asylum, for few targets can afford private clinics. Several
victims with whom I corresponded had been involuntarily admitted to mental institutions
because of their symptoms despite not posing a threat to anyone or to themselves.
They always came out of those institutions worse than when they went in. Many
facilities still employ shock therapy, which has been totally discredited as a means of
treatment for mental illnesses.
In attempting to defend themselves from unseen and unknown objects from an unseen
force, targets do indeed often act in bizarre manners. They develop faux phobias about
going to doctors and dentists; they fixate on objects disturbed or missing from their
houses; they feel that TVs are used to watch them; they place aluminum foil over their
windows to ward off the directed energy waves or whatever they may turn out to be;
and they start thinking that almost everybody is a perp. Those are reactions to their
electronic stalking and mind control assault, not signs of genuine mental problems.
Until World War II, psychiatry as a medical science was scarcely known by the general
American population. However, in the 1950’s people started turning to psychiatrists for
their perceived problems. Law enforcement began using psychiatrists to evaluate
persons who either committed crimes or were thought to be capable of committing
209
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
crimes. Anti-depressants for depression and other mental conditions became
commonplace. Since then, psychiatric medicine has become a huge business.
Strangely, the popularity of psychiatry evolved collaterally in the last half of the
twentieth century with the government’s obsession with neurological warfare. Those
responsible for the development and employment of electronic stalking and mind
control have not only fostered an increasing reliance on psychiatry but have also made
psychiatry a main facet of their total neurological torture scheme.
Targets know that attackers manipulate them to react in what is considered abnormal
behavior. When they do so, targets are often forced to undergo “psychiatric
evaluations.” The psychiatrists who perform those evaluations almost always diagnose
targets as delusional, schizophrenic, or paranoid and “treat” those victims with mind
altering drugs. Their diagnosis, says Wikipedia, “is based on observed behavior and
the patient's reported experiences.” In other words, if a target admits to a psychiatrist
that he hears voices, he will be diagnosed as schizophrenic. Once evaluated and found
mentally disturbed, targets lose their credibility, and their complaints of electronic
stalking and mind control activities are considered delusional ideas.
Most psychiatrists agree that if a person is schizophrenic, his symptoms will be obvious
by early adulthood; yet, most targets are in their middle ages when their induced
symptoms begin. The National Institute of Mental Health online booklet on
schizophrenia states that “most of the time, people do not get schizophrenia after age
45.” I was almost seventy years old when my “schizophrenic delusions” developed.
A February 3, 2012 article in the Science News called “Schizophrenia: When
Hallucinatory Voices Suppress Real Ones, New Electronic Application May Help”
states that a schizophrenic patient “experiences the inner voices as 100 per cent real . .
. “ and ". . . at the same time, he can't hear voices of others actually present in the
same room." That is not the case with targets. Targets hear other people’s voices while
the attackers talk in the background. In fact, most of the targets inform me—and this is
also true in my case—that whenever they are talking with other people, they cannot
hear the attackers’ voices. If the above explanation of “hallucinatory” voices is
accurate, it proves that targets are not schizophrenic.
Targets are victims not only of electronic assault but also of medical misdiagnosis.
When a patient visits a doctor and complains of dermatitis or restless legs, neither of
which is an ailment that can be seen, he is taken seriously. Yet, if that same patient
sees the same doctor and complains of electrical jolts and hearing voices, which
likewise cannot be seen (or heard), he will be referred to a shrink. Such is the bias and
210
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
prejudice – and ignorance -- of medical practitioners. Medicine is not an exact science
and is very subjective.
Psychiatrists have never seriously studied electronic stalking and mind control assault.
Very few psychiatrists seem to know much about organized stalking in general.
Psychiatrists could be very valuable allies to targets in identifying other victims of
electronic stalking and mind control and working with targets to find who is harassing
them, how, and why; instead, psychiatrists represent the enemy by cooperating with
those who sponsor the REA. Whether intentional or otherwise, they serve as
accomplices of the powerbrokers behind the REA.
Evidence that psychiatrists know about REA and cooperate with the perpetrators in
covering it up exists in abundance. Indeed, psychiatrists almost have to support the
powerbrokers behind REA to maintain their professional credibility. Think about it. If
psychiatrists admit that symptoms of schizophrenia and paranoia can be induced from
outside the human mind and body by remote, it blows the whole rationale behind
psychiatry as a science and repudiates the tenets on which their profession rests, for
induced signs of schizophrenia and paranoia cannot be treated with traditional
psychological therapy and medicines.
Psychiatrists have aided the CIA and other intelligence units since before World War II.
In Psychiatry and the CIA: Victims of Mind Control, Dr. Harvey M. Weinstein describes
a form of mind control practiced in the 1950s called “psychic driving,” developed by Dr.
Ewen Cameron. In that torturous practice, the subject was first psychologically and
physically beaten down almost to a state of vegetation and then his mind was subjected
to continuous loop play tapes. In the 1950s the tapes were played to the subjects in
laboratories on tape recorders, and those recorders were visible. Today, the same loop
play tapes are sent by remote to the victim as “inaudible” voices. In my case, I receive
dozens of subliminal loop play messages to my subconscious 24/7.
Targets who experience the V2K, or voices, know that their attackers are schooled in
psychology. The speakers play on the guilt and foibles of the targets in a well
researched plan of attack. The pattern is always the same: the attackers find a target’s
faults and consistently attack him by pointing out those faults and psychologically
badgering him. It is extreme psychological bullying. There can be no doubt that
psychologists and psychiatrists developed that plan.
Psychiatry as a legitimate branch of medicine is falling under increasing scrutiny.
Doctors and even psychiatrists are beginning to question psychiatric practices. If
regular medicine is not an exact science, psychiatry is far less exact. Its science is not
211
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
based on many centuries of dissecting the human body to determine the cause of
disease but on less than two centuries of observations and largely inconclusive and
conflicting experiments. Notwithstanding, psychiatric “diseases,” or labels, have grown
from fewer than a dozen in the 1950s to over three hundred today. The count goes on.
Reporter Cheryl Wetzstein, in a March 2, 2010 story in the Washington Times, writes
that “The nation's psychiatrists are considering defining addictive acts such as
overeating, gambling and compulsive sex as medical disorders in their professional
manual.” Dr. Allen Frances, former chairperson of the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual
of Mental Disorders, is quoted as stating that "what we have most feared — the
inclusion of many normal variants under the rubric of mental illness . . . – [can result in]
millions of misidentified ‘patients’ and ‘massive overtreatment.’”
While conducting online research on psychiatry as a discipline of medicine, I pulled up
the review of a book named Pseudoscience in Biological Psychiatry written by Douglas
A. Smith. The book is co-authored by Colin A. Ross, a psychiatrist, Alvin Pam, a
psychologist, and others. Although I did not read the book, I found Smith’s lengthy
review very informative.
Smith says that the authors of the book disagree with the mainstream traditional
psychiatrists who claim that psychological symptoms stem from biological
abnormalities, which suggests that genetics play a major role in those conditions. He
quotes Dr. Ross as saying, “at the present time, there is no proof that biology causes
schizophrenia, bipolar mood disorder, or any other functional mental disorder." Dr.
Pam, a psychologist, writes that “virtually all so-called psychiatric disorders are caused
by life experience rather than the theoretical biological abnormalities that biologically
oriented psychiatrists say are the causes.”
Psychiatrists particularly favor the label schizophrenia when diagnosing targets of
electronic stalking and mind control. In the cited book, Harry Wiener, M.D., states that
"The belief that schizophrenia is a specific organic disease or a group of organic brain
diseases has never been confirmed.” Dr. Thomas Szasz, Professor Emeritus of
Psychiatry at the State University of New, York, Syracuse and author of Exposing
Psychiatry as a Pseudo-Science, states flatly, “No behavior or misbehavior is a disease
or can be a disease.” In relation to psychiatric treatment of children, he makes the point
that “Labeling a child as mentally ill is stigmatization, not diagnosis. Giving a child a
psychiatric drug is poisoning, not treatment.”
Dr. Ross observes that, "The dream of biological psychiatrists is that an 'objective'
laboratory test for one of the major mental illnesses will be discovered.” His statement
212
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
is an open admission that many tests are continually being conducted to test and
“prove” the psychiatric labels. Many of those tests are probably financed by
pharmaceutical companies or probably by contractors in private research institutes
working directly for the DOD.
Psychiatrists “. . . have, for hundreds of year [sic], used diagnostic terms, so-called
diagnostic terms, to stigmatize and control people.” Psychiatrists deal with controlling
behavior. Today they “treat” patients with anti-depressants to control their thoughts and
their actions. Control over people is exactly what the government appears to wish to
accomplish through its development of neurological weaponry.
Ellen M. Borges, Ph.D., a sociologist and faculty member at Goddard College in
Plainfield, Vermont, talks about control in a chapter in Pseudoscience. She states that
"Biological psychiatry redefines social deviance as a medical problem. By doing so, it
transforms social norms, which are subjective and political, into medical norms,
presumed to be objective and scientific. Medicalization of social deviance allows us a
pretense of humanitarianism" for coercive measures against people whose behavior
"deviates from expectations based on the dominant social class's ideology and
viewpoint." She says further, "Psychiatry redefines a great deal of normal human
behavior as medically deviant by pathologizing [sic] people who are socially marginal in
any way.”
Psychiatrists have never explored why REA victims feel that they are targeted by
remote electronic and mind control activities. They not only fail to delve into the basis
of patients’ complaints but they also refuse to order x-rays, MRIs, and CT Scans to see
whether there might be an implanted object in the patients. If they order a scan at all, it
will be confined to only the brain. No target would likely have a device implanted
directly within the brain itself. Without orders for photographic searches of their body,
targets are left to guess and theorize what causes their REA.
Psychiatric practice is driven by the profit motive. In a December 4, 1998 letter,
psychiatrist Loren R. Mosher of San Diego resigned from the American Psychiatric
Association (APA) for that reason. In his letter, he writes, “At this point in history, in my
view, psychiatry has been almost completely bought out by the drug companies. The
APA could not continue without the pharmaceutical company support of meetings,
symposia, workshops, journal advertising, grand rounds luncheons, unrestricted
educational grants etc. etc. Psychiatrists have become the minions of drug company
promotions.”
With so much information on the internet about electronic stalking and mind control, the
APA has to know about that practice. Psychiatrists also have to know about microchips,
213
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
the effects of electromagnetism, and the use of directed energy weapons (DEW).
Nevertheless, those topics do not arise at their meetings. Nor have they recommended
any studies of those realities. Psychiatrists still hue to the principle that if a patient
complains of symptoms caused by DEW, microchips, and electromagnetism, he must
be schizophrenic.
The Kansas Mental Health Alternatives Clearinghouse spelled out some shortcomings
in the field of psychiatry, including the collusion between psychiatrists and the drug
industry, in its internet web page. Three of those criticisms bear mentioning. I either
quote, partially quote, or paraphrase them below.
1. “Psychoactive drugs have become legal and commonplace, with physicians acting out a role little
different from that of drug pushers, pandering to those who seek short-cuts to an escape from painful
thoughts.” . . . “The widespread availability of such drugs which are often dangerous and poorly tested is
a public scandal.”
2. Psychiatric confinement and court-ordered "medicating" of persons to prevent supposed future actions
is “a massive infringement of Constitutionally enshrined human rights. The law has the premise you do
not do the time before you've done the crime. Psychiatry stands this principle on its head.”
3. “Blaming the so-called mentally ill for everything wrong in society comes naturally from the corporateowned media, who have ties to the profiteering pharmaceutical industry. Every unpleasant quirk of the
human psyche is explained away as ‘mental illness’ or a ‘chemical imbalance’ . . . by research
[conducted] on barely or non-consenting human guinea pigs.”
Social control obviously defines the purpose for the treatment of targets. Psychiatrists
fill targets full of pills and subject them to various largely unproved treatments,
including modern versions of the old shock treatment. I have yet to find a target forced
to accept “treatment” who ceased believing that he was a target due to the
psychiatrist’s therapy and medicines and thus “cured” of his supposed delusions.
Psychiatrist Peter Breggin says about the drugs being used by psychiatrists: "Despite
the current enthusiasm for Prozac, the FDA studies underscored the drug's lack of
effectiveness, and recent analyses of literature indicate that antidepressants in general
are no better than a placebo." Karl Loren, in his paper on psychiatry, says that
“Psychiatry and psychiatric drugs do more harm than any other [medical] ‘practice’ on
the face of this planet.” Psychiatrist Susan S. Kemker, North Central Bronx Hospital,
New York City, sums up the skepticism concerning psychiatry when she says "our
understanding of our own field remains naïve."
Carole Smith, author of “On the Need for New Criteria of Diagnosis of Psychosis in the
Light of Mind Invasive Technology,” Global Researcher.ca, January 11, 2010, provides
encouragement to victims of electronic stalking and mind control made to submit to
214
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
psychological evaluations: “. . . if the victims at this point in the new history of this mindcontrol, cannot yet prove their abuse, it must be asserted that, faced with the available
information about technological development – it is certainly not possible for those
seeking to evade such claims – to disprove them.” Indeed, the burden of proof rests
with the medical profession to prove that REA victims do NOT hear voices or
experience remote-delivered electronic effects
I rest my case. Psychiatry as a branch of medicine and psychiatrists as practitioners of
that field do much harm to targets of electronic stalking and mind control. They most
certainly single out targets of REA for stigmatization, lending credence to the belief that
its main purpose is social control. It is little wonder that the powerbrokers and their
hireling attackers force targets to undergo psychiatric “evaluations” and treatment, for
they know that the examining psychiatrists will diagnose them as schizophrenic.
Psychiatrists serve as main accomplices of the powerbrokers who employ electronic
stalking and mind control by remote. Those same psychiatrists who evaluate targets
and often commit them to mental institutions for observation are aware that “the risk of
violence among people with schizophrenia,” according to the National Institute of
Mental Health, “is small.” They also know that schizophrenics are far more likely to
commit suicide or attempt suicide than to harm others.
One might wonder how physicians become involved in an action that clearly violates
the Hippocratic oath that they took when they received their degrees. I suspect that the
powerbrokers convince those physicians (1) that the patient will only be monitored and
not otherwise harmed, (2) that they are performing a patriotic duty, (3) that they would
be helping law enforcement catch a criminal, (4) that their medical practice might be
“targeted” if they do not cooperate, and (5) that their cooperation could be very
profitable to them.
In the spring of 2010, scientists announced that they had succeeded in artificially
creating a living cell. If science today has that capability, why can psychiatrists not
grasp that symptoms of schizophrenia and paranoia can be induced by remote?
Psychiatrists’ failure to recognize and admit that possibility shows either a remarkable
naivete or a widespread complicity on their part.
In this paper, I have already recounted my visit to the psychiatrist after making a report
about intruders on my property to the sheriff’s office. During the interview, I avoided
telling him about the V2K for very obvious reasons. Almost two years after the
psychiatrist performed his psychiatric assessment on me, I re-read his assessment and
made notes on some of his observations that I thought were misleading. I attached a
copy of The Great Conspiracy and my notes to a cover letter, which follows.
215
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Dear Dr. (name excluded):
When I underwent a psychiatric evaluation on March 10, 2008, I told you that I do not receive
any auditory effects -- you referred to such sounds as "hallucinations" -- along with the
physical symptoms that I described to you. I lied about the auditory effects for reasons that
you will read in the attached paper The Great Conspiracy, which I have written over the past
two years. I am a target of electronic stalking and mind control.
I am writing to you now, almost two years after the evaluation, for several reasons: (1) to set
the record straight; (2) to inform you and the world that I will no longer seek to hide the neurological symptoms caused by an electronic assault on my person by unknown means by
unknown criminals; and (3) to urge you to research the topic of mind control and open your
mind to neurological phenomena that you probably have not studied in a formal manner.
I hope that you will read the entire paper, especially the part about the role of psychiatrists in
perpetuating the plight of targets of electronic stalking and mind control. Many thousands of
victims around the world struggle daily with their torture, many of them afraid to admit what
is happening to them for fear of being labeled "psychotic," or, more colloquially, "crazy." Their
complaints ignored by the authorities, hundreds of targets have organized in groups to interact
with others experiencing the same problems. That is not mass psychosis. I belong to one such
organization called Freedom from Covert Harassment and Surveillance (FFCHS). Naturally,
among the many targets, several alleged victims may indeed be psychotic. However, the
overwhelming majority are (or were) perfectly "normal" people although many of them have
adopted some strange habits to counter their continual physical and neurological assault.
Your psychiatric evaluation of me contained some misleading notations, which I point out in
the second attachment. You will probably forward copies of this letter and my paper to the
local authorities. Although I am sure that they already have copies, I welcome that action. You
also have my consent to share this material with your colleagues in the medical field. Should
you wish to talk with me further concerning this letter or the attached papers, you can reach
me at (phone number excluded) day or night.
On a trip to Baton Rouge to visit with my son and family, I took the package by the
psychiatrist’s office to hand deliver it to him. When his receptionist told me that I would
have to make an appointment to do so, I left the material with her. The doctor called me
less than two hours later.
He first asked me why I had left the material, and I referred him to the cover letter. I told
him point blank that I was a victim of attempted mind control, and that I wish that I had
told him so two years earlier. He then asked me what I wanted him to do. I told him that
I hoped that he would take patients seriously from now on when they complain of
voices, do in-depth research on mind control, and change his attitude about a condition
that affects many thousands of people in the United States. I briefly talked about the
“Voice of God” V2K that the United States conducted on Iraqi troops during the second
Bush’s war on Iraq and also asked him to research other neurological capabilities of
intelligence and the military.
216
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
I mentioned the part of this paper that deals with psychiatrists and told him that if he did
not have time to read the entire text, I hoped that he would read that portion. He wanted
to talk with my son and did so for perhaps ten minutes. Afterward, he talked with me
again. He ended his approximately twenty-five minute phone call by asking me if I
intended to take matters into my own hands. I reassured him that I did not. As he ended
the conversation, it was clear that the content of my letter to him had made an impact.
However, I do not expect any departure from his attitude toward the voices.
I have no idea whether he read the entire paper or whether he contacted the sheriff of
the parish in which I live. However, providing the psychiatrist that material gave me
great satisfaction. Whether he reads the paper or not, I have “set the record straight.” I
DO hear voices, and they are most certainly NOT the voice of God.
Psychiatrists cannot prove that the targets’ complaints are not true. If I ever see a
psychiatrist again – and it is not very likely that I shall – and he questions my belief that
I am electronically and neurologically attacked, I shall turn the topic back on him using
the Socratic method. I shall ask him if he believes in God or a Higher Power. He will
almost certainly say yes. Then, I’ll ask him for proof that God exists. I’m sure that he will
get the point.
The Hate Factor
Regardless of who the powerbrokers are and regardless of their objective(s), the
people whom they procure, the attackers, to carry out their sordid agenda are creatures
of hate. They reek of hate and hate permeates their daily physical and neurological
attacks. Those despicable examples of humanity are not selected at random. They are
classical sociopaths chosen for their work because of who they are. Common criminals
posing as normal citizens, they break dozens of laws regarding human, civil, and
personal rights – and they do so with anonymity and obvious pleasure. Yet, those
criminals look just like all Americans and could easily be your next-door neighbor.
Indeed, simple stalking itself is a hate crime. However, electronic stalking and mind
control carries that hate crime to its greatest extreme. The attackers’ actions prove
them to be evil nut cases as they attempt to cause targets to commit suicide and cripple
them with the electronic effects, target innocent close relatives and friends of the victim,
plant degenerate sexual ideas, and even harm domestic pets.
Hate groups are not hard to find. Some of the personnel who helped develop the
devices and methods used in performing REA on targets may have even been
members of some of those hate groups. Imagine the hundreds of personnel of large
defense suppliers, research institutes, pharmaceutical companies, and university labs,
217
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
in addition to the personnel of intelligence units involved, who helped develop
electronic stalking and mind control. There should be little doubt that many
opportunities exist for those people to purloin and peddle the devices and methods on
the black market or to pass those secrets to special agenda-driven hate groups.
From my correspondence, research, and personal knowledge of REA, it seems that the
attackers particularly target homosexuals and lesbians as a group. My attackers also
make it obvious by V2K remarks to me that they are anti-black, very politically
conservative, and religious bigots although that may be deception. Young people
experimenting with recreational drugs and prison inmates have also often been
targeted. In addition, it becomes increasingly clear that people who “rock the boat” and
those who do not subscribe to mainline ideas often become targets.
That does not explain, however, the majority of the targets who do not fit into those
various categories. Targets represent every conceivable stratum of American society.
By far the greatest number of victims I have met are average Americans. That suggests
that the knowledge and power to use REA may be available by organized crime, whose
services are sold to those who may wish to harass particular individuals, to groups of
political and religious extremists, and to foreign powers and those acting for them. The
proliferation of microchips and perhaps other means of electronically assaulting victims
by remote as well as perhaps the increasing availability of those devices and methods
pose a threat today for every American citizen.
Regardless of who a target might be, how he is selected, and why he is selected, he
becomes a plaything for his attackers. To relentlessly torture targets, whom they may
not even know, with electronic and mind control devices by remote and watch them
suffer, commit suicide, and die from those effects requires unbridled hatred and lack of
conscience on the part of the psychopaths who ply that torture. Targets are condemned
in absentia by some person or group, provided no trial, and then summarily executed
slowly by remote. All of that equals hate in its most marked extremity. Although the
attackers are doubtlessly well paid for their efforts, they are driven by their own
demons.
The evil nature of the attackers and their hate comes across clearly. My attackers,
using their synthetic telepathy, laugh and taunt as I pray for friends and family with
serious physical problems. One of those persons is a ninety-one year-old man and a
former professor of mine who has suffered with cancer and heart problems for years
and who is legally blind. He and his wife, who is only a year younger than he, are two of
the kindest, most gentle people I have ever known.
218
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Another subject of my prayers whom the attackers ridicule is a little now four year-old
great-great niece who because of a congenital heart defect wears a pacemaker and a
feeding tube. She was first operated on at two weeks of age to attempt to correct the
heart problem. They also demonstrated their hate and evil in taunting as an elderly
aunt, the last of twelve uncles and aunts, lay dying. The attackers were well aware of
those peoples’ conditions; yet, they poked fun at them as I prayed. Such evil is
unfathomable.
Another example of hate in my case concerns one of my pastimes and interests,
conducting research on my family history. I have collected genealogical material on my
ancestors for over fifty years, and that material is entered into my computer under the
various family names in individual folders. Recently when I went into two of those family
folders, the attackers had corrupted the material. Much of it had been deleted. When I
loaded the back-up copies into the computer, the back-up folders were also corrupted.
That loss represents hundreds of hours of work. Hate, simply hate on the part of the
attackers.
Can anyone doubt that hate is a factor in electronic stalking and mind control when the
attackers cause targets to be constipated for days or when they cause frequent bowel
movements that immobilize them? When the attackers damage organs and eyesight?
When they cause psoriasis and sores on targets’ faces and bodies? When they deprive
targets of sleep night after night? When they cause targets to vomit uncontrollably?
When they make targets scream with pain from cramps? When they attempt to make a
victim’s face and body ugly? When they goad a target into committing suicide?
I communicate with my attackers through V2K, which in our case works both ways.
They continually tell me one moment that they love me and the next, that they hate me.
In second instance, I laugh at them and reply that I would hate them, too, except I have
not yet learned how to hate s--t. Targets can always find a bit of humor in their
targeting. In my case, I laugh aloud whenever the criminals, after all the unpardonable
criminal things that they have said and done to my body and mind, beg me to “trust”
them. How very funny!
That certain forces of the government employ remote torture as well as hands-on
torture is undeniable. That intelligence and law enforcement, aided by psychiatrists and
others, condone and aid in that torture is absolutely certain and provable beyond a
reasonable doubt. However, much of the torture would not fit within the government’s
objectives, especially that torture that disfigures a victim. What government purpose
would be advanced by that action? Only persons motivated by hate, or hate groups,
would carry out that type of torture.
219
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
I would like to see domestic terrorists who torture others with electronic stalking and
mind control attacks added to the list of hate groups. I would also advocate that
persons found guilty of electronic stalking and mind control receive an automatic death
penalty because of the heinous nature of that activity. Outright murder does not come
close to the cruel and villainous nature of electronic stalking and mind control.
The Real Domestic Terrorists
Much publicity is focused on alleged domestic terrorists by the controlled media. I
suggest that the people who engage in, promote, and protect electronic stalking and
mind control are the best example of domestic terrorists. Why have electronic stalkers
and mind control artists and their accomplices not been caught? They will be. It is only
a matter of time, perhaps a short time. However, their evil has long gone undetected
and unpunished for the following reasons.
-- They operate in total secrecy; therefore, their locations are unknown. The attackers
probably take an oath of secrecy. Otherwise, one of the attackers tells a relative who
tells a friend and soon the truth is out.
-- They employ a method or methods of electronic harassment and mind control not yet
fully understood. There are those researchers who believe that attackers use, in
addition to microchips, other means to communicate with the victims’ brains. Whatever
method is used, it will require some type of transmitter/receiver, although those
instruments may function slightly differently.
-- Their electronic stalking and mind control activities leaves little or no evidence. A part
of the whole scheme is to operate in a manner that leaves no trace of evidence that
could lead investigators to the perpetrators. The attackers count on victims not having
tangible evidence to submit with their complaints of REA. Without proof of assault, of
course, law enforcement has either the pretext not to investigate or finds
little cause to investigate.
-- Victims are reluctant to make complaints, as they have no proof of assault and
cannot identity the assailants and do not want to appear foolish.
-- Psychiatrists, doctors, and others in the medical community do not recognize the
existence of REA. Indeed, if they acknowledge that patients who suffer REA are not
paranoid schizophrenic, they then find themselves unable to treat those symptoms in
the traditional psychiatric manner.
-- Law enforcement has been almost completely uncooperative.
220
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
The cowardly perpetrators of REA are textbook cases of domestic terrorists. In addition
to committing terrorism, the stalkers are guilty of (1) stalking, (2) harassing with
malicious intent, (3) coercion (in attempting to make the victim do things that he/she
does not want to do with their mind control methods), (4) psychological and virtual rape,
(5) breaking and entering (which they often do to intimidate the victims by unlocking
locked doors, turning back clocks, moving items in rooms, hiding other items, etc.), (6)
burglary and theft (which they commit when they enter a victim’s home and take items
to confuse and disorient the victim), (7) recording a victim’s conversations without
his/her consent, (8) peeping tom-ism (through their ability to view the victim), (9)
assault and battery (by using electric shock, etc. against the victims), (10) slander (by
circulating false rumors and stories that lack proof about the victim), (11) libel (when
those rumors and stories are put into print in the from of emails, etc), (12) computer
hacking and phone tapping, (13) conspiracy, (14) in some cases, blackmail and
extortion, (15) first degree murder (when a victim suffers a fatal car crash because of
sleep deprivation), and (16) attempted murder (when their plans do not succeed). Their
list of crimes will put them away for the remainder of their evil lives.
In addition, the domestic terrorists violate a large number of FCC and other laws
regarding the illegal use of electronic equipment. However, they will NOT engage in
credit card fraud, identity theft, extortion, blackmail, or any other activity that will force
them to communicate in writing or that will be traceable. Should that happen, the FBI
and local law enforcement would be forced to look into those crimes and record them
as crimes. After all, the FBI investigates serious crime such as the theft of sports
memorabilia.
Keep in mind that electronic assault and mind control contains two elements: (1)
electronic harassment and (2) mind control. The first element is often conducted from
close range by persons using homemade or easily purchased electronic devices.
Those criminals may live next door or in an adjoining apartment. The target will often
have a good idea of the perpetrator’s identity and may even also in rare cases be able
to gather sufficient evidence to bring suit against that individual or individuals.
Electronic harassment is very often linked to gang, or neighborhood, stalking. Those
acts can oftentimes be recorded on videotape and presented as evidence although the
victim probably cannot count on the authorities for much assistance. Electronic
harassment is also conducted by remote.
On the other hand, mind control, which also invariably includes electronic assault,
leaves no evidence and the perpetrators are unknown. The perpetrators operate by
remote, perhaps over very long distances, and leave no trace of their work. I have not
221
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
yet communicated with any mind control target who has been victimized in a traceable
and prosecutorial manner.
There appears to be an increasing incidence of “home grown” terrorism in the United
States. I suggest that we should shift our emphasis from searching out possible home
grown terrorist to studying what causes domestic terrorism. Sooner or later the growing
number of victims of electronic stalking and mind control will contribute to “home grown
terrorism” by creating dissidents.
U. S. Intelligence and REA
Does the U. S. intelligence community know about REA and how it works? A
resounding “yes.” A journalist in a July 2008 Yahoo news article wrote about visiting
Guantanamo and interviewing some of the detainees. One of them was Omar Khadr,
an Islamic Canadian who was only fifteen years old when he was captured in
Afghanistan in 2002 and brought there. Omar told the interviewer tearfully that he had
lost both arms and both legs; yet, the boy was in perfectly sound physical condition.
Interrogators and brain control experts from the CIA, DOD, and other U. S. intelligence
agencies had taken control of his mind and had convinced him that he had no arms or
legs. As I write, Gitmo prisoners are being allowed trials by Federal judges. However,
Khadr’s lawyer warned that he is almost a basket case. His prison torturers doubtlessly
erased any memory in his mind of his neurological torture.
In my overseas work, I knew many CIA/MIA/DIA types, who posed as businessmen,
employees of international voluntary agencies, teachers in American overseas schools,
missionaries and other clergy, sometimes foreign nationals who worked under contract
for the CIA, and other non-governmental persons. In addition, each embassy and its
official appendages provide cover for CIA agents among their employees. The people
whom I knew were agents normally had far more human defects than virtues. Some of
them were virtual sleazebags. Only a very few honorable and good men and women in
that line of work stand out in my mind.
I praise President Obama for condemning torture by those elements. There is
absolutely no need nowadays for torture, for as targeted individuals can attest, the
government has long had the capability to obtain involuntary information from persons
by remote mind control. Thus, the torture of detainees, using the pretext of extracting
crucial information, represents only a sadistic excuse by torturers with otherwise little
authority and decision-making power to carry out the evil in their twisted minds.
Waterboarding is an example of that Inquisition period torture. I suggest that when the
perpetrators are finally caught—and they will be--they be waterboarded to death. Let
them experience the fruit of their work.
222
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
The mind control attackers operate by remote. Thus, some type of instrument or
receiver/transmitter must be used to make contact with the victim’s brain. That
instrument may be a scanner, ham radio, or a clandestine radio station guided by GPS.
Regardless of the type of device, it must operate along a particular frequency, a
frequency that can pick up the electromagnetic pulses of the human brain. If a radio is
used, that frequency must necessarily be blocked. If not, any listener could happen
upon that frequency and hear the whisperings and other mind control operations of the
attackers, blowing the entire operations. If it is indeed a blocked frequency, the local
law enforcement, the FBI, and the FCC have to know about and approve it, additional
proof that law enforcement has to know about REA.
Since 9/11 the Federal Government has monitored all radio frequencies to prevent
terrorists from communicating with each other. Intelligence agents routinely scan the air
waves for suspicious activity. It is an inescapable fact then that the Federal government
has to know about electronic stalking and mind control. If the Federal, state, and local
law enforcement are not involved directly in REA, their unwillingness to investigate
makes them knowing accomplices.
The FBI
I live in a rural area in Ouachita Parish (county) in north central Louisiana. In late 2006,
not trusting the local authorities, I made a trip to the nearby city of Shreveport to seek
out the FBI to make a complaint about the electronic stalking and mind control
activities. I outlined verbally to one of the agents what was happening. I also gave the
agent a CD with parts of my journal and my thoughts about those effects.
In fairness to the agent, I must reveal that I also showed him several items from my
house that my attackers had caused me to believe were bugged. I no longer fall for
those attackers’ tricks. (The agent did not examine those items but pretended to make
a note about them.) Later, I realized that the “bugs” were simply part of the attackers’
mind control games; however, the agent did not actually know that the items were NOT
bugged.
The agent asked me only two questions: was I homosexual and was I being
blackmailed? Those questions strongly suggest to me that that particular group is being
targeted with REA for purposes of experimentation and perhaps eventual annihilation
and that the FBI is well aware of that exploitation. He probably wanted to know whether
the attackers were trying to cash in on their operations by extorting money from targets
in addition to receiving their salaries. At the end of the short meeting, the agent did not
tell me that he would contact me after reviewing the material. And he did not. He also
223
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
did not make any recommendations to me about how to deal with the electronic attacks
or make any comment about them.
When I visited the FBI, I was convinced that I had been implanted with a microchip, and
naturally I wanted that object removed. I asked the FBI agent which local hospital or
clinic he and other FBI agents used that could be trusted. He gave me the name of a
nearby hospital.
Set-Up by the FBI
After leaving his office, I went to the out-patient room of the hospital that he
recommended intending to feign a symptom that would result in a doctor’s order for an
MRI that would perhaps show any foreign object in my body. I waited for hours in the
hospital waiting room. Other drop-in patients, some of whom had arrived long after I
did, were able to see doctors, and they came and went; yet, my name was not called.
Finally, I waited alone in the large empty waiting room.
After hours of waiting, I was at last attended by an Oriental male intern who had very
obviously been informed of my mission. His demeanor was condescending and he
appeared to smirk as he asked me questions. At the time, I believed that I had a
microchip implanted in a tooth, thus I complained of severe headaches to obtain an
order for an MRI. During the examination, he disappeared for long periods seemingly
for no reason. As I waited for his return, other interns would appear in the doorway to
peer at me as if I were some very strange object of curiosity. Their appearance was
obviously intentional. The examiner had very obviously told them about the “crazy man”
whom he was examining. I felt that their presence was contrived to make me feel
uncomfortable. I did. The FBI agent with whom I had spoken had probably also briefed
the young intern about how he should treat me.
Finally, when the intern seemed reluctant to order further testing, I revealed to him my
purpose for wanting the MRI, i.e., the electronic stalking and mind control. He looked at
me in a manner that clearly said that he had known all along my intentions and told me
in a mocking tone that he didn’t get into anything like that. By then, I realized that the
FBI agent with whom I talked had tipped off the hospital to expect a crazy man to show
up seeking an MRI. I left there feeling dejected and helpless, apparently what the
attackers as well as the FBI agent wanted. Naturally, I heard nothing else from the FBI
after that meeting. I visited that office a second time early in 2007 and again got no
help or advice.
Non-Responses from the FBI
224
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
The refusal of the FBI to listen seriously to complainants and to investigate their claims
indicts that agency. An electronic stalking victim whom I later met in person had also
recurred to the FBI to complain. The victim told me that the agent to whom she made
her complaint said with a grin: “Makes you feel like you’ve got nowhere to turn, huh?”
She stated that “He was quite aware of what I was experiencing.” That victim, a
grandmother and a very soft spoken, almost timid person, had worked for a single
telecommunications company for thirty-five years before she retired. Like most victims,
she lived alone. A policeman lived next door and a Fundamentalist preacher lived
across the street.
For the sake of argument, let us consider that the FBI and local law enforcement just
may be using electronic stalking and mind control, although illegal and inhuman, to
attempt to combat crime. If there is any element of truth in that conjecture, it is not
supported by statistics. Crime continues to grow at an alarming rate. Moreover, our
government is based on the principle of “due process of law” and justice for all,
including drug smugglers, murderers, rapists, and others. An indictment of crime and a
trial by jury are the cornerstones of our democracy. When law enforcement becomes
the judge, jury, and executioner by using covert electronic torture on targets, they
trample on and make a mockery of those democratic principles.
I searched the internet for statistics concerning the categories of FBI investigations.
The FBI has about 60 field offices and over 12,000 agents. There are departments
whose only job is to surf the web for information on high-tech crimes and information
relating to terrorism. The internet is literally full of references to electronic stalking and
mind control, much of it in relation to terrorism. Yet, I did not find a single reference to
the FBI’s having investigated a single case of electronic stalking and mind control
activities.
The FBI continually monitors and even infiltrates known organizations that engage in
domestic terrorism. It is ridiculous to consider that the FBI does not know about hightech electronic harassment, the instruments used, and how the instruments work.
Moreover, the FBI, Secret Service, NSA, the DOD, and other government entities share
the responsibility for the overall protection of the President, Vice President, cabinet
members, Supreme Court justices, and Congresspersons. It is absurd to think that
those intelligence agencies do not know about electronic stalking and mind control,
how to prevent it, and, if discovered, how to neutralize it.
The subject of electronic stalking and mind control remains taboo. The controlled media
will not touch that topic, which hints that the media is a co-conspirator with the
government. Only on the internet, where data is still largely uncontrolled by the power
brokers, can one find information on REA. In performing my research, I found on the
225
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
internet multiple accounts by and about victims of REA, and I corresponded with scores
of those targeted individuals. Most of those correspondents appeared to be regular
people whom one would expect to live next door. Many of them had braved the stigma
of being labeled schizophrenic to complain to the FBI and their local law enforcement.
Not a single case had led to an investigation.
There appears to be a high level sub-culture within the law enforcement and
intelligence communities that endures regardless of which political party is in power
and who might be the president. While other high-ranking members and heads of law
enforcement and intelligence come and go, those employees remain. It is possible that
those people, or some of those people, have learned to employ electronic torture and
mind control and have lent that method to various groups for their own purposes.
On the premise that certain rogue factions of the FBI, and not the entire FBI, were
involved in the electronic torture and mind control on Americans, on April 14, 2009, I
wrote to the FBI. Here is the letter.
Public Relations & Information
Federal Bureau of Investigation
935 Pennsylvania Ave, NW
Washington, DC 20535
Subject: Electronic Stalking and Mind Control Activities Performed on Americans
Dear Sirs:
Attached is an article on the above subject that I wrote under a pseudonym for online readers. In that paper, I
pointedly state that the FBI and other U. S. intelligence services must necessarily know about electronic assault and
mind control, yet they do nothing to halt that practice. Further, I write that FBI failure to take action against those
domestic terrorists logically leads one to believe that the Bureau condones and perhaps even collaborates with
those criminals.
I would appreciate receiving the FBI’s responses to the following questions.
-- Does the FBI officially acknowledge that electronic stalking and mind control, particularly the latter, are carried
out by remote on selected targets in the United States of America?
-- If so, does the FBI know how those electronic and mind control effects are carried out on those victims?
-- If so, what action is the FBI pursuing to locate and apprehend the perpetrators?
-- If so, why does the FBI not inform local and state law enforcement and the general public of electronic assault
and mind control being conducted on citizens and residents of the United States?
Thank you.
I sent the above letter by USPS Priority Mail on April 14, 2009, attaching the paper that
you are reading to it. I asked for a delivery confirmation receipt. The collection site for
226
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
mail leaving Monroe is Shreveport, Louisiana. The collection sites are conveniently
located in the same cities as the FBI field offices. When I checked the delivery status
online, it showed that the package arrived in Shreveport on January 2, 2002, or
seven years earlier. January 2 was my mother’s birthday. The year 2002 probably
also has some significance. It was about that time that my son became covered with
painful and unsightly psoriasis sores.
Apparently the FBI field office or somebody working with the post office in Shreveport
intercepted the package and would not acknowledge the date, as they needed time to
examine its contents. According to the tracking advisory, the letter was supposedly
picked up in Washington, DC on April 20, almost a week later. Priority mail guarantees
a three or four day delivery period. I doubt that the package ever actually arrived at FBI
headquarters. At any rate, I never received a reply to my letter.
Through their capability of knowing my thoughts, the attackers already knew that I was
sending the letter. If the letter was delivered at all, the Shreveport FBI field office
intercepted the letter to add to or alter material intended for the FBI in Washington, DC.
The obvious intent was to discredit me and make me appear to be mentally unsound.
Another attempt to communicate with the FBI had the same result. In late winter of
2011, I sent recordings of my silent environment to a sound specialist, and that
technician confirmed that he had picked up human voices in my ambience. He also
identified the frequency range of the voices from 1429.32 Hertz to 1438.36 Hertz. In the
early summer, I wrote to the FBI Field Office in New Orleans, asking them to identify
the sources of those frequencies, which were not found on the FCC approved
frequency chart. Although I sent my letter “delivery confirmation,” I did not receive a
confirmation or a reply from that office. Certainly no surprise.
Occasionally, in its struggle to survive, the controlled media divulges information about
the powerbrokers that is not in the interest of its benefactors. Such was the case when
in June, 2011, a story broke about the FBI’s use of members of the Westboro Baptist
Church as instructors in its training classes. The FBI’s employment of radical extremists
as instructors struck a cord with mainstream America.
For those readers who may not remember, members of the Westboro Baptist Church of
Topeka, Kansas, gained notoriety in picketing at the funerals of soldiers killed in Iraq
and Afghanistan. Its pastor, Fred Phelps, whose extended family essentially makes up
the church membership, claimed that their deaths were God’s way of punishing the
United States for homosexuality. That Phelps singled out homosexuality, which is not
illegal, as opposed to coldblooded murder, drug running, white collar thievery, armed
227
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
robbery, bigamy, and other serious crimes, demonstrates the narrow bigoted focus of
his group.
The FBI’s employment of members of that particular extremist group causes one to
wonder about its mandate to protect the American public, all of the American public.
When the story broke, I remembered what the FBI agent in Shreveport asked me when
I complained of being targeted: Was I homosexual? The agent’s question and the FBI’s
use of the Westboro Baptist Church cause me to wonder whether the FBI sponsors a
program against homosexuals as a group in the United States. After the FBI story came
out, I wrote the following letter to an FBI spokesperson about that case. The text of my
letter follows.
Subject: Westboro Baptist Church Participation in FBI Training Courses
Dear Mr. Bresson:
Like many thousands, probably millions, of other Americans, I am a target of remote-delivered physical
and neurological attacks. Mine began subtly about forty years ago, and for the last six years, the attacks
have been escalating in intensity and continuous 24/7. I have appealed to the FBI three times for help in
locating my assailants without receiving any cooperation whatsoever from that agency. All of the many
targets with whom I am in contact report the same treatment from the FBI. Thus, you can readily see why
I am apoplectic about the FBI hiring hatemongers like the Phelpses to instruct your agents.
Despite the lame reason given, there is no rationalization for using taxpayer money to hire people like
the Phelpses as training participants, let alone as instructors. Using them gives that group recognition
and respectability, neither of which it deserves. I would appreciate FBI answers to the following
questions.
What particular expertise do the members of the Westboro Baptist Church possess that
the FBI does not already possess or cannot obtain from other sources?
Do you also hire members of the KKK, Militia, JDL, Black Panthers, M-13, and others
of that gendre with public funding to teach your agents?
Have you used the Westboro Baptist Church members for “training” purposes on other
occasions in the past?
How much did the participation of the Westboro Baptist Church representatives cost the
American taxpayers?
Whose idea was it to hire members of a so-called church whose membership consists
essentially of the Phelps extended family?
What positive result accrued from their performance?
I can be reached at (phone number excluded). However, I would appreciate receiving a written answer to
those questions. Thank you.
228
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
In the past, I had sent other letters from the main post office in Monroe, Louisiana via
various delivery confirmation methods without ever knowing whether they arrived or
not. This time I sent the letter on July 5, 2011 by regular mail from my rural mailbox
using regular postage. Naturally, I never received a reply to my letter.
Most targets would probably agree that the CIA and the FBI are very loosely run
agencies whose members do not always feel compelled to uphold the oath that they
took and who are not held accountable for their actions and non-actions. The facts, as
seen by targets, show that the FBI not only decides what victims it is going to try to help
but also decides what criminals it is going to pursue. The FBI, which represents the
highest law enforcement authority in the land, has proven that it has no intention of
aiding victims of electronic stalking and that likewise it will not attempt to determine who
is behind the targeting. Those failures on the part of the FBI alone make that agency a
part of the conspiracy against targeted individuals.
Moreover, the FBI may be responsible for sabotaging efforts by victims to get the
attention of their Congressional representatives for their cases. Most victims, including
this writer, have written multiple times to their Congresspersons to complain of their
remote torture. Those Congresspersons do not even reply. The reason for their not
replying may be simple. When Congressional aides answer letters such as the ones
written by remote torture victims, they will often contact the FBI and local law
enforcement to inquire about the writers. Both the FBI and the local authorities
doubtlessly inform the aides that the writers are kooks.
Targets as Activists
What does a citizen do when the FBI and local law enforcement refuse to listen to his
complaints about electronic and mind control assault, let alone investigate those
complaints? The complaints of REA never make it to the prosecutorial level of justice
because law enforcement refuses to attempt to identify and arrest the assailants. Such
actions of the part of the executive branch’s law enforcement, instituted to uphold laws
and protect the citizenry, represent a failure of the government.
Because of that, every target must become an activist. Not doing so subjects him for
the remainder of his life to unending and increasingly violent treatment by remote by a
yet unknown device/method conducted by unknown assailants. Local law enforcement
already knows about the plight of targets – and does nothing. The FBI and other
national intelligence agencies already know about the plight of targets – and do
nothing. Thus, targets must act bravely and defiantly to expose the evil of electronic
229
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
assault and mind control to the general American public. Targets whose lives have
been ruined by REA have little to lose by taking the offensive.
In March, 2009, I put my own advice on activism into action by preparing, printing, and
distributing a flier about electronic assault. I intentionally did not mention the mind
control portion, as readers in my area simply would not understand at this point. I also
printed copies of the FFCHS flier and distributed it. Here is my flier.
SPEAK OUT AGAINST ORGANIZED STALKING
Most people get the idea that stalking is performed by a lone individual on another lone individual. While
that is often true, stalking is also carried out by organized groups or gangs against individuals. That criminal activity
is being practiced in Louisiana and right here in Ouachita Parish with complete immunity.
Stalkers consist of several or many accomplices who band together to harass an individual through
spreading vicious rumors or giving out personal information, making wrong number telephone calls and actually
tapping the victim’s phone, hacking his computer, vandalizing his property, illegally entering his house in his
absence, sabotaging his vehicle and equipment, and even causing vehicular and other accidents. Those attackers
are careful to conceal their identities.
Today’s technology has lent organized stalkers the use of remote-operated equipment to strike the victim
from afar. The perpetrators can now use those devices to cause these symptoms: electrical-like jolts; chronic
fatigue; sleep deprivation; cramping (usually the calves of the legs); violent tremors; burns, sores, and abrasions on
the skin; pin-like pricks on any area of the body; extreme itching; migraine headaches; abnormally fast heart beat,
ringing in the ears (tinnitus); and many others, including cancer. Distance provides the attackers anonymity.
Local law enforcement is unresponsive to complaints of electronic assault using remote instruments. Two
deputies from the Ouachita Parish Sheriff’s Office visited a citizen at his request to view tangible proof of the effects
of remote electronic attacks. The deputies gave the evidence only a cursory examination, did not take it for forensic
study, and later refused to communicate with that person further. One of the deputies was supposed to be the local
expert in high-tech crime. Moreover, the sheriff’s office never entered that complaint in its crime report that it sends
to Baton Rouge.
Electronic stalking happens to victims of every gender, age, racial and ethnic group, color, political
thought, philosophy, religious persuasion, economic bracket, and occupation. A sixty-year old mixed-race
grandmother in New Orleans videotaped some actions of her organized stalkers from her own property. Instead of
arresting the harassers, the police arrested the victim. She is awaiting sentencing at this moment (April, 2009).
Do your own research by “Googling” the following key words and phrases: stalking (organized, gang,
neighborhood); directed energy weapons, uses of RFID, electromagnetic forces, directed sound, targeted
individuals, laser weapons, electronic assault, and microwave attacks. Some websites dedicate themselves to the
topic of remote electronic assault and stalking.
Victims number into the tens of thousands. Some experts place that number at well over two million. If you
are not yet a victim, you could be next. Speak out against organized electronic stalking and the criminals who
employ it.
I also bought a dozen colorful pastel T-shirts with a sign on the back reading: “I’m a
defiant victim of electronic stalking, and – hey – I’m doing great!” I wear them daily.
230
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Most targets by far are law abiding citizens who wish to live their lives in peace while
preserving their privacy; yet, when law enforcement and the government fail them, it is
time to consider other measures. However, whatever you do, it must be done in a calm
deliberate manner. Do not lose your temper. Do not make threats. Do not appear to be
a threat to anybody or to yourself. Remember that your attackers want you to acquire a
police record or have you sent to a psychiatrist for an “evaluation.” Both go into your
FBI file.
In June, 2010, it was learned that the FBI was directly involved with the arrest of Joran
Van Der Sloot in his murder of a young woman in Peru. Although their assistance is
commendable, the FBI seemingly cannot investigate the complaints of thousands of
targets of electronic stalking and mind control within the United States. What is wrong
with American law enforcement?
On May 2, 2011, after having captured on tape some of the attackers’ talking, I wrote to
the FBI field office in New Orleans, under whose jurisdiction my area falls. In the letter,
I told them about the electronic attacks, gave them the frequencies that Todd Bates had
identified, and asked them to identify those frequencies. Although I sent the letter by
delivery confirmation, I never got any indication that the FBI had received the letter. As
usual, I asked them to reply in writing. Naturally, I have heard nothing else from that
office. What else is new!
Local Law Enforcement
Like the FBI and other national law enforcement agencies, local level law enforcement
has also been unresponsive to victims. There may be several reasons for that.
(1) Local law enforcement knows little if anything about electronic stalking and
neurological assault. Officers on the local level very seldom receive training in hightech crimes involving the human body. If they have received training, that instruction
probably covered only the electronic effects and did not address the mind control
element. In addition, most law enforcement officers, as well as the general public,
simply cannot comprehend how twenty-first century technology can be utilized to
invade the human mind and affect the human body.
(2) Victims can normally produce no hard evidence concerning their complaints, let
alone identify their assailants. As law enforcement rushes to point out, that gives them
little to work with in pursuing the assailants. It also provides them a very convenient
excuse to do nothing.
231
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
(3) Victims are very reluctant to make complaints concerning neurological attacks for
fear that they will be considered crazy and treated as such. Indeed, psychiatrists and
others have convinced the world that persons who complain of electronic stalking and
mind control must be textbook cases of paranoid-schizophrenia. I remained silent for
three years after I knew what was happening for that same reason. When I finally did
brave the stigma of being labeled crazy to present my complaints, surely enough the
investigative officers apparently thought or pretended to think that I was crazy.
(4) Authorities refuse to publicize information in the media concerning electronic and
neurological attacks. One can draw his own conclusions about their reason. The
assailants are quite aware of the authorities’ silence, and they exploit that lack of
publicity.
(5) Local law enforcement may be coerced by national law enforcement and
intelligence into not cooperating with victims or from otherwise interfering in cases of
electronic stalking. The Federal government very often gives grants to local police
departments; thus, the Federal government exert a great deal of leverage over those
local units.
(6) In some cases, law enforcement doubtlessly knowingly permits and sometimes even
abets and actively participates in those stalking activities. If not, they may have very
good ideas about people and groups that might engage in electronic stalking without
pursuing those ideas. It is no secret that law enforcement officials in many places have
“protected” certain criminal elements either for money or other benefits or out of
sympathy for those groups. Vigilante groups are known to enjoy police and other law
enforcement support and protection in some areas of the United States.
My Dealings with Local Law Enforcement
My experience with local law enforcement has been at best disappointing. After several
years of enduring electronic stalking and mind control without having proof of it, I finally
found that proof. Here is what happened. I read on the internet a victim’s advice that
aluminum foil could ameliorate some of the effects of the REA. Thus, I placed heavy foil
over the three windows of my bedroom. At night I could hear what seemed like puffs of
air hitting against the foil, sounding much like rain drops falling on large leaves of
plants.
After several weeks, one day I entered the bedroom without turning on the light, and I
was astonished to see literally hundreds of tiny holes in the foil. The holes can only be
seen when the room is dark and there is daylight outside showing through those holes.
The holes ranged from pin size to perhaps a forth of an inch diameter; the smaller
232
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
holes seemed to be perfectly round; some of the larger holes were somewhat jagged.
Those windows on that side of the house face south southwest. My satellite TV dish
and satellite internet dish stand right outside those windows to pick up the satellite
signals from the southern sky, a further hint that satellites may have something to do
with REA.
I prepared a written report about the holes in the foil, being very careful not to mention
the mind control element of electronic stalking, as I knew that any mention of mind
control would only make me look like a crackpot. Before I had time to print out the
complaint, the attackers, who have ready access to my computer, changed the date of
the complaint from January 14, 2008 to November 14, 2008 (11 months in the future) to
make me look crazy. Fortunately, in scanning the report before I submitted it, I caught
that change in the date and corrected it by hand.
I drove that same day to deliver the report to the local sheriff’s office, When I arrived, I
parked in front of the large three-storied building, and the moment I stepped out of the
truck I felt strong vibrations. My dog in her portable kennel in the back of my pickup
truck also started to shake uncontrollably, just as she does when under attack from the
electronic stalkers. That suggests that the sheriff’s office either houses some very
sophisticated electronic equipment that is manned throughout the day or there is an
exceptionally strong electromagnetic force in that location. I later learned that the
current sheriff had turned the top floor of the building into a high-tech area with very
limited access.
I entered the building and found the criminal investigation section. When the duty
officer in that office asked the nature of my complaint, I told him. Without blinking an
eye, he told me matter-of-factly, as if he were an electronics expert, that the only way
stalkers could bother me electronically was in touching me with something like a Taser.
Instead of telling him that he was full of s--t, as I was inclined to do, I kept quiet and
insisted on talking with an investigative officer.
The duty officer’s remark, though impertinent and uninformed, was revealing. He had
obviously been instructed by the sheriff to make that policy statement to anybody
complaining of electronic harassment. That means that other citizens in Ouachita
Parish, Louisiana had previously complained about the same electronic harassment. I
am still searching out those persons.
I later confided in an older dentist whom I had seen over the years about the possibility
of a microchip having been implanted in one of my molars. The dentist did not appear
the least bit surprised by my statement, which strongly implies that other patients had
also told him similar stories. He replied that if I had one it would more likely be located
233
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
in the soft tissue (the gums and the roof of the mouth) rather than the teeth, suggesting
that it may have been injected with a syringe. The dentist began condemning various
government actions and government surveillance. I do not know whether he thought
that he was patronizing a delusional patient or actually believed that the government
was covertly targeting many American citizens.
The duty officer at the Sheriff’s Office assigned a junior parole officer to take my
complaint, and that officer promised to pass my complaint to the investigative section.
My complaint concerned only electronic stalking. I mentioned nothing about mind
control. A few days later an investigative officer, with an assistant, did indeed arrive at
my house.
The lead officer was supposed to be the resident expert on high-tech crime. I showed
the two officers the holes but did not offer any explanation for them except that they
came from some unknown outside energy source. The officers showed little surprise
and asked no questions. How strange! If I had been the investigative officer, I would
have asked the complainant what he thought had perforated the holes and where it
came from, whether he thought that he had been affected in any way by whatever
caused the holes, and whether there was any other area affected by the mysterious
source of energy. So much for detective work!
Instead, as their report later revealed, they were more interested in seeing what type of
firearms I had in my house. They very carefully noted the presence of several firearms
that they saw in the bedroom but they did not ask for a sample of the foil for forensic
examination. I never heard anything else from those deputies. Still more strangely, the
senior detective who visited me received a promotion a few weeks later from sergeant
to lieutenant. I did not attempt to obtain a copy of his report until almost two years later.
His report was never entered into the crime statistics sent to the state police.
When I visited the sheriff’s office a second time, I showed a different officer some notes
that I had written on electronic stalking (no mention of mind control at this point), which
I wanted to give to an investigative reporter for the local newspaper. My objective in
publishing a news story on REA was to flush out other victims in the area, as by then I
was convinced that there were several other targets in the parish. The officer stated
somewhat smugly that publishing the article would not be a good idea, as
(paraphrased) “investigative reporters have a habit of wanting to delve deeper into the
matter.” That was exactly what I wanted. I viewed his statement as meaning that local
law enforcement did not want the public to know anything about electronic stalking.
Once again, the officer’s statement suggested that law enforcement knew that other
targets in the area were experiencing the same problem.
234
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Local Law Enforcement Attempts to Have Me Committed
Once again, in February, 2008, I was harassed non-electronically by persons riding
four-wheelers at one o’clock in the morning in front of my house and shouting. I live at
the end of a long, obscure, private dirt lane with a cotton field on one side and a
pasture on the other side. It is my property, and my house is the only residence on that
long lane, which dead ends at my house. So, there was no reason for them to be in that
area. When the harassers made a second pass by my house, I stood with my shotgun
in the shadows. When they got nearer, I shined a high-beam spotlight on them and
shouted that if they returned I was going to shoot them. The following morning I
prepared a complaint about that incident and took it to the sheriff’s office later that
same day.
A few days after presenting the second written complaint, the sheriff’s office called my
son at his work place. Although the sheriff’s office could have called me, instead they
called my son to tell him that they wanted me to undergo a psychiatric evaluation.
When they called, I was actually on my way back home from visiting my son and his
family. There was no reason to call my son instead of calling me directly. Moreover, I
had not given them my son’s name, his place of work, or his telephone number. I
interpreted their action as a deliberate effort to intimidate me and to suggest to my son
and others that I was crazy.
I called the sheriff’s office and made an appointment to see somebody the following
day. When I visited the sheriff’s office the following morning, I learned that an older
female officer had been assigned the case. The woman threatened to obtain a court
order to force me to submit to a psychiatric evaluation. Although I knew that they could
not justify that action and furthermore that I could refuse treatment, I agreed to the
evaluation only on my own terms, as I reasoned that the result could possibly
strengthen my case. I underwent the psychiatric evaluation as well as a good physical
examination in Baton Rouge a few months later.
After my going to much trouble and expense in getting the examinations, the sheriff’s
office consistently refused my requests for meetings to review those findings. They did
not have to, for the psychiatrist doubtlessly mailed the sheriff a copy of his evaluation.
That appears to be pro forma in those cases, which practically proves that psychiatrists
are a part of the “system.” Yet, I, the patient, had to sign a consent form to obtain
copies of the psychiatrist’s evaluation for my son and myself.
Shortly after that meeting, I got a call one day from an employee in the state-operated
Elderly Protective Services, an office that I had never heard of before then. The
Sheriff’s Office had asked her to get in touch with me and visit me – still another
235
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
evaluation. I realized that her visit might work to my advantage instead of the opposite,
so I agreed to her visit.
The moment she arrived and I greeted her I could see that she was puzzled about why
she had been asked to see me. I invited her inside and we chatted for a few minutes.
As she left, she told me candidly that she was confused about the request to visit me,
as I was more mentally and physically fit than many younger people she knew. Yet, her
visit was another ploy by the authorities to make me appear mentally unstable. I am
sure that her visit went on my record. In addition, by sending the social worker, the
sheriff’s office also covered itself in case I later sued the office for failure to act on my
complaint.
After undergoing the psychiatric and physical exams and still being unable to see
anyone in the sheriff’s office, I sent a delivery-confirmation letter to the state attorney
general’s office on June 10, 2008, asking that office to investigate my complaints. By
this time, I had decided that regardless of the almost certain stigma, I was no longer
going to hide the fact that I was a victim of mind control. Thus, I attached a summary of
my experiences that included the mind control portion. I have both my mailing receipt
as well as the initialed delivery confirmation from that office. I never heard from the
attorney general’s office. I am quite certain, however, that the letter was kept in some
file to later attempt to declare me mentally incompetent.
After more than two months had passed since writing the letter to the state attorney
general without getting an answer, I then wrote to the Public Affairs Division of
Louisiana State Police for statistics on electronic stalking and mind control, defining
clearly both terms. That office answered tersely, “We do not have statistics on such
incidents.” That meant that my complaint and doubtlessly those by other targets in my
parish had gone unreported by local law enforcement in its monthly crime statistics
report to the state office. No surprise there.
Finally, on February 19, 2009, when another object turned up missing in my house, I
wrote to the Sheriff of Ouachita Parish, summarizing three different intrusions into my
house in my absence. I took the letter to the sheriff’s office and his secretary stamped
the date on my copy. I never heard from that authority or any other officer. Again, no
surprise there.
Local law enforcement knows very well that everyone who knows me perceives me to
be intelligent and perfectly sane. That knowledge leaves them with little latitude for
intervention to have me declared mentally unstable. Thus, their routine attempt to make
me look delusional failed.
236
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Non-Response from Law Enforcement
In my correspondence with other victims, I learned that in case after case they had
sought out the FBI, state, and local law enforcement for help and had received none.
Some of those victims had even stated that they believed that policemen and other law
officers were a part of their problem. It is well documented that in certain cases law
enforcement has been involved in stalking. In all of my communication, I never found a
victim whose complaint was seriously investigated.
In my case, although an investigator initially came to view the proof of REA, that visit
was simply a formality. For the record, they could say that they “investigated” the
incident. They probably came as much out of curiosity as out of duty. Moreover, as the
answer from Public Affairs attests, the lead detective never filed an official report of his
visit. I never heard anything else from the Ouachita Parish Sheriff’s Office about the
REA case, and that officer and others refused to meet with me afterward.
Electronic stalking and assault (in this case, on both the body and the mind) are crimes
in any civilized society. That I could not identify my assailants should not have been a
factor. Many victims of crime cannot identify their assailants. Watch the “who dunnit”
programs on TV. In many cases, victims are assaulted without seeing their attackers.
Although naturally that makes pursuing the assailants more difficult, law enforcement is
responsible for at least attempting to locate the criminals. In the case of REA, the victim
should only have to describe his attack. He should not have to identify who did it or
necessarily how it was done.
Let us review our seventh grade civics. On all three levels of government – national,
state, and local – there are three branches, the executive, judiciary, and the legislative.
Theoretically the legislative branch passes the laws, the judiciary interprets them, and
the executive enforces them. Law enforcement belongs to the executive branch on all
three levels. Most of the higher officials in the executive branch, including law
enforcement on the state and local levels, are elected by the people. Thus, if law
enforcement is indeed a part of the REA conspiracy, they are elected public servants
using public funding to harass private citizens. In other words, the taxpaying victims are
not only unprotected by law enforcement but they are financing their own electronic and
mind control torture.
Targets know that law enforcement officers very often harass people who have
committed no crime. In one such case that occurred in 2004 in South Carolina, a victim
of harassment reported “numerous instances of trespassing and vandalism” to the
police. The harassers had also shot and killed the victim’s cats. The police ignored the
complaint. One night the harassment victim shot and killed a trespasser on his property
237
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
who was carrying an assault rifle. The trespasser turned out to be a police officer. An
accomplice of the officer, who was with that officer when he was shot, later admitted
that the officer had killed the victim’s cats. In other words, the officer’s actions were
purely harassment intended to look like actions of the victim’s neighbors or other
trespassers.
In that same case, the harassment victim was first tried, convicted, and sentenced to
thirty years. However, the Supreme Court of South Carolina threw out that decision
because of improper judicial proceedings. The case again went to trial in January,
2010, and the victim was acquitted. During the trial, the prosecution tried to persuade
the jury that it was a case of an upstanding officer of the law being killed over the death
of some lowly cats. However, the jury wisely recognized that the case was about a
victim defending himself and his property against harassment and stalking. In this case,
the dead stalker and the harasser was a police officer. Local law enforcement had
apparently been trying to involve the victim in an action that would cause him to be
declared mentally unstable. Sound familiar? In that particular case, their attempt
backfired.
In my case, when my remote attackers tried to convince me that the local sheriff’s office
was a part of their system, I told them through our mutual telepathic communications
system that it did not matter, for that person would be “a one term sheriff.” That proved
to be true. The sheriff was later caught in an adulterous affair that received much media
attention, was strongly criticized by the media for the way he administered his office,
and was also investigated by the FBI for theft of public funds. He did not run for a
second term.
The sheriff that succeeded him is equally unresponsive. Here is why I make that
statement. One day a black extended-cab pick-up came down the lane on which my
house is located, passed by the house, drove to the levee [I live on a river protected by
a levee], turned around, and headed back to the highway. Although the truck had tinted
windows, I could see a Caucasian man wearing a ball cap on the passenger side when
it returned to the highway. He looked straight ahead and never turned his head toward
me.
The following day I found the glass on one side of a French door that faced the lane
shattered into thousands of small, strangely configured segments. The glass, however,
remained intact. That door is protected by a porch and kept locked, as I rarely use that
wing of the house. Nothing could have fallen on it or smashed into it. Only some type of
directed energy weapon could have shattered the glass in that fashion.
238
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
I wrote up the incident so that I would have proof that I made a complaint and took the
report to the sheriff’s office. The report described the breakage, without assigning the
act to the black pick-up truck, and asked that a deputy be sent to inspect the breakage.
The sheriff was not in, so I left the report with his secretary. The secretary stamped my
copy of the report with a sheriff’s office date stamp. I never heard from the sheriff and
no deputy ever arrived. Yet, sheriff deputies have in the meantime investigated other
crimes such as the killing of a cow on a person’s property.
A Brush with the Law
As stated previously, victims often do some strange things as a result of his targeting.
After learning that I was a target, I began researching every possible article that shed
light on the topic of REA. In researching, I discovered articles on the possible use of
ham radios and clandestine radio stations in the REA process; thus, I started looking
into radio stations in the area that no longer operated. In a nearby city named Bastrop,
in an adjoining parish, I found one such station whose owner had had his license
revoked. That sounded like a good lead.
I went looking for that particular radio station. A person in Bastrop whom I asked about
the station, directed me to a location out in the countryside. He either deliberately
mislead me or he suffered from a very bad memory. I later found out that the station
had been located right downtown. Subsequent research divulged the name of the
former owner. There were several people in Bastrop by that name. I finally narrowed it
down to one. Then I Googled that person’s address.
I bought a pair of binoculars, and with a Map Quest map showing that person’s
address, I went to find out what I could about that person. As I entered the street on
which the man’s house was located, two men on bicycles sat talking with each other on
the street near that house. I thought nothing more about it.
I drove to the end of the street, a cul-de-sac, and parked with the cab of my truck facing
down the street toward the house. Using my binoculars, I took down the number on the
license plate of a car underneath the carport of the house. I saw a male exit the house,
go into the yard, and then return to the house. When I started back down the street to
leave the area, the two men on the bikes blocked the street and hailed me. I should
have known!
My attackers, knowing my every thought, had obviously forewarned the former station
owner who had in turn asked two of his friends to feign the tete-a-tete on the bikes to
watch me. One of the two men made a call to the sheriff’s office. Before long, three
sheriff’s cars appeared with several deputies. The irate owner of the house came out,
239
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
and we talked a few minutes. I tried to explain what I was doing without sounding like a
madman. The head deputy asked me to follow him to the sheriff’s office.
When we got there, they looked inside the cab of my truck. In the truck, I carried a
double-barreled .12 gauged shotgun, as at that stage of my targeting, I believed that I
might be attacked at some point. The shotgun was not loaded; however, there were
several shells on the floorboard. In Louisiana, only concealed weapons are illegal.
Shotguns in trucks are perfectly legal and thousands of people routinely carry them.
So, they could not charge me with possessing and carrying a firearm.
The deputies took me inside to the office of a higher authority who may have been
either the sheriff or a chief deputy. He looked up, apparently already apprised of the
situation, and asked in a derisive and intimidating manner, “What nut house did you
escape from?” He took copies of my driver license and other papers. I expected to be
arrested. Instead, he told me to leave the city and not to come back there again. Not
intimidated, I have returned there several times since then.
The sheriff had a perfect opportunity to arrest me and make me look insane. Instead,
he let me go with a warning. He had obviously been instructed by a higher authority not
to arrest me. Why? Because the incident would have gone into the local newspaper
and might have drawn attention to my reason for being there in the first place. I would
have had a perfect reason to talk to reporters about why I was there. They knew that.
The powerbrokers and their accomplices go to great lengths to stifle any publicity on
the targets and their cause.
That incident taught me several lessons that targets usually learn sometime during the
early days of their discovery: That targets must be very careful in sleuthing out what
they believe may be leads to their REA; that the attackers and the people behind them
pull strings on every level of government; that the local authorities are a part of the
“system;” and that law enforcement does not want anything brought before the public
about electronic stalking and mind control.
U. S. Intelligence and Law Enforcement Examined
The stand-back, hands-off position of the FBI and local law enforcement is
understandable only if one considers that those authorities themselves may be involved
in electronic assault and mind control activities. Ask yourself the following questions.
(01) Who would have the equipment to carry out electronic assault?
(02) Who would have the knowledge about how to use that equipment for REA?
(03) Who would have a ready opportunity to use the equipment?
240
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
(04) Who can communicate through a network that allows them national coverage?
(05) Who has the authority to investigate people and obtain their personnel and military
files?
(06) Who has the financial resources required to buy the equipment, procure the
attackers, train those people, and pay them for their services 24/7?
(07) Who has the technical expertise to train attackers in electronic stalking and mind
control activities?
(08) Who has secure facilities where extra-legal records on the targets and information
gathered on the targets can be kept?
(09) Who has the authority and funding to send hundreds of investigators into the field
to conduct interviews with people who know the targets and record those interviews.
(10)) Who has the connections to pursue victims from city to city, state to state, and
country to country as they seek to escape the effects of REA?
(11) Who can best start rumor campaigns and spread misinformation about the
targets?
(12) Who can prevent investigations by law enforcement into complaints of REA?
13) Who can encourage the medical and scientific communities to maintain silence on
REA and psychiatrists to label victims paranoid-schizophrenic without looking further
into the subject?
(14) Who can summon the assistance of telephone companies, public utility
companies, and internet providers in tapping phones and hacking computers of
victims?
(15) Who can command the cooperation of the post office and the package delivery
services into misdirecting and interfering in other ways with the victims’
correspondence?
(16) Who has the human resources to fill the internet with lies, misleading material, and
deceptive information on electronic stalking and mind control?
(17) Who has the equipment and the capability of tracking a person within his home or
any other structure and pinpointing any place on that person’s body?
(18) Who has the means to encourage neighbors to ostracize a victim in his own
neighborhood?
(19) Who has the power to direct the resources of the IRS, DEA, ATF, and other
agencies on the targets?
(20) Who has the capability of gaining access to the targets’ financial records and
credit reports?
(21) Who has the clout to silence Congresspersons, especially the Committee
Chairpersons, from ordering a national inquiry into widespread and increasing
allegations of REA?
(22) Who has the capability to garner the cooperation of elements of all ethnic groups
against a target?
241
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
(23) Who can make certain that no REA complaint is submitted on local law
enforcement’s monthly crime report?
(24) Who has the influence to keep any mention of REA out of local newspapers? (25)
Who has the authority to issue policy statements denying that electronic assault even
exists?
(26) Who has unlimited human resources to use in this manner?
(27) Who can legally allow or block out frequencies over the air?
(28) Who can subsidize the rent of policemen and other local law enforcement to rent
an apartment or house next to yours?
If you answered “the government,” or the powerbrokers, to all twenty-eight of those
questions, you are correct.
Electronic stalking and mind control simply cannot exist without the knowledge of the
FBI and other Federal intelligence gathering agencies, period. That hints of a vast and
widespread conspiracy that must necessarily include local law enforcement. The
conspiracy is secret, well organized, and thoroughly implemented. It is highly possible
that conspirators may include legally constituted and outwardly legitimate groups. If
that is correct, the FBI, DIA, MIA, DOD, CIA, and other American intelligence units
would have to train those selected groups, provide them the equipment and know-how
to use it, and advise them.
In the event of a crime, a victim’s only recourse is to inform law enforcement of the
crime. Those authorities are expected to investigate and assist the victim. If law
enforcement is the perpetrator, to whom else can a victim turn for help?
Electronic Stalking Versus Mind Control
Four main points stand out: (1) Electronic stalking and mind control pervades the
United States of America, targeting victims that represent the make-up of the entire
population; (2) Conspiracy, deception, and secrecy are key elements in those activities;
(3) Perpetrators of that electronic stalking and mind control conspiracy operate on
national, state, and local levels; (4) Many of those conspiracies operate with the
acquiescence and under the protection of law enforcement on all levels of government.
Ordinary electronic stalking can be carried out by many people and groups operating
near the victims and using home-made or altered devices and equipment that can be
easily purchased. Mind control, on the other hand, is quite another activity, which
requires high-tech equipment, a great deal of organization, intensive training, utter
secrecy, and the ability to operate by remote. Amateurs can carry out electronic
stalking; however, only highly trained technicians can carry out mind control.
242
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
The Role of Jails and Prisons in Electronic Torture and Mind Control
Law enforcement has cooperated with REA on targets for many years. Experiments
with electronic torture and mind control in so-called correctional facilities probably
began back in the 1960’s and 1970’s. David James Fratus, a prisoner in the Utah State
Prison in Draper, Utah, wrote of his experiences with REA in that facility in a 1988
letter. I include below some excerpts from that very long and descriptive letter.
“I began to receive, or hear, high frequency tones in my ears. Like the test pattern on a TV set. The volume or
intensity of these frequencies is adjustable and some are so high and piercing that they've literally had me climbing
the walls. You cannot imagine what it has been like confined to a cell 24 hours a day for almost a rear [year] now,
being brain blasted by high frequency impulses--no respite, no place to hide, and having not the lightest notion what
was going on.
For the climax in this series of weird events, I began to hear voices in my ears. Voices that change pitch and timbre
in contrast from being a cartoonish high and squeaky, descending through the octaves, including everything from
sinister Darth Vadorish to basically normal characteristics. The reception of these voices into my inner ears is as
vivid as though I were listening to a set of stereo headphones, and they are able to mix, match, and blend them in
conjunction with the frequency tones creating a raucous cacophony of audio discord that disheartens the soul.
Now for the clincher. The various effects of this device have been progressively increased throughout this elevenmonth onslaught, finally arriving at full potential with the end result being that I am now having my brain monitored
by an omnipotent computerized mind reading or scanning machine of some sort. No hoax, no illusion to what I'm
experiencing. These people have devised or acquired a specialized unit that reads absolutely everything--physical
as well as mental functions, and are able to cause severe impairments and dysfunctions via this remote-control
scanning device.
This scheme of sleep deprivation, headaches, and audio torments is relentless and being used to break down my
resistance and wear me to a mental frazzle, permitting no mental privacy, berating and picking my thoughts apart,
and attacking my mind with an insidious tirade of sickening innuendo and threats. They are going into my
subconscious, or memory bank, bringing forth unpleasant memories long ago forgotten, and I am being punished
for past as well as present indiscretions. I can think of anything from the past-- a friend or situation from 30 years
ago for instance, and the voices will provide names and particulars. I have repeatedly tested and attempted to trick
them on this. No way. They have better access to what's in my head with this nefarious invention than I do.
I can converse with my antagonists merely by thinking what I wish to say.... and I welcome you to the Twilight
Zone!! How the hell is this being done?? They are using those frequency impulses to perpetrate some very vicious
maltreatment on me. With the apparent ease of manipulating a keyboard, they can, with a flick of the switch, strip
me of all energy and motivation to where I'm forced to lie on my bunk and stare at the wall like a zombie. I've been
left in this state for weeks at a time--literally chained to my bed without the actual use of physical restraints, having
not the energy to walk back and forth in my cell even a few times. For almost the entire eleven months I have
continuously been made to feel low down and chronically depressed.
It is inconceivable to me that the technology of this awesome device can be unique and possessed solely by the
State of Utah, but I may very well be wrong. When I first entered the prison in May, 1986, one of the psychologists
who conducted my initial classification interview inquired as to whether I had ever heard "voices." That seems to be
the key word around here. . . .The proficiency of the apparatus I'm dealing with is sophisticated far beyond anything
scientists had apparently imagined in use at that time. I have since heard many references made to people hearing
"voices" by both inmates and staff, which would indicate that these people were in possession of, and employing
243
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
this technology at least that far back. This is what prompts me to wonder how they could have had such an
innovative piece of equipment in use, operating with apparent perfection of technique, without the scientific and
medical community in general being aware of it. Quite a puzzle.
At least two inmates that I know of have been badgered to the point of having attempted suicide as a result of this
mental torment, and something stinks to the high heavens here! All of the staff, as well as a number of inmates, are
aware of what is happening, so I can't fathom how it can remain, or even at this time, be a kept and closed secret
human nature being what it is. They [prison authorities and guards] are so very smug and secure in the belief that
they cannot be brought to account for these blatantly illegal acts due to their well rehearsed methods of official
denial, isolation, and absence of witnesses, bogus psychiatric evaluations, and of course, the fact that this mental
torment is being accomplished by a faceless machine, operated by anonymous antagonists from an unknown
location and distance.”
What happened to Fratus in the Utah prison represents the most heinous crime against
humanity. Keep in mind that Fratus wrote his letter over twenty years ago. Imagine how
much more sophisticated the equipment, the software, and the mind control techniques
have gotten in the last two decades. And imagine how the spread of that evil has
proliferated in the meantime.
In a case aired on the TV program “48 Hours” on August 16, 2008, the narrator told
about Florida playboy Fred Kretsmer’s spending eight months in a California prison and
later hearing “voices.” Kretsmer later murdered a woman. Did the voices that he heard
urge him to kill? Several victims with whom I corresponded who also hear voices had
served time in prison. Thus, it appears that prisoners are routinely implanted with
microchips and often submitted to psychological torture in prisons.
A few of email REA correspondents have served jail or prison time. All of them were
subjected to electronic torture and mind control in those facilities. They believe that
they were also targeted while they were there. In truth, they may have already been
targeted long before they were incarcerated.
Only the most naive, uninformed persons will believe that state prisons exercise a
monopoly over electronic torture devices and methods and mind control. Other
elements of law enforcement must know about them. Moreover, how did those prisons
acquire that technology in the first place? Detention center personnel appear to be a
party to the entire intelligence community/law enforcement REA conspiracy.
The REA Operators Manual
Something as sophisticated as mind control is developed over a long period of time and
involves many levels and steps. Thus, its methods have to be spelled out in a type of
trainers manual. That manual establishes particular protocols for applying the REA.
Those protocols differ with the aims of the REA and the types of targets.
244
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
REA could not have been developed without input from psychologists, psychiatrists,
electronic and aerodynamic engineers, very highly trained computer programmers and
technicians, probably physicists, chemists, and pharmacists, mind control and
interrogation experts, i.e., the intelligence community, and others. Nor could it have
been developed without the knowledge of the FBI or the blessings of the National
Security Agency.
It is surprising that at least one of the scientists or government officials involved in
planning the original REA techniques has not spoken out and revealed the sordid
secret. However, the fact that participating in REA makes them criminals and subject to
imprisonment is probably sufficient persuasion to keep them quiet. In addition, they
probably fear they will also become victims of fatal “accidents” and other mysterious
deaths if they talk to authorities or to the press.
One of the aims of the assailants is to discredit the target by making him look crazy,
and they do indeed cause anxiety and other psychological problems in the target that
drive him to a doctor. The regular doctor will then refer the target to a psychiatrist.
Unfortunately, the medical community either knowingly supports the perpetrators or
plays into their hands. I believe that the powerbrokers who control the medical schools
also control what doctors are taught about paranoia and schizophrenia.
I understand that pre-graduation counseling of medical students warns them about
patients who think that they are targets of electronic and mind control assault. In other
words, doctors have been thoroughly brainwashed not to think outside the traditional
centuries-old concept of mental diseases. That is why physicians usually are not
targeted. They are more useful to the powerbrokers who employ the perpetrators in
making targets look crazy with their diagnoses.
REA, Government, and Democracy
I resisted for years the notion that my own government might have anything to do with
my becoming a victim of electronic stalking and mind control; yet, overwhelming
circumstantial evidence and logic tell me that U. S. law enforcement on the Federal
level may be directly involved in electronic harassment and mind control. If not, they
know the identity of the assailants, protect them, and refuse to investigate them.
Many TI correspondents trace their REA to the early 2000s, which coincides with the
Bush administration (2000-2008). The Patriot Act not only gives U. S. law enforcement
carte blanche to monitor American citizens but also excludes those officers from
prosecution for that activity. Moreover, it authorizes law enforcement to use private
citizens to spy on their peers. Those domestic neighbor-spies normally have no training
245
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
in law enforcement and do not have to undergo a security check. In May, 2011,
Congress approved the ubiquitous Patriot Act without changes for another four years.
I used to be the type American whose eyes welled with tears whenever he heard the
Star Spangled Banner. I was raised to revere the government. Moreover, I served in
the U. S. Army Reserves and spent years working with the government. My ancestors
helped found the British colonies, and my ancestors and kinsmen have fought in every
conflict from Colonial wars and the American Revolution to the present.
However, after my experiences with REA, I have developed a very strong distrust of my
government and the executive branch in particular. I believe that it is patently clear that
the FBI, the U. S. intelligence community, and law enforcement on every level either
take part in electronic stalking and mind control operation, cooperate with the
perpetrators, or cover for the perpetrators.
I kept quiet for over two years after I discovered that I was a target of electronic
harassment and mind control, as I knew that most people would not only doubt my
accounts of REA but also my sanity. Then I realized that the perpetrators of that evil
counted on my remaining silent. In fact, targets’ reluctance to talk about what is
happening to them has set back for years our attempts to expose REA and the people
behind it. Thus, I chose to reveal to the world my experiences as a victim of electronic
stalking and particularly of mind control. I would urge other targets to do likewise,
regardless of the stigma that they will almost certainly encounter.
In the silent telepathic manner in which the attackers and I communicate, I tell the
attackers that nothing lasts forever, that times are changing and that they are “going
down.” The hirelings are convinced that the establishment will continue to protect them.
After all, they have engaged in the sordid practice of REA for decades. Once, one of
my attackers told me subliminally, “I guarantee you that we are protected.”
Nevertheless, eventually the sheer growing numbers of complainants will force law
enforcement to follow the laws that they swore to uphold and adhere to the principles of
the Constitution that they swore to defend. The general public is becoming more aware
of and informed about REA, and targets are beginning to emerge from hiding to insist
on law enforcement investigations. More victims are beginning to network on the
internet. Until law enforcement acts, I invite other victims of electronic stalking and mind
control and other concerned Americans to join me in the war against the demented, evil
REA torturers and sociopaths.
The stability of the American government lies in grave danger. If the perpetrators of
REA are from foreign countries and are attempting to create American dissidents, they
246
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
have succeeded. If the perpetrators are rogue groups within the U. S. intelligence
community and law enforcement, they have succeeded. If the perpetrators are domestic
terrorists or vigilante groups, they have succeeded. Thousands of American targets of
electronic harassment and mind control today distrust their government and no longer
feel any patriotism toward that government.
As the reader has probably surmised, I am a longtime critic of U. S. foreign policy. I
stand against our waging war on a country without a formal declaration of war naming
that country, supporting particular countries (Israel in particular) with abysmal human
rights records, blockading countries without declarations of war, using public funds to
buy the acquiescence and cooperation of corrupt dictators, establishing puppets in
smaller, weaker, poorer countries, stationing U. S. troops all over the world,
proliferating the use of atomic, neurological, and biological weaponry, using third
countries and Guantanamo to incarcerate so-called prisoners of war without trials, and
banning travel in countries that do not comply with U.S. demands (Cuba, N. Korea, and
Libya).
I visited Cuba in the 1990’s to test the U. S. Government’s curtailment of the right of
Americans to travel to certain countries with which we were not at war. I hoped that I
would be arrested and charged under the law forbidding travel with Cuba. It did not
happen. Yet, I am sure that my trip to Cuba was duly noted. I also intend to make a
future trip to Cuba to prepare a report for other targets on electronic stalking and mind
control effects or the absence of them in that country. I have no intention of fleeing to
that country. I shall live and die in my home in Louisiana. However, if no REA is found
in Cuba, many U. S. targets who look for respite from their electronic torture may want
to consider migrating there.
I am a social scientist with many years of experience in performing research. When I
analyze situations, I look for facts that support scientific explanations. Yet, due to the
secrecy involved, REA cannot be explained scientifically. The remote-operated
electronic and mind control assault is designed to leave no evidence. Nevertheless,
thousands of victims with similar symptoms delivered by remote by unknown forces
know the reality of their circumstances. They await an explanation and a resolution.
The FISA Court
Under the Patriot Act and its subsequent supporting acts, the U. S. Government can
target certain Americans, try them in a secret court called the Foreign Intelligence
Surveillance Act (FISA) Court, and subject them to a series of covert actions without
advising the victims of those actions or the reasons for them . On March 8, 2010, I
247
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
directed a letter to that secret court asking them to clarify under the Freedom of
Information Act (FOIA) whether I had been targeted. Here is my letter.
Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act (FISA) Court
Department of Justice
National Security Division
Office of Intelligence Policy and Review
950 Pennsylvania Avenue, NW, Room 3305
Washington, D.C. 20530
Subject: Request for FISA Disclosure
Dear Sirs:
I respectfully request that you advise me whether I have been considered a terrorist suspect by the FISA
Court. I am a target of daily electronic torture and mind control activities performed by remote by yet
unidentified and unseen criminals, who I believe work with the knowledge, acquiescence, and protection
– and perhaps the assistance -- of the Government of the United States of America.
My remote assailants are most likely Israel and its U. S. supporters, as I am pro-Palestinian, generally
pro-Arab, anti-Israel, and anti-Zionist. The U. S. intelligence community already knows that I do not
communicate with nor conspire with any foreign agent nor any foreign country in support of my political
beliefs and actions. Nor do I belong to any radical or terrorist domestic groups. Thus, there is no valid
reason for my processing before a FISA court.
Additional personal information is provided below to help further identify me. I affirm that I am in perfect
command of my mental faculties and that the totality of this information is true under pain and penalty of
perjury.
Sincerely yours,
Max Harrison Williams
As usual, I sent that letter by confirmation mail and received no indication that the letter
arrived. That the court did not answer my letter came as no surprise. What else is new!
The secret FISA court is supposed to target only those very few Americans with
connections to known or suspected foreign terrorists. The rules under which it operates
do not require it to release the names of targeted Americans. The court could merely
tell me that it cannot disclose that information or, more likely, ignore my request. As
expected, it was the latter.
The U. S. Government increasingly focuses on finding and rooting out “home grown”
terrorists. While finding the domestic terrorists in the short-run may be helpful to the
powerbrokers, it will not stop the development of those so-called “home grown”
terrorists. I suggest that the solution to home grown terrorists lies in studying WHY they
248
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
become terrorists. The government’s use of electronic and neurological attacks on its
own people will almost certainly lead to “home grown” terrorists.
If the U.S. Government sees me as a possible terrorist and is indeed behind my
attacks, it does so in a very discreet manner, for I am not on the no-fly list. I frequently
make flights abroad without any problem. Thus, I believe that although the U.S.
Government knows about and cooperates with attackers, the targeting itself comes
from another entity. That entity is probably another government, that of Israel, acting
possibly through a proxy organization located in the United States of America.
Identifying my Attackers
My stalking dates back to the mid-1970’s. By connecting the dots, I can prove beyond a
reasonable doubt that Israel and its U. S. backers initiated my targeting. That does not
necessarily mean that Israel and its supporters are directly behind the electronic
stalking and mind control activities of all targets. They are only one of the powerbrokers
who probably have that capability. Since my initial targeting, the program used against
me has gradually evolved from only simple surveillance and harassment to today’s
high-tech torture and mind control.
After reading my story, the reader can draw his own conclusions. As usual, I make no
effort to be politically correct nor any excuse for not being politically correct. I shall start
from the beginning.
I was working for the U. S. Government in South America when the 1973 Arab-Israeli
War broke out. As a Ph.D. in history and also a writer, I like to perform my own
analyses of events instead of accepting the controlled media’s views and the
government’s versions; thus, I began looking into the background of the conflict,
including the two previous Arab-Israeli Wars.
While conducting research, I became intrigued by Israel’s air attack on the U.S.S.
Liberty during the 1967 Arab-Israeli War. In that attack, Israel used unmarked aircraft,
supported by Israeli torpedo boats, to strafe and bomb the Liberty, killing thirty-seven
American sailors. In contrast, the attack on the U.S.S. Cole in 2000 by “Arab
extremists” killed only seventeen American sailors. Guess which incident the media
played up. Subsequent investigations found that Israel knew that the clearly-marked
Liberty was American and sought to blame their attack on Egypt; a tactic called a “false
flag” operation, for which Israel is infamous. Nevertheless, the United States
powerbrokers accepted Israel’s claim that it was an accident. Case closed.
249
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
As a result of my research on Arab-Israeli relations, I saw for the first time that Israel
was not at all the poor beleaguered nation that U. S. media portrayed but instead
pursued internal and foreign policies that caused the Middle East problems. I also
realized for the first time that the media in the United States skews information
concerning Israel to place that nation in the most favorable light. On the other hand, it
rarely if ever says anything positive about Arabs or Moslems. Dan Rather, a longtime
news correspondent with CBS, is currently (2009) suing that company because of its
censorship of the news due to powerful business and political pressure.
At the time, I was almost totally ignorant of Zionism and its influence on U. S. domestic
and foreign policy. My post-doctoral education was just beginning. I learned quickly that
criticizing Israel caught the immediate attention of Israel’s far-reaching intelligence
operations – as well of those of the United States of America, which often acted in
concert with Israel’s Mossad.
Pro-Israel factions in the United States simply cannot understand that the interests of
the United States do not always coincide with the interests of Israel. Nor do they want
others to question that intertwined relationship. Shortly after my “enlightenment,” proIsrael Americans with whom I worked started testing my views. Were it not for their
attempts to intimidate me, I may have become only moderately anti-Israel. As it was, I
became increasingly vocal in expressing my condemnation of Israel’s policies, and I
also became a dedicated anti-Zionist.
In that same country, I experienced an act that I believe became a pattern of
harassment and attempted mind control that continues to this day. One day as I left
from work and was walking home, a swarthy, middle-aged, rather short man fell into
step with me on the crowded sidewalk. He sidled up closer to me as we walked and
said in a perfectly American-sounding accent, “The Jews control the United States.”
Completely stunned by his statement, I stammered my protests. Then, in a few
seconds, just as suddenly as he had appeared, he disappeared into the crowd.
No inhabitant of that country would have had the slightest interest in my feelings about
Jews. The man was probably either Israeli or a pro-Israel agent of United States
intelligence. That encounter strangely coincided with an official visit to that country by
an American Jew from the Department of State who had close ties to Israel.
After that incident, I was occasionally struck with a sense of unnatural overwhelming
gloom while in my bedroom at night before retiring. I had always been an optimistic,
outgoing person and had never had feelings of that type. The sensation returned time
after time. In retrospect, I know that even back in the mid-1970’s devices and methods
250
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
for affecting the mind existed and were being used. Whatever the device was, it
operated by remote. It was very possibly the Russian-invented Lida machine, which
operated by remote on subjects to cause them disquiet. (More about anxiety later.) The
underdeveloped country in which I was working had absolutely no reason or the
wherewithal to target me.
In 1978, I was assigned to a different South American country. One of the national
employees who worked in my section was a Jewish woman who had worked with the
Israeli Consulate before that office closed. One day when I had a problem with a molar,
I asked that person to recommend a dentist. She referred me to an older German
Jewish "dentist," who supposedly did a root canal on that tooth. An older woman,
perhaps his wife, served as his assistant in a stark room of their dark, unpleasantlooking residence that served as a dental office.
After retirement in the 1990's, I went to an American dentist with problems with the
same molar on which the South American dentist had supposedly performed the root
canal. The local dentist found in the tooth a tiny cylindrical pin-like object less than a
quarter of an inch long that he thought perhaps was the point of a broken file. At the
time, I thought little of it. However, now in retrospect, I know that it had to be a tiny
prototype of today’s microchip. Not knowing at the time that I was targeted, I did not
have the foresight to save that small object.
The South American dentist had also wanted to place a filling in-between my two front
teeth, claiming that there was decay between the teeth. Fortunately, I refused to allow
him to do that, for MORE THAN THIRTY YEARS LATER THOSE TWO FRONT
TEETH STILL REMAIN PERFECTLY SOUND. Thus, the dentist obviously wanted to
use a fake filling to plant an almost microscopic camera in that location, which would
allow them to see as well as hear the people with whom I talked. By WWII, the Axis as
well as the Allies had developed cameras so small that they could be cleverly
concealed in pencil erasers, shirt buttons, and other items. Documents on microfilm
could be reduced in size to fit underneath a typed punctuation period or comma on a
piece of paper. That was almost seventy years ago!
I was fond of the employee who recommended the dentist, and at the time I had no
reason at all to doubt that she was just a nice, friendly national employee who
happened to be Jewish and who happened to find work with the U. S. Government.
Although I liked that particular employee, her peers obviously did not. When other
employees reported to me that she got to the office early in the morning before I arrived
to go through the papers in my desk, I dismissed those charges as simply tales
manufactured out of jealousy and office rivalry.
251
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
I had given that employee excellent performance evaluations and had even written
Washington that as our presence in that country diminished, we should retain her
services as long as we could. Nevertheless, after I left the country for another
assignment, that employee lost her job. She told others that I caused her to be fired. In
actuality, I did not find out that she had been dismissed until much later. In hind sight, I
believe that her guilt convinced her that I had found out about her duplicity and had
gotten her fired. Apparently that employee did not stop working with the Israelis when
she took the job with the U. S. Government. Certain people in our government probably
knew that she was still an Israeli agent.
In the 1970’s, Israeli Nazi hunters were still active in South America, funded in large
part by the U. S. Government. The “dentist” probably worked with them, and the
employee in my office may have also cooperated in the hunt. One of the contractors
who worked with the American Government and who alternated between Argentina and
the country in which I was assigned was known to be associated with that group. The
“Nazis” doubtlessly included anybody who opposed Israel and its pro-Israel factions in
the United States.
The minuscule device implanted by the Jewish dentist in South America in the late
1970’s may have had only limited capability. That small object embedded in a molar
was undoubtedly used to listen to my conversations through bone-to-instrument
conduction as well as perhaps to track my movements. Since that time, however, much
more sophisticated, high-tech, intelligence-gathering and mind control equipment and
software have been developed, tested, and put into operation.
Over the years, I have continued to speak out against Israel’s foreign policy and our
misguided support for it. In the 1970’s, I defended the Palestine Liberation Organization
(PLO) when it was still considered a renegade group, and in 1984 I became a member
of the American Arab Anti-Discrimination Committee (ADC) at a time when Americans
were being led by the U. S. media down the anti-Moslem path. I never occupied an
important decision-making position in the government; yet, to the Israelis, an enemy is
an enemy, regardless of his rank. I have an analytical and inquiring mind, and I
articulate my thoughts. My friends respect my opinions. Thus, I am a threat.
In the early to mid-1980’s, I served in Washington, DC, where my anti-Israel views
became widely known in my work venue. In that city, I subscribed to a small obscure
newspaper called The Spotlight, which often published Israeli and Zionist actions that
would never have been published in the controlled American media. Every subscriber
to The Spotlight, now defunct, got a place on the pro-Israel hit list. While in
252
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Washington, the IRS, which represents a very powerful tool of the pro-Israel
powerbrokers, audited me twice consecutively. Never think that the IRS is not political.
It is an integral part of the Zionist powerbrokers.
In 1981, the U. S. Government’s plan to sell AWAKs to Saudi Arabia stalled in
Congress because of Israel’s lobbyists. Israel has over fifty PACs in the United States
that work aggressively to promote its interests. I wrote one of the senators from my
home state: “. . . Israel always has been and continues to be a liability to the United
States, and our protection of that nation is not now, and never was, in our national
interest.” I went on to say that our blind support of that country’s aims “has earned us
the enmity and distrust of traditionally friendly Arab and Moslem countries . . . .”
If I was not already on the Israeli hit list, other points made in the same letter were sure
to place me firmly on it. Here are other excerpts from that letter.
− “. . . the United States has prostrated itself in Israel’s behalf and has received little, if
anything, in return. In so doing, our country has lost many real opportunities in other
countries.”
− “The smoldering situation in the Middle East is very likely in the future to lead to a
regional or perhaps global conflict in which our country would be inextricably involved.”
– “Mr. Begin’s statement (paraphrased) that 'one cannot be anti-Israel without also
being anti-Jewish, because the two are inseparable' was a deliberate attempt to
discourage criticism of that country.”
– “I am fully aware of the countless subtle means of retaliation to which I may be
subjected for my views. Yet, I will no longer be numbered among the ‘Silent Majority’
and watch my beloved country subvert itself for the sake of a self-serving nation whose
value to us and to mankind has yet to be demonstrated.”
That lawmaker wrote me back a sickeningly defensive letter, calling Israel a bastion of
democracy and the U.S.’s best friend in that region. I have no doubt that either he or an
aide forwarded a copy of my letter to the Israeli Embassy.
On April 25, 1985, I also wrote a letter to the editor of The Washington Post, criticizing
Reagan’s attacks on Gadhaffi’s palace in Libya, in which a small son of Gadhaffi was
killed. A part of the letter stated: “In its recent attacks on Libya, the United States
demonstrated the same unevenhandedness and injustice that it has misguidedly
followed in the Middle East since 1948. Our blind pro-Israel stance has spawned hatred
253
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
for us in the Arab world for almost forty years, causing acts of frustration by leaders like
Col. Gadaffi, whom the U.S. media then label “flakey” and “mad dogs.”
In the same letter, I referred to “my country’s shameful Middle East policy” and blamed
the Libya attacks on the US Government’s attempts to weaken Israel’s enemies. I also
recalled Reagan’s bombing of Beirut in 1983 in support of Israel’s invasion of Lebanon.
Later that same year I was reassigned to an African post. The American ambassador in
that country was a political appointee who was ardently pro-Israel. He was also Jewish.
Shortly after my arrival, he gathered several newly arrived employees supposedly to
brief them. During his talk, he told us point blank that a part of our duty was to support
Israel’s interests in that country. I could hardly believe my ears. His remark was clearly
intended for me. Having been apprised of my anti-Israel views, he may have been
baiting me to challenge his statement and thus give him reason to send me back to the
United States. In retrospect, I wish that I had challenged him.
That ambassador was not a career diplomat but a political appointee who had bought
his position through so-called “campaign contributions” to the president. He left shortly
after I arrived. His replacement was a female career diplomat, who, it turned out, was
very evenhanded concerning Israel’s interests in that county. To her credit, she cut
short the tour of an American Foreign Service Officer, a Jew married to an Israeli
woman, who often rode to local events in an Israeli Embassy vehicle, for his obvious
connection with another foreign country.
I liked both the man and his Israeli wife. I had worked previously with that officer in
Washington, and we had often chatted during work breaks about various topics. He
had remarked on one occasion that he had his bags packed for an anti-Jewish,
holocaust-type movement that was bound to happen, a comment that made me
question his loyalty to the United States.
In that same country several years later when it looked like President George Bush (the
elder) planned to attack Saddam Hussein, I objected to that action, as I saw it as a
convenient pretext for removing one of Israel’s most implacable enemies. Taking
advantage of a process known as the “dissent channel,” in which American government
employees abroad may express opposition to U. S. foreign policy, I sent several cables
– that was before electronic mail and cell phones – to the Secretary of State.
In those cables, I stated my opposition to the war and charged that the principal reason
for the U. S. attacking Hussein was not to assist Kuwait but to fight a proxy war for
Israel to maintain Israeli hegemony in the Middle East. However, the media had already
pumped up the American public to support the so-called Gulf War. I was among only a
254
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
handful of thoughtful Americans who opposed that war, and my opposition became duly
noted by pro-Israel factions within U. S. intelligence as well as the Israelis.
My cables criticizing both the U. S. and Israel for their Middle East policies may have
triggered much more advanced electronic surveillance. I believe that as a result of
those cables criticizing George H. W. Bush’s policies, the U. S. intelligence community
joined Israel in placing me on the “watch list,” and most probably the “hit list.” My hindsight observations tell me that probably in the early 1990’s pro-Israel elements within
the FBI took over my surveillance from the original perpetrators when I retired and
returned to the United States, probably on the pretended grounds that I was a
subversive and a suspected terrorist. Their mind control assault on me probably began
in earnest in the early-1990s and increased in intensity over the last ten to fifteen
years.
When I retired, I continued speaking out against Israel in conversations with friends
and in letters to editors of newspapers although I knew that elements in U. S.
intelligence loyal to Israel had placed me on their hit list and that they were following
my activities. During Israel’s most recent invasion of Lebanon, I wrote to CNN to
complain about Wolf Blitzer’s obvious bias in his interpretation of the events
concerning that invasion. Blitzer, a Jew, had once worked for the Jerusalem Post. That
he had previously worked for an Israeli newspaper should not be surprising, for, as a
well written article in the March 16, 2011 issue of the online Pakalert Press states, 96%
of the world’s media is Zionist owned and/or operated.
After retiring, I continued to travel abroad occasionally, usually to Central America,
where I owned property. Once when I returned to the Houston international airport from
one of the trips, a rookie immigration official processed my entry. A veteran officer
stood nearby. When the rookie scanned my passport and viewed his monitor, he
looked perplexed. He turned to an older officer and pointed to something on his monitor
that he obviously did not understand. The veteran officer took a quick look and said to
the rookie, “ADOD” (Advise Department of Defense).
My computer has been hacked and my phone tapped for years. A recent accidental
discovery strongly suggests that the hackers and phone tappers are pro-Israel Federal
agents or foreign agents working with the permission of U. S. intelligence. Here is what
happened. One day I entered my email Sent file to copy a paragraph that I had written
to a correspondent about the tiny device having been implanted in a molar while living
in South America in 1978. I cut and pasted that paragraph and re-sent it. Because my
computer is monitored and my emails sometimes deleted or changed, I went back to
the Sent box to see if the message had actually gone out. When I opened the
255
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
previously sent email, I was astonished to see three words encased in blue-lined
rectangular boxes: ISRAEL, MIDDLE EAST, and SOUTH AMERICA.
As a former government employee, let me explain why those three areas were
highlighted. Intelligence organizations in every country organize their offices into
geographical sections, which include Israel, the Middle East, and South America.
Copies of my email went to those three offices in some intelligence agency in some
country. Every U. S. law intelligence agency, including the Department of State and
other agencies, has personnel sections that deal with regional affairs. Whoever
monitors my email spotted my references to Israel, the Middle East, and South America
and marked that email for copies to be sent to those regional affairs offices. I suspect
that copies not only went to U. S. intelligence agencies but also to the Mossad.
The hackers never imagined that I would go back into a previously sent letter to cut and
paste. Finding the highlighted words was a total accident, but a very fortunate one for
me, for it told me that somebody monitors my email correspondence and that he is not
looking for kiddy porn, drug and money laundering rings, and other unlawful activities
but for material dealing with political views. After passage of the so-called Patriot Act,
anybody working with the FBI can justify monitoring a citizen’s email and tapping his
phones without getting judicial approval.
Later, to make their flub-up appear to be a computer glitch or a common internet action,
the same monitors encircled other words on several other letters; however, when they
saw that I had not fallen for that deception, they quit doing it. In view of the fraternal
cooperation between the FBI-CIA and the Mossad, the person who monitored my
emails could be an agent of the latter. What I do not know is the location of the person
who monitors my computer, as computers can be hacked from anywhere in the world,
including Monroe, Louisiana, where I live, New York City, or Tel Aviv. As a result of
internet providers turning over its information to U. S. intelligence in 2010, it is
commonplace now for words in emails to be highlighted.
Freedom of expression in the United States seemingly comes at a price. Although I
have never belonged to the Ku Klux Klan, the Aryan Brotherhood, the Survivalists, the
Militia, or any other extremist organization, I have openly and consistently condemned
Israel. As an American, I thought that I had the right to do so. Apparently I was wrong.
An American can publicly criticize England, France, Mexico, or any other country in the
world, including his own country, but he cannot criticize Israel.
That point was driven home by Israeli spokeswoman Tzipora Menache, who was
reported in a February 1, 2009 article as saying, “You know very well, and the stupid
Americans know equally well, that we [the Israelis] control their government,
256
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
irrespective of who sits in the White House . . . . We control congress, we control the
media, we control show biz, and we control everything in America. IN AMERICA YOU
CAN CRITICIZE GOD, BUT YOU CAN’T CRITICIZE ISRAEL.” But I do, and I shall
continue to do so in my small voice as long as I am alive.
Unfortunately for Americans, the Israeli woman was correct. Today in the United States
one hears and reads in the media discussions on abortion, the death penalty, the
legalization of marijuana, U. S. politicians’ personal relationships, illegal immigration,
religious beliefs and their leaders, sex of all descriptions, the Iraq War, autism and
every type of mental disorder, and other sometimes divisive and intimate topics. I defy
the reader to provide a reference to a meaningful debate on Israel’s actions and
policies in the United States during the last fifty years. The media, the clergy, and
especially politicians on every level carefully avoid any negative criticism of Israel.
Moreover, one can verbally express doubt about evolution, the divinity of Christ, the
existence of God, the holiness of the Pope, or the sanctity of the Bible, but he cannot
doubt the Zionist version of the WWII European “holocaust.” In Canada, Germany, and
other countries, one can be imprisoned for even questioning the holocaust. Zionist
organizations have successfully kept that topic from being scientifically studied by
historians. Arsonists set fire to and destroyed an institute in California whose aim was
to use extant documentation to write a true history of the holocaust. The Jewish
Defense League (JDL), the Anti-Defamation League (ADL), or B'nai B'rith was
suspected as the arsonist; however, investigators made little effort to determine the
identity of the criminals.
The Israelis even target American and Israeli Jews who oppose their Zionist aims. The
target support organization to which I belong, Freedom from Covert Harassment and
Surveillance, was founded by a woman from Israel who did not always agree with
Israeli foreign policy. That woman believed that she had been targeted by Israel or its
surrogates in the United States. I am sure that American Jewish clergy such as Rabbi
Arthur Waskow, who opposes Israeli occupation of Palestinian territory, are targeted.
Having always considered myself a fervently patriotic citizen, I smolder at being made a
surveillance target and now a target of electronic torture and mind control because of
my personal and political views. If communication with radical and terrorist groups is
the only object of my surveillance, that surveillance would have concluded years ago
that I am not a domestic or an international terrorist. That suggests that I am perceived
by either pro-Israel U. S. intelligence or Israeli intelligence as a threat to Israel and thus
the reason for my surveillance. The aim of Israel and its pro-Israel American
accomplices is to stifle any opposition at all in the United States – and worldwide -- to
257
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Israel, and American intelligence appears only too ready to lend assistance toward that
objective.
That Israel sees any anti-Zionist views as dangerous and attempts to silence those
views is obvious. That pro-Israel organizations in the U. S. such as the JDL, the ADL,
and the Americans for Israel PAC (AIPAC) perform unlawful acts to advance Israel’s
agenda is a matter of record. That Israel and its U. S. backers have reason to want me
and others silenced is readily evident. They are masters, however, in using
misinformation, staging “false flag” operations, and developing schemes to get others
to perform their dirty work while they sit and watch several levels removed from the
action. They discover the target’s vulnerabilities and then farm them out to pro-Israel
PACs, Christian Fundamentalist Zionists, and plain hirelings, who, without ideals and
agendas, simply work for the money.
Such is the control by Israel and its supporters over the U. S. Government that today
we do not have a U. S. Middle East foreign policy. Instead, our Middle East policy is
Israel’s Middle East policy. Every serious candidate for U. S. president today must extol
Israel’s position as the “Middle East’s only democracy,” and our foremost ally.
Those candidates even have to make a symbolic trip to Israel to seek the blessing of its
prime minister for his/her candidacy before the U. S. election. We do not know what
concessions now-President Obama promised when he made the traditional pre-election
trip to Israel. He probably reassured the Israelis that his top advisors would have strong
traditional ties to Israel and that the U. S. would not interfere with Israel's Palestinian
policy. Indeed, Obama has done just that. No person with unfriendly views toward
Israel can expect to get a job with any administration in the White House or a top job in
the government despite his brilliance and impressive education and job qualifications.
This paper is not about Israel; nevertheless, I feel compelled to make several
observations about Israel, as Americans will never see anything critical of Israel in the
controlled mainline U. S. media.
(1) Israel often “creates” its enemies to justify its agenda, knowing full well that the
United States will back it. Despite the media hype, the facts show that Israel has made
no genuine effort to make peace with its neighbors. On the contrary, through its actions
it has ensured continued Arab and Moslem hostility.
(2) Israel purposefully engenders the belief that it is surrounded by hostile forces, as it
unites the Western world in its support and opens pocketbooks on its behalf. Indeed,
the U. S. provides billions of dollars a year for no-strings budget support for Israel that
far exceeds the entire budgets of most developing countries.
258
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
(3) Israel spies on and steals secrets from the United States. Jonathan Jay Pollard, an
American Jew and a civilian analyst with the Navy Intelligence Service (NIS), spied for
the Israelis in the 1980’s. He was eventually caught and sentenced in 1986 to life in
prison. Today he is incarcerated in the same prison with Bernard Madoff, recently
sentenced to 150 years for a multi-billion dollar Ponzi scheme rip-off. Ron Olive, chief
of counterintelligence for NIS at the time, stated in a later book that Pollard’s treachery
constituted “one of the most devastating cases of espionage in U.S. history” Olive
claimed that Pollard passed to Israel over a million classified documents. One of those
stolen documents is of particular interest to targeted individuals: a ten-volume manual
called Radio-Signal Notations, which describes in detail the U. S.’s “global
electronic surveillance network.”
(4) Israel uses its pro-Israel supporters in the United States, not all Jews by any means,
to promote its plans for Middle East domination using American resources. We have
already fought two proxy wars for Israel (the Gulf War and the Iraq War) and
intervened in Somalia, Sudan, Libya, Yemen, Lebanon, and other Middle Eastern and
African countries in support of Israel’s foreign policy. In addition, we have lost scores of
American soldiers when Islamic bombers blew up barracks in two Arab countries
(Lebanon and Saudi Arabia) and attacked the U.S.S. Cole near Yemen because of our
unswerving support for Israel.
(5) Israel is one of the biggest exporters of small arms and assault weapons, many of
which end up in the hands of gang members on American streets and along the
Mexican border as well as those of despotic regimes in Africa and Asia. It has armed
the Kurds in Iraq for many years, even during the Saddam Hussein regime. Today while
American soldiers die supposedly in a war against terror and as the Iraq government
tries to pacify the country, Israel continues providing arms to the Kurdish separatists.
Moreover, for decades Israel has used internationally outlawed cluster bombs and built
up an arsenal of atomic bombs; yet, the United States has done nothing to discourage
Israel from those activities. On the other hand, the U. S. condemns Iran and North
Korea for developing atomic weapons.
(6) Israel has the worst human rights record of any other country in the entire world, a
fact carefully concealed by the pro-Israel U. S. media. Only the repeated veto of the
U. S. has kept condemnations of those violations from being registered and acted upon
in the United Nations Security Council.
(7) The 9/11 attack on the twin towers is a direct result of the United States’
subservience to Israel and that country’s continued efforts to halt the formation of a
Palestinian state. Moslem nations see the U.S. as Israel’s chief backer--which indeed it
259
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
is--and an obstacle to Palestinian statehood. The controlled U.S. press never touches
upon the reason behind the 9/11 attack and other attacks: Arab revenge for United
States’ protection of and loyalty to Israel.
I have sent letters to several U. S. national lawmakers, including both of Louisiana’s
senators, and I have not received a reply from any one of them. As I attached a copy of
The Great Conspiracy to those letters, I can only imagine that the recipients did not
want to get on the wrong side of Israel and its backers by responding to my mail. They
had rather lose one vote than risk losing the financial support of pro-Israel backers.
The United States and Israel systematically target and conduct electronic stalking and
mind control on dissidents and other opponents of the regimes who challenge the
status quo. There is apparently an unwritten agreement between the two countries that
they can target persons in each other’s territory. That agreement favors Israel, as the
United States has little reason to target Israelis. Once again, the Israelis outsmarted
the naïve U. S. leadership or U. S. politicians made the agreement knowing that it
would benefit only Israel.
In March, 2010, Vice President Biden made a trip to Israel to urge a peace settlement
between Israel and the Palestinians, and during his visit, Israel announced that it would
expand its settlements in the disputed city of Jerusalem. Israeli leaders apparently
believed that it could defy world opinion and continue to harvest Jewish and Zionist
support for its land grabs. That tactic proved to have the opposite effect. Fortunately,
some insightful and thoughtful American Jews in Israel, the United States, and other
countries as well as Christians who once supported Israel unswervingly are beginning
to question Israel’s foreign and domestic policies concerning the Palestinians and other
Moslems.
As a longtime student of Middle Eastern history, I believe that Israel’s ultimate plan is
world domination. Israel fully understands that it does not have the capability of
accomplishing that objective militarily, so its aim is to do so economically and politically.
By influencing leaders, controlling the media, and taking over both legitimate and
underground business activity, encouraging the concept of “God’s chosen people,”
manipulating the stock market, and getting control of major international industries,
Israel and its supporters do not have to fire a shot and do not have to occupy countries
militarily. They have succeeded to an astonishing degree during the last half century.
U. S. Consular Officers in foreign countries have standing orders from the Secretary of
State to grant visas without any scrutiny to Jews from any country. Our showing
favoritism to a particular religious group and putting them ahead of other would-be
immigrants in those countries violates every principle expressed in our U. S.
260
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Constitution. After the fall of the Iron Curtain, thousands of Russian Jews flocked to the
United States. Today many of those same Russian immigrants play a role in what has
been called a Jewish Mafia or a Russian Mafia.
Moreover, any Israeli can shuttle back and forth to the United States as easily as an
American citizen. No questions asked. On the other hand, an African, Asian, or Latin
American must wait for years and request a visa repeatedly just to travel to the United
States. Once again, we show religious preference. In addition to the religious
preference, most Israelis are white, which apparently makes them more acceptable. .
Iraq was once Israel’s biggest threat. The U. S. took care of that threat at a colossal
cost in money and American lives. Iran now stands as the obstacle to Israel’s Middle
East domination. Once again, Israel is lobbying behind the scenes in the United States
urging the Obama administration to attack Iran and destroy its nuclear facilities. That
attack would doubtlessly involve the U. S. in still a third war in that region because of
Israel.
Israel’s master plan, however, has run into a worrisome snag – the internet. For the first
time, Israel, its minion officials in the United States, and the pro-Israel Jews and
Zionists are running scared as increasing numbers of opponents connect electronically
to oppose Israel’s evil regime and human rights abuses. Even young people, who have
been fed pro-Israel propaganda since birth, have begun to awaken to Israel’s true aims.
The Masons, the Illuminati, law enforcement, and the FBI/CIA would have little reason
to inflict physical and psychological torture on my body and mind. Even if “Big Brother”
were monitoring me as a suspected terrorist, it would only covertly have to track and
record my activities, not assault me with electronic and mind manipulation devices.
Only one logical source for my electronic stalking and mind manipulation is left
standing, and overwhelming evidence points to Israel and its supporters. Israel has the
capability, the motive, and apparently the opportunity to do so. However, its work is
probably carried out today by the Radical Right, American PACs working for Israel, and
perhaps even by international ethnic groups known for selling their talents to the
highest bidder.
The services of astute hit men, or mercenaries, are not difficult to find. A former freelance soldier of fortune who calls himself Carl Clark of Norfolk, England, recently quit
his sordid activities after working over twenty years for the CIA, the Mossad, and the
ADL, according to his statement. Much of his work involved surreptitious entries into
the domiciles of his targets, where he planted material on their computers dealing with
child pornography or how to make a home-made bomb.
261
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
In addition to their electronic and neurological attacks, my assailants also very
obviously are experimenting on my mind. Israel has been very involved in brain
mapping activities and developing mind control devices and methods for many years.
Does my own government know that this is happening on American soil? Of course it
does. At least the key players in the government know about it. Those key persons are
probably not the political appointees, who come and go, but are civil servants whose
jobs are secure when the political party changes.
That Israel and its supporters lurk behind my attacks is obvious to me. Here are some
examples of my proof. In the spring of 2011, another target advised me how to pick up
the V2K by recording my surroundings and then using computer software to enhance
any sounds heard in that environment. I recorded on several occasions, making certain
that there were no extraneous noises, and sent the recording to that target. Keep in
mind that the recordings do not pick up the regular V2K that targets can ready “hear”
but pick up only the subconscious material that targets are not supposed to hear. The
other target analyzed the recordings over several weeks, and he heard the following
statements: “David, David, King of the Jews.” He explained that it was a type of chorus,
almost a chanting. He also heard, “He (meaning I) wants to have sex with a Jew.”
Also, one day I mixed some herbicide in a two-gallon pressure tank to spray some fruit
trees. As I pumped air into the tank to cause pressure, with each rasping thrust, I hear
very clearly “Israel, Israel, Israel.” The thrusts on the air tank picked up “silent” loopplay recordings already mentioned that are continually bombarding my mind but which
my ears cannot hear. The attackers often state through the regular V2K, “cease your
opposition to Israel” and “stop talking about the Jews.”
Few U.S. secrets are kept secret from Israel. Israel’s spies and its collaborators who
work for the U.S. Government and for government contractors ensure that Israel
receives that information. For greater insight into how Israel works to strew deception,
manipulate public opinion, and silence dissent, read the following books: By Way of
Deception by Victor Ostrovsky (former Mossad officer); Man in the Shadows by Efraim
Halevy; Gideon’s Spies by Gordon Thomas; Every Spy a Prince by Dan Raviv; and
Israel’s Secret Wars by Ian Black.
The U.S. media is controlled mainly by Zionists and Jews. Both television and radio
media unashamedly edit the news in favor of Israel. I usually watch the BBC America
news on the national public broadcasting channel. On Monday afternoon, May 28,
2012, the BBC aired a story showing Israeli bulldozers razing Palestinian homes in the
occupied West Bank. None of the other TV channels said a word about it. News on
American TV and radio appears to come from one single source, as every TV channel
262
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
and radio station always has the same news stories, usually even in the same
sequence.
Now, substitute the word Venezuela, Iran, Cuba, or North Korea for the word Israel and
substitute the word Moslem for Jew in the preceding paragraphs, and my narrative
appears perfectly in keeping with what the controlled U. S. media lead Americans to
believe. Yet, many Christian Fundamentalists and Jewish supporters of Israel, along
with the majority of well meaning but thoroughly brainwashed Americans, will call the
content of what I have just written hate and anti-Semitic propaganda. Israel and its proIsrael allies in the United States have successfully used accusations of anti-Semitism
for decades to squelch vocal opposition to Israel and its objectives. That tactic does not
stop me.
Israel and its Zionist supporters have conditioned Americans not only to look upon
Israel as their main ally and friend but also to fear to criticize Israel and Jews. Today
Americans are afraid to speak out, fearing the stigma and the consequences of being
labeled anti-Semitic. I have even had alleged targets criticize me for my anti-Israel
views, as if I should change ideas about my attackers to be “politically correct.”
Fortunately I am not bothered by people’s opinions of my views.
I have clearly identified the Israelis and their supporters as the most likely origin of my
remote-delivered electronic physical and neurological attacks. Whenever occasionally
someone suggests that I am anti-Semitic, I do not wither; nor do I assume the
defensive. Why? Because if they believe that I am anti-Semitic (which is actually a
misnomer), then they must also believe that there may be a reason for that stance, as I
am not known to be irrational.
I view myself as a dying breed, an American who devotedly loves his country and who
believes that the United States should engage in actions that ONLY protect and
enhance its own interests. In little over sixty years, American Zionists allied with Israel
and international Jewry have subverted our American interests to those of Israel. In my
opinion, the current hold of the Zionists on the U. S. Government is irreversible. The
only solution is dissolution, dissolution of the current government and the formation of a
government that represents the interest of its own people.
Religion and Targeting
In this book, I am neither attempting to imbue the reader with my religious beliefs nor
offering him a mini-course on religion. However, I include this section because many
targets believe that religion may somehow figure in their targeting. Some victims use
religion to help themselves get through their ordeal; others feel that certain religious
263
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
people and religious institutions have created their ordeal. I offer the reader the
following views on religion. I do not ask that the reader accept those views, and, as
usual, I do not strive to be religiously correct.
Concurrent with the beginnings of my targeting, back in the 1970s, I also started to
examine my religious beliefs, which, like most people, I had never before questioned. I
had been raised in a Southern Baptist home. In most cases, we follow what we are
TAUGHT to believe. If one’s parents are Catholic, he will also be Catholic. If his
parents are Baptists, he will in all likelihood become Baptist. That is simply the way it is.
People do not examine their beliefs, they normally simply accept the beliefs that they
inherit. The church wants its churchgoers to accept everything “on faith,” faith with a
capital F.
Historically, the concept of one single all-powerful god is a relatively new belief. For
many thousands of years before the one-god idea, people worshiped multiple gods.
The main ones represented the earth, the sky, and the sea. In addition, there were
other minor gods who dealt with rain, the sun, good crops, and other objects. Rulers
and people had their favorite gods. The belief in one god first came from the Egyptians;
then the Israelites adopted the one god theme. The Romans much later accepted that
religious concept, and as a result the Western world today believes in one god. God,
Jesus, and the Holy Spirit make up what Christians call the Trinity.
Christianity is a Middle Eastern religion based on Judaism that was foisted upon
Europe, North America, and Middle and South America by subversion and conquest.
Does that mean that the conquered people of Europe and later America had no
religious beliefs prior to being subjugated and coerced into Christianity? Of course not.
They followed their native beliefs, which gradually disappeared because of punishment
from the Church for disbelief in Christianity. At that time, there was only one church, the
Roman Catholic Church.
Not content to accept what I had been taught “on faith,” as churches ask their members
to do, I began to question the tenets of Christianity. When I did, I learned that I did not
agree with most of the pillars on which it stood. I shall not go into my in-depth analysis
of those tenets, as analysis is very tedious.
However, as a result of my questioning what I actually believed and not what I had
been taught to believe, I completely forsook Christianity. I might also add that my
examination of Islam and other religions finds them all equally lacking in substance.
The only belief that I share with Christianity is that there is a deity. In fact, unlike
Christians, I believe there may be several or many deities. I do not worry about how
many gods there might be. What does it really matter? Like my Native American
264
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
ancestors, when I pray, I simply refer to The Great Spirit, which may be one or more
entities. The Great Spirit is genderless and colorless.
Christians follow what they have been led to believe is god’s model for their lives. They
even added to that model the idea of “salvation,” which made them immortal. If they
believed that Jesus was the son of God, upon death, they went to heaven. If they did
not accept that avenue to heaven, they went to hell. There is not one shred of proof in
any of that model; yet, we are told that we must accept it “on faith.” I am amused when I
sometimes imagine that the one god that Christians worship might actually be a very
fun-loving god who wants all humans to drink, party, smoke, curse, use drugs and
alcohol, and practice promiscuity.
My personal beliefs revolve only around The Great Spirit (or spirits). There are no sons
or daughters of that god or those gods that we humans know of, no written word of
god’s “model” (except that written by man, The Old Testament and the New
Testament), no virgins giving birth, no Trinity, no heaven and hell, no sins (but simply
logical, moral, and sensible human actions that allows us to live in harmony with each
other), nobody dying because of our sins, no promise of an after life (either heaven or
hell), no churches, no dogma, no priests/ministers, no Holy city or any other Holy place,
and no prophets.
Christian belief is based on Middle Eastern teachings found in The Old Testament and
The New Testament, collectively known as the Bible. Many Christians are surprised
when I tell them that their religion is Middle Eastern, for they have been prejudiced from
birth toward the Middle East. They do not realize that the Bible was put together over
the hundreds of years by clergy and scholars, who, over time, added to and took from
those writings, with the Church compromising on various concepts such as the date of
the birth of Christ, the Trinity, the role of Mary, alleged mother of Jesus, baptism, etc.
Christians are taught that the Bible, as it presently exists, represents the true word of
god and that to question anything in it is sacrilegious and heretical. .
Sorry, folks. I do not buy that package. Thus, it should not be surprising to the reader
that religious friends of mine pray for my “soul,” firmly believing that I am doomed to
hell. Of course, others believe that Jews and other non-Christians are also bound for
hell. To me, whatever happens to me after death is completely immaterial. I do not seek
immortality, or to be “born again.” Only the god or gods will determine that, if they wish
to.
I know. Christian readers would probably love to debate me about my view of
Christianity. However, the only reference they can provide for their statements is the
Bible. Therefore, debate is useless. Since to me the Bible is simply a book and not the
265
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
word of god, no Christian and I could possibly engage in a meaningful discussion on
religion.
Now, having described my religious beliefs and disbeliefs, let us turn to religion and
targeting. Many targets believe that there is a religious group called the Illuminati that
targets them for some reason, probably in an attempt to take over the world. I find that
notion completely illogical. If that were so, the group would concentrate on those in
power, not the average citizen. Moreover, many of the targets are very religious.
I also doubt that the Masons have any such ambition. Although Masonry is based on
Christianity, Masonic members represent many faiths and denominations. That does
not mean that some of the attackers may not be Masons. It is highly likely that Masons
figure among the attackers and accomplices. That does not indict Masonry in general.
Some Christian churches and their members do seemingly cooperate with the
powerbrokers as accomplices in carrying out the spurious targeting activities. Many of
my correspondents mention the role of a minister or some other clergy in their
targeting. Usually those cases involve organized stalking. Again, that does not mean
that all Christian churches and all Christians participate either in organized stalking or
remote-delivered physical and neurological attacks.
It does appear that the powerbrokers would like to Christianize the entire American
population, not to “save” them but to encourage conformity and discourage nonconformity. I believe that the powerbrokers look upon Christianity as the one unifying
factor that will provide that conformity. That in turn makes the population far easier to
control.
Judeo-Christianity is simply a convenient tool that can be used not only to impose
conformity on the populace but also to buttress the notion that Israel is god’s favored
nation and to engender antipathy for Moslems. Any degree of non-conformity, whether
religious, political, social, or economic, is a threat to the status quo and to the
powerbrokers’ aims.
Americans are polarized as they have probably never before been over abortion, gay
rights, human rights, the distribution of wealth, loss of control of their government,
mortgage foreclosures, job displacement, race/ethnicity, and other issues. The Occupy
Movement that began in October, 2011 epitomizes that polarization. I predict that in
fewer than twenty-five years an all-encompassing class war will erupt on a worldwide
basis, starting probably first in the United States. Call it what you will: the haves against
have-nots; the disenfranchised against the powerbrokers, the poor against the rich.
Tens of millions of people will probably lose their lives in that conflict.
266
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
The Great Conspiracy,
When four demonstrating students at Kent State, Ohio were killed and nine wounded
by National Guard troops on May 4, 1970, that incident created such international
outrage that an incident like that will never happen again in the United States.
Nevertheless, today a much more cowardly, widespread, and inhuman massacre
occurs every day to a growing number of victims in an electronic and neurological
onslaught. The Kent State students could at least see and face the troops’ weapons;
victims today stand helpless against a lethal unseen force cloaked in secrecy and
delivered by remote.
Likewise, victims of today’s silent massacre do not have an opportunity either to
prosecute their attackers or face a court of law in which they might be able to defend
themselves. They simply die a very slow death at the hand of unseen executioners,
commit suicide, or become institutionalized. Most targets are plain middle-class
Americans of all races, ethnicities, colors, genders, religious and political beliefs,
philosophies, and life styles. Many of them, however, have somehow bucked the
system or have refused or failed to fit into the socio-economic-Judeo-Christian
structure.
An immigrant from a former Communist country recently wrote me about her electronic
torture and mind control ordeal in the United States. Here is what she says in her own
words: “It makes me mad, especially, because I came from the former communist
country and didn't expect such things going on in here. This is a very, very big
disappointment. Now I do not believe in democracy any more, and, as you, I guess that
the government is involved in that too. I do know my abusers: they are my neighbours;
There is also, a coordinator, as a former law enforcement officer living just opposite of
my house. It is exactly as you wrote in your paper.”
Although my surveillance dates back many years, the electronic and mind control
torture did not surface until 2005. In my case, the date coincides with Michael
Chernoff’s appointment as Secretary of Homeland Security. Chernoff, son of a rabbi,
has very strong connections to Israel, pro-Israel PACs, and pro-Israel so-called
Christian Fundamentalists in the United States. Senator Joe Lieberman (I-CT), a Jew
and also an ardent supporter of Israel with close ties to that country, heads the Senate
Homeland Security Committee.
Today, instead of shooting its citizens, elements protected by the government slowly
tortures them to death by remote with directed energy and neurological weaponry that
conveniently remains both unknown and unseen. In 1989, the United States
267
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Government reacted strongly to China’s attack on unarmed dissidents in Tiananmen
Square. Yet, the United States’ silent massacre eclipses a thousand-fold the
Tiananmen Square shootings, and it is carried out daily with complete national and
international impunity.
The Future of Electronic and Mind Control Assault
Hardly a day passes without my receiving an email from a person who has only recently
discovered that he is targeted. The new targets appear to be far younger than before.
Unless REA is stopped very soon, it will continue to proliferate and we will see an
alarming rise in the misuse of the technology used for electronic torture and mind
control in other areas: racial and ethnic groups targeting persons in other racial and
ethnic groups; religious groups targeting those in opposing religious groups or atheists
and agnostics; rightist nuts targeting homosexuals, lesbians, and others following
alternative life styles; the wealthy targeting people whom they single out, perhaps for
the sport of it and the voyeurism involved; gangs targeting those in rival gangs;
mobsters targeting young women and boys for prostitution; drug lords targeting people
to turn them into drug addicts; politicians targeting political enemies; social purist
psychos targeting for extinction the handicapped and others who do not conform to
their concept of societal perfection; and world leaders targeting other world leaders.
The wider the practice of electronic torture and mind control spreads, the more out of
control it becomes. It promises to become the Armageddon that many people believe
will eventually occur.
I suspect that in years to come we will discover that many mass murderers and parents
who kill their children are victims of mind control. Two such murderers have made news
in the last few years: Andrea Yates, who drowned all five of her children, and Leanna
Laney, who killed two of her young sons and left a third one incapacitated for life. Both
women were believed to be good, caring, and devoted mothers. Both women heard
inner voices commanding them to commit infanticide. One of the women said the voice
was that of the devil; the other one, that it was the voice of God. In addition, killers like
the D.C. snipers, John Allen Mohammed and Lee Boyd Malvo, show markings of
people under the influence of mind control attackers. Students who have committed
school massacres also may have been unknowing victims of perverted attackers
whispering instructions into their impressionable brains.
I foresee the day when groups of professional extortionists, blackmailers, and swindlers
learn the secret of REA and turn it into a money-making scheme. They will do that by
selecting targets who lead comfortable life styles, torturing them with their electronic
and mind control techniques, and then making deals with the targets to stop the REA.
They will also make money by offering their services to people who want to harm
268
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
somebody whom they do not like. For a price, the high-tech criminals will “hook” that
person, torture him, and provide the payer with videos to prove it.
Moreover, they can later approach the victim and ask for a large sum of money to
“release” him. Thus, the assailants will make money playing both sides. My attackers
have demanded from me $10,000 one time, $15,000 another time, and $30,000 still
another time without telling me why I should pay them. Of course, that is plain
deception. I tell them, “You can publish anything that you know about me in the
Washington Post or the Miami Herald and put it on national TV.”
The perpetrators will also render the justice system completely invalid. How? They will
manipulate the minds of witnesses and authorities to cause them to lie under oath,
probably truly believing that they are telling the truth. They will also skew the minds of
judges, prosecutors, and defense lawyers. In many cases, this will result in the guilty
going free and the innocent being sent to prison.
Attackers learn from targets the combinations to safes, telephone numbers of many
people, financial records of others, the weaknesses and vices of others, and much
other information that, in the wrong hands, could result in great personal losses not
only for the targets but also for people with whom they associate. With their knowledge,
the assailants have the means to blackmail targets or sell other people information
about the targets.
A Conspiracy of Silence
Many years ago a cabal of the controlled media decided that it would not disseminate
news that might give publicity to anti-Zionists, Survivalists, KKK, the John Birch
Society, and other groups opposing the powerbrokers. The media blackout seriously
damages those groups’ propaganda efforts, which largely depend upon media
coverage. The responsibility of the media is to keep the public informed, and it
intentionally fails to do so for political purposes. The media’s control of the news
concerning certain organizations amounts to a conspiracy of silence regardless of the
reason.
Nobody knows that conspiracy of silence better than targets of electronic stalking and
mind control. In my case, I have written to the President, members of Congress,
including my two senators from Louisiana and the representative from my voting
district, the FBI, several government agencies, the state attorney general, and the local
sheriff about REA without receiving a single answer. My letters were not the ramblings
of a delusional person but were concise, cogent, and respectful letters. Since no
269
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
recipient could possibly know my state of mind when I wrote them, their failure to
answer me proves that conspiracy of silence.
Most of the hundreds of correspondents who write me have recounted their efforts to
communicate with politicians and others. They received the same silent treatment.
Those politicians apparently had rather lose a vote than to buck the powerbrokers,
especially, as in my case, if the powerbroker is Israel or Israel’s backers.
A target from Texas advised me in early 2010 that he had succeeded in convincing an
aide to a Congressman to look into his claims of electronic stalking and mind control.
Upon finding out about the aide’s cooperation, however, the Congressman fired the
aide. That Congressman could have attempted to placate a constituent even if he
considered him psychotic. Instead, he perpetuated the conspiracy of silence. It
becomes increasingly clear that members of Congress know about REA, know who is
doing it, and choose not to interfere. There is probably either money or favors behind
Congress’s spurning victims of remote-delivered electronic torture.
That conspiracy of silence also pertains to crime statistics and police reports. I have
already recounted my writing the Public Affairs Division of Louisiana State Police for
statistics on electronic stalking and mind control and receiving a letter saying “We do
not have statistics on such incidents.” Although I had complained twice about REA to
the local sheriff’s office, it had not reported those attacks in its monthly crime statistics
report to the state police. Likewise, the FBI does not keep reports of remote torture.
The conspiracy of silence is institutionalized and national in scope. The intention is
very clear: If there is no crime report, no crime was committed.
Targets Versus Targets
I believe that the attackers may create targets and pit them against other targets. What
better way of getting rid of their enemies? Law enforcement, for example, does nothing
for the targets and often forces targets to submit to psychological evaluations. Could
key members of law enforcement or indeed all law enforcement officers also be targets
who have been programmed to operate against other targets? Such an action is clearly
within the realm of possibility. By programming the law enforcement officers, the
powerbrokers have strengthened their attack capabilities and support mechanism.
Look still further. I am told that medical students undergo training in their last year of
med school about “delusional” patients and how to deal with them. Med students are
told, I understand, that some of their patients will complain that they are victims of
remote-delivered electronic torture, and the med students are instructed to treat them
270
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
as delusional and refer them to psychiatrists. The psychiatrists in turn prescribe antidepressants that do nothing to alleviate the patient’s symptoms.
Whether law enforcement officers and medical doctors, including psychiatrists, are true
targets is not really significant. They may have been programmed by authority figures
to act against the interests of targets.
Remember that targeting is a well thought-out plan that covers all aspects of human
thought and behavior and contemplates every advantage and disadvantage of the
targets. That plan was developed, analyzed, and evaluated by scientists in think tank
situations for years before it was placed into effect. But the “best made plans of mice
and men” often fail. This plan will also ultimately fail. Time is on the side of the targets,
not the attackers.
What Targets Can Do
All targeted individuals are subjected to a barrage of criminal acts, some of which they
may not be fully aware. If targets are true TIs, their phones WILL be tapped, their
computers WILL be hacked, and their mail WILL be monitored. What can victims do to
defend themselves, halt electronic stalking and mind control activities, apprehend the
cowardly attackers who carry it out, and punish them and their accomplices?
-- Remember that THEY, the perpetrators of your REA, are the criminals, not you. If
the victim receives V2K, the attackers will bring up occurrences from the past to
attempt to make the victim feel guilty. Then, they play upon that guilt. Do not let
them convince you that you are beneath them. They are breaking dozens of laws.
You are not.
Certainly, the total loss of privacy, even in the case of your most intimate thoughts,
is frustrating. That common criminals whom you probably do not know have
knowledge of your thoughts that even family members and friends do not know is
unconscionable. However, keep in mind that whatever the criminals know about you
and your thoughts, they cannot publish them in the New York Times. I continually
laugh at my perverted attackers and tell them that I really don’t care what they see,
hear, know, or think that they know, or do. I tell them through our synthetic telepathy
to publish those thoughts in the newspapers and expose them on national TV. It
does not matter to me.
-- Remain positive. Despite the unsettling nature of the REA activities, targets must
make a special effort to maintain a positive attitude, especially when around others.
Remember that the perpetrators of REA are trying to ruin your lives. Do not let them.
271
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
I start each day by stating to myself how great the day is, whether it is rainy or
sunny or cold or hot.
-- Resist depression. One of the attackers’ ploys is to cause a target to commit
suicide. Keep your life bright. Surround yourself with uplifting and cheerful décor.
Let plenty of light into your house. Targets have a tendency to keep their houses
dark, with the windows perpetually covered. A dark house encourages depression.
Open those windows. I do not even have curtains on my windows. And also use
your good mind. Tell yourself how fortunate you are despite your electronic and
mind control assault. Think about things that make you happy and that calm your
mind.
-- Maintain your physical health. This is very important, as the perpetrators of the REA
seek to make you a couch potato. They will whisper to your subconscious to binge
eat, to watch more TV than usual, and to eat the wrong kinds of food. They will also
whisper to you that you have no energy, that you feel extremely tired, and that you
must rest.
Take vitamins and eat correct foods. Force yourself to get exercise and be active.
They will discourage you from making improvements in and around your home.
Despite your listless feelings, go about your activities and make a point of getting
plenty of exercise. A clear correlation exists between physical health and mental
health. Defy the attackers. Make an effort not only to maintain your health but even
to strengthen it.
-- Be receptive to making new friends. After a time, many targets become their own
worst enemies. They have suffered so many frustrations and disappointments
because of their REA that they have become suspicious of everybody. That appears
to psychiatrists as paranoia. Moreover, that is exactly what your attackers want, as it
further isolates you from society. Do NOT think that every person you meet is an
accomplice of the attackers. There are still many uncorrupted people with whom you
can become friends. However, remember that to have a friend, you must be a friend.
Keep an open mind about people’s intentions.
-- Do not engage private investigators. They are often a part of the problem. Private
investigators cannot ply their trade without the assistance of law enforcement. First,
they have to register and get permission to operate from a state law enforcement
office, usually the attorney general. Then, they have to be tied into the state police
and other law enforcement agencies’ data systems to look up license numbers and
auto license tags, search backgrounds, and even look for missing persons.
272
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Moreover, many of the private investigators are shady characters who operate just
inside the law, and they often even cross over that line. I believe that private
investigators are part of the law enforcement network that probably participates in
actual electronic stalking and mind control. Getting private investigators to look for a
bug in your car is like sending the fox to the hen house. Even if they discover a bug,
they will not inform you, for they would believe that it was placed there by law
enforcement. In fact, they will have probably already been informed by law
enforcement of the bug.
-- Do not discuss your REA harassment with every friend, family member, and
acquaintance. Such is the nature of electronic stalking that they simply do not
understand and cannot understand. However, if you have a perceptive, intelligent,
trusted friend or family member who is open minded enough to believe hard-tobelieve circumstances, let that person know what is happening. A confidant who
truly believes you can be very supportive.
-- Do NOT visit a psychiatrist. The REA assailants want targets to go to psychiatrists,
knowing that the doctors will diagnose targets as schizophrenic or paranoid. Once
targets see a psychiatrist, their credibility is compromised.
The REA assailants will do everything they can to convince targets that the targets
are mentally incompetent, including continually whispering to their subconscious
“you are crazy.” Indeed, the attackers’ activities will often cause targets to exhibit
the very symptoms that psychiatrists associate with schizophrenic and paranoia in
attempting to defend themselves against forces that they cannot see and do not
understand. However, the general public is increasingly becoming aware of REA,
and friends and family members of targets who have been designated “demented”
are beginning to see that those targets are not truly mentally unstable. In only a few
more years, the psychiatric community will have to redefine schizophrenia,
paranoia, and other mental disorders because of the unnatural electronic and mind
control assaults that cause those symptoms. This will not occur, however, without a
great deal of pressure from the outside, as psychiatrists have no way of treating
remote-induced symptoms of schizophrenia and paranoia resulting from REA.
Resist any effort on the part of law enforcement to make you submit to a psychiatric
evaluation. In our system of justice, targets should not have to prove that they are
sane. Indeed, the burden of proof falls on law enforcement to prove that targets are
mentally deranged. That is why authorities want to send you to a psychiatrist whom
they customarily use and can depend on to render a verdict that is in keeping with
their accusations. If you are forcefully made to see a psychiatrist, remember that it is
your right to refuse treatment.
273
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Know that mental incompetence cannot be proved by your words and actions alone,
and that the state and local law enforcement have no power to act unless your
actions have the potential of harming yourself and others. If authorities do insist on
your seeing a shrink, demand that the psychiatrist also possess knowledge of
directed energy, electrical and radio theory, high tech communications, organized
stalking, and even electronic stalking and mind control. That will, of course, limit the
possibilities to only a few psychiatrists. Notwithstanding, targets should make every
effort NOT to look insane by falling into the attackers’ well laid traps. Despite your
frustrations and the attackers’ drivel through V2K, do not act irrationally.
-- Remember that if you are made to undergo a psychiatric evaluation, you have the
right to refuse treatment. As early as 1973, the American Hospital Association
established patients’ rights known at the HICA Act. Of those twelve rights of the
AHA, the fourth one gives the patient the right to refuse treatment. Today Federal
and state laws reaffirm that right.
-- De-emphasize “self.” Many targets become obsessed with what the attackers do to
their minds and bodies. That is quite natural and understandable. However, targets
should train their minds to think beyond themselves and instead reach out to their
pastimes, hobbies, and to others. Reducing the attention to “self” is a very important
defense tool for targets.
-- Make special efforts to stay in contact with family members and friends, for the
attackers concentrate on isolating you from society. Maintaining contact will not be
easy. The attackers will fill your minds with negative thoughts about those people.
Moreover, the attackers will have hacked your computer and tapped your phone
lines. I recently got a call on my cell phone that showed the phone number of good
friends, a man and woman couple. The person who called pretended to be the
woman; however, the female speaker spoke with an accent and the voice was most
certainly not that of my friend. Moreover, she ended with an exaggerated “goodbyeeeeee,” which would have been totally out of character for my friend. That meant
that the caller had used my friends’ telephone service provider to be able to make
the call through my friends' account; otherwise, the real number of the impostor
would have appeared on my phone. The caller probably wanted me to say
something later to my friends about the call to make me appear crazy. I did not
mention the call to them.
The attackers will cause problems with your computer and will intercept your emails
to others and also those that come from others. They will also suddenly cut off
phone conversations, create static that makes talking impossible, cause your voice
274
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
to echo (only you will be able to hear those echoes), and sometimes divert the calls
so that their accomplices answer. Manipulation of your communications system is
ultra important to the attackers’ plan to isolate and frustrate you.
-- Record the attackers’ actions and your thoughts about them in a diary, or journal.
Those thoughts will change over time as you learn increasingly more about your
attackers. Their REA tactics will also change, becoming increasingly more complex
as they go through their repertory of capabilities. It is very important for you to
describe the attackers’ electronic and mind control actions accurately and to record
in great detail the sensations that you feel and your reactions to those actions.
Record the day, date, and hour that particular actions occur. You may see a pattern
in the timing. Their actions will normally occur in the evening while you sleep, as
you present an immobile target for them and there is less electromagnetic
atmospheric interference. Keep a flashlight, watch, notepad, and pen underneath
your pillow or nearby to record those actions.
-- Be observant. The attackers, of course, count on your not having proof of their
electronic stalk and mind control activities. Watch people, places, and objects
carefully. Record your reactions when you see anything that looks even slightly odd.
Videotape anything that happens out of the ordinary: blinking lights, anomalies in
your emails, etc. Record any unusual sounds: loud noises that occur in or around
the house, etc. However, do not let yourself develop paranoia over those events.
Also, check out the law in your state. Some states make videotaping others a crime.
-- Do not constantly look for perps and perp signals. Although you should be
observant, do not fall into the trap of seeing perps wherever you go and looking for
well known signals that perps are supposed to use. Some targets who used to be
perfectly sane now have all of the markings of a paranoid schizophrenic because
they imagine that everything they see or hear is perp-related. The real perps want
that to happen.
-- Remember precedents. Think back over previous events and actions. You had to
have been targeted at some point in time. By recalling people, occasions, and
incidents, you will probably get a very good idea about when, by whom, and even
how you were targeted. Particularly think about any medical procedures, shots, and
inoculations that you had prior to your electronic stalking and mind control
experiences.
-- Thwart the efforts of the attackers and defy them. As time goes on, you will see that
certain actions on your part affect the capabilities of the attackers. You will also
learn things that annoy the attackers. I enjoy singing monotonous ditties and
275
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
repeating a phrase or a sentence for hours at a time (silently, through thought) as I
work and putter. That action incenses them. Laugh at your attackers and try to make
their lives as miserable and difficult as they attempt to make yours. It works.
Remember that behind the REA lie humans (I call them sub-humans). As vile, evil,
and hard as they might be, those humans can be affected by your thoughts and
actions against them.
-- Stay alert. The attackers will attempt to make you do irrational things by whispering
instructions and suggestions into your brains. Know this. Give much thought to your
actions because of that. Remember that one of the major objectives of the attackers
is to make you look crazy. Be very careful of their deception.
-- Work to change the narrow mindset of the medical community about REA. I am
quite certain that at least some psychiatrists recognize the reality of REA without
admitting it.
-- Submit written complaints to local law enforcement. Get the complete name of the
officer to whom you submit your report. It is very important that the reports be
presented in writing so that YOU can word the complaint like you wish. Otherwise,
the person with whom you are talking will write it the way he wants to, probably
noting that you are nuts. Ask the officer to whom you submit your complaint to sign
it. Others have done this and the officers have refused. If the officer refuses to sign,
record that in your notes and let him see you doing it. Your complaints will probably
never be entered by law enforcement in their crime statistics. Mine were not and
neither were those of other targets with whom I have corresponded. Law
enforcement wants no record of your complaints about REA.
-- Contact your Representatives and Senators in writing. Petitions are meaningless.
Write individual letters. It is important that your correspondence be done in writing
(emails or letters), as their employees may include an accomplice “plant” who will
not record and advise higher-up authorities of telephone calls. This will of course
reveal your real name. It is time for victims to stop hiding and let the public know
what is actually going on in this country. Our reluctance to do so has allowed
electronic torture and mind control to go unchallenged probably for decades.
In addition, send copies of your letters to local and state officials, particularly the
sheriff’s office and the attorney general’s office. Do not expect answers or
acknowledgements of receipt. Unless overwhelming pressure is laid on the backs of
leadership, nothing will be done. Congresspersons, themselves being protected, are
probably blithely unaware of electronic stalking and mind control and the possibility
of national and local law enforcement in that activity. However, they cannot ignore
276
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
thousands of letters of complaint. There is strength in numbers, and the number of
victims is growing every day.
-- Seek out other victims of REA and network with those victims in comparing your
symptoms, your thoughts, and information that you have found on REA. That
organization can also become a meaningful support system for you. In the United
States, Derrick C. Robinson, a TI and also a U. S. Armed Forces veteran, heads a
pro-active organization called Freedom from Covert Harassment and Surveillance
(FFCHS) whose address is info@freedomfchs.com. There are other similar
organizations worth joining.
-- Maintain the life style that is normal to you to the extent possible. Targets often let
their targeting become their way of life. They relocate from place to place. They
continually look for and experiment with shielding. They spend every waking
moment on the computer communicating with other targets and writing to forums,
phoning other targets, and thinking about their particular problem. They come to
believe that every person and every action somehow relates to their targeting.
When targets’ allow their situations to consume their total time, they sacrifice family
and friend relationships, give up their hobbies and pastimes, and often neglect their
appearance and their health. Indeed, no target asks for the electronic stalking and
mind control activities that he receives. Yet, targets must try to balance their life to
include activities other than those related to REA. Remember that every person with
whom you are in contact is not a perp. There are still wonderful people out there.
-- Do not consider suicide an option. Your attackers, through sleep deprivation,
electronic torture, mind control, social isolation, induced anxiety, and other ways will
attempt to make you take your own life. That is a part of the script. Do not oblige
them. The FFCHS has recently begun collecting notarized statements from
members who swear that they will never take their own lives. We call it a NoSuicide-Ever pact. This was considered necessary because some targets die under
very mysterious circumstances that are recorded as suicides.
-- Do not act kooky. Because of their targeting, many victims dress with several layers
of clothes, even in summertime. Others will wear tin foil on their heads and
underneath their caps. I know of one target who actually wears a large metal pot
over her head when she goes out in public. No wonder people think that targets are
crazy. Dress and act normally. Do not call attention to yourself by dressing and
acting like an escapee from a mental institution.
-- Do NOT allow the attackers to force you to move. They will often try to force targets
to leave their houses and even their hometowns. I have never known a target who
277
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
improved his situation by moving. Targets who do move will normally end up drifting
from location to location, getting out of touch with friends and relatives along the
way, and ending up alone in shelters or on the street. Stand your ground.
-- Do not spend money on devices/methods that are supposed to shield against or
neutralize the electronic attacks unless you are wealthy. They simply do not work on
a sustained basis. The intelligence community and the Secret Service must
necessarily know a way to guard against or neutralize the attacks, but that
defensive device/method is still a closely guarded secret, which they are unwilling to
share with the general public. In other words, the powerbrokers are protected; you
are not..
Defying the attackers
I am very defiant of the attackers, and I go on with my life despite their electronic and
mind control effects and the resulting annoyances and inconveniences. The attackers
recognize that although they can bother me, they cannot beat me down. On two
occasions, the attackers have invited me to join them. I laughed, called them a few
choice names, and told them, “Not in 500,000,000 years!!!!” Whether their offers are
real or more deception, the attackers know that I will NEVER sell out to them.
Over the last few months, the attackers have attacked the outside of my right nostril. I
can feel a distinct tingling in that location that is anything but natural. First a very
sensitive brown spot appeared there and then a small indentation. More recently, I
have noticed a white spot about a quarter of an inch in diameter on my chin, where the
tingling also occurs. Like my nose and ears, that spot becomes covered with a film,
except that instead of feeling crusty, it feels soft. The hairs of my beard are thicker and
much more numerous in that small area. The attackers may be trying to cause skin
cancer or melanoma. The attackers know that I use smokeless tobacco, and they want
the cancer to appear to be tobacco-related.
I visited a Monroe dermatologist in the summer of 2009 to have a record of that induced
malady. The doctor did biopsies on the two spots and found the one on my nostril was
basal cell carcinoma. He wanted to set up an appointment with a plastic surgeon to
remove the cancerous growth, and he was dismayed when I told him that I would not
seek nor accept treatment. I candidly explained that the spot was induced and that the
attackers could and probably would only cause cancer in additional places. I gave him
a copy of this same paper to read. I do not know whether he read it or not.
Two years later, however, mindful that one of the aims of the attackers is to disfigure
their victims, I finally made an appointment with a surgeon. He removed the carcinoma
278
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
on September 12, 2011. The attackers occasionally continue to visit that spot. We shall
see what happens.
Electronic torture and mind control have been employed for decades. Why have they
not been curtailed? Here is why: (1) Targets have suffered in silence. Only with the
advent of the internet have targets begun to perform research and reach out to other
victims. Most of that communication has transpired during the last ten years or less.
The internet is the last bastion of communication freedom. The powerbrokers have not
yet contrived a way to limit and control its use. (2) Targets have wasted too much time
in complaining to each other and have gotten bogged down in self-pity. That does not
at all mean that we should stop supporting and communicating with each other; yet,
that should not be an end in itself. Targets should become activists instead of habitual
complainers.
(3) Targets have depended on law enforcement, national government, and international
bodies to “investigate” and stop the electronic torture and mind control. They are
correct is doing so; however, only those agencies of the government that are most
likely to engage in REA or aid the perpetrators or allow them free rein in operating have
the necessary expertise to “investigate.” (4) Targets have remained anonymous. Most
targets are reluctant to use their real names for fear that it will alienate family members
and friends and make the targets appear crazy. I first wrote this paper under a
pseudonym. However, when I realized that that did not serve the interest of the
targeted community, I changed the name of the author to my real name.
Targets can best defend themselves against the attackers by learning to use their
minds. By developing their own type of psychology against the attackers’ psychology,
targets can offset many of the effects of both the physical and the neurological attacks.
In developing that psychology, they must start with the premise that the attackers can
harm targets only if targets let them. Every facet of that self-made psychology must be
based on positivism as opposed to negativism.
Taking Our Country Back
As a longtime victim of electronic and mind control assault, I am now also a dissident
American. My attackers sometimes tell me telepathically that I am an extremist and unAmerican. I reply that I am now indeed extremist and that if THEY are Americans, I am
now most definitely UN-American. For the last time in this article, I repeat that
electronic assault and mind control CANNOT be carried out without high-up
government knowledge of, cooperation with, and protection of the attackers.
279
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Certain members of the national executive branch of the government have to pull the
REA strings. Government leaders who sponsor this type of sick socio-politico operative
can never succeed. Instead, they create many dissidents and malcontents who will
eventually weaken this government and force its collapse. If targets have violated the
law, let them be formally accused and be able to defend themselves before their
accusers. That is the American way -- or it used to be before George W. Bush.
The Declaration of Independence rests on the principles of “unalienable Rights, that
among these are Life, Liberty and the pursuit of Happiness,” It further enjoins that
“whenever any Form of Government becomes destructive of these ends, it is the Right
of the People to alter or abolish it . . . .” No target of electronic and mind control assault
possesses a meaningful life, and he most certainly finds it difficult to pursue liberty and
happiness. Targets of REA who cannot find protection under any of the three levels of
government -- national, state, and local -- have every right to seek the end of that nonresponsive and non-protective government.
The so-called Patriot Act of 2001 took away most of the individual rights of Americans.
(Don’t you love the names given to those laws that usurp our freedom?) We are
supposedly fighting “extremists” in Afghanistan, Pakistan, Iraq, Somalia, and other
countries who supposedly want to take away those freedoms. Guess what. The
American Government has beaten them to it.
Every target—and every citizen--I know probably would rather take his chances with
terrorists than to surrender his personal rights and submit to relentless and continuous
electronic and mind control torture. Protection from terrorists, the pretended purpose of
the Patriot Act, cannot be compared with the preservation of our American rights.
Voting out the self-serving leadership and replacing them with others equally
unaccountable to the American people cannot be the solution to the current problem.
Every administration represents only a regime change with the status quo remaining
static.
During my targeting, the attackers have been pushing me increasingly farther to the
left. Perhaps their aim was to make me increasingly anti-government so that I would do
something irrational. Perhaps their plan was that I go crazy, run out with an AK-47, and
murder people, perhaps those whom the attackers had convinced me through
subliminal messages were part of the plot. That will not happen. Knowing that, their
next move is probably to try to have me committed to a mental hospital, to arrest me on
charges of domestic terrorism, or perhaps murder me and make it look like a suicide, a
home invasion, or a street robbery.
280
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Regardless of the consequences, I shall continue my objective of bringing down the
powerbrokers, along with their cronies and foot servants, and seeing them punished,
establishing a government in which citizens’ full rights are restored, setting up clinics
and instituting systems for “deprogramming” targets, and eliminating the possibility of
American citizens EVER becoming victims again of electronic stalking and mind
control.
Conspiracies can be defeated. My personal goal is to bring down the Federal
Government, which no longer represents the interests of the American people, and reestablish our Constitutional rights under another government or another form of
government. I will work day and night to bring that about. If good fortune smiles upon
me, I have probably another quarter of a century left to accomplish that, working with
others of like minds.
Summary
This paper is long. Let me summarize in few words the above material. A target is
targeted for life; sometimes that is many years. Only governments and their power
brokers (using taxpayer money) have the power, finances, manpower, and other
resources required to invent, employ, and sustain in total secrecy the devices and
methods used for electronic assault and mind control and continue those efforts against
targets sometimes for decades.
It appears that the objective of the powerbrokers who control the USA is to have the
capability to monitor the entire population. Many of those monitored will be singled out
as targets of perpetual electronic and mind control assault. Others will be monitored at
random or on an as-needed basis. Countries such as the United States, Israel, Russia,
probably China, and others have long experimented with directed energy weapons and
mind control.
Conspiratorial-type talk is making the circles now concerning the government’s aim to
cause a domestic conflict that will give them an excuse to intervene militarily. The
military is supposed to have orders to herd much of the population into concentration
camps on or near military posts and bases. That Homeland Security has established
concentration camps in various parts of the country is now confirmed. What happens to
those people incarcerated can only be guessed at. Congress recently (December 3,
2011) passed a bill that would allow the executive branch the power to imprison any
American that it deemed an enemy without ever bringing him to trial. In other words,
Congress is capitulating to the executive branch and legalizing a virtual dictatorship.
281
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Only the government and the power brokers who control the government can direct the
intelligence community and law enforcement on every level of government either to
engage in REA or refuse to investigate it – perhaps both. OVERWHELMING
EVIDENCE SHOUTS THAT REA MUST NECESSARILY INVOLVE THE FEDERAL
GOVERNMENT and very probably government on the state and local levels.
Secrets of the atomic bomb, space craft, stealth air planes, and other cutting-edge,
high-tech objects remained very closely guarded for years; yet, eventually those
secrets leaked out. Much attention is being focused on electronic and mind control
assault and a massive amount of information is being disseminated concerning its
origin. Some of that information is probably right on target; other “planted”
misinformation probably only confuses the issue. The point is that one day, probably in
the very near future, the secrets of electronic torture and mind control by remote will
also be revealed.
In the meantime, productive and intelligent American citizens daily fall victim of
electronic and mind control assault. Their lives are ruined, and many of them lose their
lives to that silent death or commit suicide. Most of those victims have already lost all
faith in their government to protect them and have even lost their belief in democracy. I
invite readers to study the cases of victims of electronic torture and mind control in the
United States and then argue that those victims would be worse off under Chinese
Communist, Iranian, or Russian rule than under so-called American democracy. If such
electronic torture and mind control can take place in the cradle of democracy, why
should targets support that democracy?
The irony of the high-tech knowledge used by the U. S. Government for electronic
stalking and mind control on its citizens is not lost on informed American citizens.
According to an April 2010 CNN survey, four out of five Americans distrust their
government. While the evil practice of REA is being conducted on this country's
citizens, the U. S.'s ranking with other industrialized countries in production output,
literacy, mortality, and education drops increasingly lower.
At the same time, the U. S. is engaged in endless military actions without declarations
of war, its unemployment rate has surged above a ten per cent average, much of its
industry has shut down permanently, its deficit is frightening, its banking institution has
collapsed and remains in shambles, millions of Americans have lost their homes,
disparity between rich and poor widens, crime continues to increase, unemployment
and welfare rolls continue to expand, and Congress has sunk to the lowest noconfidence status ever registered in our history.
282
THE GREAT CONSPIRACY
Sooner or later the powerbrokers must assert complete control over the citizenry to
maintain the status quo. That appears to be in 2010 the direction in which the leaders
of the United States of America are heading. The powerbrokers, using their high-tech
remote capabilities and a legal system that run counter to the Constitution, are
probably close to their goal of achieving complete control.
If the Government of the United States of America is not involved in electronic stalking
and mind control, it should be acutely concerned about that activity, for almost all
targets blame the government for their targeting. The United States of America is
sinking into an abyss of high-tech crime, much of it generated and protected by the
very forces sworn to uphold the law. Even when the forces behind this crime are
exposed – and they will be – it is very likely that they will not be brought to justice.
Thus, nothing will change for targeted individuals. The technology is already out there
for anyone powerful enough to acquire and utilize it.
[This paper is based on my own experiences, a very long and lucid memory, my journal
entries, in-depth and ongoing research, logic and reasoning, and correspondence with
hundreds of other targets. The opinions formed from those sources are my own. Should
you wish to contact me, my email address is mindovermonster@yahoo.com.]
283